OSN 8800&6800&3800 V100R006C03 Commissioning Guide 03

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
V100R006C03
Commissioning Guide
Issue 03
Date 2012-06-22
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C03
iManager U2000 V100R006C00
iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R006C00
NOTE
The Commissioning Guide for the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C02 and V100R006C03 are the same.
Intended Audience
This document provides information about commissioning and testing operations after hardware
installation. It describes the preparations, methods and procedures for station and network
commissioning.
This document is intended for:
l Installation and commissioning engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Based on Product Version V100R006C03

The update of contents is described as follows:
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
9 Automatic l 9.9 Routine Maintenance is added.

Commissioning l 9.10.7 Common Problems Found During Link Optimization
Commissioning is added.
l 9.10.8 How to Deal with the Problem When the Optical Power of
the RAU Board Cannot Be Adjusted to the Target Value? is added.
l 9.10.9 Performing Other Operation Tasks Fails During NMS Data
Synchronization is added.
l 9.10.10 Commissioning Fails Due to a Mismatch of Board
Manufacturer Information Between the NMS and Live Network
is added.
5 5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier is modified.

Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site
8 Example for 8.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System is modified.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System
16.34 l PRBS Application Scenarios is deleted.

Configuring the l 16.34.1 PRBS Test is added.
PRBS Test
All Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

Update Description
5.7.9 Adjusting Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction is modified.
the On-off Gain
of the Raman
Board
9 Automatic Automatic Commissioning is modified.

Commissioning

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
8 Example for Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent
Commissioning Transmission System is added.
the Optical
Power of the
Coherent
Transmission
System

Update Description
5.7.9 Adjusting Adjusting the Optical Power in the Receive Direction is modified.
the On-off Gain
of the Raman
Board
Automatic Automatic Commissioning is deleted.

Commissioning

Update Description

Update Description
2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.
16.35 Managing Managing NE Power Consumption is added.

NE Power
Consumption
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Update Description
2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.
16.35 Managing Managing NE Power Consumption is added.

NE Power
Consumption

Update Description
5 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board is deleted.

Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site
9 Automatic Automatic Commissioning is modified.

Commissioning

Update Description
3 The procedures for commissioning and configuration during deployment

Commissioning are added.
and
Configuration
Procedure
During
Deployment
4 Configuring 4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is added.
NE and
Network
5.11 5.11.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9

Commissioning +WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power
of ROADM
Board
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
5.13 Example of 5.13.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9

Commissioning +WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power
Based on 10G
(or Lower)
Single-
Wavelength
System
6 Remotely 6.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and
Commissioning link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9) is added.
Optical Power
10 Configuring The chapter "Configuring Services and System Features" is added and
Services and provides hyperlinks to the Configuration Guide and Feature
System Description where detailed procedures for configuring services and
Features system features are described. In this manner, the whole commissioning
process during deployment is provided.
11 11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal

Commissioning Alarms, 11.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection,
the Network 11.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System, 13 Checklist for
Commissioning During Deployment, and 14 Backing Up the NE
Database to the SCC Board are added.
16 Reference The section "Reference for Commissioning During Deployment" is

Operations for added.
the
Commissioning
and
Configuration
17 Parameters The section "Parameter Description" is added.

Reference

l Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this
release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,
and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Update Description
Whole manual l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX
OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any difference
between the products is described in the manual.
l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
4 Configuring Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added.

NE and Network
5.7 Description of commissioning the optical power of Raman boards is

Commissioning modified. The structure of the contents is adjusted and certain contents
Guide of the are added.
Raman
Amplifier
5 11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks is added.

Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site
5 11.6.3 Testing Items is added.

Commissioning
Optical Power
on Site
7 Example of 7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System, 7.2 Process for
Commissioning Commissioning a 40G System, 7.3 Preparations for
Optical Power Commissioning, and 7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems
Based on 40 in a 40G System are added.
Gbit/s Single-
Wavelength
System
9 Automatic Automatic Commissioning is added. This section describes the scenarios

Commissioning where the WDM optical power commissioning tool is used to
automatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations and
procedure for the commissioning.
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Preparations for Commissioning................................................................................................1
1.1 Safety Operation Guide......................................................................................................................................2
1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols........................................................................................................................2
1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers..................................................................................................................................2
1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on............................................................................................5
1.1.4 ESD............................................................................................................................................................5
1.2 Instruments and Tools........................................................................................................................................6
1.3 Reference Documents.......................................................................................................................................10
1.4 Engineering Design Information......................................................................................................................11
1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document................................................................................................................11
1.4.2 Engineering Design Document................................................................................................................11
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check ..................................................................................................................11
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers...................................................................................................11
1.7 Testing Connection Points................................................................................................................................12
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer.......................................................................................................................20
1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly...................................................................................................20
1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN.......................................................................................22
2 Quick Guide.................................................................................................................................24
2.1 U2000 Quick Guide..........................................................................................................................................25
2.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)................................................................25
2.1.2 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)....................................................................27
2.1.3 Starting the U2000 Server (HA System, Windows)................................................................................30
2.1.4 Starting the U2000 Server in a High Availability System (Solaris)........................................................31
2.1.5 Logging In to the U2000 Client...............................................................................................................33
2.1.6 Shutting Down U2000 Clients.................................................................................................................35
2.1.7 Shutting Down the MDS 6630 Server.....................................................................................................36
2.1.8 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)........................................................37
2.1.9 Shutting Down the High Availability System (Windows)......................................................................39
2.1.10 Shutting Down the U2000 Server in a High Availability System (Solaris)..........................................41
2.2 Web LCT Quick Guide.....................................................................................................................................43
2.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEs............................................................................................................44
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2.2.2 Starting the Web LCT..............................................................................................................................44

2.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT....................................................................................................................45
2.2.4 Shutting Down the Web LCT..................................................................................................................45
2.3 Entering the Common Views...........................................................................................................................46
2.3.1 Opening the Main Topology on the U2000.............................................................................................46
2.3.2 NE List on the Web LCT.........................................................................................................................46
2.3.3 Opening the NE Explorer........................................................................................................................47
2.3.4 Opening the NE Panel.............................................................................................................................48
2.4 Using Online Help............................................................................................................................................52
3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment...............................54

4 Configuring NE and Network...................................................................................................60
4.1 Creating NEs in Batches...................................................................................................................................62
4.2 Creating Optical NEs........................................................................................................................................65
4.3 Logging In to an NE.........................................................................................................................................65
4.4 Uploading the NE Data.....................................................................................................................................66
4.5 Setting NE ID and IP........................................................................................................................................67
4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually......................................................69
4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE....................................................................................70
4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication...........................................................................................71
4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions...................................................................................................75
4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode................................................................................................76
4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search..............................................................................................................78
4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection........................................................................................79
4.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64............................................................81
4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16.............................................................................85
4.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800....................................................................................89
5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site...................................................................................94

5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power.................................................................................................96
5.1.1 Basic Requirements.................................................................................................................................96
5.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence..........................................................................................................96
5.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments...................................................................................................98
5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board.................................................................................................98
5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light....................................................................................................98
5.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board..................................................................................99
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board........................................................................................100
5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board...............................................................................................100
5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH Board........................................................................................................101
5.5.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface Boards..............................................101
5.5.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical Interface Board..........................................103
5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board...............................................................105
5.6.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board...........................................................106
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.6.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board...........................................................................107

5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier.............................................................................................108
5.7.1 Preparations...........................................................................................................................................110
5.7.2 Precautions.............................................................................................................................................110
5.7.3 Requirements on the Fiber Line............................................................................................................111
5.7.4 Checking the Fiber Connections............................................................................................................112
5.7.5 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side....................................................................................113
5.7.6 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function..................................................................................115
5.7.7 Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the Raman Board................................................116
5.7.8 Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board.............................................................................................116
5.7.9 Adjusting the On-off Gain of the Raman Board....................................................................................118
5.7.10 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum..............................................................................................................120
5.8 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light..............................................................................................121
5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel................................................................................124
5.9.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of the OSC Board..........................................................................125
5.9.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board.................................................................................129
5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board...................................................130
5.10.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V Boards........................................................130
5.10.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board......................................................................131
5.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board.............................................................................133
5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board......................................................................................135
5.11.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM+ROAM)...............................................135
5.11.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9).................................................137
5.11.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9).................................................138
5.11.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9+WSM9).................................................140
5.11.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4)..........................................141
5.12 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM......................................................................................................146
5.13 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System...........147
5.13.1 Example Description...........................................................................................................................147
5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station....................................................148
5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA..............................................................................................152
5.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End........................................................................154
5.13.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board)...................158
5.13.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)..................................................................160
5.13.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)..........................................................164
5.13.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)...........................................................167
5.13.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)............................................................171
5.13.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)..........................................................177
5.13.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)...................................................181
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power............................................................................190

6.1 General Commissioning Sequence.................................................................................................................191
6.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network................................................................................193
6.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network.................................................................................194
6.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network................................................................................196
6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning...............................................................198
6.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards..................................................................................................198
6.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards.............................................................................................200
6.2.3 Configuring the MCA Board.................................................................................................................201
6.2.4 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards..............................................................................201
6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network....................................................202
6.3.1 Example Description.............................................................................................................................202
6.3.2 Commissioning Procedure.....................................................................................................................205
6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A..................................211
6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B..................................................................215
6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9
+RMU9)..........................................................................................................................................................219
6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9
+WSM9).........................................................................................................................................................226
6.3.7 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9
+WSM9).........................................................................................................................................................228
6.3.8 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM
+ROAM).........................................................................................................................................................230
6.3.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4
+WSMD4)......................................................................................................................................................231
6.3.10 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2
+WSMD2)......................................................................................................................................................233
6.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C (WSMD9
+WSMD9)......................................................................................................................................................234
6.3.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D......................................................................235
6.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V)
........................................................................................................................................................................236
6.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board
+Demultiplexer Board)...................................................................................................................................239
6.3.15 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F.......................................................................241
6.3.16 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G....................................................................242
6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization.............243
6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization.............248
6.3.19 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and OLA Station F for Equalization..............249
6.3.20 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)...............................................................................250
6.3.21 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU.....................................................................................251
6.3.22 Commissioning OSNR........................................................................................................................253
6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans......................................................................253
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
7 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength

System.............................................................................................................................................257
7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System........................................................................................................259
7.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System.....................................................................................................263
7.3 Preparations for Commissioning....................................................................................................................264
7.3.1 Checking Design Documents................................................................................................................264
7.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter...................................................................................................................267
7.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System....................269
7.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station................................274
7.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station and the OTM Station at the Receive End
........................................................................................................................................................................276
7.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization...................................................................................278
7.4.5 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System..........................................................................................278
7.4.6 OSNR Penalties.....................................................................................................................................284
7.4.7 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.....................................................................................................297
7.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System...............................299
7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station.......................................................305
7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station..............................................................................308
7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station........................................................310
7.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization...................................................................................313
7.5.6 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation.....................................................................................................314
7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System.....................................................................315
7.6.1 OSNR Failure........................................................................................................................................315
7.6.2 Excessively High Incident Optical Power.............................................................................................315
7.6.3 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration.......................................................................................................315
7.6.4 Methods for Handling Other Faults.......................................................................................................316
8 Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System
..........................................................................................................................................................318
8.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System....................................319
8.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission system............................................................................321
8.3 Preparations for Commissioning....................................................................................................................322
8.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 100 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System..................323
8.4.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at the OTM Station................................325
8.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station................................................................326
8.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Added Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station (Colorless)
........................................................................................................................................................................328
8.4.5 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM Station........................................................332
8.4.6 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization...................................................................................334
9 Automatic Commissioning......................................................................................................335
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.1 Version Mapping............................................................................................................................................337

9.2 Network Models and Application Scenarios..................................................................................................337
9.3 Precautions for Commissioning......................................................................................................................347
9.4 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a New Network.......................................................349
9.4.1 Commissioning Process.........................................................................................................................349
9.4.2 Preparing for the Commissioning..........................................................................................................350
9.4.3 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters...........................................................................................351
9.4.4 Choosing Commissioning Trails...........................................................................................................353
9.4.5 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning (Optional)...............................................................356
9.4.6 Commissioning Optical Power..............................................................................................................357
9.4.7 Viewing the Commissioning Result......................................................................................................361
9.5 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of an Expanded Network.............................................362
9.5.3 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters...........................................................................................365
9.5.4 Choosing Commissioning Trails...........................................................................................................366
9.5.5 Fiber Connection Verification (for Expansion Commissioning)..........................................................370
9.5.6 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning (Optional)...............................................................372
9.5.7 Commissioning Optical Power of Expansion Deployment...................................................................372
9.5.8 Viewing the Commissioning Result......................................................................................................377
9.6 Optical Power Commissioning During Maintenance.....................................................................................378
9.6.3 Online Monitoring.................................................................................................................................381
9.6.4 Link Optimization..................................................................................................................................390
9.7 Commissioning Report...................................................................................................................................400
9.7.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning Report..............................................................................401
9.7.2 Generating Commissioning Report.......................................................................................................401
9.8 Reference........................................................................................................................................................406
9.8.1 Viewing Operation Tasks......................................................................................................................406
9.8.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000.........................................................................................................407
9.8.3 Setting Optical Amplifier Information..................................................................................................409
9.8.4 Setting Fiber Types................................................................................................................................410
9.8.5 Querying Commissioning Index Data...................................................................................................411
9.9 Routine Maintenance......................................................................................................................................415
9.9.1 Preventive Maintenance Items...............................................................................................................415
9.9.2 Maintenance Operations........................................................................................................................416
9.10 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................................418
9.10.1 FAQs in the Optical Power Commissioning Window.........................................................................418
9.10.2 How to Optimize the Optical Power Using the U2000 when the Span Loss changed and the OA Gain
could not Match it...........................................................................................................................................420
9.10.3 What Restrictions Does the U2000 Have on Optical NE Classification.............................................420
9.10.4 FAQs About Setting Subnet Parameters.............................................................................................421
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.10.5 FAQs About Trail Commissioning......................................................................................................421

9.10.6 Solutions to Abnormal Optical Power in the Link Report..................................................................422
9.10.7 Common Problems Found During Link Optimization Commissioning..............................................423
9.10.8 How to Deal with the Problem When the Optical Power of the RAU Board Cannot Be Adjusted to the
Target Value?.................................................................................................................................................423
9.10.9 Performing Other Operation Tasks Fails During NMS Data Synchronization...................................423
9.10.10 Commissioning Fails Due to a Mismatch of Board Manufacturer Information Between the NMS and
Live Network..................................................................................................................................................423
10 Configuring Services and System Features........................................................................425

10.1 Configuring Boards......................................................................................................................................426
10.1.1 Checking Board Parameters................................................................................................................426
10.1.2 Adding Ports........................................................................................................................................441
10.1.3 Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board..............................................................................................441
10.2 Configuring Services....................................................................................................................................442
10.3 Configuring System Features.......................................................................................................................443
11 Commissioning the Network................................................................................................445

11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms........................................................447
11.2 Testing Protection Switching........................................................................................................................448
11.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection..............................................................................449
11.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect Board and Clock Board for OptiX OSN 8800......451
11.2.3 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching of the Cross-Connect Board for OptiX OSN 6800.......................452
11.2.4 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC Boards..................................................................453
11.2.5 Testing Optical Line Protection Switching.........................................................................................454
11.2.6 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching....................................................................................456
11.2.7 Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching.............................................................................................458
11.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching.............................................................................................461
11.2.9 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching........................................................................................465
11.2.10 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection Switching.....................................................................................468
11.2.11 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching.................................................................................471
11.2.12 Testing Board-Level Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)...............................................473
11.2.13 Testing Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection Switching...........................475
11.2.14 Testing DBPS and ERPS Protection Switching................................................................................479
11.2.15 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching...........................................................................482
11.2.16 Testing DLAG Protection (OTN) Switching.....................................................................................486
11.2.17 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection Switching....................................................................................488
11.2.18 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection Switching...............................................................491
11.2.19 Testing Linear MS Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)...........................................................494
11.2.20 Testing Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)...................495
11.2.21 Testing Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)...................497
11.2.22 Testing SNCP Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)..................................................................500
11.2.23 Testing SNCTP Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)...............................................................502
11.2.24 Testing Transoceanic MSP Ring Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800).....................................504
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2.25 Testing ERPS Protection Switching..................................................................................................507

11.2.26 Testing the DLAG(OCS)...................................................................................................................509
11.3 Testing Data Characteristics.........................................................................................................................510
11.3.1 Testing the LCAS................................................................................................................................510
11.3.2 Testing the LAG..................................................................................................................................512
11.3.3 Testing the LPT...................................................................................................................................514
11.3.4 Testing the STP/RSTP.........................................................................................................................515
11.3.5 Testing the MSTP................................................................................................................................517
11.4 Testing System Features...............................................................................................................................518
11.4.1 Testing IPA..........................................................................................................................................518
11.4.2 Testing IPA (Raman System)..............................................................................................................519
11.4.3 Testing ALC........................................................................................................................................522
11.4.4 Testing APE.........................................................................................................................................524
11.4.5 Testing EAPE......................................................................................................................................525
11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks.....................................................................................................................528
11.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2....................................................................................................................................530
11.6.1 Testing Process....................................................................................................................................531
11.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation...............................................................................................................532
11.6.3 Testing Items.......................................................................................................................................535
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels...............................................................................................................538
11.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops........................................................................538
11.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the Ethernet OAM Function........................................540
11.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System.......................................................................................................541
11.8.1 Setting the Orderwire Board................................................................................................................541
11.8.2 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................542
11.8.3 Configuring Conference Calls.............................................................................................................543
11.8.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................544
11.9 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System..................................................................................545
11.9.1 Configuring Orderwire........................................................................................................................545
11.9.2 Configuring Conference Calls.............................................................................................................546
11.9.3 Dividing Orderwire Subnets................................................................................................................547
11.10 Testing Orderwire Functions......................................................................................................................548
12 Testing Bit Errors.....................................................................................................................550

12.1 Testing 10-Minute Bit Errors for Each Optical Channel..............................................................................552
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors.....................................................................................................................554
13 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment.........................................................557

14 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board................................................................559
15 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems...........................................561
15.1 OSC/ESC Conflict........................................................................................................................................562
15.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports..........................................................................................................563
16 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and Configuration...............................565
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
16.1 Configuring the NE Data..............................................................................................................................569

16.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually.....................................................................................................569
16.1.2 Replicating the NE Data......................................................................................................................570
16.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack..............................................................................................................571
16.2.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration...................................................................................................571
16.2.2 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE................................................................................571
16.2.3 Changing a Subrack Attribute.............................................................................................................572
16.2.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack..............................................................................................572
16.2.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack.....................................................................................................................573
16.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming.............................................................................................................574
16.3.1 Basic Concepts....................................................................................................................................574
16.3.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow........................................................................................575
16.3.3 Configuring the ROADM....................................................................................................................575
16.4 Configuring the NE Time.............................................................................................................................586
16.4.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the U2000/Web LCT and NEs...................................................587
16.4.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the NMS Time..........................................587
16.4.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key....................................................................................................588
16.4.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server Time......................................................589
16.5 Performance Management............................................................................................................................590
16.5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold...........................................................................................590
16.5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters......................................................................................590
16.5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers..............................................................................................593
16.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs..................................................................................................................594
16.6.1 Modifying the NE Name.....................................................................................................................594
16.6.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name.........................................................................................................595
16.6.3 Modifying GNE Parameters................................................................................................................595
16.6.4 Changing the GNE for NEs.................................................................................................................596
16.6.5 Changing a GNE to a Normal NE.......................................................................................................597
16.6.6 Changing a Normal NE to a GNE.......................................................................................................597
16.6.7 Deleting NEs........................................................................................................................................598
16.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration...........................................................................................................599
16.7.1 Deleting Boards...................................................................................................................................599
16.7.2 Adding Boards.....................................................................................................................................599
16.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration.............................................................................................................600
16.8.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information....................................................................................................600
16.8.2 Deleting Fibers....................................................................................................................................601
16.9 Creating a Single NE....................................................................................................................................602
16.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User................................................................................................................603
16.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode..................................................................................................604
16.12 Configuring the Edge Port..........................................................................................................................606
16.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection.................................................................................................607
16.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes..................................................................................................609
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
16.15 Configuring Board SDH Port Attributes....................................................................................................610

16.16 Opening/Closing Lasers.............................................................................................................................610
16.17 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board.....................................................................................611
16.18 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards........................................................................................612
16.19 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters............................................................................................612
16.20 Configuring the Service Mode...................................................................................................................614
16.21 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC).......................................................................................................614
16.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board...........................................................................615
16.23 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board.............................................................................616
16.24 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection Switching..............................................................617
16.25 Setting the NULL Mapping Status.............................................................................................................618
16.26 Configuring Path Binding...........................................................................................................................619
16.27 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring......................................................................................620
16.28 Configuring the FEC Function...................................................................................................................621
16.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT......................................................................................................................622
16.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans.................................................................................................................623
16.31 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial Port...................................624
16.32 Configuring Ethernet Boards......................................................................................................................625
16.32.1 Configuring Internal Ports.................................................................................................................625
16.32.2 Configuring External Ports................................................................................................................627
16.33 Verifying Ethernet Services........................................................................................................................629
16.34 Configuring the PRBS Test........................................................................................................................629
16.34.1 PRBS Test..........................................................................................................................................629
16.34.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board...............................................................631
16.34.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board ....................................................................................632
16.35 Managing NE Power Consumption............................................................................................................634
16.35.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption.................................................................................................634
16.35.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE....................................................................................636
16.35.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption Report...........................................................637
16.36 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data...........................................................................................................638
16.36.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods..............................................................638
16.36.2 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card......................................................................640
16.36.3 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS Client.....................................................641
16.36.4 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board..............................................................................642
16.36.5 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card..................................................................................642
16.36.6 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client..................................................643
17 Parameters Reference..............................................................................................................645
17.1 Parameters (Creating a Network).................................................................................................................646
17.1.1 Laser Spectrum Analysis.....................................................................................................................646
17.1.2 Wavelength Monitoring Management.................................................................................................648
17.1.3 Orderwire Board Settings....................................................................................................................648
17.1.4 General.................................................................................................................................................648
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
17.1.5 Conference Call...................................................................................................................................650

17.1.6 Auxiliary..............................................................................................................................................651
17.1.7 NE Attributes.......................................................................................................................................651
17.1.8 NE User Management.........................................................................................................................652
17.1.9 NE Time Synchronization...................................................................................................................657
17.1.10 Standard NTP Key Management.......................................................................................................661
17.1.11 Path Binding......................................................................................................................................662
17.2 Parameters: WDM Interface.........................................................................................................................662
17.2.1 Optical Transponder Board.................................................................................................................663
17.2.2 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board.................................................................................................673
17.2.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board..............................................................................................677
17.2.4 Tributary and Line Boards...................................................................................................................680
17.2.5 Optical Amplifier Board......................................................................................................................682
17.2.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Board....................................................................................................688
17.2.7 Protection Board..................................................................................................................................690
17.2.8 Spectrum Analysis Board....................................................................................................................691
17.2.9 Variable Optical Attenuation Board....................................................................................................694
17.2.10 Dispersion Compensation Board.......................................................................................................696
17.3 Parameters (Configuring Wavelength Grooming)........................................................................................697
17.3.1 Parameters: Edge Port.........................................................................................................................697
17.3.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection........................................................................698
17.3.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection.........................................................................699
17.3.4 Parameters: Enabling the Port Blocking Function..............................................................................700
A Glossary......................................................................................................................................702
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning
1 Preparations for Commissioning
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to prepare for commissioning.
1.1 Safety Operation Guide

This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety regulations
and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to prevent personal
injuries or damages to the equipment during operations.
1.2 Instruments and Tools
This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.
1.3 Reference Documents
This section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process.
1.4 Engineering Design Information
This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment
commissioning.
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check
Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers
This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.
1.7 Testing Connection Points
This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function and
connection types.
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer
This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS manages
the NE.
Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1.1 Safety Operation Guide

This section describes the safety operation guidelines. It contains the personal safety regulations
and equipment operating regulations. These regulations must be followed to prevent personal
injuries or damages to the equipment during operations.
1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols

During equipment installation and maintenance, observe the precautions indicated by the alarm
and safety symbols to help prevent personal injury or equipment damage.
Table 1-1 describes the alarm and safety symbols on the WDM equipment.
Table 1-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment

Symbol Describes
ESD protection symbol.

You must wear an ESD wrist strap or glove to avoid
damage caused by electrostatic discharge to boards.
Laser level symbol.

Indicates the laser level and warns that laser beams
CAUTION can cause injuries to eyes.
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
Grounding symbol.
Indicates the position of the grounding point.
Regular cleaning symbol.

Warns you to regularly clean the air filter.
Fan warning symbol.

Warns you not to touch the fan blade until the fan
stops moving.
1.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers

This section describes how to safely use fibers.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
DANGER
Laser beams on the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber can cause damage to your
eyes. When installing and maintaining optical interface boards and optical fibers, avoid directly
exposing your eyes to the laser beams originating from the optical interfaces or fiber connectors.
Protection of Optical Connectors

All idle optical connectors for fiber jumpers and optical ports on the optical interface boards
must be covered with protective caps. The optical ports on the replaced boards must be promptly
covered with protective caps. In addition, properly store these boards in their packages to keep
the optical ports clean.
Recommended protective caps are shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Recommended protective caps
Protective caps that are not recommended are shown in Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 Protective caps that are not recommended

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Do not use protective caps that are made of soft rubber. These caps tend to collect dust and other material.
These caps are hard to clean and do not resist the build-up of dust.
Connecting Fibers
CAUTION
When applying a physical fiber loopback between two optical ports, increase the attenuation to
avoid equipment damage in case the laser optical power is excessively high. For boards that
have the capability of having optical attenuators added, add an optical attenuator at the Rx optical
port rather than at the Tx optical port.
Insert fibers into optical connectors carefully when connecting fibers. If the optical power is
excessively high, add a fixed optical attenuator before the optical port to avoid damages to the
device caused by a high input of optical power.
DANGER
Before removing or inserting fibers from/into the CRPC board, shut down the pump laser to
avoid injuries due to the high optical power from the laser.
The CRPC board has specific requirements on fiber loss of the line nearby. For details, see Table
1-2.
Table 1-2 Fiber connection requirements of the CRPC

Distance Loss (dB) Connector (piece)
0–10 (km) ≤0.1 0
10–20 (km) ≤0.2 0
NOTE
The ODF has only one connector for connecting to the CRPC board. All the other fiber connection points must
be spliced.
Cleaning Fibers
CAUTION
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flanges for each external fiber must be cleaned before
the fibers from the ODF are inserted into the optical ports on the boards in the equipment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The fiber connectors and optical ports for the lasers must be cleaned by using special cleaning
tools and materials. Some common cleaning tools are:
l Cleaning solvent. Isoamylol is preferred, propyl can be used (alcohol or formalin is never
used)
l Non-woven lens tissue
l Special compressed gas
l Dust-free cotton stick
l Special cleaning roll used along with cleaning solvent, either isoamylol or propyl
l Fiberscope
For details on how to clean fibers, see the Supporting Tasks.
1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on

This section describes the requirements for performing operations on the equipment when the
power is on.
Follow these requirements when performing operations on the equipment when the power is on:
l Do not install or disassemble equipment when the power is on.
l Do not install or remove power cables when the power is on.
l Before connecting a cable, ensure that the cable and cable label comply with installation
requirements.
1.1.4 ESD
During installation and maintenance, follow antistatic procedures to prevent equipment damage:
l Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.
l Check that the equipment is securely grounded.
CAUTION
Wear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch equipment or boards. Make sure
that the wrist strap touches your skin. Insert the ESD strap connector into the ESD socket of the
equipment.
For information about how to wear an ESD wrist strap, see Figure 1-3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 1-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap
NOTE
Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the equipment port. For details, see the Quick Installation Guide.
When you are following antistatic procedures, take the following precautions:
l Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Its resistance value must be between
0.75 mega ohm to 10 mega ohm. If the wrist strap validity period (usually two years) has
expired, or if the resistance value fails to meet requirements, replace it with a wrist strap
that provides the required resistance value.
l Do not touch a board with your clothing. Clothing generates static electricity that is not
protected by the wrist strap.
l Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an ESD pad when you replace boards or
chips. Use ESD tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips. Do not touch chips, circuits,
or pins with your bare hands.
l Keep the boards and other ESD-sensitive parts you are installing in ESD bags. Place the
removed boards and components on an ESD pad or ESD material. Do not use non-antistatic
materials such as white foams, common plastic bags, or paper bags to pack boards, and do
not let these materials touch the boards.
l Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are also ESD-
sensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective sleeves before you connect
them to the ports.
l Keep packing materials (such as, ESD boxes and bags) available in the equipment room
for packing boards in the future.
ESD complies with IEC Publication 1000, EN 55022, EN 55024, IEC 61000 and GR-1089-
CORE.
1.2 Instruments and Tools

This section describes the tools and testers used for equipment commissioning.
Table 1-3 describes how the tools and testing instruments are used for equipment
commissioning.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 1-3 Instruments and tools required for commissioning

Tool or Tester Usage
Laptop Used to install the U2000 Web LCT during network element
(NE) commissioning.
Optical power meter Used to measure the received optical power, receiver sensitivity,
and receiver overload at an optical port. It is mainly used to
measure the optical power on the client side and the WDM side
of the OTU. This meter also measures the total optical power of
the multiplexed signals.
Optical spectrum analyzer Used mainly to test the optical power, optical signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR), and central wavelength for each wavelength in
the multiplexed signals.
NOTE
In a DWDM system, the optical power of a single wavelength in the
multiplexed signals needs to be measured using an optical spectrum
analyzer. The commissioning result from this method is more accurate.
When using this method, the noise impact does not need to be
considered.
Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to perform the
test. Use the following method to verify the calibration: measure the
optical power of the OUT optical port on the OTU using the optical
spectrum analyzer. Then compare it with the optical power obtained by
using an optical power meter. If the difference is less than 0.5 dB, the
calibration is acceptable. If the difference is greater than 0.5 dB,
recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.
SDH analyzer Used for network commissioning and SDH service testing.
GE analyzer Used for the GE service testing.
10GE analyzer Used for the 10GE service testing.
OTN analyzer Used for the OTN service testing.
ESCON analyzer Used for the ESCON service testing.
Ethernet analyzer Used for the data service testing.
FICON/FC analyzer Used for the FICON service and FC service testing.
Multimeter Used to test the voltage, resistance, and current intensity during
a power test.
Fiber microscope Used for checking the cleanliness of fiber end faces.
Phillips screwdriver Used to install or uninstall the board screws.
Compressed gas Used to clean optical ports of boards.
Fiber jumper Used for connections during the optical power test of optical
ports on the optical distribution frame (ODF) side.
Cassette cleaner or lens Used to clean fiber end faces.

tissue

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Tool or Tester Usage
Flange Used to transfer the fiber jumper.
Fixed optical attenuator Used to attenuate the received optical power, which may
damage the optical component, during the received optical
power test for an optical port.
Variable optical attenuator Used for testing the receiver sensitivity and overload optical
(VOA) power of an optical port.
A 40G SDH analyzer, an optical spectrum analyzer, and a power meter are required to
commission a 40G system. Table 1-4 lists three 40G SDH analyzers. Table 1-5 lists three types
of optical spectrum analyzers intended for testing a 40G system.
NOTE
A 40G system requires high-precision optical power. Before using an optical spectrum analyzer, calibrate its
optical power setting.
Table 1-4 40G SDH analyzers
Name Appearance
ONT-506
NX 4000
MP1797A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 1-5 Optical spectrum analyzers intended for 40G system testing
Name Appearance
MTS8000
Agilent86145B/86142
AQ6370/6370B/6319/6317
Table 1-6 lists the 100G test meters.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 1-6 Optical spectrum analyzers for 100G system testing

Name Appearance
JDSU ONT-503
EXFO FTB-500
1.3 Reference Documents

This section describes the reference documents required during the commissioning process.
The following reference documents are required for OptiX OSN 8800 equipment
commissioning:
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Hardware Description
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 Configuration Guide
l OptiX OSN 8800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Feature Description
commissioning:
l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines
l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description
commissioning:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description
l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines
l OptiX OSN 3800 Compact Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide
l OptiX OSN 6800/3800 Feature Description
1.4 Engineering Design Information

This section describes the engineering design information required for equipment
commissioning.
1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document

This section describes the required engineering survey documents.
The required engineering survey documents include the survey report and the work instructions
associated with the engineering survey.
1.4.2 Engineering Design Document

This section describes the engineering design documents required during equipment
commissioning.
The following engineering design documents are required for equipment commissioning:
l Network diagram (including the networking diagram for the entire network, the basic
topological diagram, and the network management diagram)
l Board layout diagram of the cabinet
l Wavelength allocation diagram
l Cabinet fiber connection diagram
l Configuration diagram of the optical amplifiers
l Fiber connection diagram
l Optical attenuator list
l Design description file
1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check

Before commissioning equipment, check the commissioning conditions.
For details about checking the commissioning conditions, see the Installation Guide.
1.6 Requirements for Commissioning Engineers

This section describes the requirements for commissioning engineers.
Commissioning engineers must have received professional training on optical network
commissioning and are skilled in using the test equipment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning engineers must be familiar with:
l WDM, SDH, and Ethernet theories

l WDM equipment
l U2000/Web LCT and service configuration by using the U2000/Web LCT
l Analyzers (WDM, SDH and Ethernet)
1.7 Testing Connection Points

This section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function and
connection types.
Figure 1-4 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. For
the functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-7 and Table
1-11.
1-11.
1-11.
Figure 1-7 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800. For the
functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-8, and Table
1-11.
Figure 1-8 shows the testing connection points on the chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800. For the
functional description of the testing connection points and buttons, see Table 1-9, Table 1-10
and Table 1-11.
Figure 1-4 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
EFI2 EFI1 PIU STI ATE
53A
PWR
RTN -48V
NM_ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2
ALMI2 ALMO3
ALMI1 ALMO1
ETH1
CLK2
CLK1
ETH2
TOD2
TOD1
SERIAL
NM_ETH
ALMO4
ALMO2
ETH3
Front Back

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
EFI2 EFI1
PIU ATE
53A
PWR
RTN -48V
NM_ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2
ETH1
ALMI2 ALMO3 ALMO4

ALMI1 ALMO1
ETH2
SERIAL
NM_ETH1
ALMO2
ETH3
Fan
Fan

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
PIU
EFI AUX ATE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 1-7 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800
COM ETH3 ALM02 ALM04 ALMI1 LAMP1
ALM01 ALM03 SERIAL ALMI2 LAMP2
PIU
xcs SCC
STAT STAT RUN
ACT ACT
PROG PROG
SRV SRV
PWRA
PWRB
NEG(-)
PWRC
ALMC
RTN(+)
SubRACK_ID
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
Fan RESET
STAT
PROG
LAMP TEST
AUX
ALM CUT
xc SC
s C

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 1-8 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3800
FAN
STAT STAT RUN

ACT PROG
PROG
SRV DO not hot
PWRA plug this unit！
PWRB
PWRC
NM_ETH1
ALMC
S1 S11
S6
S5
S4
S2
SCC
SCC
AUX
PIU
PIU
RESET
NM_ETH2
LAMP
TEST
NEG(-)
ALM
CUT
PWR
RTN(+)
CRI
EXT
MAJ
MIN
SCC AUX PIU
Table 1-7 Function description of the testing connection points on the OptiX OSN 8800
Interface Silk- Function Description Connection
Screen Type
ALMO1 Generally the alarm output is sent to the centralized RJ-45

ALMO2 alarm and power distribution cabinet by output
ports and cascading ports. Other modes can be
ALMO3 configured to send the alarm output for assembling
ALMO4 and displaying the alarm. The OptiX OSN 8800
provides eight channels of alarm output. The first
three channels, by default, are critical alarms,
major alarms, and minor alarms. The other five
channels are reserved for alarm output cascading.
SERIAL OAM port is a serial network management (NM) DB9

port which supports the X.25 protocol.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Screen Type
ALMI1 The external alarm input function is designed for RJ-45

ALMI2 an external system that has alarms requiring remote
monitoring (for example, an environment
monitoring system). The names for the eight alarm
channels can be set to achieve remote monitoring
of the external alarms with the external system.
LAMP1 Used to drive the running indicators and alarm RJ-45

LAMP2 indicators for the cabinet where the subrack is
housed.
NM_ETH1 Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port RJ-45

NM_ETH2 on the OptiX OSN 8800 using a network cable to
the network port on the U2000 server to achieve
management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN
8800.
Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port
on one NE through a network cable to that on
another NE to achieve communication between
NEs.
ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on one RJ-45

subrack using a network cable to the same ports on
another subrack to achieve communication
between the master subrack and its slave subracks.
CLK1/CLK2 CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time RJ-45

signals. CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional.
That is, they input and output signals at the same
time.
TOD1/TOD2 TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time RJ-45

signals. At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can
either input or output time signals.
PHONE Orderwire phone interface RJ-45
F1 F1 interface RJ-45
Screen Type
COM Commissioning port used for communications RJ-45

between the EFI and AUX boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Screen Type
ALMO1 Generally the alarm output is sent to the centralized RJ-45

ALMO2 alarm and power distribution cabinet by output
ports and cascading ports. Other modes can be
ALMO3 configured to send the alarm output for assembling
ALMO4 and displaying the alarm. The OptiX OSN 6800
provides eight channels of alarm output. The first
three channels, by default, are critical alarms,
major alarms, and minor alarms. The other five
channels are reserved for alarm output cascading.
SERIAL OAM port is a serial network management (NM) DB9

port which supports the X.25 protocol.

ALMI2 external system that has alarms requiring remote
monitoring system). The names of the eight alarm
channels can be set to achieve remote monitoring
of the external alarms with the external system.

LAMP2 indicators of the cabinet where the subrack is
housed.
NM_ETH1 Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 on the OptiX RJ-45

NM_ETH2 OSN 6800 using a network cable to the network
port on the U2000 server to achieve management
of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800.
on one NE using a network cable to the network
port on another NE to achieve communication
between NEs.
ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connect the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 port on one RJ-45

subrack using a network cable to the same ports on
another subrack to achieve communication
between the master subrack and its slave subracks.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Interface Silk- Connection
Screen Function Description Type
NM_ETH1/ Connect the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network port RJ-45

NM_ETH2 on the OptiX OSN 3800 using a network cable to
the network port on the U2000 server to achieve
management of the U2000 over the OptiX OSN
3800.
on one NE using a network cable to the network
port on another NE to achieve communication
between NEs.
EXT Accesses and outputs all external signals. DB64
Table 1-10 Function description of the testing EXT connectors on the OptiX OSN 3800
Interface Silk-
Screen (on Connection
Cables) Function Description Type
ETH Used as the COM commissioning port. RJ-45
F&f Debugs the serial port. DB9
ALMO The alarm output is sent to the centralized alarm RJ-45

and power distribution cabinet by output ports and
cascading ports. The port provides two channels of
alarm output and two channels of output cascading.

ALMI2 an external system that has alarms requiring remote
monitoring system). It is used to input six channels
of external alarms.

LAMP2 indicators for the cabinet where the chassis is
housed.
Table 1-11 Function description of the testing buttons

Interface Silk-Screen Function Description
RESET Used to reset the SCC board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Interface Silk-Screen Function Description
ALM CUT The trigger switch is used to mute the alarm from the subrack.
You can either hide the prompt of current alarms by pressing
and then immediately releasing the button, or mute the alarms
by pressing the button for five seconds. When the audible
alarm function is turned off, the ALMC indicator on the SCC
board remains on. Otherwise, the audible alarm function is
turned on, and the ALMC indicator on the SCC board remains
off.
LAMP TEST Used to test the indicators. After you press this button, all
indicators are lit.
1.8 Connecting the NMS Computer

This section describes how to connect the NMS computer to an NE, so that the NMS manages
the NE.
1.8.1 Connecting the U2000 Server Directly

This section describes how to connect the U2000 server to Ethernet port in the subrack using a
cable.
Prerequisites
The subrack must work normally.
The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same network
segment.
Tools, Equipment, and Materials

U2000, network cable
Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to the
master subrack through a network cable.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the cable. One end of the cable should be connected to the network port of the NMS
computer. The other end should be connected to the specified port on the board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2
or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2
port on the EFI board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the
AUX board.
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the
AUX board.
Step 2 Determine if the green indicator of the network card interface of the NMS computer remains
constantly on.
Step 3 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on.
The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or the
indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for the
NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board.
Step 4 On Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start
Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed.
Step 5 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window is
displayed.
Step 6 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.
Step 7 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties window is displayed.
Step 8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
window is displayed.
Step 9 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP address
that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is an integer
from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address must be unique and cannot be the same as any of the
existing IP addresses.
Step 10 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
CAUTION
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do not
configure the gateway. Otherwise, the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. If
the U2000 server has more than one network card, select the corresponding local connection for
the network card connected to the subrack.
Step 11 Click OK.
----End
1.8.2 Connecting the U2000 Server Through a LAN

This section describes how to connect the U2000 server to the NE through a LAN.
Prerequisites
When the U2000 server connects to the NE through a LAN, the IP address is set in a way that
is similar to connecting the U2000 server to an Ethernet port in the subrack using a cable. Note
the following requirements:
l The subrack must work normally.

l The IP address of the NE and the IP address of the U2000 server belong to the same network
segment.

U2000, network cable
Precautions
If the connection mode for subracks is the master/slave mode, connect the U2000 server to the
master subrack through a network cable.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the NMS computer into the LAN.
Step 2 Check the cable. The NMS computer is connected to the LAN using cables. The equipment is
connected to the LAN through the specified port on the board using cables.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2
or NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1 port or NM_ETH2
port on the EFI board.
The OptiX OSN 6800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board
using cables.
The OptiX OSN 3800 is connected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 port on the AUX board
using cables.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Determine if the indicator for the network card interface of the NMS computer remains
constantly on.
Step 4 Check the indicators on the board. The green "LINK" indicator should remain constantly on.
The orange "ACT" indicator should blink.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port on the EFI2 board or the
indicators for the NM_ETH2 port on the EFI1 board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, check the indicators for the NM_ETH1 port or the indicators for the
NM_ETH2 port on the EFI board.
Step 5 In Windows XP on the U2000 server, click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start
Menu. The Control Panel window is displayed.
Step 6 Click Network and Internet Connection. The Network and Internet Connection window is
displayed.
Step 7 Click Network Connection. The Network Connection window is displayed.
Step 8 Right-click Local Area Connection, and click Properties. The Local Area Connection
Properties window is displayed.
Step 9 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
window is displayed.
Step 10 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP address
that is in the same network segment with the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is an integer
from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address is unique and cannot be the same as any of the existing
IP addresses.
Step 11 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.
CAUTION
When configuring the Use the following IP address check box in a direct connection, do not
configure the gateway. Otherwise the configured gateway may lead to a failed connection. If
the U2000 server has more than one network cards, select the corresponding local connection
for the network card connected to the subrack.
Step 12 Click OK.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 2 Quick Guide
2 Quick Guide
About This Chapter
The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT and the
U2000.
The U2000 is an integrated management platform for all Huawei equipment. It can centrally
manage transport equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment (including routers, security
equipment, and Metro Ethernet equipment). With powerful management functions at the NE
and network layers, the U2000 is the major future-oriented network management product and
solution for Huawei equipment. In the telecommunication management network (TMN)
hierarchy, the U2000 is located between the element management layer and network
management layer, and supports all functions of the NE and network layers.
The Web LCT is an element management system (EMS) in an optical transport network. In the
TMN, the Web LCT is located at the NE layer. Based on the browser/server architecture, the
Web LCT allows you to perform all operations of NE-level configuration and maintenance. The
Web LCT accesses a local NE through a LAN or a serial port, and accesses a remote NE over
data communications channels (DCCs).
2.1 U2000 Quick Guide
The U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. You are
recommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in
order not to affect other users who are operating the U2000.
2.2 Web LCT Quick Guide
The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.
2.3 Entering the Common Views
This task describes how to display the common views of the network management system (NMS)
and functions of the views.
2.4 Using Online Help
Online Help provides help information about the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2.1 U2000 Quick Guide

The U2000 uses the standard client/server architecture and multiple-user mode. You are
recommended to start or shut down the U2000 by strictly observing the following procedure, in
order not to affect other users who are operating the U2000.
Context
You are recommended to start the computer and the U2000 application according to the
following sequence:
l Start the computer.

l Start the U2000 server.
l Start the U2000 client.
You are recommended to shut down the U2000 application and the computer according to the
following sequence:
l Exit the U2000 client.

l Stop the U2000 server.
l Shut down the computer.
2.1.1 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Windows)

Three steps are required to start the U2000 server: power on the server safely, start the database,
and start the U2000 server processes.
Starting the Database

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. This topic describes how to start
the database on the Windows single-server system.
Prerequisites
The OS must have been started.
Context
Generally, the database starts along with the OS.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS as a user with administrator rights.
Step 2 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager to check whether
Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.
The SQL Server Service Manager dialog box is displayed.
If Start/Continue is dimmed, Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 If Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is not running, click Start/Continue.
----End
Starting the U2000 Server Processes

You can log in to the U2000 to manage the network only after starting the computer where the
U2000 is installed and the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to start the
U2000 server processes on the Windows single-server system.
Prerequisites
The OS on the computer where the U2000 server is installed must be running properly, and the
database must have been started.
Context
Generally, the U2000 server processes start along with the OS.
During the installation of the U2000 software, only one default NMS user, admin, is provided.
The admin user is a U2000 administrator, who has the highest rights of the U2000 system.
Procedure
Step 2 In Windows Task Manager, view the startup information about the U2000 server processes.
If imapmrb.exe, imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe,
imap_sysmonitor.exe, ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, and
imapPortTrunkSvc.exe are displayed in the process list, the U2000 server processes have
started.
Step 3 If the U2000 server processes have not started, choose Start > Programs > Network
Management System > U2000 Server > U2000 Server or click the shortcut icon on the desktop
to start the U2000 server.
Starting the U2000 server processes takes about 3 minutes.
Step 4 Choose Start > Programs > Network Management System > U2000 System Monitor or click
the shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U2000 System Monitor client.
Step 5 In the Login dialog box, enter a user name and a password to access the System Monitor client
window. The user name is admin, and the password is empty by default. You are required to
change the password at the first login.
NOTE
Two data transmission modes are available: Common and Security(SSL). You can run a command on the
server to query the data transmission mode. The default data transmission mode is Common.
Step 6 Check whether the U2000 processes start properly. The processes for which the start mode is
manual must be started manually.
l If the U2000 processes for which the start mode is automatic start successfully, the U2000
runs properly.
l If any process does not start, right-click the process and choose Start Process from the
shortcut menu.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l If the U2000 runs abnormally, contact Huawei engineers.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The network management system maintenance suite is applicable to U2000 commissioning,
maintenance, and redeployment. Generally, the network management system maintenance
suite server processes start along with the OS.
In Windows Task Manager, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed.
l If the two processes are listed, the MSuite server has started.
l If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server does not start. Navigate to the C:
\HWENGR\engineering directory, double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuite
server.
2.1.2 Starting the U2000 Server (Single Server System, Solaris)


the database on the Solaris single-server system.
Prerequisites
Context
Generally, the database starts along with the OS.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the sybase user.
TIP
Run the su - sybase command to switch to the sybase user.
Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:
$ ps -ef | grep sybase
Information similar to the following is displayed:

sybase 4848 4847 0 May 18 ? 167:11 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/data
server -sDBSVR -d/opt/sybase/data/lv_master -e/opt
sybase 5250 5248 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/bin/back
upserver -SDBSVR_back -e/opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/insta
sybase 4847 1 0 May 18 ? 0:00 /usr/bin/sh /opt/sybase/ASE-1
5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR
5_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back
...

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The database is running if the displayed information contains /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/

RUN_DBSVR and /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/RUN_DBSVR_back.
Step 3 Run the following commands to start the Sybase database if it is not running:
# su - sybase
$ cd /opt/sybase/ASE*/install
$ ./startserver -f ./RUN_DBSVR &
$ ./startserver -f ./RUN_DBSVR_back &
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:

...
NOTE


U2000 server processes on the Solaris single-server system.
Prerequisites
Context
Generally, the U2000 server processes start along with the OS.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the nmsuser user.
Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the U2000 is running:
$ daem_ps

nmsuser 27069 1 0 10:31:39 ? 1:39 imapmrb
nmsuser 27079 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:00 imapwatchdog -cmd start

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
nmsuser 27075 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:50 imapsysd -cmd start

nmsuser 27086 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:09 imapeventmgr
nmsuser 23679 1 1 17:57:06 pts/8 0:02 imap_sysmonitor -cmd start
nmsuser 27116 1 0 10:31:40 ? 0:52 ResourceMonitor -cmd start
NOTE
The U2000 is running if the displayed information contains imap_sysmonitor -cmd start.
Step 3 Run the following command to start the U2000 if it is not running:
$ cd /opt/U2000/server/bin
$ ./startnms.sh
Step 4 View the running status of each process through the System Monitor as user nmsuser to log in
to the server GUI, as follows:
CAUTION
If you cannot log in to the GUI of the server, run the svc_adm -cmd status command to view
the status of processes as user nmsuser.
1. On the desktop of the OS, double-click the U2000 System Monitor shortcut icon.
NOTE
The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set the ACL
restriction range based on the security requirements. .
2. In the dialog box that is displayed, enter the U2000 user name and password (to open the
System Monitor window). The default password of user admin is blank. You must change
the default password during first-time login.
NOTE
There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal and Security(SSL). You can run the
ssl_adm -cmd query command to query data transmission modes on the server. The ssl_adm -cmd
query command must be run as user nmsuser in Solaris and SUSE Linux OS. The default data
transmission mode is Normal.
The U2000 is functioning properly if it can initiate in automatic startup mode, indicating
that the U2000 is functioning properly.
If a process cannot start, right-click the process and choose Start the Process from the
shortcut menu.
If the U2000 works properly, contact Huawei engineers.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The network management system maintenance suite is used to debug, maintain, and redeploy
the U2000. Generally, the network management system maintenance suite server processes start
along with the OS. If the processes do not start, run the following command:
$ su - root
password: password_of_the_root_user
# cd /opt/HWENGR/engineering
# ./startserver.sh
Run the following command to switch back to the nmsuser user:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
# exit
Run the following command to check whether the network management system maintenance
suite process is started:
$ ps -ef | grep java
root 19913 19907 0 04:04:09 pts/1 0:00 grep java
...
root 18382 18311 0 03:42:33 pts/2 12:20 /opt/HWNMSJRE/jre_sol/bin/java -
server -Dequinox.conf=engineering/conf/installE
NOTE
If the displayed information contains /opt/HWNMSJRE/jre_sol/bin/java -server, it indicates that the

network management system maintenance suite process is started.
2.1.3 Starting the U2000 Server (HA System, Windows)


the database on the Windows HA system.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 In the high availability system, log in to the OS as the user who has administrator rights.
Step 2 Start the VCS client.
1. Choose Start > Programs > Symantec > Veritas Cluster Server > Veritas Cluster
Manager - Java Console to start the VCS client.
2. Choose File > New Cluster.
3. Enter the IP address of the system of the primary site. Then, click OK.
4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password for the VCS client.
Then, click OK.
Step 3 Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-click
AppService-SQLServer2000 and choose Online > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the
dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
----End

U2000 server processes on the Windows HA system.
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Context
During the installation of the U2000 software, only one default NMS user, admin, is provided.
The admin user is a U2000 administrator, who has the highest rights of the U2000 system.
Procedure
Step 2 Run the following command to manually start the U2000 processes:
Manager - Java Console to start a VCS client.
Then, click OK.
5. Right-click AppService in the navigation tree and choose Online > host_name from the
shortcut menu.
6. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The network management system maintenance suite is applicable to U2000 commissioning,
maintenance, and redeployment. Generally, the network management system maintenance
suite server processes start along with the OS.
In Windows Task Manager, check whether msdaemon.exe and msserver.exe are listed.
l If the two processes are listed, the MSuite server has started.
l If the two processes are not listed, the MSuite server does not start. Navigate to the C:
\HWENGR\engineering directory, double-click startserver.bat to start the MSuite
server.
2.1.4 Starting the U2000 Server in a High Availability System

(Solaris)
Four steps are required to start the U2000 server in a high availability system (Solaris): power
on the server safely, check the high availability system, start the database, and start the U2000
server processes.

the database on the HA system (Solaris).
Prerequisites
l The OS must have been started.
l The VCS service must have started along with the OS and the disk must function properly.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Perform the following operations to start the Sybase database service in the HA system:
l GUI mode:
1. Log in to the primary site as user root.
2. Run the following command to start the VCS client:
# hagui &
3. Choose File > New Cluster from the main menu. In the window that is displayed, enter
the IP address of the server and click OK.
4. Enter the default user name admin and the default password password of the VCS
client. Click OK.
5. Expand the AppService node in the navigation tree, and expand the SybaseBk node.
Right-click BackupServer and check whether the Enabled check box is selected. If it
is not selected, select it and choose Online > host_name from the shortcut menu.
Wait until BackupServer and DatabaseServer on the Resources tab page are
available, which indicates that the Sybase database service is running.
l CLI mode:
2. Run the following command to start the Sybase database service:
# hares -online BackupServer -sys hostname
----End

U2000 server processes on the Solaris HA system.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the primary site as user root.
Step 2 Start the U2000 server processes.

l GUI mode:
1. Open a terminal window, run the following command:
# hagui&
NOTE
If the login window fails to be displayed and the terminal displays a message indicating that the
current status is "STALE_ADMIN_WAIT", run the # hasys -force host name of node command.
2. Click Connect to Cluster name.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
If you are logging in to the VCS for the first time, you need to create a new Cluster.
a. Click File > New Cluster.
b. Enter the IP address of application network.
c. Click OK.
3. Enter User Name and Password.
NOTE
The default user name of the VCS is admin and the password is password.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Cluster Explorer window, right-click the AppService resource group in the
navigation tree and choose Online > primary from the shortcut menu to start the Sybase
process and U2000 server process.
TIP
Click the Resources tab to view the start status of each resource.
Normally, on the Status tab page, Online is displayed for State in the Group Status
on Member Systems area on the active site, and Online on primary is displayed for
Status in the Resource Status area.
NOTE
l In actual configuration, use the actual host name.

l If a fault has occurred during start of the AppService process, right-click AppService and choose
clear fault from the shortcut menu to clear the fault. Then, choose Online > host_name to start
the AppService process.
l CLI mode:
# hagrp -online AppService -sys hostname
----End
2.1.5 Logging In to the U2000 Client

Log in to a U2000 using the client, and then perform management operations in the GUI of the
U2000 client.
Prerequisites
Before logging in to the U2000 client, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l The U2000 processes are started.

l The network communication between the U2000 client and the U2000 is available.
NOTE
Run the ping peer_IP_address command to check network communication.

– In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is the system IP address of the
server.
– In a single-server system (distributed), the IP address is the system IP address of the
master server.
– In a high availability system (centralized), the IP address is the IP address of NMS
application network in the active site server.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– In a high availability system (distributed), the IP address is the IP address of NMS

application network in the master server of active site.
l The ports used between the U2000 client and the U2000 are opened by the firewall.
l The IP address of the client must be contained in the access control list (ACL) that is
configured on the U2000.
NOTE
The default ACL range is the entire network segment. It is recommended that you set the ACL
restriction range based on the security requirements.
l The legitimate U2000 user account and password must be allocated.
l U2000 Licenses have been correctly loaded to the server.
Context
By default, after you enter an incorrect password for three consecutive times, the user account
that you use is locked by the U2000. The super user admin can unlock the account of a common
user. In addition, the system can automatically unlock the account in 30 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS where the client program is installed.
l On Windows OS, log in to the OS as user administrator.
l On Solaris OS, log in to the GUI as user nmsuser.
Step 2 On the OS desktop, double-click the U2000 Client shortcut icon. The Login dialog box is
displayed.
TIP
l In the case of a Windows OS, you can double-click the startup_all_global.bat file in the D:\U2000
\client directory to start the client.
l In the case of a Solaris OS, you can run the command of ./startup_all_global.sh in the /opt/U2000/
client directory to start the client.
Step 3 In the Server drop-down list, select the server to be logged in to. Then, set User Name and
Password to the valid values, and click Login.
l If the intended server is not configured, perform the following operations to add a server:
1. Click the ... button. In the Server List dialog box, click Add.
2. In the Add Server Information dialog box, set the parameters of the U2000 server to
be added, and then click OK.
Table 2-1 Server parameter settings

Parameter Settings
Name It is recommended that you set this parameter to the IP address

for login or the related host name.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameter Settings
Server Name (or It is recommended that you set this parameter to an IP address.
IP Address) l In a single-server system (centralized), the IP address is the
system IP address of the server.
l In a single-server system (distributed), the IP address is the
system IP address of the master server.
l In a high availability system (centralized), the IP address is
the IP address of NMS application network in the active site
server.
l In a high availability system (distributed), the IP address is the
IP address of NMS application network in the master server
of active site.
Port There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal and
Security(SSL). By default, port 31037 is used in Normal mode
and port 31039 is used in Security(SSL) mode.
Mode There are two data transmission modes, namely, Normal and
Security(SSL). You can run the ssl_adm -cmd query command
to query data transmission modes on the server. The ssl_adm -
cmd query command must be run as user nmsuser in Solaris and
SUSE Linux OS. The default data transmission mode is
Normal.
NOTE
l If the client and server applications are on the same host and the server
uses the SSL mode, then the client can use the Normal or SSL mode.
The client can only use the Normal mode if the server uses the
Normal mode.
l If the client and server applications are not on the same host, the client
can log in to the server only when it uses the same mode as the server.
3. In the Server List dialog box, select a record from the record list. Then, click OK.
l When you log in to the U2000 client, if the system detects that the local version is earlier
than the server version, a prompt is displayed, asking you whether to upgrade the client.
– Click Yes to upgrade the client.
– Click No to log in to the client.
----End
Result
After the login to the U2000 client is successful, the U2000 client obtains related data from the
U2000.
2.1.6 Shutting Down U2000 Clients

You must ensure that all U2000 clients are shut down before you shut down the U2000 server.
Prerequisites
The U2000 clients must be started properly.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Exit from the main menu.
Step 2 In the Confirm dialog box, click OK.

If certain operations are performed on the Main Topology but not saved, a prompt is displayed,
asking you whether to save them.
----End
2.1.7 Shutting Down the MDS 6630 Server
Procedure
Step 1 Stop all running clients.
----End
Stopping the U2000 Server Processes

Do not stop the U2000 server processes when the U2000 server is managing NEs. Stop the
U2000 server processes only for some special purposes, for example, changing the system time
of the computer where the server is installed or upgrading the version. This topic describes how
to stop the U2000 server processes on the Windows single-server system.
Prerequisites
Exit all running U2000 clients.
Procedure
Step 2 In Windows Task Manager, view the startup information about the U2000 server processes.
If imapmrb.exe, imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe,
imap_sysmonitor.exe, ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, and
imapPortTrunkSvc.exe are displayed in the process list, the U2000 server processes have
started.
Step 3 In the U2000 software installation directory, for example, D:\U2000\server\bin, run
stopnms.bat to stop U2000 server processes.
----End
Result
In Windows Task Manager, click the Processes tab and check that imapmrb.exe,
imapwatchdog.exe, imapsysd.exe, imapeventmgr.exe, imap_sysmonitor.exe,
ResourceMonitor.exe, imapsvcd.exe, EmfGnlDevDm.exe, and imapPortTrunkSvc.exe
have been stopped.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Shutting Down the Database

The U2000 can start properly only after the database is started. Before shutting down the
database, stop the U2000 server processes. This topic describes how to shut down the database
on the Windows single-server system.
Prerequisites
The U2000 server processes must have been stopped.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager to check whether
Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.
The SQL Server Service Manager dialog box is displayed.
If Start/Continue is dimmed, Microsoft SQL Server 2000 is running.
Step 3 Choose Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server > Service Manager.
Step 4 In the dialog box that is displayed, click .

Step 5 In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
----End
2.1.8 Shutting Down the U2000 Server (Single Server System,

Solaris)
Three steps are required to shut down the U2000 server: stop the U2000 server processes, shut
down the database, and power off the server safely.

to stop the U2000 server processes on the Solaris single-server system.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the nmsuser user.
Step 2 To check the running status of the U2000 process, run the following command:
$ daem_ps

nmsuser 27069 1 0 10:31:39 ? 1:39 imapmrb
nmsuser 27079 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:00 imapwatchdog -cmd start

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
nmsuser 27075 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:50 imapsysd -cmd start

nmsuser 27086 1 0 10:31:39 ? 0:09 imapeventmgr
nmsuser 23679 1 1 17:57:06 pts/8 0:02 imap_sysmonitor -cmd start
nmsuser 27116 1 0 10:31:40 ? 0:52 ResourceMonitor -cmd start
NOTE
The U2000 is running if the displayed information contains imap_sysmonitor -cmd start.
Step 3 Run the following commands to stop U2000 if it is running:

$ cd /opt/U2000/server/bin
$ ./stopnms.sh
----End
Result
Run the following command to check the running status of the U2000 process:
$ daem_ps
NOTE
The process is stopped if the displayed information is empty.

on the Solaris single-server system.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the server as the sybase user.
TIP
Run the su - sybase command to switch to the sybase user.
Step 2 Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:

...
NOTE

Step 3 Run the following commands to stop the Sybase database if it is running:
$ su - sybase

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
$ . /opt/sybase/SYBASE.sh
$ cd /opt/sybase/OCS*/bin
$ ./isql -SDBSVR -Usa -PChangeme123
1> shutdown SYB_BACKUP
2> go
1> shutdown
2> go
NOTE
l Leave a space between the dot (.) and the command /opt/sybase/SYBASE.sh.
l In the ./isql -SDBSVR -Usa -PChangeme123 command, Changeme123 specifies the password for the
sa user of the Sybase database.
----End
Result
Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database is running:
NOTE
The database is stoped if the displayed information does not contain /opt/sybase/ASE-15_0/install/
2.1.9 Shutting Down the High Availability System (Windows)

This topic describes how to shut down a system. Do not power off a U2000 when it is properly
managing NEs. The U2000 only needs to be shut down in special circumstances, such as
switching the power supply.
Procedure
Step 1 Stop all running U2000 clients.
Step 2 On the primary site, do as follows to stop the U2000 processes:

2. Choose File > New Cluster. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in the following figure.
Then, click OK.
5. Right-click AppService in the navigation tree and choose Offline > host_name from the
shortcut menu.
Wait patiently. If all the resources on the Resources tab page turn grey, it indicates that the NMS
processes are stopped.
Step 3 Log in to the server of the active site and run the following commands to stop the VCS service:
C:\> hastop -all -force
In the Task Manager, check whether the had.exe process exists. If yes, right-click the process
and stop it.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Log in to the server of the standby site and perform the preceding step to stop the VCS service
on the server of the standby site.
Step 5 Shut down the OS of the standby site.

1. Choose Start > Shut Down.
2. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Shut Down. Then, click OK.
Step 6 Shut down the OS of the active site.

1. Choose Start > Shut Down.
2. In the dialog box that is displayed, select Shut Down. Then, click OK.
----End

to stop the U2000 server processes on the Windows HA system.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 2 End the U2000 processes of the Veritas high availability system.
Then, click OK.
5. Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-click
NMSServer and choose Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu.
----End

on the Windows HA system.
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 In the high availability system, log in to the OS as the user who has administrator rights.
Step 2 Start the VCS client.

Then, click OK.
Step 3 Choose AppService from the navigation tree and click the Resources tab. Then, right-click
NMSServer and choose Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is
displayed, click Yes.
Step 4 After the NMSServer resource is stopped, right-click AppService-SQLServer2000 and choose
Offline > host_name from the shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
----End
2.1.10 Shutting Down the U2000 Server in a High Availability

System (Solaris)
Four steps are required to shut down the U2000 server in a high availability system (Solaris):
stop the U2000 server processes, shut down the database, stop the VCS service, and power off
the server safely.

to stop the U2000 server processes on the Solaris HA system.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS of the active site as the root user.
Step 2 Stop the U2000 server processes.

l GUI mode:
1. Open a terminal window, run the following command:
# hagui&
NOTE
If the login window fails to be displayed and the terminal displays a message indicating that the
current status is "STALE_ADMIN_WAIT", run the # hasys -force host name of node command.
2. Click Connect to Cluster name.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
If you are logging in to the VCS for the first time, you need to create a new Cluster.
a. Click File > New Cluster.
b. Enter the IP address of application network.
c. Click OK.
3. Enter User Name and Password.
NOTE
The default user name of the VCS is admin and the password is password.
4. Click OK.
5. Choose AppService from the navigation tree.
6. Click the Resources tab. Right-click NMSServer and choose Offline > Host name
from the shortcut menu.
Wait about 1 minute. If the NMSServer icon changes to grey, the U2000 processes
have been stopped.
l CLI mode:
# hagrp -offline AppService -sys hostname
----End

on the Solaris HA system.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Perform the following operations to disable the Sybase database service at the primary site in
the HA system:
NOTE
By default, the Sybase database service at the secondary site is not running.
l GUI mode:
2. Run the following command to start the VCS client at the primary site:
# hagui &
3. In the Cluster Monitor window, click the server record in the list.
4. In the dialog box that is displayed, enter the user name and the password of the VCS,
and click OK.
NOTE
The default user of the VCS is admin and the default password is password.
5. On the VCS client of the primary site, right-click the NMSServer node and choose
Offline > hostname from the shortcut menu.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.

7. Right-click the BackupServer node and choose Offline > hostname from the shortcut
menu.
9. Right-click the DatabaseServer node and choose Offline > hostname from the shortcut
menu.
l CLI mode:
2. Run the following command to shut down the U2000:
# hares -offline NMSServer -sys hostname
3. Run the following command to disable the Sybase database service:
# hares -offline BackupServer -sys hostname
# hares -offline DatabaseServer -sys hostname
Run the following command to check whether the Sybase database service is disabled:
# ps -ef | grep sybase
If the following message is displayed, the Sybase database service has been disabled:
root 9629 14603 0 07:46:52 pts/3 0:00 grep sybase
----End
Stopping the VCS Service

This topic describes how to stop the VCS service.
Prerequisites
The U2000 and database must have been shut down.
Context
Before powering off the server safely, manually stop the VCS service; otherwise, the server may
fail to shut down properly.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the OS on the server as the root user.
Step 2 Run the following command to stop the VCS service:
# hastop -all -force
----End
2.2 Web LCT Quick Guide

The following topics describes how to successfully launch and shut down the Web LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to NEs

To configure and manage NEs by using the Web LCT, first connect the Web LCT to the NEs
with Ethernet cables or serial port cables.
Procedure
l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs by using Ethernet cables.
1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Web LCT computer.
2. Route the cable to the equipment side and connect the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet
cable to the NMS interface of the equipment panel.
NOTE
The IP address of the NMS and the IP address of the equipment must belong to the same network
segment.
l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs over the DCN.
1. Connect the Web LCT computer to the DCN using an Ethernet cable.
2. Connect one end of another Ethernet cable to the NMS interface of the equipment
panel and connect the other end of the line to the DCN.
l Connect the Web LCT to the NEs by using the RS 232 serial port cable.
1. Connect the serial port cable to the Web LCT computer.
2. Route the cable to the equipment and connect the RS 232 connector of the serial port
cable to the RS 232 interface of the equipment panel.
NOTE
For the location of the RS 232 serial interface and Ethernet interface on the equipment, see the
Hardware Description for your equipment.
----End
2.2.2 Starting the Web LCT

You need to start the Web LCT before logging in to configure and manage NEs.
Prerequisites
The Web LCT computer and equipment must be correctly connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Start the Web LCT computer.
Step 2 Double-click the shortcut icon Start Web LCT on the desktop. The Web LCT starts and the
login page for the Web LCT is displayed.
Step 3 Enter Password.
NOTE
By default, the User Name is admin, and the initial Password is admin. To protect the Web LCT from
illegal logins, immediately change the initial password and keep the new one.
Step 4 Click Login. The NE List is displayed.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2.2.3 Logging In to the Web LCT

You can log in to the Web LCT server through Internet Explorer without installing the server
on the local computer.
Prerequisites
l The Web LCT server must be started correctly.
l The Internet Explorer pop-up blocker must be turned off.
Procedure
Step 1 Open Internet Explorer.
Step 2 Enter the IP address of the Web LCT server in the address field. The Web LCT Login dialog
box is displayed.
NOTE
Enter the IP address of the server, for example, http://10.70.73.1:11080/WebLCT. The four octets
10.70.73.1 is the IP address of the server computer and 11080 is the port number.
NOTE
The IP address of the Web LCT server is case-sensitive. Ensure that WebLCT is entered correctly.
Step 3 Enter the Password.

NOTE
By default, the User Name is admin, and the initial Password is admin. To protect the Web LCT from
illegal logins, immediately change this password and keep the new one.
If a user account is used to log in to the NE with incorrect passwords for consecutive five times, the user
account is locked and will be unlocked 15 minutes after the last failed login. Two login attempts are
considered as consecutive if the interval between the two attempts is within three minutes.
The unlocking operation cannot be performed through the NMS. Only the system can (automatically)
unlock the user account.
Here locking means that the user account of a specified NE is locked and the other NEs are not affected.
Step 4 Click Login. The NE List is displayed.

NOTE
An NE supports the login of a single Web LCT user at a time. Concurrent logins of several Web LCT users
on an NE is not supported on an NE.
----End
2.2.4 Shutting Down the Web LCT

You are recommended to shut down the Web LCT by strictly observing the following procedure.
Prerequisites
The Web LCT must be started normally.
Procedure
Step 1 Click to close the NE Explorer.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Click to close the NE list.
Step 3 Double-click the shortcut icon for Web LCT shutdown to stop the Tomcat service.
----End
2.3 Entering the Common Views

This task describes how to display the common views of the network management system (NMS)
and functions of the views.
2.3.1 Opening the Main Topology on the U2000

On the Main Topology, you can manage topologies, protection subnets, and trails.
Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher.
Tools, Equipment and Materials

U2000
Procedure
l To open the Main Topology, log in to the U2000 client.
l Choose Window > Main Topology from the Main Menu.
----End
2.3.2 NE List on the Web LCT

NE List is the main user interface of the Web LCT. The Web LCT performs the following NE
management operations through NE List: adding NEs, logging in to NEs, logging out of NEs,
deleting NEs, browsing system logs, and setting time format.
NOTE
NE List is refreshed periodically and the NE information is automatically refreshed every five seconds.
The Web LCT supports the focus display function. After the mouse cursor resides on a shortcut icon for
about two seconds, the description of the shortcut icon is displayed.
After the Web LCT client is successfully started, the NE List window is displayed.
The Web LCT supports backup of the NE database to the SCC board so that the configuration data of the
NE can be stored.
User Interface
Figure 2-1 shows the NE List window of the Web LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 2-1 NE List
2.3.3 Opening the NE Explorer

The NE Explorer is the key interface for the U2000 to configure a single station. After opening
the NE Explorer, you can configure, manage and maintain each NE, board or port in a
hierarchical manner.
Prerequisite
Background Information
You can open a maximum of five NE Explorer windows at the same time.

U2000/Web LCT (U2000 is recommended)
Procedure on the U2000

l Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. In the displayed window, right-click
an NE in the left-hand pane and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800/6800, the icon of the NE can be directly placed on the Main Topology.
Double-click the NE icon and then click to display the NE Explorer.
----End
Procedure on the Web LCT

l In the NE List, select an NE and click NE Explorer, or double-click the NE in the NE
List. Then, the NE Explorer is displayed.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2.3.4 Opening the NE Panel

The NE Panel displays subracks and boards on an NE. The color of the icon indicates the current
state of the component. On the NMS, the NE Panel is a key user interface for configuring,
monitoring, and maintaining equipment.
Prerequisite
You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.


l In the Main Topology, double-click an NE icon and select the NE in the pane on the left
side. The pane on the right side displays the NE Panel by default.
----End

l Right-click the NE and choose NE Explorer. The pane on the right side displays the NE
Panel by default.
----End
User Interface
NE Panel is product-specific. Figure 2-2 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32.
Figure 2-3 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Figure 2-4 shows the NE Panel
of the OptiX OSN 6800. Figure 2-5 shows the NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 2-2 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 2-3 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 2-4 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 6800
Figure 2-5 NE Panel of the OptiX OSN 3800
2.4 Using Online Help

Online Help provides help information about the U2000.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Help > Help Topics from the Main Menu. The Online Help page is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
TIP
When using the U2000 client, press the F1 key to quickly display the related Online Help page.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During
Commissioning Guide Deployment
3 Commissioning and Configuration

Procedure During Deployment
This section describes the general commissioning procedures.

The commissioning procedures for the equipment can be divided into two parts: optical power
commissioning and network commissioning.
l Optical power commissioning procedures individually commission the optical power
values of NEs and boards based on the optical signal flow. They also remove the abnormal
attenuation of lines or boards based on the requirements of optical power, and the gain and
insertion losses of the boards.
l Network commissioning procedures include the commissioning protection function,
testing bit errors, and other functional commissioning operations at the network level.
Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 provides the general commissioning procedures.

Figure 3-1 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 8800/6800

Installation Installing the Creating OCh
Creating an NE Creating Fibers trails using the
Equipment
trail search
function
Creating an Checking
Checking the
Optical Network Network-Wide
Installation Configuring
Element Software
Version the ROADM
Powering On Uploading the
and Checking NE Data Setting
the Equipment Manually
Extended ECC
Setting Up Setting NE ID Communication
Optical Paths and IP
Setting
Performance
Synchronizing Monitoring
Configuring NE
the NE Time Parameters of
and Network
with the NMS an NE
Commissioning
Optical Power
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the Configuring Port
Service on
Service of the Board
Configuration
Configuration Guide
Configuring the
& WDM
Commissioning Protection
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Feature on
WDM Feature
Feature
Description
Commissioning
the System
Testing Bit
Errors
Backing Up the
: Mandatory
NE Data : Optional

Figure 3-2 General commissioning procedures for OptiX OSN 3800
Installation Installing the Creating OCh

Creating an NE Creating Fibers trails using the
Equipment
trail search
function
Creating an Checking
Checking the
Optical Network Network-Wide
Installation
Element Software
Version
Powering On Uploading the
and Checking NE Data Setting
the Equipment Manually
Extended ECC
Setting Up Setting NE ID Communication
Optical Paths and IP
Setting
Performance
Synchronizing Monitoring
Configuring NE
the NE Time Parameters of
and Network
with the NMS an NE
Commissioning
Optical Power
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the Configuring Port
Service on
Service of the Board
Configuration
Configuration Guide
Configuring the
&
WDM
Commissioning Protection
Refer to
Configuring the
Configuring the
Feature on
WDM Feature
Feature
Description
Commissioning
the System
Testing Bit
Errors
Backing Up the
: Mandatory
NE Data : Optional
You can perform the commissioning and configuration during deployment of the equipment by
using either the iManager U2000 (U2000 for short) or the OptiX iManager U2000 Web LCT
(Web LCT for short). All the operations that can be performed on the Web LCT can be performed
on the U2000. Compared with U2000, the Web LCT has lower requirements on the computer
hardware and can be started quickly.
Table 3-1 lists the tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment.
Table 3-1 List of tasks for the commissioning and configuration during deployment
No. Task Mandato Tool

ry/
Optional
1 Creating NEs in Batches. Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT
2 Creating Optical NEs. Mandatory U2000


ry/
Optional
3 Uploading the NE Data. Mandatory U2000
4 Setting NE ID and IP. Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT
5 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT Server Manually. LCT
6 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of Mandatory U2000 or Web

an NE. LCT
7 Setting Manually Extended ECC Optional U2000

Communication. Perform this task when the
network uses HWECC for communication and
more than four Huawei equipment NEs use the
extended ECC for communication.
Configuring IP over DCC. Perform this task when Optional U2000

the network uses IP over DCC for communication.
Configuring OSI over DCC. Perform this task when Optional U2000
the network uses OSI over DCC for communication.
8 Checking Network-Wide Software Version. Optional U2000
9 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode. Mandatory U2000

Perform this task on the U2000. on the
U2000
10 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search. Perform this Mandatory U2000

task on the U2000. on the
U2000
11 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross- Optional U2000 or Web

Connection. Perform this task when ROADM according LCT
stations are configured on the actual network. to the
network


ry/
Optional
12 Commission optical power by using one of the Mandatory U2000 or Web

following methods as required: LCT
l Commissioning Optical Power on Site
l Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
l Automatic Commissioning
NOTE
This document uses a 40-channel system as an example
to describe optical power commissioning. The optical
power commissioning methods for an 80-channel system
are similar. The main difference is that the 40-channel
system and 80-channel system have different
requirements on nominal single-wavelength optical
power and single-wavelength incident optical power for
OA boards.
NOTE
See Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based
on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System to commission
optical power of a 40 Gbit/s system.
See Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of
the Coherent Transmission System to commission
optical power of the Coherent Transmission System.
13 Configuring Boards. Mandatory U2000 or Web

LCT
14 Configuring Services. Mandatory U2000
15 Configuring System Features. Mandatory U2000
16 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Mandatory U2000 or Web

Removing Abnormal Alarms. LCT
17 Testing Protection Switching. Mandatory U2000
18 Testing Data Features. Mandatory U2000
19 Testing System Features. Mandatory U2000
20 Testing Ethernet Service Channels. Mandatory U2000
21 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System and Optional U2000 or Web

Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS LCT
System.
22 Testing Orderwire Functions. Optional U2000 or Web

LCT
23 Testing Bit Errors. Mandatory OTN analyzer or

SDH analyzer


ry/
Optional
24 Checking the entire network against the Checklist Mandatory U2000 or Web
for Commissioning During Deployment. Ensure LCT
that the network configurations are correct.
25 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Mandatory U2000 or Web

Board. LCT

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 4 Configuring NE and Network
4 Configuring NE and Network
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to configure NEs and networks.
4.1 Creating NEs in Batches

When the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs that
communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which
the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker and
more accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in batches is
recommended.
4.2 Creating Optical NEs
The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. There
are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and
WDM_OTM.
4.3 Logging In to an NE
On the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.
4.4 Uploading the NE Data
By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network
management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the NE data by
uploading the data.
4.5 Setting NE ID and IP
ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for searching
on the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you must assign a
unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused.
In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if you
need to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on the
U2000.
4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is consistent
with the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly record the
time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time of
the U2000/Web LCT server.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

By setting performance monitoring parameters of an NE properly and starting the performance
monitoring for the NE, you can obtain the detailed performance record during the running of
the NE. This facilitates the monitoring and analysis of the NE running status performed by
maintenance personnel.
4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication
When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be
used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE takes the auto-extended
ECC communication. When more than eight Huawei devices need to use the extended ECC
communication, the manually extended ECC communication must be used instead.
4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions
After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each board
on the NE.
4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode
In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow
diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of
fiber connections one by one.
4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search
After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search for
the cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end WDM
trails at the network layer of the U2000.
4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection
Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-
station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.
4.13 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T32/8800 T64
The equipment supports the master/slave subrack management. To prevent subrack ID conflict
and avoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly. The
ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.
4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16
ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.
4.15 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 6800
ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.1 Creating NEs in Batches

When the U2000/Web LCT communicates properly with a GNE, you can search for all NEs that
communicate with the GNE by using the IP address of the GNE or the network segment to which
the IP address is associated. Then, you can create NEs in batches. This method is quicker and
more accurate than manual creation. Therefore, the method of creating NEs in batches is
recommended.
Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Administrators" authority.
l The U2000 must communicate properly with the GNE.
l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.
For Web LCT, only NEs that use the Ethernet port to communicate can be searched out.

U2000 or Web LCT

1. Choose File > Discovery > NE... from the Main Menu. The NE Discovery window is
displayed.
2. Select the Transport NE Search tab.
3. Select the search mode from the drop-down list of Search Mode.
l Sets the Search Mode as Search for NE.
a. In the Search Domain dialog box, click Add and the Input Search Domain dialog
box is displayed.
b. Set Address Type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE, or NSAP
Address, and enter Search Address, User Name, and Password. Then, click
OK.
NOTE
You can repeat the above steps to add more search domains. You can delete the system
default search domain.
l If you use IP address to search for NEs:
l only the NEs (not across routers) in the same network segment can be searched out
in normal conditions if you select the IP Address Range of GNE because
broadcasting is usually disabled for the routers in the network (to prevent network
storm).
l search out the NEs in the network segment by using the IP Address of GNE if you
need to search for the NEs across routers.
l If you search for NEs by using the NSAP address, you can only select NSAP
Address.
c. In the Search for NE dialog box, you can perform the following operations:
– Select Create NE after search, and enter NE user and Password.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l The default NE user is root.

l The default password is password.
– Select Upload after being created, so that the NE data can be uploaded to the
U2000 after the NE is created.
NOTE
You can select all options in the Search for NE area to search for NEs, create NEs,
and upload the NE data at a time.
l Sets the Search Mode is IP auto discovery.
NOTE
If you fail to enter a network segment correctly, enable IP auto discovery. After enabling IP
auto discovery, you can obtain the IP address of the GNE and search out all the NEs related to
the GNE.
CAUTION
In the case of NEs that are connected to the NMS through the router, these NEs cannot
be searched out by IP auto discovery. They can be searched out only by network
segment.
4. Click Next and the Result area is displayed.

TIP
You can select the Display uncreated NEs to only display the uncreated NEs.
5. Optional: Click Change NE ID. Then, the Change NE ID dialog box is displayed. Users
can check against the Bar Code List by the value of Bar Code, and then modify the NE
Name, Extend NE ID, Base NE ID, and IP Address fields accordingly.
NOTE
The Bar Code List is provided by the hardware installation personnel to the software commissioning
personnel. The list contains the bar codes of stations.
6. Optional: If you select only Search for NE, after the U2000 completes the search, you
can select the uncreated NEs from the Result list and click Create. The Create dialog box
is displayed. Enter the NE User and Password. Click OK.
7. Optional: Select the NEs from the Result list and click Set Gateway NE. The Set Gateway
NE dialog box is displayed. Enter the message, and click OK.

1. Click NE Search > Advanced Search in the NE List. The Search NE dialog box is
displayed.
2. Click Manage Domain. The Manage Domain Search dialog box is displayed.
3. Click Add, and the New Domain dialog box is displayed.
4. Set Domain Type to GNE IP Domain or GNE IP Address, and enter an IP address in the
Domain Address field.
5. Click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
You can repeat step 3 through 5 to add multiple search domains.
6. Close the Manage Domain Search dialog box.
7. Select appropriate network segment IP addresses within the Domain and click Search.
NOTE
l The NE search function searches out only the NEs in the specified network segment.
l When the search is in progress, you can click End Search.
8. After the search is complete, select an NE from the list and click Add NE. A prompt
message is displayed, indicating that the NE is successfully added. Click OK.
9. Select the NE that you want to log in and click NE Login in the lower right corner or right-
click the NE and choose NE Login. In the NE Login dialog box that is displayed, enter
lct and password in the User Name and Password fields, and then click OK.
TIP
You can select multiple NEs at a time by concurrently pressing Shift.

If you select the Use same user name and password to login check box, you can log in to multiple
NEs at a time by entering the user name and password only in the first line.
If you select the Use the user name and password that was used last time check box, you do not
need to enter the use name and password and the system automatically uses the user name and
password for login last time.
Reference Information
Category Item Description
(Optional) Related Operation Creating a Single NE If you have obtained the ID of

an NE, you can create the NE
manually.
Switching a Logged-In NE You can switch a login NE

User user without logging out of
the U2000 or Web LCT.
Modifying the NE Name You can change the NE name

as required. This operation
does not affect the running of
the NE.
Deleting NEs If you have created a wrong

NE, you can delete the NE
from the U2000 or Web LCT.
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.
l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.2 Creating Optical NEs

The U2000 allocates the WDM equipment into different optical NEs for management. There
are four types of optical NEs. They are WDM_OADM, WDM_OEQ, WDM_OLA and
WDM_OTM.
Prerequisite
l For OptiX OSN 8800, the license must be installed and the license must support creating
the NE of the type.

U2000

1. Right-click in the Main Topology and choose New > NE.
2. In the Create NE dialog box that is displayed, click corresponding to Optical NE in the
left pane, and then select the type of the optical NE that you want to create.
3. Click Basic Attributes and enter the attributes such as the optical NE name according to
the customer's planning.
4. Click Resource Division and select an NE or a board from the idle optical NEs, and then
click .
TIP
To re-allocate the resources of an optical NE that has been created, right-click the optical NE and
choose Object Attribute. Click the Resource Division tab, select an NE or a board from the list on
the left, and then click to allocate the NE or board to the optical NE.
5. Click OK.
6. Click the Main Topology to create the optical NE icon.
(Optional) Related Operation Modifying the Optical NE See this section to change the
Name name of an optical NE
independently.
4.3 Logging In to an NE
On the U2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
The NE must be created and must be working normally.
The user must have logged in to the U2000.

U2000
On the U2000, a user can see an NE only when the user has the authority to log in to the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the desired ONE icon in the Main Topology to display the NE Panel for the ONE.
Step 2 Right-click the NE and choose Login from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the Operation
Result dialog box.
----End
4.4 Uploading the NE Data

By uploading the NE data, you can synchronize the current NE configuration data to the network
management system directly. Therefore, it is recommended that you configure the NE data by
uploading the data.
Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
l The NE must be created successfully.

U2000

1. In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management.
2. In the left topology tree, select a created NE and click . In NE Configuration, select
an NE whose NE Status is Unconfigured.
3. Click Upload. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. Click OK to start the upload.
4. When the upload is complete, the Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
(Optional) Related Operation Configuring the NE Data You can configure the NE
data in upload or manual
mode.
4.5 Setting NE ID and IP

ECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word for searching
on the U2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you must assign a
unique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused.
In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if you
need to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on the
U2000.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE and network operator authority or higher.
The ECC GNE or ECC non-gateway NE must be created.

U2000
The master and slave subracks are displayed as one NE on the U2000. They share one NE ID
and one NE IP.
Precautions
CAUTION
l Changing the ID of an NE is a risky operation because it causes the NE to be reset, which
further results in an NE communication failure during the reset.
l Before changing the NE ID, delete the function connected with the NE ID, for example,
the Client 1+1 Protection group, the Intra-Board 1+1 Protection group, the Optical
Wavelength Shared Protection group, the Optical Line Protection group, IPA, ALC, APE,
EAPE, fiber connection and so on. After changing the NE ID, reconnect the fiber connection
and re-configure the protection group, IPA, ALC and other function connected with NE ID
on the U2000.
l Before changing the NE ID, delete the manually added monitoring relationship between
the WMU board and the OTU board on the NE. After changing the NE ID, restore the
deleted monitoring relationship on the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
l For Non-Gateway NEs
1. Log in to U2000, delete the NE service configuration and the NE fiber connection.
2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from
the Function Tree.
3. Click the Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and the
New Extended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.
CAUTION
For non-gateway NEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this
NE and other NEs on the U2000.
l For Gateway NEs

1. Log in to U2000, delete the NE service configuration and the NE fiber connection.
2. In the NE Explorer, select the GNE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from
the Function Tree.
3. Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and the New
Extended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.
CAUTION
For GNEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this NE and other
NEs on the U2000. Also, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs that
are originally connected to the GNE.
l Setting NEs IP
NOTE
If the IP address of an NE is not changed before you change the NE ID, the IP address of the NE varies
with the NE ID. Once the IP address of the NE is changed, the association between the NE ID and IP
address is deleted automatically.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Communication > Communication
Parameters from the Function Tree.
2. Set the communication parameters of the NE, including IP, extended ID, gateway
IP and subnet mask.
3. Click Apply. Click OK in the two displayed Warning dialog boxes. Then click
Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.
NOTE
For GNEs, after you set the NE IP, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs that
are originally connected to the GNE.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.6 Synchronizing the NE Time with the U2000/Web LCT

Server Manually
For NEs that do not have the NTP service configured, check whether the NE time is consistent
with the U2000/Web LCT server time, so that the U2000/Web LCT can correctly record the
time that an alarm is generated. Otherwise, manually synchronize the NE time with the time of
the U2000/Web LCT server.
Prerequisite
On the Web LCT, the synchronous mode of NE time must be set to NM or NULL.

U2000 or Web LCT
Synchronizing the NE time does not affect services. Before synchronizing the NE time, verify
that the system time on the U2000/Web LCT server is correct. If you want to change the system
time, exit the U2000/Web LCT to reset the time, and then restart the U2000/Web LCT.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE. Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization
from the Function Tree. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
2. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. A dialog box is
displayed. Click Yes.
3. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. In this manner, the NE time is
synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

from the Function Tree.
2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.
3. Right-click the NE and then choose Synchronize with NM Time. In this manner, the NE
time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
(Optional) Related Operation Configuring the NE Time With the time

synchronization function,
consistency is maintained
between the NE time and the
U2000/Web LCT server
time.
4.7 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

Prerequisite
The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT server time.

U2000 or Web LCT

1. Choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring Time from the Main Menu of
the U2000.
2. Select an NE in the left-hand pane, and click .

3. Select the desired NE in the right-hand pane.
4. Select the check box 15-Minute, and click radio button Enabled; or select the check box
24-Hour, and click radio button Enabled.
5. Click the behind From field, select the date, and enter the time to set the beginning
time and end time for monitoring.
NOTE
The start time must be later than the current time of the NMS and NE. If you need to monitor the
performance immediately, set the start time just a little later than the current time of the NMS and
NE. To set the end time, select the check box before To first. The end time must be later than the
start time. If the check box before To is not selected, it indicates that the monitoring function is
enabled all the time.
6. Click Apply. The Warning dialog box is displayed, click OK.
7. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close to finish the operation.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor
Time from the Function Tree. In NE Performance Monitor Time, select the desired NE.
NOTE
An NE must be selected at this step. Otherwise, it is impossible for you to proceed with the task.
2. In the Set 15-Minute Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the
From field to set the start time for monitoring the 15-minute performance of the NE.
TIP
The method of setting the time is as follows: In the hour, minute, or second time control, right-click
the time to increase it, or press Shift and right-click the time to decrease it.
3. In the Set 24-Hour Monitoring field, select Enabled and click behind the From
field to set the start time for monitoring the 24-minute performance of the NE.
4. Click Apply to apply the settings.
(Optional) Related Operation Performance Management To ensure the normal

functioning of the network,
the network management and
maintenance personnel
should periodically check
and monitor the network by
taking proper performance
management measures.
4.8 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication

When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be
used to achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE takes the auto-extended
ECC communication. When more than eight Huawei devices need to use the extended ECC
communication, the manually extended ECC communication must be used instead.
Prerequisites
The NE must be created on the U2000. The communication between the U2000 and the NE must
be normal.
The communication between NEs must be normal.

U2000
Precaution
The extended ECC communication is disabled by default. To use the automatic extended ECC
communication, you must enable the extended ECC communication on the U2000 as follows:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
In the NE Explorer, select Communication > ECC Management from the function tree, and
click Apply. And click OK in the Warning dialog box.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet
port on the EFI1 and EFI2 board.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T16 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port
on the EFI board.
l OptiX OSN 6800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port on the
AUX board.
l OptiX OSN 3800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernet port on the
AUX board.
When configuring the manually extended ECC, one server end NE can have a maximum of
seven client end NEs. One client end NE can function as the server end NE of another ECC
group. Normally, the NE without the optical supervisory channel board is configured as the
client end, and the NE with the optical supervisory channel board is configured as the server
end.
The manually extended ECC communication can be set on site or remotely. When setting the
ECC extended mode remotely, with the normal communication between the NE and the
U2000, set the client NE first and then the server NE.
When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, set the NE without the optical supervisory
channel board first and then the NE with the optical supervisory channel board.
In the case of the NE without the optical supervisory channel board, the communication between
the U2000 and the NE stops after the ECC extended mode is set remotely. The communication
between the U2000 and the NE is restored after the setting on the NE with the optical supervisory
channel board at the station is complete.
CAUTION
When setting the ECC extended mode remotely, strictly follow the setting sequence as required.
The ECC extended mode of the remote NEs must be modified first, and that of the gateway NE
must be modified last. Otherwise, the communication between the U2000 and the unreachable
NEs cannot be restored automatically. In this case, the ECC extended mode of the NEs must be
set again on site.
The extended ECC communication is avoided between the subnet gateway NEs.
Hence, when setting the ECC extended mode remotely, work out the ECC setting plan in advance
to ensure that the settings are correct.
For example, a station has nine NEs. The optical supervisory channel board is configured at NE
A. NE A is the server end. NE H is the client end of NE A and the server end of NE I. Figure
4-1 shows the network topology and Table 4-1 provides the IP addresses of the NEs and the
ECC setting plan.
For example, a station has nine NEs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 4-1 Network topology of a station

B
A C
DCN
I H D
G E
Client NE
F
Server NE
NOTE
NEs of the station are cascaded through network cables.
Table 4-1 Manually extended ECC setting plan
NE IP Address Set Server Set Client
IP Port Opposite IP Port
A 132.37.49.130 0.0.0.0a 1601 - 1601
B 132.37.49.131 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
C 132.37.49.132 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
D 132.37.49.133 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
E 132.37.49.134 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
F 132.37.49.135 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
G 132.37.49.136 - - 132.37.49.130 1601
H 132.37.49.137 0.0.0.0a 1602 132.37.49.130 1601
I 132.37.49.138 - - 132.37.49.137 1602
a: Indicates the local NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
When setting the manually extended ECC communication at the station remotely, follow the
sequence below:
NOTE
The default ECC extended mode is automatic mode.
I→H client end→G, F, E, D, C and B→A server end→H server end
During the configuration, the status of the communication between the U2000 and NEs changes
frequently.
l After the setting at NE I is complete, the communication between the U2000 and NE I
stops.
l After the setting at NE H client end is complete, the communication between the U2000
and NE H stops.
l After the settings on NEs B, C, D, E, F, and G client end are complete, the communication
between the U2000 and NEs B, C, D, E, F, and G stops.
l After the setting at NE A server end is complete, the communication between the U2000
and NEs B, C, D, E, F, G, and H restores automatically.
l After the setting at NE H server end is complete, the communication between the U2000
and NE I restores automatically.
Procedure
l Setting the Client NE
1. Log in to the U2000.
2. Double-click the ONE icon, and the Running Status of the ONE is displayed.
3. Select one NE as the server NE. Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer.
4. Choose Communication > Communication Parameter from the left-hand Function
Tree. Observe the NE IP in the right-hand view and record the NE IP.
5. In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click any one remote NE and select NE
Explorer.
6. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the left-hand Function Tree.
7. Set the ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode in the right-hand Functional Panel.
8. Enter the IP of the server NE in the Opposite IP field and the port number in the
Port field in the Set Client dialog box.
NOTE
The port number is the port number of the local NE for communication with the server NE.
9. Click Apply in the Set Client dialog box.
10. An Operation Result dialog is displayed indicating an Operation succeeded
message. Click Close.
NOTE
l The IP addresses of NEs cannot be repeated and must be within the same subnet.
l The client NE can be the server NE of the next lower level. At that time, the client port and the
server port of the local NE cannot be the same. For specific procedure, refer to Setting the Server
NE.
l The port number must be within the range from 1601 to 1699, for example, 1610.
l Setting the Server NE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1. Log in to the U2000.

2. Double-click the ONE icon, and the Running Status of the ONE is displayed.
3. Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer.
4. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the left-hand Function Tree.
5. Set the ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode in the right-hand Functional Panel.
6. Enter the port number in the Port field in the Set Server dialog box. The port number
must be the consistent with that value entered in the Port field in the Set Client dialog
box of the client NE.
NOTE
l The port number is the port number of the local NE for communication with the client NE.
l The port number of the server NE must be the same as that of the client NE for
communication.
7. Click Apply in the Set Server dialog box.
8. A dialog box is displayed indicating an This operation will reset the NE
communication. Continue? message. Click OK.
----End
4.9 Checking Network-Wide Software Versions

After you query the software version, obtain the status and version information of each board
on the NE.
Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client must be started up.

U2000
Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Physical Inventory from the main menu.
2. Select Board in the Physical Inventory Type. The Board List tab is displayed.
3. Click Filter... in the Board List tab. The Filter window is displayed.
4. Click corresponding to NE Object. The Select NE Object tab is displayed. Then

select the desired NE from the tab, and click OK.
5. The status and version information of each board of the NE are displayed in the user
interface.
6. Click Query. In the displayed Please Select Query Scope dialog box, select Selected
rows or All rows as prompted. Then click OK to query information, such as the software
version of the board. In the displayed Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
7. Obtain the software version of each board in the Software Version column and make
records.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The NEs that are loaded with the same software package should have the same software version. Similarly,
the same boards on different NEs that are loaded with the same software package should also have the
same software version. If version inconsistency occurs, immediately provide feedback to the regional
office of Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.
4.10 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode

In graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flow
diagram directly. This mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a large number of
fiber connections one by one.
Prerequisite
l Optical NEs and NEs must be created.
l Logic board has been created on the U2000.
l Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Planned Wavelength No./
Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designed
wavelength.
l Applies to WDM equipment.

U2000
After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the NE.
You can synchronize on the U2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with the
U2000 side.
Conflicting fibers refer to the different fibers configured on the NE and U2000 sides. Click
Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in the
Uncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fibers
cannot be synchronized between the U2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the networking
design, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create the
remaining fibers.
NOTE
The U2000 supports the ability to synchronize WDM fibers in batches. To do so: In the Main Topology
view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > WDM Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber/Cable
Synchronization from the Function Tree.
2. Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side and
that on the NE side are displayed. Click Close in the Result dialog box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Synchronized Fiber: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides. U2000 is the
same as the fiber data on NEs.
3. Handle different situations as follows:
l If uncreated fiber in U2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click
Create Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronized
fibers are displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable.
l If conflicting fibers are configured and therefore you fail to create a fiber, click Delete
Fiber/Cable to delete the incorrect fiber and click Create Fiber/Cable to re-create the
failed fiber.
Step 2 To create fiber connections inside an NE, do as follows:
NOTE
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge port, see
Configuring the Edge Port.
1. Double-click an optical NE on the Main Topology. Click the Signal Flow Diagram tab.
2. In the Signal Flow Diagram, right-click in the blank area and choose Create Fiber from
the shortcut menu. The cursor is displayed as "+".
3. Select the source board and port and click OK. The cursor is displayed as "+".
4. Select the sink board and port and click OK.
TIP
When a wrong source or sink board or port is selected, right-click to cancel the operation and exit
object selection.
5. In the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the attributes of the fiber.
6. Click OK.
TIP
To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.
Step 3 To creating fiber connections between NEs, do as follows:

NOTE
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot edge ports. For how to select an edge port, see
Configuring the Edge Port.
NOTE
Creating fiber connections between NEs is performed on the Main Topology. In fact, the FIU fiber
connections between stations are created.
1. Click the shortcut icon on the Main Topology and the cursor is displayed as "+" .
2. Click the source NE of the fiber on the Main Topology.
3. Select the source board and source port in the Select Fiber/Cable Source dialog box
displayed.
4. Click OK. The Main Topology is displayed and the cursor is displayed as "+" again.
5. Click the sink NE of the fiber in the Main Topology.
6. Select the sink board and sink port in the Select Fiber/Cable Sink dialog box displayed.
7. Click OK and enter the attributes of the fiber in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box
displayed.
8. Click OK. The created fiber is displayed between the source NE and the sink NE on the
Main Topology.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
TIP
To delete a fiber, right-click a fiber that has been created and choose Delete.
Step 4 Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber is displayed.
Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly.
----End
(Optional) Related Operation Creating Fiber Compared with the graphic

Connections in List Mode mode, the creating fiber
connections in the list mode
is not visual. Hence, the list
mode is applicable to the
scenario where you create a
few fiber connections only.
Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to verify all fibers are created to ensure that the
fiber connections are correct and the line communication is available.
4.11 Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search

After you create fibers and configure services for WDM equipment on the U2000, the trail
information does not exist at the network layer of the U2000. To manage OCh trails, search for
the cross-connections and fiber connections data over the network to generate end-to-end WDM
trails at the network layer of the U2000.
Prerequisite
l Fiber connections must be correctly created for the WDM equipment.
Precautions
l If certain cross-connections exist, you can create an optical-layer trail by using any of the
following methods:
– Delete the original cross-connection and create the optical-layer trail by using the trail
function. This method affects services.
– Complement cross-connections on NEs and search for the trail.
l You can create only single-NE optical cross-connections from the AM port to the OUT
port of the RMU9 board and from the IN port to the DM port of the WSMD4/WSMD2
board. In this case, the board optical cross-connection is not supported. These types of
single-NE optical cross-connections do not impact services. You need to create these types
of single-NE optical cross-connections and search for trails if you want to manage the
services transmitted in the cross-connections by using the trail management function.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000
Procedure for the U2000

1. In the Main Topology view, choose Service > WDM Trail > Search for WDM Trail
from the main menu.
2. Under Advanced settings, set the search policies.
NOTE
In the searching by subnet mode, the selected subnet range should be independent from the
networking. That is, no fiber connection exists between the selected subnet range and the area beyond
the selected subnet range.
3. Click Next to begin the search for trails. The U2000 takes a while for searching, depending
on the number of services.
NOTE
l If there are cross-connections that are collisions and these cross-connections cannot form end to
end trails, the U2000 shows the conflicting trails after you perform the search operation.
l The principles of verifying a conflict trail are as follows: If the networking changes, the trail may
cause interruption of service flow. For example, the key information for the trail, including
deleting a cross-connection or fiber, is verified.
4. Click Next after searching, you can browse all trails found. If you want to set a trail
management flag, right-click it and select the management flag.
NOTE
Skip this step if you selected the "Automatically create trails after searching policy" in Step 2.
5. Click Next to view all discrete services in the network.
NOTE
If Step 4 is performed, the U2000 deletes trails that do not have the management flag from the network
layer. This does not affect services for the actual NE or the data for an individual NE on the
U2000.
6. After the search is complete, click Finish.
4.12 Creating Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

Optical cross-connection defines the routes of wavelengths. Through the creation of single-
station optical cross-connection, the routes of inter-board services are configured.
Prerequisite
The logic fiber connection inside a single station has been set up on the U2000/Web LCT.
The edge port must be configured.
When creating an optical cross-connection of a single station, make sure that the optical cross-
connection of a board in this single station does not occupy the wavelength that the optical cross-
connection of the single station uses.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000 or Web LCT
When you create an optical cross-connection, the optical power can be adjusted automatically
or manually. If you select Auto, the dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board automatically
adjusts the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the board. If you select Manual, you
need to manually adjust the attenuation range of the optical attenuator in the dynamic optical
add/drop multiplexer board. The Auto option is available for the several types of optical cross-
connection trails. For details, see Feature Description.
NOTE
The WSMD9/WSMD4/WSMD2 can be used to replace the WSD9 or the WSM9.

OA indicates the optical amplifier boards such as OAU1 and OBU1.
The FIU can be added before or after the OA.
In drop networking, the demultiplexer boards such as D40, D40V and MR2 can be added between the
WSD9 and OTU.
In add networking, the multiplexer boards such as M40, M40V and MR2 can be added between the OTU
and WSM9.
NOTE
The optical cross-connect services created are unidirectional. The reverse services need to be configured
in addition. The configuration in the other direction is similar.
Optical cross-connections are created by creating optical cross-connections on the board or on a single
station. Creating optical cross-connections on a single station is recommended.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab in
the right-hand pane.
2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
NOTE
Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of
Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths from the Available
Wavelength list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelength. Click OK.
3. Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.
NOTE
When the operation is performed on the U2000, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab in
the right-hand pane.
2. Click Create. The Create NE-Level Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
1. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the right of
Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the Available
Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Click OK.
3. Click OK. The created single-station optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.
(Optional) Related Operation Configuring the Edge Port Setting an edge port is to set
an optical port of an NE as a
connection point between
this NE and another NE.
Creating Board Optical The intra-board optical

Cross-Connection wavelength route can be set
for a board that performs
grooming at the optical layer.
The intra-board service route
is established through the
creation of single-board
optical cross-connection.

T32/8800 T64
ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI1 board in the subrack.
Prerequisites
The U2000 server and client should be started normally.
The master/slave subracks should be installed.
Fiber connection should be done.

U2000
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of the
EFI2. The EFI1 board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is 0.
The setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of the two
DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW2,
and ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. Currently,
the first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-2, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is
000001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the CPLD, the two DIP switches are
numbered SW1 and SW2.
l When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
NOTE
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the
Product Description.
Figure 4-2 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board
EFI1
CPLD (ID5) ON (ID1) ON

(ID6) ON (ID2) ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON
SW1 SW2
Figure 4-3 The ID of the subrack: 1-15

SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID
(ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON (ID1) ON

(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) (ID2) ON
1 2 3 4 5
ON ON ON

(ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) ON
6 7 8
ON
(ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON 9 (ID3) ON 10

(ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
11 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
12 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
13 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
14 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
15

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID
(ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON (ID5) ON (ID1) ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
16 17 18
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
19 20 21
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
22 23 24
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
25 26 27
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
28 29 30
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID5) ON (ID1) ON
(ID6) (ID2)
31
ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON
The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack
is 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 31.
On the U2000, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE with
one ID and one IP.
Precautions
CAUTION
Changing the subrack ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the SCC boards in the master and slave
subracks. If two subrack IDs repeat each other, it indicates a subrack ID conflict. If a subrack
ID displayed on an LED blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust the
DIP switches on the EFI1 board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning
so that the DIP switches setting for each subrack is unique.
NOTE
After the adjustment of the DIP switches (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reset
on the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000.
Step 3 Double-click the optical NE to display the Running Status of the ONE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer.

1. If there is repetition or blink of the master subrack ID in step 1, perform a power-off reset
on the NE after the DIP switches adjustment.
2. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after jumper adjustment, warm
reset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.
NOTE
l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be realized by rebooting the subrack power
supply. For example, to reset the NE, you can switch off the power supplies of all master and slave
subracks, and then switch on the power supplies when all boards stop operating.
l To prevent service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then, change
the ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the power
supply of this subrack.
Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE and select Browse Current Alarms to
display the Browse Current Alarms.
Step 6 Check for the SUBRACK_LOOP alarm among the current alarms.
1. If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the
master subrack and the slave subracks are chains.
Step 7 Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current alarms.

1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI1
board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the DIP
switches setting for each subrack is unique.
2. Reset the board with reference to step Step 4.
Step 8 Check for the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm among the current alarms.
1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the DIP switches on
the EFI1 board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set the
ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC
board in this subrack.
2. Reset the NE or the subrack with reference to Step 4.
Step 9 Upload the NE configuration data to the U2000. Insert a physical board in the slave subrack and
add the corresponding logical board on the U2000. Check whether the board is available and
operate normally (displayed as green). If yes, the configuration of the master/slave subrack is
correct.
----End
(Optional) Related Operation Configuring Master/Slave Describes how to modify the

Shelf attributes of a master or slave
shelf.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4.14 Setting Master/Slave Subracks for OptiX OSN 8800 T16

ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the EFI board in the subrack.
Prerequisites

U2000
The master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 of the
EFI. The EFI board can be used to set the ID of a subrack. The default ID of a subrack is 0. The
setting is implemented by DIP switches. The value that can be set by using each of the two DIP
switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1-ID4 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW2, and
ID5-ID8 correspond to bits 1–4 of SW1. Among these ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. The
bits from high to low are ID6-ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. Currently, the
first 32 states are used. As shown in Figure 4-5, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 000001,
which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
l Along the direction reaching from a point close to the T1, the two DIP switches are
numbered SW1 and SW2.
l When the DIP switch is toggle to ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 4-5 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board
U8
SERIAL
T1
SW1 SW2
NM_ETH2
(ID8)
(ID7)
(ID6)
(ID5)
(ID4)
(ID3)
(ID2)
(ID1)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW1 SW2

SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID SW2 Subrack ID

(ID2) (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) (ID2) ON
1 2 3 4 5
ON ON ON

(ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) ON (ID2) (ID2) ON
6 7 8
ON
(ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON (ID3) ON 9 (ID3) ON 10

(ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
11 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
12 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
13 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
14 (ID3)
(ID4)
ON
ON
15

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID SW1 SW2 Subrack ID

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
16 17 18
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
19 20 21
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
22 23 24
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
25 26 27
ON ON ON ON ON ON

(ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2) (ID6) (ID2)
28 29 30
ON ON ON ON ON ON
(ID5) ON (ID1) ON
(ID6) (ID2)
31
ON ON
(ID7) ON (ID3) ON
(ID8) ON (ID4) ON
The LCD front panel of the AUX indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack
one ID and one IP.
Precautions
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LCDs on the AUX boards in the master and slave
ID displayed on an LCD blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust the
DIP switches on the EFI board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning
so that the DIP switches setting for each subrack is unique.
NOTE
After the adjustment of the DIP switches (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reset
on the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

on the NE after the DIP switches adjustment.
2. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after DIP switch adjustment,
warm reset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.
NOTE
l To prevent service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform a reset
operation as follows: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then, change
the ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the power
supply of this subrack.
Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE select Browse Current Alarms to display
the Browse Current Alarms.

1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the DIP switches on the EFI
board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the DIP
switches setting for each subrack is unique.
1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the DIP switches on
the EFI board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set the
ID of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LCD on the AUX
correct.
----End

shelf.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ID of the master or slave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack.
Prerequisites

U2000
For OptiX OSN 6800, the master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/
ETH2 of the AUX or the ETH3 of the EFI. The ID of the master subrack is 0 by default. The
AUX board can be used to set the ID of the slave subrack. The setting is realized by jumpers.
l The TN11AUX01 has three jumpers, Figure 4-8 shows the jumpers. The bits from high to
low are 1–3.
l The TN11AUX02 has eight jumpers, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. Figure
4-9 shows the jumpers. The bits from high to low are J16, J15, J4, J3, and J2.
Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. The three jumpers of the TN11AUX01 can be
used to realize eight states that represent decimal values 0–7. The default value of the three
jumpers is 000. The five jumpers of the TN11AUX02 can be used to realize 32 states that
represent decimal values 0–31. The default value of the three jumpers is 00000.
l When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure, it represents the
value 1.
l When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure or the three pins are
not placed with any jumper cap, it represents the value 0.
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 6800, in Figure 4-10 the value represented by the three jumpers is 0001, which
is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 4-8 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX01

jumpers
1 2 3
CPU
Figure 4-9 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02

Jumpers
J4 J3 J2
J17 J16 J15
J18 J14
CPU

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 4-10 Jumper on the AUX

TN11AUX01
jumper cap
representing 0 representing 0 representing 1
1 2 3
TN11AUX02
jumper cap
representing 0 representing 0 representing 0 representing 0 representing 1
J16 J15 J4 J3 J2
NOTE
The dashed line between two pins in the figure indicates that a jumper cap may or may not be placed over
the two pins.
The LED front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrack
one ID and one IP.
Precautions
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Check the subrack IDs displayed on the LEDs on the SCC boards in the master and slave

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
ID displayed on an LED blinks, it indicates a subrack ID mismatch. In either case, adjust the
jumpers on the AUX board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning
so that the jumper setting for each subrack is unique.
NOTE
After the adjustment of the jumpers (change of the subrack ID) is complete, perform a power-off reset on
the NE or the subrack. For details, see step Step 4.

on the NE after the jumper adjustment.
2. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, after jumper adjustment, warm
reset all boards in this slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.
NOTE
l To avoid service interruption during upgrade for capacity expansion, you can perform the reset
operation in this manner: First, perform a warm reset on all boards in the original subracks. Then,
change the ID of the subrack where the subrack ID conflict or mismatch occurs. At last, reboot the
power supply of this subrack.
Step 5 In the Running Status of the ONE, right-click the NE to display the Browse Current
Alarms.
2. Perform a warm reset on all boards in the master and slave subracks.

1. If an alarm indicating a subrack ID conflict is reported, adjust the jumpers on the AUX
board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning so that the jumper
setting for each subrack is unique.
1. Optional: If the SUBRACK_ID_MISMATCH alarm is found, adjust the jumpers on the
AUX board in the corresponding subrack in line with the subrack ID planning to set the ID
of the subrack to a value that matches the subrack ID displayed on the LED on the SCC
correct.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

shelf.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site
5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to commission optical power on site.
5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power

This section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring optical power.
5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board.
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board.
5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board.
5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH Board
If the received optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment. When
this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. By
testing the specifications of the optical ports, you can check whether the received/transmitted
optical power for each optical port on the equipment is normal.
5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical Amplifier Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical amplifier
board.
5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier
This section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment of the Raman
amplifier.
5.8 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light
This section describes how to adjust the optical power of dummy light.
5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel
This section describes how to commission the optical power of supervisory channel.
5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board
This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the
multiplexer and demultiplexer board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board

ROADM board.
5.12 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM
The single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower than –3 dBm.
5.13 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength
System
This section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning
procedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power

This section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools for configuring optical power.
5.1.1 Basic Requirements

This section describes the basic requirements on commissioning optical power.
Basic requirements on commissioning optical power are as follows:
l After commissioning, the optical power should be in the range of the minimum and
maximum values.
l Certain optical power margins should be reserved during commissioning to ensure that the
power fluctuations in a range do not affect services.
l After commissioning, the optical power must meet the requirements for system expansion.
Requirements of commissioning the CWDM network are as follows:
l The CWDM network does not support the OA (Optical Amplifier). Therefore, for a CWDM
network, only the optical power needs to be commissioned. The OSNR and flatness do not
need to be commissioned.
l Only the receive optical power of the OTU needs to be commissioned. Specific
commissioning requirements and procedures are similar to those for the DWDM network.
During capacity expansion, the maximum number of wavelengths that you can add at one time
is half the number of existing wavelengths or less. If there is only one wavelength in the system,
only one wavelength can be added at a time.
5.1.2 General Commissioning Sequence

This section describes the general sequence of commissioning optical power.
General Sequence of Commissioning Optical Power

Optical power for NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the optical signal flow.
During the commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is normal based on the requirements
on optical power, gain, and insertion loss for each board.
Generally, the optical power for the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the supervisory
channel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical power requirements on the
boards.
Optical Power Commissioning Procedures

Usually, the spans between two OTMs in an OptiX WDM system are considered as one network
segment. One network segment has two signal flow directions, the transmit direction and the
receive direction.
For an OptiX WDM system, the optical power for a network segment is commissioned on a per-
NE basis according to the signal flow.
First, commission the transmit optical power for one OTM. Then commission the optical power
for each downstream NE along the transmit direction. Finally, commission the receive optical

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
power for the destination OTM. After commissioning the optical power along the transmit
direction, commission the optical power in the reverse direction of the system.
Project X is used as an example to describe how to commission the optical power of an OptiX
WDM system.
Figure 5-1 shows the networking diagram of Project X. A, B, C, D, E and F are optical NEs
(ONEs). The equipment forms a ring network. ONE A and ONE C are back-to-back OTM
stations, ONE B, ONE D, and ONE F are OLA stations, and ONE E is an OADM station.
Figure 5-1 Networking diagram of Project X

Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM
135km/39dB 85km/27dB
55km/15dB 60km/16dB
Station B OLA Station C 2OTM Station D OLA
:OTM :OLA : OADM
Project X consists of two network segments: A-B-C and A-F-E-D-C.
First, commission the optical power on the A-B-C network segment according to the following
sequence.
l Commission the optical power along the A-B-C signal flow:
– At ONE A, commission the optical power to ONE B.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE A.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE C.
– At ONE C, commission the optical power from ONE B.
l Commission the optical power along the C-B-A signal flow:
– At ONE C, commission the optical power to ONE B.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power from ONE C.
– At ONE B, commission the optical power to ONE A.
– At ONE A, commission the optical power from ONE B.
Based on the previous procedure sequence, commission the optical power for the A-F-E-D-C
network segment in both directions.
NOTE
For details on how to commission the optical power of an NE, see 5.13 Example of Commissioning
Optical Power Based on 10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments

The optical power meter and the optical spectrum analyzer are required for commissioning
optical power.
l Optical power meter: Used to measure the optical power on the client side and the WDM
side of the OTU, and measure the total optical power of the multiplexed signals.
l Optical spectrum analyzer: Used to measure the optical power, optical signal-to-noise ratio
(OSNR), and the central wavelength of each wavelength in the multiplexed signals.
Calibrate the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to measure the optical power. Use
the following method to verify the calibration:
Measure the optical power at the OUT optical port on the OTU by using the optical spectrum
analyzer. Compare it with the optical power obtained by using the optical power meter. If
the difference is less than 0.5 dB, the calibration is acceptable. If the difference is more
than 0.5 dB, recalibrate the optical spectrum analyzer.
NOTE
The optical power of a single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to be measured by using an
optical spectrum analyzer. The commissioning result is more accurate when this method is used. When
this method is used, the noise impact does not need to be considered.
5.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTU board.
CAUTION
The overload of the APD receiver laser is -9 dBm. If the input optical power is higher, the APD
laser may be damaged. Therefore, it is recommended that you insert the fiber loosely from the
input optical port of the OTU during commissioning. After commissioning, make sure the input
optical power is lower than the receiver overload before you insert the fiber.
For the receiver sensitivity, overload, and output optical power specifications for the OTU, see
the Product Description.
5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light

This section describes how to force the OTU board to emit light.
Prerequisites
The NE must be created on the U2000.

U2000
The signals accessed on the client side or the WDM side should be service signals in actual
transmission, or the optical signals generated by forcing the board to emit light.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The WDM side of the OTU board by default is forced to emit light. If it does not emit light, refer
to the following procedure to query whether the board is forced to emit light. If the board is not
forced to emit light, set the board to emit light.
NOTE
See the Hardware Description to determine whether Automatic Laser Shutdown can be set for the OTU board.
Precautions
NOTE
l The prerequisite for commissioning the ESC (Electric Supervisory Channel) is that the OTU is forced
to emit light.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer window, select the desired OTU and choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Optional: Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown of the optical
port on the WDM side of the OTU to DISABLE.
NOTE
Only the LWX2, LWXD and LWXS can set Automatic Laser Shutdown of the WDM side.
Step 4 Set the Laser Status of the optical port on the WDM side of the OTU to OPEN.
Step 5 Click Apply.
----End
5.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board

This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of OTU board.

Optical power meter
Precautions
CAUTION
Before the equipment is powered on, verify that the fixed optical attenuator is configured
according to the configuration rules. Verify the input optical power of the OTU (including the
WDM side and client side) is lower than the receiver overload to avoid damage to the optical
module during commissioning. Note that the overload of the APD receiver laser is only -9 dBm.
For the specifications about the sensitivity and overload point of the OTU board, see the Product
Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Requirements
l For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the IN port
on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal
range: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm; adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client
side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from
(sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.
l For the other OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side
and the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the
input optical power is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload
point -5) dBm.
NOTE
For certain OTUs, if the overload point of the optical module is 0 dBm, and if the receiver sensitivity
is -17 dBm, the receive optical power should be adjusted within the following range: from -14 dBm
to -5 dBm.
l Confirm the optical preamplifier on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end has output
the standard optical power of single wavelength. When this occurs, the input optical power
on the WDM side can be adjusted based on the actual optical power by adding, changing
or removing the fixed optical attenuators.
l After commissioning, insert a fiber into the input optical port on the OTU when the input
optical power reaches a normal state.
5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the tributary board.

Optical power meter
The tributary boards include the TDX, TOM, TOG, TQS, TDG, TBE, TQM, TSXL, THA,
TOA and TQX.
For the tributary unit specifications, see the Product Description.
Before the optical signals of a single wavelength are sent to the corresponding tributary board,
adjust the input optical power by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator at the RXn
on the client side of the tributary board. This ensures that the input optical power is within the
optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point - 5) dBm.
5.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the line board.

Optical power meter

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The line board includes the NS2, NS3, NQ2 and ND2.
For the line unit specifications, see the Product Description.
l For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s line units: before the optical signals of single wavelength are
accessed by the corresponding line unit, adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical
port IN of the line unit by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator to be within the
optimal range: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm.
l For the other line units: before the optical signals of single wavelength are accessed by the
corresponding line unit, adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical port IN of the line
unit by adjusting an MVOA or adding a fixed attenuator to be within the optimal range:
from higher than the sensitivity by 3 dBm to lower than the overload point by 5 dBm.
l Generally the commissioning of the output optical power is not needed. However, if the
station is an OADM station or configured with wavelength protection, adjust the VOA of
the output port on the WDM side of the line unit to make the gain flatness for each add
wavelength amplified by the OAU to be less than 2 dB.
5.5 Testing Specifications of an SDH Board

this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. By
testing the specifications of the optical ports, you can check whether the received/transmitted
optical power for each optical port on the equipment is normal.
The test items are the mean launched optical power and actual received optical power of an
optical interface board.
CAUTION
If the rate of the optical port is variable, add the logical port with the corresponding rate through
the U2000 before testing the specifications of this optical port.
5.5.1 Testing the Mean Launched Optical Power of Optical Interface

Boards
If the mean launched optical power is excessively high or low, bit errors occur on the equipment.
When this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged.
This section describes how to test the mean launched optical power of an optical interface board.
This test is performed to ensure that the mean launched optical power of each port is correct.
Prerequisites
The optical port to be tested must be enabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The optical port of certain SDH optical interface boards is disabled by default. Before performing the test,
you need to check whether the optical port to be tested is enabled. Determine if it is enabled by doing as
follows: In the NE Explorer window of the U2000 or U2000 LCT, select the board to be tested. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface, and check the status of the Laser Switch in the list. The status should
be Open.
The optical fiber connections must be tested to ensure the optical fibers are connected correctly.

Optical power meter, fiber jumpers with different connectors, optical fiber connectors, fiber
cleaning tools
Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-2 shows the connections for testing the mean launched optical power of an optical
interface board.
Figure 5-2 Connection diagram for testing the mean launched optical power of an optical
interface board.
Optical power meter
SDH Board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Precautions
DANGER
During NE commissioning, avoid directly exposing your eyes to the laser light.
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the optical fiber from the OUT port of the optical interface board to be tested. Cap the
removed optical fiber with a protective cap.
Step 2 Use the test jumper to connect the OUT port and the optical power meter.
NOTE
The port of the optical power meter varies. Select a fiber jumper with the corresponding connector.
Step 3 Identify the board feature code and the type of the corresponding optical port by referring to the
section that describes the board bar code in the Hardware Description. Query the specifications
of the corresponding optical port by referring to the Technical Specification Reference. By doing
this, you can obtain the working wavelength for the optical port to be tested.
Step 4 Set the test wavelength of the optical power meter according to the working wavelength of the
optical port.
Step 5 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it becomes stable.
The recorded value is the mean launched optical power. It should be within the range of the
transmitted optical power for this optical port, specified in the Technical Specification
Reference.
Step 6 If the actual transmitted optical power is outside the range, check and clean the optical fiber
connectors used for the equipment test and the optical power meter. For more information, see
"Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the Supporting Tasks. After cleaning
the connectors, repeat Steps 1-5.
Step 7 After the test is complete, reconnect the optical fiber to the test optical port.
----End
5.5.2 Testing the Actual Received Optical Power of an Optical

Interface Board
this occurs, the services are affected and the components of the equipment can be damaged. This
section describes how to test the actual received optical power for an interface board. This test
is performed to ensure the actual received optical power for each port is correct.
Prerequisites
l The test of optical fiber connections must be complete. Ensure that the optical fibers are
connected correctly.
l The test result of the mean launched optical power at the optical port must be normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l The fibers for the opposite station must be routed to the ODF of the local station. In addition,
the opposite station must be commissioned and powered on.

Optical power meter, optical fiber connectors

Figure 5-3 shows the connections for testing the actual received optical power.
Figure 5-3 Connection diagram for testing the actual received optical power for an optical
interface board
Optical interface
board
Tested
optical
Fiber interface
jumper Fiber IN
- jumper
ODF ODF
OUT
Local station Adjacent station
Procedure
Step 1 At the local station, remove the fiber jumper from the IN port of the optical interface board.
Connect the fiber jumper to the optical power meter through the fiber connector.
Step 2 Identify the number of the optical port by referring to the section that describes the board bar
codes in the Hardware Description. Query the specifications of the corresponding optical port
by referring to the Technical Specification Reference. By doing this, you can obtain the working
wavelength for the optical port to be tested.
Step 3 Set the test wavelength for the optical power meter based on the working wavelength of the
optical port.
Step 4 Check the value displayed on the optical power meter. Record the value when it becomes stable.
The recorded value is the value for the actual received optical power.
Step 5 Check whether the value of the actual received optical power is correct by referring to the optical
power range, which is specified in the Technical Specification Reference.
NOTE
The actual received optical power should meet the following requirement:
Minimum sensibility + 3 dB ≤ Actual received optical power (measured value) ≤ Minimum overload
point – 5 dB
Step 6 If the received optical power is not correct, do as follows:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l If the received optical power is excessively low, check whether the fiber connector, ODF
fiber adapter, and optical attenuator are normal. For information about cleaning the fiber
connector, see "Inspecting and Cleaning the Optical Fiber Connectors" in the Supporting
Tasks.
l If the received optical power is excessively high, check whether the optical attenuator is
normal or add an attenuator on the ODF. For information about the values of the optical
attenuators, see the Technical Specification Reference and the description about the actual
received optical power in Step 5.
Step 7 Repeat Steps 1 through 6 until the measured value is normal.
Step 8 When the measured value is normal, reconnect the removed optical fiber to the optical port under
test.
----End
5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA Optical

Amplifier Board
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the EDFA optical amplifier
board.
The EDFA optical amplifier board includes HBA, OAU1, OBU1, and OBU2.
l Six types of OAU1 are valid: OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103, OAU106 and
OAU105.
l Three types of OBU1 are valid: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104.
l One type of OBU2 is valid: OBU205.
The relationship between the multiplexed signal and the single wavelength of the optical
amplifier board with regard to the optical power is as follows.
Optical power of multiplexed signal = Optical power of single wavelength + 10lgN (where N
is the number of wavelengths of the multiplexed signal)
Because the maximum output power of the HBA board is high (26 dBm), the end face of a fiber
at an optical port may be burned. To prevent this from happening, the following two solutions
can be adopted.
l 1. When there is direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, complete the following operations:
– (1) Remove the flange on the ODF, and prepare to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2 on
the ODF. See Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4 Fiber splicing on the ODF
1
3
OUT F OUT
HBA I ODF
RC U
0
2

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– (2) Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers that are to be spliced. Use a
fiber stripper to remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you break the 250
um bare fiber core, cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the fiber.
– (3) Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Splice the fiber jumpers in the standard
single mode. The splice point must be free of flaws and voids. If the splice point is not
free of flaws and voids, re-splice the fiber jumpers.
– (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to sheath the
splice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heat
shrink tubes should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room
and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tube slot.
l 2. When there is fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, complete
the following operations:
– (1) Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also called
the E2000-E2000) flange. The flange can only be installed on the ODF for the SC.
– (2) Use a Ø3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the OUT port of the
FIU board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. See Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Fiber splicing on the line side
1
3
OUT F OUT
HBA I ODF
RC U
0
2
– (3) Cut off a Ø0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an intermediate

point. Connect the cut end of one of the two fiber jumpers to the client-side line fiber
at point 4, as shown in Figure 5-5.
– (4) After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tube to sheath the
splice point. Also ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 30 mm. The heat
shrink tubes should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room
and be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tube slot. The redundant fiber needs to
be spooled on the fiber management tray after the splicing.
5.6.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of Optical Amplifier Board

This section describes how to adjust the input optical power of the optical amplifier board.
Adjust the average single wavelength input optical power of the IN port of the optical amplifier
board to the typical input power for single wavelength ±1 dB. Ensure that the number of
wavelengths whose optical power is higher than the typical value is equal or close to the number
of wavelengths whose optical power is smaller than the typical value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11HBA is –19 dBm (40-channel) and
–13 dBm (10-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OBU101/TN12OBU101 is –20 dBm
(40-channel) and –23 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/
TN13OAU101 is –16 dBm (40-channel) and –19 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 is –19 dBm
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN12OAU100 is –14 dBm (40-channel)
and –17 dBm (80-channel).
l Typical input power of single wavelength of the TN13OAU106 is –12 dBm (40-channel)
and –15 dBm (80-channel).
If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the optical amplifier
board is added with a VOA that is higher than the typical input power of single wavelength,
adjust the VOA before the optical amplifier board to make the average single wavelength input
optical power reach the typical value.
NOTE
For the TN12/TN13 OA board, the input end of the OA is not added with a VOA, but instead uses the inner
EVOA.
If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the optical amplifier
board is added with a VOA that is lower than the typical input power of single wavelength, no
VOA is needed.
5.6.2 Adjusting the Gains for the Optical Amplifier Board

This section describes how to adjust the gains for the optical amplifier board.
Prerequisites
The commissioning of the optical power for the upstream board must be complete.

U2000, optical power meter

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
For the optical amplifier board, set the gain to ensure that the mean output optical power equals
the maximum output optical power for single wavelength. Gain = Maximum output power of
single wavelength - Mean input optical power of single wavelength.
After setting the gain, use the optical spectrum analyzer to check whether the mean output optical
power of single wavelength is in the range of maximum output optical power of single
wavelength - 0.5 dBm to maximum output optical power of single wavelength + 0.5 dBm. If it
exceeds this range, fine tune the gain value.
Procedure
Step 1 Display the NE Explorer on the U2000.
Step 2 Select the desired optical amplifier board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 4 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and Nominal Gain Lower
Threshold to get the nominal range for the gain.
Step 5 In the Basic Attributes tab, query Upper Threshold of Actual Gain and Lower Threshold of
Actual Gain to get the settable gain range for the OAU board.
Step 6 Ensure that the input power of the OAU is the average input power of single wavelength.
Calculate the gain value.
Gain = Maximum output power of single wavelength - Average input power of single wavelength
NOTE
The average per-channel input optical power is measured by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 7 Check whether the gain is within the value range calculated in Step 6.
l If the gain is less than the minimum gain calculated in Step 6, increase the attenuation value
of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board. This decreases the average input
power of single wavelength to the standard value.
l If the gain is more than the maximum gain calculated in Step 6, decrease the attenuation
value of the VOA at the input end of the optical amplifier board. This increases the average
input power of single wavelength. If the gain cannot meet the requirement, confirm the
network design value with the network designer.
Step 8 In the Basic Attributes tab, set the Nominal Gain of the OAU1 board.
Step 9 Click Apply.
Step 10 Click Query. Query the Gain displayed on the U2000. If the gain difference of the actual value
and the set nominal value is within 0.5 dB, the setting is successful. If the setting fails, check
whether the gain is within the gain range.
----End
5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier

This section describes the commissioning of and precautions for the deployment of the Raman
amplifier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 5-1 provides the general commissioning procedures for CRPC and RAU board.
Table 5-1 General commissioning procedures for Raman board

No. Task CRPC RAU board RAU board RAU board
board (Gain (Pump (Maximum
locking) power) power)
1 5.7.4 Y Y Y Y
Checking
the Fiber
Connection
s
2 5.7.5 Y Y Y Y
Connecting
the Fiber
Jumpers on
the Line
Side
3 5.7.6 Y Y Y Y
Checking
the
Configurati
on of the
IPA
Function
4 5.7.7 N Y Y Y
Configuring
the
Working
Mode and
Fiber Type
for the
Raman
Board
5 5.7.8 N Y N N
Adjusting
the Gains
for the
Raman
Board
6 5.7.9 Y N Y N
Adjusting
the On-off
Gain of the
Raman
Board

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
No. Task CRPC RAU board RAU board RAU board

board (Gain (Pump (Maximum
locking) power) power)
7 5.7.10 Y N Y N
Adjusting
the Gain
Spectrum
l "Y" indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed.

l "N" indicates that the procedure need not be performed.
5.7.1 Preparations
This section describes the requirements on the fiber line, precautions, and tools required for
commissioning the Raman amplifier.
Compared with general amplifiers, the Raman amplifier has a lower noise figure. When general
amplifiers and the Raman amplifier are used in one system, the system can achieve better OSNR.
The strong pump light output from the LINE optical port on a Raman amplifier enters a fiber
line. Therefore, disable the pump laser on the Raman amplifier before the testing.
Before you enter the equipment room, perform the following operations:
l Wear laser-protective glasses (Class 4). Wear long-sleeve ESD coat, shoe covers, and
protective gloves.
l Confirm the number of adopted Raman boards. Be familiar with the fiber connection
between the local Raman boards and remote boards. Be familiar with the connection
between these fibers and the upstream/downstream sites. Be familiar with the location of
the connector. Take the drawings into the equipment room.
l Prepare tools for fiber cleaning: CLETOP cassette cleaner, a video fiberscope (400x or
higher magnification). Clean solvent with wipes. Use only video fiberscopes. For more
information, see Inspecting and Cleaning the Fiber-Optic Connectors.
l U2000 or Web LCT has been installed on the local engineer's PC before the single station
commissioning is performed. This section uses the U2000 as an example to describe the
commissioning procedure.
After the CRPC board works properly, to connect the board to a subrack on another NE, you
must reset the board instead of removing and re-inserting the network cable. The operation of
resetting the CRPC board, however, may interrupt services.
5.7.2 Precautions
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. Therefore, you should take the
following precautions when using the Raman amplifier.
l Do not insert or remove a fiber when the laser is enabled
When the laser of the Raman amplifier is enabled, do not insert or remove the fiber
connector. Otherwise, the laser may result in fire after the fiber connectors are burned or
there may be personal injuries especially to the eyes.
l Clean the fiber surface.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. If the surface of the fiber jumper
is dirty, the filth of the fiber surface absorbs the energy and heats. As a result, the jumper
is easy to be damaged or burned, and the system performance is affected.
l Perform cable testing.
The gain medium of the Raman amplifier is the transmission cable. Hence, the type and
quality of the transmission cable influences the performance of the Raman amplifier. If the
fiber, especially the end near the Raman amplifier has the poor quality (big loss point or
large reflection factor), the system performance is greatly influenced, and may result in the
line being burned. Hence, testing the cable before enabling the Raman amplifier is
necessary.
l Dedicate the LSH/APC fiber connector.
The reverse output optical power of the Raman amplifier reaches 30 dBm. Hence, the fiber
connector must be the dedicated LSH/APC fiber connector. If the PC fiber connector is
used, a large reflection is formed, which damages the fiber connector.
l Do not bend the fiber.
The bend radius of the fiber jumper of the Raman amplifier should meet the requirements
and cannot be bent. Otherwise, the fiber jumper will burn.
l Enable the laser of the Raman amplifier on the U2000.
For security consideration, if the laser is disabled after the Raman amplifier is working
normally, the Raman amplifier will stop working. You can issue the corresponding
command on the NMS to enable the laser of the Raman amplifier.
l Review the jumper connection before enabling of the laser.
Before enabling the laser of the Raman amplifier, you must connect the jumper at the input
port and the corresponding ODF subrack jumper.
l Meet output optical power requirements.
When the Raman amplifier is used, the pump optical power is high. The requirements of
the near-end fiber increase directly with the optical power. High optical power may bring
damages to equipment and injuries to human body. Hence, the power of the Raman pumping
light should be as low as possible on the premise that the on-off gain is not less than 10 dB.
5.7.3 Requirements on the Fiber Line

The additional loss of a single point on the fiber line should meet the requirements.
NOTE
Whether the single-point loss exceeds the threshold must be determined by performing a bi-directional test.
Use an OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) to test the additional loss at both ends of the fiber
line and calculate the average of the tested two loss values.
Before the deployment of the Raman amplifier, OTDR must be used to determine if the quality of the local
40 km optical cable meets the requirements of deployment.
l 0 km-20 km (0 mi.- 12 mi.): Do not use fiber connectors. The fibers should be connected
to each other by splicing. If the fiber connector is used, components may be burned and the
on-off gain of the Raman amplifier is affected.
l 0 km-10 km (0 mi.-6 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.1 dB (G.652) or
0.2 dB (G.655 LEAF, G.653, TW-RS, TW-C).
l 10 km-20 km (6 mi.- 12 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.2 dB (G.652)
or 0.4 dB (G.655 LEAF, G.653, TW-RS, TW-C).
l 20 km-30 km (12 mi.- 18 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.4 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l 30 km-40 km (18 mi.- 24 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 1 dB.
l Over 40 kilometers: The single-point additional loss is less than 2 dB.
l The single-point return loss is not less than 40 dB.
5.7.4 Checking the Fiber Connections

This section describes the method of checking the fiber connections of the Raman amplifier.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections on the optical amplifier board must be correct.
Generally, the Raman amplifier is used in the case of extremely low input optical power. When
the SYS port of the Raman amplifier is connected to an optical amplifier board, the variable
optical attenuator (VOA) is not required and it should be replaced with a fiber.

l Optical power meter.
l Optical fiber scope with 400x magnification. A video fiberscope is recommended.
l CLETOP cassette cleaner.
l Clean solvent. Isoamylol is preferred and propyl can be used. Alcohol or formalin cannot
be used.
l Non-woven lens tissue, lint-free wipes, or fiber cleaning tissue. Non-woven lens tissue is
recommended.
l Special compressed gas.
l Special cleaning roll.
l Optical cleaning sticks used for optical connectors or cotton swabs.
Precautions
CAUTION
l Strictly comply with the following procedure to ensure the operation safety.
l The LINE port of the Raman board has extremely high output optical power. Be very careful
during operation.
Procedure
Step 1 Ensure that the Raman board is in "power-off" state before any operation. Do not completely
insert the Raman board in the designated slot. That is, the board can be placed in the designated
slot but not plugged thoroughly. In this case, the board will not receive power from the subrack.
Step 2 Determine if the SYS port of the Raman board is well connected to the IN port of the FIU or
optical amplifier board with fibers.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Before you connect the line-side fiber to the LINE port of Raman board, ensure that the fiber
loss is normal and that the connection surface of the fiber is clean. Check this with a video
fiberscope (400x or higher magnification).
Step 4 The connection surface should have no dust or scratches. If there is any, immediately replace
the line-side fiber. It is recommended that the customer prepares spare fibers.
----End
5.7.5 Connecting the Fiber Jumpers on the Line Side

This section describes how to connect the fiber jumpers on the line side of the Raman amplifier.

Fiber cutter, fiber stripper, fusion splicer, heat shrink tubing
Precautions
CAUTION
l The Raman amplifier board must be powered off before the fiber jumpers are spliced, and
the personnel to splice the fiber jumpers must be experienced in fusion splicing.
l Ensure that the endfaces of fiber connectors are clean before you install the fiber connectors.
l The flange must be cleaned using an ultrasonic cleaner.
l To ensure the quality of fiber connectors, it is recommended that you insert and remove an
E2000-E2000 connector for less than 500 times.
Context
The output optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. In this case, if the endface of a fiber
connector inserted to a port on the Raman amplifier is contaminated, the probability is high that
the fiber endface is damaged. The high output optical power can cause eye damage or skin burns
in case of misoperation. The Raman amplifier has very strict requirements on the loss of the
near-end line fiber. The fiber should have no connector within the distance of 0 km to 20 km
(12 mi.) and fibers should be connected to each other by means of fusion splicing. There are two
fiber splicing modes. (Select the slicing mode according to the actual situations on site.)
Fiber Splicing Probabilit Risks of Difficulty Difficulty Preference

Mode on the y of Personal of On-Site of Level
ODF Endface Injury Operation Maintena
Damage nce
Direct fiber None None Medium Low High

fusion splicing
on the ODF

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Fiber Splicing Probabilit Risks of Difficulty Difficulty Preference

Mode on the y of Personal of On-Site of Level
ODF Endface Injury Operation Maintena
Damage nce
Fiber splicing Low Very low Medium Medium Medium

through the
E2000-E2000
connector on the
ODF
Procedure
Step 1 In the case of direct fiber fusion splicing on the ODF, the procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the flange on the ODF, and ready to directly splice fiber 1 to fiber 2 on the ODF.
The CRPC board shown is used as an example.
ODF CRPC
Line Sys
2. Cut off the redundant connectors on the fiber jumpers to be spliced, and use a fiber stripper
to remove the external sheath of the fiber jumpers. If you break a 250 um bare fiber core,
cut the fiber core at the break and re-strip the fiber.
3. Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper to protect the melting point after fiber
splicing.
4. Use a fiber cutter to cut the fiber jumpers. Then, splice the fiber jumpers in the standard
single mode. The splice point must be free of flaws or voids. Otherwise, re-splice the fiber
jumpers.
5. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to sheath the splice
point. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 50 mm. The heat
shrink tubing should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and
be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tubing slot.
Step 2 In the case of fiber splicing through the E2000-E2000 connector on the ODF, the procedure is
as follows:
1. Replace the original flange on the ODF with an LSH/APC-LSH/APC (also called E2000-
E2000) flange.
2. Use a Ø3 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper to connect the LINE port of the CRPC
board to fiber 3 of the LSH/APC-LSH/APC flange on the ODF. The CRPC board shown
is used as an example.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
ODF CRPC
Line Sys
3. Cut off a Ø0.9 mm LSH/APC-LSH/APC fiber jumper of 2 m long at an intermediate point.

Add a heat shrink tubing to one of the fiber jumper that is cut off or the customer line cable
to protect the melting point after fiber splicing. Then splice the cutoff end of the fiber with
the customer line cable at point specified by 4 in the figure above.
4. After the fiber fusion splicing is complete, use the heat shrink tubing to sheath the splice
point. In addition, ensure that the fiber bending radius is greater than 50 mm. The heat
shrink tubing should be placed in the special fiber splicing box in the equipment room and
be fixed by using the matched heat shrink tubing slot. The redundant fiber after the splicing
needs to be spooled on the fiber management tray.
Step 3 Insert the Raman board thoroughly into the designated slot. If this is a new cabinet that is
installed, proceed in powering on the cabinet and the corresponding subrack. If the cabinet and
the subrack are already in service and therefore powered on, see 5.7.6 Checking the
Configuration of the IPA Function.
----End
5.7.6 Checking the Configuration of the IPA Function

This section describes the procedure for checking the configuration of the IPA function when
you commission the Raman amplifier.
Prerequisites
When set Working Mode of the RAU boards to Gain locking or Maximum gain, you must
set Fiber Type as the actual fiber type.
Precautions
CAUTION
The optical power of the Raman amplifier is high. It is recommended to configure the IPA
function should be previously. When a Raman amplifier is configured, set the threshold for the
detection board when configuring the IPA function. Before the commissioning at each station,
disable the IPA function and the laser of the Raman board. For more information regarding
configuring the IPA function, see Intelligent Power Adjustment (IPA) of Raman System.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the
Function Tree. For more information regarding IPA configuration, refer to Intelligent Power
Adjustment (IPA) of Raman System.
Step 2 Ensure that the IPA Status attribute of the IPA Group is Disabled. If not, set them to
Disabled and click Apply.
----End
5.7.7 Configuring the Working Mode and Fiber Type for the Raman
Board
This section describes how to configure Working Mode and Fiber Type for the RAU1 board.
Prerequisites
The RAU1 board must be working properly.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Set Working Mode for the RAU1 board as required.
1. Navigate to the NE Explorer. In the Function Tree, select the desired RAU1 board and
choose Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. Click Advanced Attributes. Set Working Mode to Gain locking, Maximum power, or
Pump power as required for the LINE port.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
For the OUT port of the RAU1 board, Working Mode can be set to Gain locking or Pump power.
Step 2 Set the fiber type to the type of physical fibers that have been used.
1. In the Advanced Attributes tab. set Fiber Type to the type of physical fibers that have
been used.
2. Click Apply.
----End
5.7.8 Adjusting the Gains for the Raman Board

This section describes how to adjust the gains for the RAU1 board.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections on the RAU1 board must be correct.
The commissioning must be performed after all the current services are added.
Return loss detection is enabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The Raman module of the RAU1 board must work under Gain locking.

Optical power meter, U2000
Precautions
NOTE
Return loss detection is enabled by default. If the RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI alarm is reported
during commissioning, remove the alarm by referring to RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI in
Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
Context
If the TN11RAU1 board is used in the system, set the gain of the Raman module and EDFA
module for the different types of the fibers by referring to Table 5-2 and Table 5-3.
Table 5-2 Setting the TN11RAU1 board gain in a system using G.652 fibers
Loss(dB) Gain(dB)-Raman Gain(dB)-EDFA Remarks
19 5 14 When the line loss is

in the range of 19 dB
20 6 to 24 dB (smaller
21 7 than 24 dB), keep the
EDFA gain at 14 dB
22 8 and set the Raman
amplifier gain to
23 9 ensure that the line
loss meets the
requirement.
L 10 L - 10 When the line loss is

to 33 dB, keep the
Raman amplifier
gain at 10 dB and set
the EDFA gain to
ensure that the line
loss meets the
requirement.
Table 5-3 Setting the TN11RAU1 board gain in a system using G.653/LEAF/TWRS/TW-C
fibers
19 5 14 When the line loss is

20 6 to 26 dB (smaller
than 26 dB), keep the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
21 7 EDFA gain at 14 dB
and set the Raman
22 8 amplifier gain to
23 9 ensure that the line
loss meets the
24 10 requirement.
25 11
L 12 L - 12 When the line loss is

to 35 dB, keep the
Raman amplifier
gain at 12 dB and set
the EDFA gain to
ensure that the line
loss meets the
requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 Use an optical power meter to measure the actual input optical power on the LINE port of the
Raman board and check whether it is greater than 1 dBm. If it is greater than 1 dBm, add a fixed
attenuator to the transmit end of the upstream site so that the input optical power on the LINE
port meets the requirement. Note that the input optical power on the LINE port of the RAU1
board must be within the range of -40 dBm to +1 dBm. If it is greater than +1 dBm, the Raman
amplifier may be damaged.
Step 2 Set the gain of the RAU1 board by referring to Table 5-2, Table 5-3.
1. Click Basic Attributes. Set Nominal Gain (dB) for the LINE and OUT ports according
to the actual line loss.
2. Click Apply.
NOTE
You do not need to set Nominal Gain (dB) if the Raman module of the RAU1 board is working in Maximum
power mode.
----End
5.7.9 Adjusting the On-off Gain of the Raman Board

This section describes how to adjust the on-off gain of the Raman board.
Prerequisites
The Raman module of the RAU1 board must work under Pump power.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Spectrum analyzer, U2000.
Precautions
NOTE
Return loss detection is enabled by default. If the RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI alarm is reported
during commissioning, remove the alarm by referring to RL_CRITICAL_LOW or RL_CRITICAL_HI in
Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
NOTE
The gain medium of the reverse Raman amplifier is transmission fiber, so the gain value depends on the
type, length, and attenuation of the transmission fiber. If the gain values are required to be the same, different
fibers should correspond to different optical power of pumps. Set the initial optical power of the Raman
amplifier during network commissioning to the optical power values and the requirement of the on-off gain
of each channel in the following table.
Table 5-4 Recommended optical power values of Raman pump for different fibers
Board Type Fiber Type P1 P2 On-Off gain
(Optical Power (Optical Power
of Pump of Pump Group
Group 1) 2)
CRPC G.652 +24.0 dBm +24.0 dBm 11 dB
G.655 LEAF +24.5 dBm +24.5 dBm 13 dB
G.653/TW- +23.5 dBm +23.5 dBm 13 dB

RS/TW-C
RAU1 G.652 +24.5 dBm +24.5 dBm 12 dB
G.655 LEAF +25.0 dBm +25.0 dBm 14 dB
G.653/TW- +24.0 dBm +24.0 dBm 14 dB

RS/TW-C
Context
The on-off gain refers to the difference between the output optical power on the SYS port of the
Raman board when the pump laser is turned on and the output optical power when the pump
laser is turned off. During the calculation of the on-off gain, optical noise must be measured
using an optical spectrum analyzer and be considered because it may have impact on gain
calculation.
Procedure
Step 1 Close the pump laser of the Raman board.
1. Select the desired CRPC/RAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
2. Select By Board/Port (Channel).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. Click the Basic Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the LINE ports of the
Raman board WDM interfaces are Close. If not, set them to Close and click Apply.
Step 2 Disconnect the fiber between the SYS port of the RAMAN board and the IN port of the FIU or
optical amplifier board.
Step 3 Connect the fiber from the SYS port to the test port of the spectrum analyzer. Scan the spectrum.
Obtain the actual signal optical power and record it.
Step 4 Select the desired CRPC/RAU from the left-hand Navigator Tree, and choose Configuration >
WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Select By Board/Port(Channel) and click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 6 Set the optical power of the pump laser to the recommended value.
Step 7 Open the pump laser on Raman amplifiers manually. In the Basic Attributes tab, set the Laser
Status of the LINE port of the Raman board WDM interfaces are On, and click Apply.
Step 8 Calculate the on-off gain of the SYS port by using the following formula:
SYS on-off gain = SYS signal output power (Raman laser enabled) - SYS signal output power
(Raman laser disabled)
NOTE
Before reconnecting the SYS port of the Raman board to the IN port of the FIU board, you must disable
the laser of the Raman and IPA.
Step 9 Adjust the on-off gain.

NOTE
For the different fiber type, the on-off gain of each channel must be greater than the requirement value, which
is required by the Raman board. If not, adjust the on-off gain to make it meet the requirements.
1. Select the desired CRPC/RAU in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > WDM
2. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Click Advanced Attributes. Increase the Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm) of the
CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-1 port and the CRPC-1(LINE/LINE)-2 port of Optical Interface/
Channel. Increase the optical power of both groups of pumps by 0.1 dBm respectively at
a time until the minimum on-off gain of each channel is higher than the requirement value.
NOTE
For the RAU board, set the Fixed Pump Optical Power(dBm) of the 9(LINE)-1 and 9(LINE)-2 port in
the Advanced Attributes tab.
NOTE
If the pump optical power is set too high, the PUM-LBC-HIGH alarm is generated. If this alarm occurs, the
pump optical power set is excessive and must be decreased. If this alarm occurs while the gain does not reach
the requirements, shut down the pump lasers and check the line fiber. Replace or repair the line fibers if necessary.
----End
5.7.10 Adjusting the Gain Spectrum

This section describes the procedure for adjusting the gain spectrum of the Raman amplifier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
The Raman module of the RAU1 board must work under Pump power.

Spectrum analyzer, U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Adjust the pump power to ensure that the gain spectrum meets the requirement.
l After adjusting the on-off gain to the requirement value, determine if the gain flatness among
all the wavelengths is within 3 dB. If yes, the gain flatness requires no adjustment.
NOTE
The requirement of the on-off gain of each channel of the Raman amplifier refer to Table 5-4.
l If the gain flatness among all the wavelengths exceeds 3 dB, proceed to the next step to adjust
the pump optical power according to the Raman gain spectrum to improve the gain flatness.
Step 2 Find the wavelengths of the highest and lowest gains.
Step 3 If the short-wavelength gain is lower than the long-wavelength gain, increase the optical power
of pump laser group 1 to elevate the shortwave gain or decrease the optical power of pump laser
group 2 to lower the long-wave gain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dBm until
the optical power difference meets the requirement. That is, the gain flatness among all the
wavelengths is within 3 dB.
Step 4 If the short-wavelength gain is higher than the long-wavelength gain, decrease the optical power
of pump laser group 1 to lower the shortwave gain or increase the optical power of pump laser
group 2 to elevate the long-wave gain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dBm until
the optical power difference meets the requirement. That is, the gain flatness of each wavelength
is within 3 dB.
Step 5 Retest the on-off gains to determine if the on-off gain of each wavelength is higher than the
requirement value. If not, increase the optical power of both pump laser groups 1 and 2 in steps
of 0.1 dBm until the on-off gain of each wavelength is greater than the requirement value.
NOTE
After item 3 of step 6, the pump optical power is changed. As a result, the on-off gains need be retested.
If the on-off gain of any wavelength is smaller than the requirement value, the optical power of both pump
laser groups 1 and 2 need be increased to meet the gain requirement according to the new optical power
rate between the two pump laser groups. The gain difference between the two pump laser groups cannot
change.
----End
5.8 Adjusting the Optical Power of Dummy Light

This section describes how to adjust the optical power of dummy light.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
You must be an NMS user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

U2000
For a system that cannot be fully configured with service wavelengths in the initial phase, vacant
channels must be filled with wavelengths that do not carry services, or the optical power must
be increased for one or more wavelengths that do not carry services to ensure that the input
optical power of optical amplifiers (OAs) satisfies the system requirement. The wavelengths
that do not carry any services are called dummy light wavelengths.
The networking for producing dummy light depends on the channel spacing of the system.
l 100 GHz channel spacing

The networking for producing dummy light is OA+ITL+OA+OD, as shown in Figure
5-6.
NOTE
In a system with 100 GHz channel spacing, only even wavelengths are generally deployed. Therefore, in
the following figure, only even wavelengths in the dummy light block are transmitted from the TE port
on the ITL board to the OA board and the odd wavelengths transmitted from the TO port on the ITL board
are not used.
Figure 5-6 Networking for producing dummy light (100 GHz channel spacing)
EVEN
VO
IN
IN VI IN
OA(OBU101) ITL OA(OAU101) D40
OUT TE OUT
RDC
TDC M40V
Dummy Light
OTU
OTU
l 50 GHz channel spacing

The networking for producing dummy light is OA+ITL+2xOA+2xOD, as shown in Figure
5-7.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 5-7 Networking for producing dummy light (50 GHz channel spacing)
OTU
ODD
OTU
VO
IN
IN IN M40V
OA(OAU101) D40
TO OUT
RDC
IN
OA(OBU101) TDC
ITL
OUT VO
IN
IN IN
OA(OAU101) D40
TE OUT
M40V
RDC
TDC
OTU
EVEN
Dummy Light OTU
Requirements for Commissioning Forward Raman Amplifier Boards

Commissioning of a forward Raman amplifier is to adjust the pump power of the amplifier and
the signal power allocation for each channel of the amplifier. The adjustment is determined by
the system design for the spans. To commission a forward Raman amplifier board, an optical
spectrum analyzer (OSA) or an optical spectrum analyzing board must be used at the receive
end to determine in real time whether the OSNR flatness and optical power flatness are as
expected. It is recommended that the OSNR flatness be smaller than 1 dB and the optical power
flatness meet the system requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 Before adjusting the optical power of wavelengths that carry dummy light, ensure that the
wavelengths that carry service signals provide the optimal performance. For details, see 6
Remotely Commissioning Optical Power.
Step 2 Set the EVOA attenuation for the M40V board's port connecting to the D40 board to the
maximum value.
Step 3 Set Working Mode to Power Locking for the first-level OA (OBU101) board. And set Power
Value to 0 dBm.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the OBU101 board. In the navigation tree, choose
Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. On the Advanced Attributes tab, set Working Mode to Power Locking.
3. Set Power Value to 0 dBm.
4. Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Enable the first-level OA (OBU101) board to forcibly emit light.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the OBU101 board. In the navigation tree, choose
Configuration > WDM Interface.
2. Click Query.
3. Enable Laser Status for the OUT port on the OBU101 board is On .
Step 5 Adjust the EVOA attenuation for the second-level OA (OAU101) board to ensure that the total
input optical power of the board reaches the standard optical power.
1. Right-click the NE housing the OAU101 board and choose NE Explorer from the shortcut
menu to start the NE Explorer.
2. Select the OAU101 board and in the navigation tree choose Configuration > WDM
Interface.
3. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for the VI port on the OAU101 board to ensure
that the total input optical power of the board reaches the standard optical power.
NOTE
In the navigation tree, choose Configuration > Optical Power Management. On the right side of the
window, check the value of Input Power, which represents the optical power of the IN port on the OBU103
board.
4. Click Apply.
Step 6 Set the EVOA attenuation to 5 dB for the wavelength that carries dummy light next to the
wavelength that carries service signals on the M40V board.
Step 7 Fine-tune the EVOA attenuation for the wavelength that carries dummy light and other
wavelengths that carry service signals on the M40V board to ensure that the board provides the
optimal optical power balancing among the wavelengths.
Step 8 Repeat Step 6 through Step 7 to adjust the optical power of the remaining wavelengths that carry
dummy light one by one to ensure that the system will be able to provide the optimal performance
when a maximum of wavelengths are provisioned.
----End
5.9 Commissioning Optical Power of Supervisory Channel

This section describes how to commission the optical power of supervisory channel.
The system offers two types of supervisory channels:

l Optical supervisory channel (OSC)
l Electrical supervisory channel (ESC)
The OSC requires the optical supervisory channel unit HSC1, SC1 or SC2. The unit is used to
transmit and receive the supervisory information.
The ESC does not need the optical supervisory channel units. In this mode, the optical
transponder unit (OTU) multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channels for
transmission.
NOTE
After the boards are commissioned and work normally, the ESC and OSC are enabled by default.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.9.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of the OSC Board

This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OSC board.
Prerequisites
The commissioning of the optical power at the transmit end of the upstream station must be
complete.

Optical power meter, fixed attenuator
The receive optical power of OSC is in the range of -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The transmit optical
power of OSC is in the range of -4 dBm to 0 dBm. Basic requirements of the optical power
commissioning on the OSC are as follows:
l The receive optical power of the OSC should be in the range of -45 dBm to -8 dBm.
NOTE
The receive optical power of the ST2 board and the OSC unit on the DAS1 board is in the range of -41 dBm to
-10 dBm.
To prevent the laser on the OSC board at the receive end from being burnt, fixed attenuators that
are required must be configured properly by referring to the following tables.
l When the SC1 or SC2 board is used as the OSC board,
Table 5-5 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the SC1 or SC2 board
System Rate Line Fiber Standard Fix Attenuator on the SC1/

Type Optical SC2 Board (Line Insertion
Power Loss Is the EOL Value)
Incident
Scenario or 0 <= Insertion
Not Insertion Loss >= 20
Loss < 20
10 Gbit/s SSMF/LEAF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A

TWRS/TWC/ EVOA is
TW+ configured
before an
optical
amplifier)
No (and an
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
System Rate Line Fiber Standard Fix Attenuator on the SC1/

Type Optical SC2 Board (Line Insertion
Power Loss Is the EOL Value)
Incident
Scenario or 0 <= Insertion
Not Insertion Loss >= 20
Loss < 20
G.653/SMF- - - -
LS
No (and no 15 dBa N/A
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)
40 Gbit/s, or a SSMF/LEAF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A

mixture of 10 TWRS/TWC EVOA is
Gbit/s and 40 configured
Gbit/s before an
optical
amplifier)
LEAF/TWRS/ No (and no
TWC/TW+/ EVOA is
SMF-LS/G. configured
653 before an
optical
amplifier)
a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TM port on the SC1 board or the TM1/TM2 port
on the SC2 board.
l When the ST2 board is used as the OSC board,
Table 5-6 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the ST2 board
System Line Fiber Standard Fix Attenuator on the ST2 Board (Line
Rate Type Optical Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value)
Power
Incident 0 <= 15 <= Insertion
Scenario Insertion Insertion Loss >= 25
or Not Loss < 15 Loss < 25
10 Gbit/s SSMF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A N/A

LEAF/ EVOA is
TWRS/ configured
TWC/TW+ before an
optical
amplifier)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
System Line Fiber Standard Fix Attenuator on the ST2 Board (Line
Rate Type Optical Insertion Loss Is the EOL Value)
Power
Incident 0 <= 15 <= Insertion
Scenario Insertion Insertion Loss >= 25
or Not Loss < 15 Loss < 25
No (and an
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)
G.653/ - - - -
SMF-LS
No (and no 20 dBb 10 dBa N/A
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)
40 Gbit/s, or SSMF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A N/A

a mixture of LEAF/ EVOA is
10 Gbit/s TWRS/ configured
and 40 Gbit/ TWC before an
s optical
amplifier)
LEAF/ No (and no 20 dBb 10 dBa N/A

TWRS/ EVOA is
TWC/TW+/ configured
SMF-LS/G. before an
653 optical
amplifier)
a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board.
b. Configure a 10 dB fixed attenuator at the TM1/TM2 port on the ST2 board and a 10
dB fixed attenuator at the RM port on the FIU board.
Table 5-7 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the ST2 board for Raman System
Line Insertion Loss(EOL Value) Fix Attenuator on the ST2 Board
0<=IL<24 NA
24<=IL<30 7a
30<=IL NA
a: If a more than 7 dB fixed attenuator has been configured for the ST2 board refer to
Table 5-6, it does not need to configure other fixed attenuators.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l When the DAS1 board is used,
Table 5-8 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the OSC unit of the DAS1 board
System Line Fiber Standard Fix Attenuator on the OSC Unit of the
Rate Type Optical DAS1 Board (Line Insertion Loss Is
Power the EOL Value)
Incident
Scenario 0 <= 15 <= Insertion
or Not Insertion Insertion Loss >= 25
Loss < 15 Loss < 25
10 Gbit/s SSMF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A N/A

LEAF/ EVOA is
TWRS/ configured
TWC/TW+ before an
optical
amplifier)
No (and an
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)
G.653/ - - - -
SMF-LS
No (and no 20 dBb 10 dBa N/A
EVOA is
configured
before an
optical
amplifier)
40 Gbit/s, or SSMF/ Yes (and an 15 dBa N/A N/A

a mixture of LEAF/ EVOA is
10 Gbit/s TWRS/ configured
and 40 Gbit/ TWC before an
s optical
amplifier)
LEAF/ No (and no 20 dBb 10 dBa N/A

TWRS/ EVOA is
TWC/TW+/ configured
SMF-LS/G. before an
653 optical
amplifier)
a. Configure the fixed attenuator at the TX port on the DAS1 board.

b. Configure a 10 dB fixed attenuator at the TX port on the DAS1 board and a 10 dB
fixed attenuator at the RM port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 5-9 Principles for configuring a fixed attenuator on the OSC unit of the DAS1 board
for Raman System
Line Insertion Loss(EOL Value) Fix Attenuator on the OSC Unit of the
DAS1 Board
0<=IL<24 NA
24<=IL<30 7a
30<=IL NA
a: If a more than 7 dB fixed attenuator has been configured for the DAS1 board refer to
Table 5-8, it does not need to configure other fixed attenuators.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of the OSC unit.
l The RM port of the OSC board connects to the TM port of the FIU board at the local station.
l The TM port of the OSC board connects to the RM port of the FIU board at the local station.
l The RX port on the DAS1 board is the receive optical port of the OSC unit and must be
connected to the TM port. The TX port is the transmit optical port of the OSC unit and must
be connected to the RM port.
Step 2 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the transmit optical
power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -4 dBm to 0 dBm. If it does not meet
the requirement, replace the board.
NOTE
The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and 1511 nm.
Step 3 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the actual receive
optical power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from -48 dBm to -3 dBm. The input
optical power of the OSC board can be adjusted on the basis of the actual optical power by
adding, changing or removing the fixed optical attenuators.
NOTE
The supervisory channel on the ST2 board supports the following wavelengths: 1491 nm and 1511 nm.
NOTE
If the result does not meet the requirements, clean the fiber connector. If the problem persists, check whether
the OSC is faulty, and if so, clear the fault.
Step 4 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then test the insertion loss between
the IN and TM ports, and between the RM and OUT ports of the FIU. The values should be less
than 1.5 dBm.
----End
5.9.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of ESC Board

This section describes the basic requirements on commissioning the optical power of the ESC
board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
When the OTU starts to work and the service is normal (or the WDM side of the OTU side
transmits light), the ESC route is set up.
By default the WDM side of the OTU board emits light forcibly. If it does not emit light, see
5.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light to query whether the board is forced to emit light.
If the board is not forced to emit light, configure the board so that it emits light forcibly.
5.10 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and

Demultiplexer Board
multiplexer and demultiplexer board.
5.10.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V Boards

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the optical power of the M40V
and D40V boards.
Tools, Equipment, and materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, U2000
Adjust the optical power and the flatness of OSNR by adjusting the built-in VOA for each
wavelength at the receive end to meet the requirements.
l Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on each channel of the M40V or D40V at the transmit
end to 5 dB before commissioning.
1. In the NE Explorer and select the desired M40V board, choose Configuration >
WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB.
3. Click Apply. A prompt appears telling you that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
l Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow.
Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel in the WDM mode. Or
connect the INx port of the MCA4/MCA8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in the
signal flow. Then measure the optical power and the OSNR for each channel on the
U2000 as follows:
– Select the desired MCA4/MCA8 board in the NE Explorer, choose Configuration >
Laser Spectrum Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree.
– Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.
– In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR(dB) for each current
wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l The MON port of the OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 and CRPC board is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal
at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual signal power).
l The MON port of the HBA board is a 1/999 tap of the total composite signal at the OUT port (30dB
lower than the actual signal power).
l According to the optical spectrum figure, determine the channels with the largest or the
smallest optical power (or OSNR). Adjust the VOA for the corresponding channels of the
M40V/D40V to make the optical power (or OSNR) near the average value.
l Ensure that the maximum difference of optical power among all the channels is within 4
dB, and the maximum different of the OSNR among all the channels is within 2 dB.
NOTE
Generally the output optical power values of all OAUs do not have obvious changes after this
commissioning. If changes are obvious, adjust the VOA before the first OAU of the signal flow to make
the input optical power reach the standard value. There is no need to adjust the successive OAUs. Ensure
that the OSNR is flat and that the optical power is near the standard value.
5.10.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU/SFIU Board

This section describes the basic requirements for commissioning the insertion loss of the FIU
board.
Tools, Equipment, and materials

Optical power meter, Optical spectrum analyzer
CAUTION
If fiber connectors or fiber adapters are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two end faces and the fiber adapter for every external fiber that is
connected into the equipment through the ODF must be cleaned. Perform the cleaning before
inserting an external fiber to an optical port on the equipment.
Note the insertion loss for the FIU boards:

l IN–>TC insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port – Output optical power of TC port
l RC–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RC port – Output optical power of OUT
port
l IN–>TM insertion loss = Input optical power of IN port – Output optical power of TM port
l RM–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RM port – Output optical power of OUT
port
Note the insertion loss for the SFIU boards:
l LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS1 port – Output optical power
of LINE1 port
l LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss = Input optical power of SYS2 port – Output optical power
of LINE2 port

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC1 port – Output optical power
of LINE1 port
l LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss = Input optical power of OSC2 port – Output optical power
of LINE2 port
The optical power can be measured with an optical power meter or an optical spectrum analyzer.
The basic requirements for the measurements are as follows.
Method one: measurement with an optical power meter of the FIU/SFIU

l For IN–>TC insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l For RC–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when
disconnecting the fiber of the RM port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0
dB.
l For IN–>TM insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
l For RM–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT port when
disconnecting the fiber of the RC port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5
dB.
l For LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the OSC1 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.0 dB.
l For LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the OSC2 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.0 dB.
l For LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE1 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the SYS1 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.5 dB.
l For LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss, measure the optical power of the LINE2 port when
disconnecting the fiber of the SYS2 port. The insertion loss must be equal to or less than
1.5 dB.
Method two: measurement with an optical spectrum analyzer of the FIU/SFIU

l For IN–>TC insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the optical power
of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion
loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l For RC–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with the optical
power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The
insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.
l For IN–>TM insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510 nm with the
optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The
l For RM–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at 1510 nm with
the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The
l For LINE1–>SYS1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port with the optical
power of the TC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. The
l For LINE2–>SYS2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port with the
optical power of the RC port at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
The insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l For LINE1–>OSC1 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN port at 1510 nm
with the optical power of the TM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For LINE2–>OSC2 insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT port at 1510 nm
with the optical power of the RM port at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
5.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board

FOADM board.
Network with MR2+MR2

Figure 5-8 shows the diagram of a network with MR2+MR2.
Figure 5-8 Diagram of a network with MR2+MR2
1 2 3 4
MO
OA OA
OUT IN OUT
TC IN OUT IN MI OUT RC
IN F F
MR2 MR2 I
I
U U
MI
OA OA
OUT MO IN OUT IN
OUT RC OUT IN TC
O O O O
West T T T T East
U U U U
1: West FIU 2: West optical amplifier board at the receiving end

3: East optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: East FIU
Network with MR8V+MR8V

Figure 5-9 shows the diagram of a network with MR8V+MR8V.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 5-9 Diagram of a network with MR8V+MR8V
1 2 3 4
OUT
MO OA
OA OUT
TC IN MI IN OUT RC
IN OUT VI F
F MR8V
MR8V I
I
U OUT U
MI
OA OA
MO VI OUT IN
IN TC
OUT RC OUT
O O O O O O
West T T T T T
East
T
U U U U U U

The commissioning requirements for the FOADM board are as follows.
NOTE
For the specifications of the OAU board, see the Hardware Description.
l In the pass-through direction:
– For MR8V, adjust the VOA on the MR8V in the pass-through direction. Make the pass-
through wavelength meet the requirements for the input optical power of the OAU at
the transmit end.
– For MR2, adjust the VOA between MR2s. Make the pass-through wavelength meet the
requirements for the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end.
l In the drop wavelength direction, add an appropriate fixed optical attenuator at the input
end of the OTU. Make the drop wavelength meet the requirements for the input optical
power of the OTU.
l In the add wavelength direction:
– For MR8V, adjust the VOA between the OUT port on the OTU for adding wavelengths
and the MR8V to ensure gain flatness between the add wavelength and the pass-through
wavelength.
– For MR2, adjust the VOA between the OUT port on the OTU for adding wavelengths
and the MR2 to ensure gain flatness between the add wavelength and the pass-through
wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board

ROADM board.
This section describes how to commission the optical power of a ring network using ROADM
boards along the west-to-east signal flow. In general, the ring network uses the following
ROADM boards:
l ROAM+ROAM
l WSD9+WSM9
l WSD9+RMU9
l RDU9+WSM9
l WSMD4+WSMD4
l WSMD2+WSMD2
NOTE
l The requirements of the intra-ring grooming and inter-ring grooming of the WSM9, WSD9, RMU9,
RDU9, RDU9, WSMD2 and WSMD4 are the same.
l The automatic power adjustment mode can be chosen in creating optical cross-connection. For
applications not supporting automatic power adjustment, choose the manual power adjustment mode.
l The optical power of the OUT port at the receive end and the rated optical power of the IN port at the
transmit end of the OAU have their default values on the U2000.
5.11.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM

+ROAM)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with ROAM
+ROAM.
Network with ROAM+ROAM

Figure 5-10 shows the diagram of a network with ROAM+ROAM.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 5-10 Diagram of a network with ROAM+ROAM
1 2 3 4
OAU
OAU
F OUT IN F
IN OUT
I ROAM ROAM I
OAU
OAU
U U
OUT IN OUT IN
OBU OBU
West East
D40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

NOTE
TDC and RDC of the OAU are connected to the port of the DCM for dispersion compensation or connected
directly.
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add and pass-through wavelength
directions.
– In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU
at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of east
OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. The system
then automatically determines and adjusts the output optical power to ensure that the
input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add
wavelength.
– In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to
the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the rated optical power of the
IN port of east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength.
The system then automatically determines and adjusts the output optical power to ensure
that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for
the pass-through wavelength.
l Manual power adjustment is required in the drop wavelength direction. Configure the fixed
optical attenuator at the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end. Select the fixed optical
attenuator according to the input optical power of the OTU to ensure that the input optical
power meets the requirements. The VOA (in the dashed frame) between the ROAM and
D40 boards is used to adjust the input optical power of the optical amplifier to a value in
the nominal range. If the input optical power is in the nominal range when the VOA is not
added, then the VOA is not required.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end,
the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an
avalanche photodiode (APD) is configured on the WDM side of the OTU board at the receive
end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the PIN photodiode is configured at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame
are required.
5.11.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9

+WSM9)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSD9+WSM9.
Network with WSD9+WSM9

Figure 5-11 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9.
Figure 5-11 Diagram of a network with WSD9+WSM9
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
1 2 3 4
D40 M40
OA WSD9 WSM9 OA
F IN OUT IN OUT F
I I
U U
OA WSM9 WSD9 OA
OUT IN OUT IN
M40 D40
West East
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

NOTE
directly.
Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-through wavelength
directions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU
to the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the west OAU
at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. The system then
automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the
WSD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for the
drop wavelength.
NOTE
Automatic power adjustment can be realized when the WSD9 drops wavelength directly to the OTU
or through the MRx or D40 to the OTU.
l In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the
east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the optical power of the OUT port of
the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. Set the
rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input
power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the
attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 and WSM9 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through
wavelength.
l I the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at
the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east
OAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single wavelength. The system then
automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the
WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the
requirements for the add wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through the
MRx board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit
end. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.
NOTE
MRx can be MR8, MR8V, MR4, or MR2.
5.11.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9

+RMU9)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSD9+RMU9.
Network with WSD9+RMU9

Figure 5-12 shows the diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 5-12 Diagram of a network with WSD9+RMU9
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
1 2 3 4
OA
D40 MRx M40 T
O
A
ROA
OA WSD9 RMU9 OA
F IN OUT IN OUT F
I I
U U
IN
OA RMU9 WSD9 OA
OUT ROA OUT IN
T
O
A M40 MRx D40
West East
OA
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

NOTE
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in the add, drop, and pass-through
wavelength (the wavelength is added either directly or through the MRx or M40V board)
directions.
– In the wavelength-dropping direction: Create a single-station optical cross-connection
from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end. The system then automatically
calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 board
to ensure that the optical power of each drop wavelength sent to the OTU board meets
the specification requirements.
NOTE
Automatic power adjustment can be used when the WSD9 drops a wavelength directly to the
OTU or drops a wavelength to the OTU board through the MRx or D40.
– In the pass-through direction: Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the
west FIU to the east FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the
attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSD9 to ensure that the input optical
power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through
wavelength.
– In the wavelength-adding direction (the OTU board adds wavelengths directly): Create
a single-station optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the
east FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the
VOA in each port of the RMU9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at
the transmit end meets the requirements for the add wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l When wavelengths are added through the MRx board or the M40 board, the optical power
needs to be manually adjusted.
When wavelengths are added through the M40/M40V board, an optical amplifier needs to
be configured between the TOA and ROA ports on the RMU9 board. And a VOA needs
to be configured between the ROA port and the optical amplifier. When wavelengths are
added through the MRx board, the TOA and the ROA ports on the RMU9 board are
connected to each other directly by a fiber.
Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MRx or M40 board to ensure that the input
power flatness of the add wavelengths and the pass-through wavelengths on the east OAU
at the transmit end meet the system requirements.
l In the case of a network with WSD9+RMU9, to implement the APE function, the RMU9
board has certain requirements on configuration. These requirements are as follows:
– Configure the VA1 or VA4 board between the OTU and RMU9 boards when the OTU
board adds wavelength directly to the RMU9 board. In this case, the APE function can
be automatically implemented.
– When a multiplexer board, through which the OTU adds wavelength to the RMU9
board, needs to be configured, configure the M40V board. In this case, the APE function
can be automatically implemented.
– If the VA1, VA4, or M40V board is not used, the APE function cannot be implemented.
5.11.4 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (RDU9

+WSM9)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with RDU9+WSM9.
Network with RDU9+WSM9

Figure 5-13 shows the diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9.
Figure 5-13 Diagram of a network with RDU9+WSM9
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
1 2 3 4
MRx D40V M40
OA RDU9 WSM9 OA
F IN OUT IN OUT F
I I
U U
OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
OUT IN OUT IN
M40 D40V MRx

West East
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
directly.
NOTE
l Automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported in add wavelength, pass-through
wavelength, and drop wavelength through the MRx board or the D40V board.
– In the drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU
to the west OTU at the receive end. Set the optical power of the OUT port of the west
OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. The system
then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel
of the MRx board or the D40V board to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU
meets the requirements for the drop wavelength.
– In the pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to
the east FIU and from the east FIU to the west FIU. Set the optical power of the OUT
port of the west OAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength,
and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the east OAU at the transmit end to the
typical input power of single wavelength. The system then automatically calculates and
adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSM9 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-
through wavelength.
– In the add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU
at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN port of the
east OAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single wavelength. The system
then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel
of the WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end
meets the requirements for the add wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through the
MRx board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit
end. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.
l When wavelengths are dropped through the MRx board or the D40 board, the optical power
needs to be manually adjusted.
Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MRx board or the D40 board to ensure that the
input optical power of the OTU meets the requirements for the drop wavelength.
5.11.5 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD4

+WSMD4)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSMD4
+WSMD4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Network with WSMD4+WSMD4

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMD4. In this section, the
network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration purposes.
The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 5-14
shows the diagram of a network with WSMD4+WSMD4.
Figure 5-14 Diagram of a network with WSMD4+WSMD4

1 2 3 4
DM4
OA OA
F IN OUT IN AM4 OUT IN OUT F
I WSMD4 WSMD4 I
U U
AM4 IN
OA OA
OUT IN OUT DM1 DM4 OUT IN
AM1 AM1 DM1
OA OA
West East
D40 M40 M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

NOTE
l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMD4 board are not shown.
These two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction.
l The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical port by the OTU board.
The commissioning requirements for the WSMD4 are as follows:
l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required.
You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical port of the OTU board
on the east and west receive ends respectively, based on the input optical power range of
the OTU board. By doing this, the input optical power to the OTU board can meet the OTU
design requirement. The optical power of the VOA (in the dashed frame) between the
demultiplexer and WSMD4 should be adjusted so that the input optical power is within the
nominal input range of the optical amplifier. If the input optical power is already within
the nominal input range of the optical amplifier before the VOA is added, the VOA is not
required.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end,
the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD
module is configured on the WDM side of OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the
dashed frame are not required.
l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in
the dashed frame need to be configured.
l In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the east
FIU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation
of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the input optical power of the
OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the pass-through wavelength.
l In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU
and from the west OTU to the west FIU. The system then automatically calculates and
adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the input
optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements for the add
wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA (in the solid frame)
needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths
through the M40, the VOA is not required.

+WSMD2)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements for a network with WSMD2
+WSMD2.
Networking with WSMD2+WSMD2

This section describes the commissioning requirements of the WSMD2. In this section, the
networking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration
purposes. The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure
5-15 shows the diagram of a network with WSMD2+WSMD2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
O O O O
1 2 T T T T 3 4
U U U U
D40 M40
AM
DM
TC OUT OUT
IN EXPI OUT
OA OA
EXPO IN RC
IN IN OUT
F F
West East
I WSMD2 WSMD2 I
U U
IN IN
OUT OUT OUT EXPI
OA OA
RC IN EXPO OUT TC IN
DM
AM
M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Fixed attenuator Variable attenuator

NOTE
l The M40 or M40V can be used as the multiplexer board.

l If only one wavelength needs to be added, you can directly connect one OTU to the AM port of the
WSMD2.
The commissioning requirements of the WSMD2 are as follows:
design requirements.
l In the pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
l In the add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA needs to be added
before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengths through the M40,
the VOA is not required.
NOTE

+WSMD9)
This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSMD9
+WSMD9.
Network with WSMD9+WSMD9

This section describes the commissioning requirements for the WSMD9. In this section, the
network diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration purposes.
The commissioning requirements for multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 5-16
shows the diagram of a network with WSMD9+WSMD9.
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
D40 M40
DCM DCM
DM1 AM1
LIN SOUT IN EXPO SIN LOUT
TM EXPI OUT TM
RX RX
DAS1 TX WSMD9 WSMD9 TX DAS1
RM RM
EXPO IN
SIN OUT EXPI SOUT LIN

LOUT
AM1 DM1
DCM DCM
M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l Optical ports AM2–AM8 and DM2–DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards
in other dimensions.
design requirement.
l In pass-through direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
l In add wavelength direction, automatic power adjustment (OPA) is supported.
wavelength.
5.12 Commissioning Optical Power of DCM

The single-wavelength input optical power of the DCM must be equal to or lower than –3 dBm.
Prerequisites
Fiber connections on the DCM must be established properly.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, fiber jumper
Procedure
Step 1 Measure the input optical power of the DCM. The single-wavelength input optical power must
be equal to or lower than –3 dBm.
Step 2 Measure the output optical power of the DCM.
Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss of the DCM. The insertion loss should be within the specified range.
Otherwise, replace the DCM.
Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM – Output optical power of the DCM
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Related Information
For more information about the specifications of the insertion loss of the DCM, see the Product
Description.
5.13 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on

10G (or Lower) Single-Wavelength System
This section uses Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning
procedures for the OTM, OLA and OADM stations.
CAUTION
Ensure that the ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise, the system
performance is affected.
l All the channels must be accessed with service signals or forced to emit light before optical
power commissioning. Once all the OTUs can emit light normally, start the commissioning
station by station.
l Enable the performance monitoring of NEs during optical power commissioning. Compare
the value reported by the NE and the value tested by the instruments. Ensure that the two
optical power values are the same.
NOTE
The optical power is queried by using the U2000. The difference between the U2000 value and the value
tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.
5.13.1 Example Description

This section describes the network of project X.
Figure 5-17 shows the network diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E and F are the
NG WDM systems which form the ring network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A and ONE C
are the back-to-back OTM stations. The ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations. And
the ONE E is the OADM station.
Station E can use the FOADM boards or ROADM boards to form the network.
If station E uses the FOADM boards, see 5.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM
Board for its commissioning description.
If station E uses the ROADM boards, see 5.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM
Board for its commissioning description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 5-17 Network diagram of Project X

Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM
55km/15dB 60km/16dB
Station B OLA Station C 2OTM Station D OLA
: OTM :OLA : OADM
NOTE
In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example to illustrate the
commissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow from east to west is the same as
the commissioning method for the signal flow from west to east.
NOTE
As shown in Figure 5-17, 2OTM means back-to-back OTM
Table 5-10 shows the incident optical power requirements based on a 10Gbit/s single-
wavelength system.
Table 5-10 Requirements on incident optical power
Module Type Number of G.652 SSMF G.655 LEAF G.653

Wavelengths
NRZ/(D)RZ 40 +4 +4 -5
80 +1 +1 -7
The optical power listed in this table is expressed in dBm.
NOTE
If modules or fibers of another type need to be used, confirm the incident optical power with the product manager
or network designer.
5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM

Station
This section describes how to commission the optical power at the transmit end of an OTM
station along the west-to-east signal flow.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and network configuration must be complete.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed optical
attenuator, VOA, U2000
Set-up Diagram
Figure 5-18 Fiber connection of OTM station A on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station A
D01 Tx Rx M01
DCM LQM LQM
TDC
RDC D02 M02
LINE C SYS M
TC IN D LOM LOM
R OAU1 4 OBU1
P 4
IN IN OUT 0 OUT OUT RC OUT
C 0
D40 M40 IN
LSX LSX
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
West To F I SC2 I To B East
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
LQM LQM
M02 D02
RC M LOM LOM D D
OBU1 4 4 OBU1 C
0 M
0 TC IN
M40 IN OUT
OUT OUT IN OUT D40 IN
LSX LSX
Fixed optical attenuator ODF side

VOA
Station A
D01 Tx Rx M01
DCM LQM LQM
TDC
RDC D02 M02
LINE C SYS M
TC IN D LOM LOM
R OAU1 4 OBU1
P 4
IN IN OUT 0 OUT OUT RC OUT
C 0
D40 M40 IN
LSX LSX
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
LQM LQM
M02 D02
RC M LOM LOM D D
OBU1 4 4 OBU1 C
0 M
0 TC IN
M40 IN OUT
OUT OUT IN OUT D40 IN
LSX LSX

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Tx Rx
L L
Q 4
M G
Station A IN OUT
DCM
D1 D2 A1 A2
LINE C SY S TDC RDC
R
P OAU1 MR2 OBU1
C IN TC IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT RC OUT
TM RM1 TM2 RM
FI SC2 FI
West To F U U To B East
RM TM1 RM2 TM
D
OBU1 MR2 OBU1 C
M
OUT RC OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN TC IN
D1 D2 A1 A2
L IN L OUT
Q 4
M G
Tx Rx

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber should be loosely inserted to the input port Rx on the client side of the OTU.
Step 2 Send the client signal to the east OTU.
Step 3 Query the bar code on the front panel or manufacturing information of the board to obtain the
optical module information on the client side of the OTU.
Step 4 Obtain the launched optical power and optical module information on the client side. Compare
the launched optical power of the client equipment with the received optical power on the client
side of the OTU. If required, prepare the fixed optical attenuator for later use.
Step 5 Measure the optical power of the fiber jumper connected to the RX port on the client side of the
OTU by using an optical power meter.
Step 6 Install a fixed optical attenuator before the input port on the client side of the OTU to ensure
that the input optical power of the OTU meets requirements.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 If the optical power of all input ports on the OTU meets the specification requirements, insert a
fiber into the RX port on the OTU and record the input optical power at the RX port in the
commissioning record.
Step 8 Check whether the OUT ports on the WDM sides of all the east OTUs emit light. If not, check
whether lasers on the WDM sides of the OTU are enabled.
Step 9 Measure the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU by using an optical
power meter.
Step 10 Measure the input optical power at the following port by using an optical power meter, and
record the value in the commissioning record. If the variance between the optical power of the
port and the optical power at the OUT port on the WDM side of the OTU is greater than 1 dB,
check whether fibers are routed properly and whether the fibers are clean.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40 by using
an optical power meter.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, measure the input optical power at the Mn port on the M40 by using
an optical power meter.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, measure the input optical power at the A1 and A2 port on the MR2
by using an optical power meter.
Step 11 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the following board to scan the
multiplexed signal. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA connected to the output port on the OTU
to adjust the optical power flatness of add wavelengths. In this manner, ensure that the single-
wavelength output optical power of the M40 is consistent with the nominal single-wavelength
input optical power of the OA at the transmit end.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the M40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the M40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT port on the MR2
board.
Step 12 Record the optical power of each wavelength and multiplexed signal and calculate the insertion
loss of each wavelength for the following board. Check whether the insertion loss of each
wavelength meets the requirements after the wavelength passes through the board. If the optical
power is abnormal, check the fiber connection to the Mn port.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40 board.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the M40 board.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the MR2 board.
Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit
OBU1 by using a fiber jumper. Then scan the multiplexed signal and measure the optical power
at the IN port on the OBU1.
Step 14 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the OUT port on the OBU1 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer. Check whether the mean output optical power of a single wavelength is in
the standard range.
Step 15 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1 according to the following formula: Gain =
Output optical power of a single wavelength - Input optical power of a single wavelength. The
gain flatness of a single wavelength must be lower than 2.0 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 16 Record the optical power at IN and OUT ports, input and output optical power, and gain of each
wavelength of the OBU1.
Step 17 Query the input and output optical power of a multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The variance between the power displayed on the U2000 and the power measured by
using the optical spectrum analyzer must be smaller than 2.0 dB. Otherwise, replace the board.
Step 18 Measure the input optical power at the RC port on the FIU by using an optical power meter. If
the variance between the optical power at RC port on the FIU and the optical power at the OUT
port on the OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check whether the fibers are routed properly and whether
the fibers are clean.
Step 19 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical power meter
(during the test, the RM port must be disconnected). Calculate the insertion loss from the RC to
OUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be equal to or lower than 1.0 dB.
Step 20 Measure the output optical power at the TM2 port on the SC2 by using an optical power meter,
and then measure the input optical power at the RM port on the FIU. If the variance between the
optical power at the two ports is greater than 1 dB, check whether the fibers are routed properly
and whether the fibers are clean.
Step 21 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the FIU by using an optical power meter
(during the test, the RC port must be disconnected). Calculate the insertion loss from the RM to
OUT ports on the FIU. The insertion loss must be equal to or lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 22 Measure the output optical power on the ODF side. Compare the value with the output optical
power at the OUT port on the FIU to check whether the fiber is correctly routed.
----End
5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow at an
OLA station.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
The optical power commissioning of station A at the transmit end must be complete.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
Figure 5-21 Fiber connection of OLA station B
Station B
D
C OBU1
M
IN TC IN OUT RC OUT
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
I SC2 I To C East
West To A
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U
D
C
OBU1 M
OAU1
OUT RC OUT IN OUT IN TC IN
RDC TDC
Fix optical attenuator ODF side

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 Test the optical power of the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Compare the
value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station A to calculate the line
attenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is larger
than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whether
the cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear the
fault by following the appropriate procedures.
Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TM port on the
west FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values in
the commissioning record.
Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port of the west FIU. The insertion loss
should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port on the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Add a proper attenuator to make the input power less than –3dBm. Record the input optical
power of the RM1 port in the commissioning record.
Step 5 Test the output optical power of the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Record the output optical power of the TM2 port in the commissioning record.
Step 6 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the OUT port on
the east FIU at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the fiber to
the RC port of the FIU board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning record.
Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion
loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 8 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power of the TC port on the
west FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power
values in the commissioning record.
Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The insertion loss
Step 10 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the West-Receive-
to-East-Transmit OBU to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the VOA before the OBU to
commission the mean input optical power of single wavelength of the OBU to nominal value.
Step 11 Test and record the input and output optical power of the DCM. Calculate the insertion loss of
the VOA and DCM.
Step 12 The optical power commissioning method of the OBU is the same as that at the transmit end of
the OTM. For more information, see Step 13 through Step 17 in 5.13.2 Commissioning
Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station.
Step 13 Test the input optical power of the RC port and the output optical power of the OUT port of the
east FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the
fiber to the RM port of the FIU board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning
record.
Step 14 Calculate the insertion loss from the RC port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion loss
----End
5.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow at the
receive end of an OTM station.
Prerequisites
The optical power commissioning of station B must be complete.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
Figure 5-22 Fiber connection of OTM station C on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station C
D01 Tx Rx M01
TDC RDC LQM LQM
D02 M02
IN D IN LOM LOM M IN RC
D
OAU1 C OBU1 OBU1
4 4
IN TC OUT M 0 OUT OUT OUT
0
D40 M40
LSX LSX
West F TM RM1 TM2 RM F East
To B I SC2 I
To D
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
M01 Rx Tx D01
LQM LQM
OUT M M02 D02
OUT LOM LOM D OUT TC
OBU1 4 4 OAU1
OUT RC IN 0 IN IN IN
0
M40 RDC TDC
D40
LSX LSX DCM

VOA
Station C
D01 Tx Rx M01
TDC RDC LQM LQM
D02 M02
IN D IN LOM LOM M IN RC
D
OAU1 C OBU1 OBU1
4 4
IN TC OUT M 0 OUT OUT OUT
0
D40 M40
LSX LSX
West F TM RM1 TM2 RM F East
To B I SC2 I
To D
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
M01 Rx Tx D01
LQM LQM
OUT M M02 D02
OUT LOM LOM D OUT TC
OBU1 4 4 OAU1
OUT RC IN 0 IN IN IN
0
M40 RDC TDC
D40
LSX LSX DCM

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Tx Rx
L L
Q 4
M G
Station C IN OUT
TDC RDC D1 D2 A1 A2
D
OAU1 C OBU1 MR2 OBU1
IN TC OUT M IN OUT IN OUT RC OUT
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
West To B I SC2 I To D East
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U
OBU1 MR2 OAU1

OUT RC OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN TC IN
D1 D2 A1 A2
DCM
RDC TDC
L IN L OUT
Q 4
M G
Tx Rx

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The optical
fiber of the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM ports on
the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.13.3 Commissioning
Optical Power of OLA.
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT ports
on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC ports on
Step 7 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then
measure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel in WDM mode. Or connect the INx
port of the MCA4/MCA8 board to the MON port on the last OAU in the signal flow. Then
measure the optical power and the OSNR of each channel on the U2000 by completing the
following operations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Log in to U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of the
NE is displayed.
l Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
l Select the desired MCA4/MCA8 board, and choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum
Analysis from the left-hand Function Tree.
l Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.
l In Spectrum Data, query Optical Power (dBm) and OSNR (dB) for each current
wavelength display.
NOTE
You can also connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN port on the West-Receive-to-
East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the optical power and OSNR of each wavelength
of the IN port on the OAU1.
Step 8 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the OUT port on the West-Receive-
to-East-Transmit OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the gain of the OAU1 on the
U2000 to commission the launched optical power to the maximum value for single wavelength
for the OAU1.
NOTE
For the methods and requirements of gain adjustment for the OAU, see 5.6 Commissioning Optical Power of
EDFA Optical Amplifier Board.
Step 9 Calculate the gains of each wavelength of the OAU1. Record the output optical power, gain of
each wavelength, and the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal.
Step 10 Check whether the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal is compliant to the
typical value by using the U2000.
Step 11 The tested OSNR of the output signals for the optical amplifier at the receive end must be higher
than the designed OSNR in the actual project.
Step 12 The commissioning method of the West-Receive-to-East-Transmit OBU and DCM is the same
as that of the OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 10 through Step 12 in 5.13.3
Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper for the following port on the west
board to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the input optical power of each wavelength.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the D40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the D40
board.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the MR2
board.
Step 14 Test the output optical power of each wavelength for the following port by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the Dn port on
the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For OptiX OSN 6800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the Dn port on
the D40 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For OptiX OSN 3800, test the output optical power of each wavelength for the D1 and D2
ports on the MR2 board by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 15 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength for the following boards. The insertion loss must
satisfy the following requirements and the maximum difference between the insertion loss values
must be lower than 2.0 dB. If the difference is greater than 2.0 dB, replace the board with a new
board.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, the insertion loss must be lower than 6.5 dB.
Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whether the
optical power for the IN port on the OTU is within the standard range.
NOTE
If a PIN receiver is used on the WDM side of the OTU, no fixed optical attenuator is needed. If an APD
is used on the WDM side of the OTU, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be added to ensure that the
input optical power of the IN port of the OTU meets the requirements. If the optical power does not meet
the requirements, add, change or remove the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the received optical
power is within the standard range.
Step 17 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port of the OTU after the input optical power meets
the requirements.
Step 18 Test the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power of the ODF.
Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is correctly
connected. The fiber attenuation must be lower than 1 dB.
Step 19 Query the input and output optical power of each OTU by using the U2000. The difference
between the values on the U2000 and the test values must be lower than 2.0 dB. The number of
error corrections within 15 minutes for the board with FEC function must be less than 100,000.
If the number of error corrections is more than 100,000, locate and correct the fault.
Step 20 If the client equipment accessed is new, test the 24-hour network-wide bit errors of the client
equipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not used, loop back the TX and RX ports
on the client side of all OTUs for station C on the ODF side. In addition, a fixed optical attenuator
needs to be added before the RX port.
NOTE
Section 5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the OTM Station, 5.13.3
Commissioning Optical Power of OLA and 5.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive
End show the commissioning process for the optical multiplex section. The commissioning for the
multiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations are similar to these.
----End
5.13.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (Multiplexer

Board+Demultiplexer Board)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the FOADM station along the
west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites
Fiber connections and network configuration must be complete.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fibers, fixed optical attenuator,
variable optical attenuator (VOA), U2000 computer
Figure 5-25 Fiber connection diagram of the FOADM station
Station E
DCM
D M
TDC
LINE C SYS RDC
IN 4 D03 Tx Rx M03 4
IN RC
TC OTU OTU
R OAU1 0 0 OBU1
P D02 M02
IN IN OUT OUT OUT OUT
C OTU OTU
D01 M01
OTU OTU
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
OTU OTU
M02 D02
OUT OTU OTU
OUT OUT D TC
M M03 D03 D
OBU1 OTU OTU OBU1 C
OUT RC 4 4 IN M IN
IN IN
0 0
Fixed optical attenuator Optical distribution frame (ODF)

VOA
Procedure
Step 1 For information on how to commission the received optical power of the FOADM station using
the multiplexer board and demultiplexer board, see 5.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of
OTM Receive End.
Step 2 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 to scan the multiplexed
signals. Based on the tested optical power for each pass-through wavelength, adjust the VOA
in each pass-through channel. Adjust the optical power flatness of the pass-through wavelength
so that the single-wavelength optical power input to the OBU1 is consistent with the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power.
Step 3 The optical power at the transmit end of the FOADM station is commissioned the same way as
the optical power at the transmit end of the OTM station. For more information about the
commissioning procedure, see 5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical Power of the
OTM Station.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.13.6 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM (MRx+MRx)

This section describes how to commission the optical power along the west-to-east signal flow
in the FOADM station using the MR2+MR2 scheme.
Prerequisites
The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

This section uses station E using the MRx boards as an example to describe the optical power
commissioning procedure for an FOADM station.
NOTE
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, MR8V is considered as an example.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, MR2 is considered as an example.
Set-up Diagram
Figure 5-26 Fiber connection of FOADM station E on the OptiX OSN 8800
Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
F D VI MO OUT OUT F
C OBU1 OBU1
I MI
I
TC M IN IN RC
To D U OUT U To F
MR8V MR8V
RC IN MI VI
OBU1 OAU1
OUT OUT MO OUT TC
RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
O O O O O O
West T T T T T T East
U U U U U U

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
F D VI MO OUT OUT F
C OBU1 OBU1
I MI
I
TC M IN IN RC
To D U OUT U To F
MR8V MR8V
RC IN MI VI
OBU1 OAU1
OUT OUT MO OUT TC
RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
O O O O O O
West T T T T T T East
U U U U U U

VOA
Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
F D MO MO OUT F
C OBU1 OBU1
I I
TC M OUT IN IN MI IN OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
MR2 MR2 MR2
MI OUT IN
MI
OBU1 OAU1
IN
RC OUT IN OUT OUT MO TC
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM
L L L L L L
Q 4 4 4 Q 4
M G G G M G

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board based on the fiber connection diagram. The optical
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that for the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.13.3
Step 3 For information about how to commission the optical power and calculate the insertion loss of
the IN and TM ports on the west FIU, see Step 2 and Step 3 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of OLA.
Step 4 For information about how to commission the optical power of the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5
in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
the RM and OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of OLA.
the IN and TC ports on the west FIU, see Step 8 and Step 9 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of OLA.
Step 7 The commissioning method for the OAU at the receive end and the DCM is the same as the
commissioning method for the OLA station. For more information, see Step 10 through Step 12
in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
NOTE
The TDC and RDC ports on the OAU1 can connect to a DCM module. After input optical power
commissioning, set the gain to adjust the output optical power to the standard value. The optical power,
gain and OSNR are tested the same way as described previously.
Step 8 Test the output optical power of the following ports in the west after commissioning the west
OBU1 at the receive end. Determine the optical port with the highest output optical power.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the output optical power of the D1 - D8 ports on the MR8V
boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving end.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the output optical power of the D1 - D8 ports on the MR8V
boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving end.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the output optical power of the D1 and D2 ports on the two
MR2 boards in the west respectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receiving
end.
Step 9 Add a proper fixed optical attenuator at the receive end of the OTU to ensure that the input
optical power at the IN port on the OTU meets the requirements.
NOTE
l The optimal range of the input optical power of the OTU is from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload
point – 5) dBm.
l For the specific specifications of OTUs, see the Product Description.
Step 10 Insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU after the input optical power
meets the requirements.
Step 11 Test the optical power at the following ports by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the optical power of the IN, D1 - D8 and MO ports on the
west MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the optical power of the IN, D1 - D8 and MO ports on the
west MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of the IN, D1, D2 and MO ports on the
west MR2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 12 Calculate the following drop insertion loss.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to any one of
the D1 - D8 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the
west MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 4 dB.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to any one of
the D1 - D8 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the
west MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 4 dB.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the D1 port
and to the D2 ports. Calculate the pass-through loss from the IN port to the MO port on the
first west MR2. The insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 13 For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of each wavelength of the IN, D1, D2 and MO
ports on the second MR2 of west. Calculate the drop insertion loss of the MR2 in the same way.
Step 14 Test the input optical power of the east OBU1 at the transmit end.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, adjust the value of the VOA between the east MR8V and the
west MR8V at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical power
of the pass-through wavelength of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end
conforms to the standard value.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, adjust the value of the VOA between the east MR8V and the
west MR8V at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical power
of the pass-through wavelength of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, adjust the attenuation of the VOA between the east MR2 and the
west MR2 at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to ensure that the mean input optical power
of the pass through wavelength for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end
Step 15 Test the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU with an optical power meter.
Step 16 Test the input optical power for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end by using an
optical spectrum analyzer. Adjust the attenuation of the VOA on the OTU to ensure that the
input optical power of the add wavelength for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end
conforms to the typical input power for a single wavelength.
Step 17 Test the optical power of the following ports by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, test the optical power of the MI, A1 - A8 and OUT ports on the
east MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, test the optical power of the MI, A1 - A8 and OUT ports on the
east MR8V by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, test the optical power of the MI, A1, A2 and OUT ports on the
east MR2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 18 Calculate the add insertion loss as follows.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, calculate the add insertion loss from any one of the A1 - A8 ports
to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to OUT port on the east
MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 6 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, calculate the add insertion loss from any one of the A1 - A8 ports
to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to OUT port on the east
MR8V. The insertion loss must be lower than 6 dB.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, calculate the add insertion loss from the A1 port and the A2 port
to the OUT port. Calculate the pass-through loss from the M1 port to the OUT port on the
east MR2. The insertion loss must be lower than 1.5 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power for each output wavelength at the OUT port on the east OBU1 by using
an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 20 Calculate the gain for each wavelength of the OBU1. Gain = Output optical power of a single
wavelength – Input optical power of a single wavelength. The gain flatness for each wavelength
must be lower than 2 dB.
Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signals of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The difference between the value on the U2000 and the measured value must be lower
than 2 dB.
Step 22 For information about how to commission the optical power and insertion loss of the RC and
the OUT ports on the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power
of OLA.
----End
5.13.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)

This section describes how to commission the optical power for a west-to-east signal flow in the
ROADM station in the ROAM+ROAM mode.
Prerequisites


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram (Networking with ROAM+ROAM)
Figure 5-29 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with ROAM)
Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN OUT
TC EXPO RC
F OBU1 OBU1 F
To D IN OUT EXPI IN OUT To F
I RC ROAM
EXPI
ROAM TC I
U OBU1 OAU1 U East
West EXPO
OUT IN OUT IN
M M M M
DM DM RDC TDC
0 0 0 0
OUT 1 2 1 2 IN
OBU OBU DCM
D40 D40
L L L L
Q O Q O
M G M G

VOA
Procedure
Step 4 For optical power commissioning for the SC2, see Step 4 and Step 5 in 5.13.3 Commissioning
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT ports
on the east FIU, see Step 6 and Step 7 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC ports on
Step 7 The commissioning method of west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the
OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU, from the west FIU to the
west OTU. Create the optical cross-connection from east OTU at the transmit end to the east
FIU on the U2000.
Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN ports for the west OTUs individually.
Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power of the west OTUs
NOTE
l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the
dashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical
amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD module
is configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frame
are not required. Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured.
l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific type can be identified
through the bar code information pasted on the front panel of the module. The APD also has a
corresponding APD warning identifier on the panel of the board.
Step 10 After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the
input port on the WDM side of the OTU.
Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN, DM and EXPO ports for the west ROAM with an optical power
meter. Measure the input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelength output optical
power at the Dn port of the D40.
Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DM port. Calculate the pass-through
loss from the IN port to the EXPO port of the west ROAM. Calculate the insertion loss for the
D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
l For the ROAM board, Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation
value of the inside VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, see the Product Description for information about the
insertion loss of the ROAM board.
Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the ROAM.
Method 1 is recommended.
1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
The ROAM automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for east OTU
and west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port
for the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000.
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the ROAM board. This ensures
that the average input power of the IN port for the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal
to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 14 Test the optical power of the EXPI, Mn and OUT ports for the east ROAM by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss from the Mn port to the OUT port and the pass-through loss
from the EXPI port to the OUT port for the east ROAM.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the inside
VOA of the board
insertion loss of the ROAM board.
Step 16 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength optical power for each output
wavelength of the OUT port for east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength
should be less than 2 dB.
Step 18 Query the input and output optical power for the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
U2000. The difference between the values on the U2000 and the test values should be less than
2 dB.
Step 19 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT ports
of the east FIU, sees Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
----End
5.13.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)

ROADM station in the WSD9+WSM9 mode.
Prerequisites


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+WSM9)
Figure 5-30 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSD9+WSM9)
L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G
Station E
D40 M40
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
DM AM
West F EXPO F East
OBU1 WSD9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
To D TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT RC U To F
U
EXPI OUT
OBU1 WSM9 WSD9 OAU1
EXPO IN
RC OUT IN OUT TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT DCM IN
M40 D40
L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

VOA
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.
Procedure
fiber for the input port Rx on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.
Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the RM and OUT ports

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TC ports on
Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the
OLA.
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, from
the west FIU to the east FIU, and from east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the
U2000.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelength. Method 1 is recommended during
deployment commissioning.
The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength. This ensures
that the average input power of the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end meets the
requirements.
NOTE
After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN optical
port on the OTU. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the power.
Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the drop wavelength
of the WSD9 board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN port of the west
OTU at the receive end meets the requirements.
Step 10 Test the optical power of IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets the
requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.
Step 11 Adjust the optical power for the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is recommended
during deployment commissioning.
The WSD9 and the WSM9 automatically adjust the optical power for the west pass-through
wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths for the
IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
NOTE
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use the second method
to fine-tune the optical power.
Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSD9 and WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of
pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to
the typical input power of a single wavelength.
Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of the D40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the D40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
The insertion loss of D40 = the input optical power of D40 – the output optical power of D40

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-through loss
from the IN port to the EXPO port of the east WSD9.
NOTE
VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to or
less than 8 dB.
Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is recommended
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU.
This ensures that the average input power of add wavelengths for the IN port on the east
OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of single wavelength.
NOTE
port on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the optical power.
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through
wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical
input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRx, a VOA (in the solid frame)
NOTE
Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports of the WSM9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate the
pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.
NOTE
l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the
inside VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSM9 board should be equal
to or less than 8 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output wavelength of the
OUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength should
be less than 2 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
2 dB.
of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.
----End
5.13.9 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)

ROADM station in the WSD9+RMU9 mode.
Prerequisites


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+RMU9)
Figure 5-31 Fiber connections of ROADM station E on the OptiX OSN 8800
L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G
Station E
D40 MR8V
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 TM OUT
TOA
DM AM
F EXPO ROA F
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
I I
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
IN
OUT EXPI OUT

OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
ROA EXPO IN IN TC
RC OUT
IN AM DM RDC TDC
OUT TOA IN
MR8V D40
DCM
L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G
Station E
D40 MR8V
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
TOA
DM AM
F EXPO ROA F
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
I I
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
IN
OUT EXPI OUT

OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
ROA EXPO IN IN TC
RC OUT
IN AM DM RDC TDC
OUT TOA IN
MR8V D40
DCM
L L L L L L L L
Q O S O Q O S O
M G X G M G X G

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
L L L L L L L L
Q Q S Q Q Q S Q
M G X G M G X G
Station E
D40 MR4
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
TOA
DM AM
F TC OUT EXPO OUT F
ROA
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
I I
IN IN EXPI OUT RC U To F East
West To D U
IN
RC OUT EXPI IN
OUT
OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
OUT ROA EXPO IN
TC
IN AM DM RDC TDC
OUT TOA IN
MR4 D40
DCM
L L L L L L L L
Q Q S Q Q Q S Q
M G X G M G X G

VOA
NOTE
at the same time.
Procedure
Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation for the IN and TM ports on

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of the
OLA.
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, from
the west FIU to the east FIU on the U2000. Create the optical cross-connection from the east
OTU that is connected with RMU9 directly at the transmit end to the east FIU.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelengths. Method 1 is recommended during
The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop wavelength from the west
OTU. This ensures that the input power for the IN port of the west OTU at the receive end
is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
2. Method 2: Set the attenuation value of each drop channel of the WSD9 on the U2000.
Ensure that the input power for the IN port of the west OTU is equal to the typical input
power of a single wavelength.
Step 10 Test the optical power of the IN port on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meets
the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input port on the WDM side of the OTU.
Step 11 Test the input and output optical power of the west D40. Calculate the insertion loss of the D40
board, which should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
Step 12 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelengths. Method 1 is recommended
The WSD9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA for each pass-through
wavelength. This ensures that the input power of the single pass-through wavelength for
the OBU1 is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power required, use method 2 to fine-
tune the power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Test
the input power of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Manually set the
corresponding VOA of each pass-through wavelength of the west WSD9. This ensures that
the input power of the single pass-through wavelength for the OBU1 is equal to the typical
Step 13 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west WSD9 board by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DM port and the pass-through loss from
IN port to the EXPO port of the WSD9 board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
VOA of the board
l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to or
less than 8 dB.
Step 15 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths for the east OTU board (the OTU is directly
connected to the RMU9 board). Method 1 is recommended during deployment commissioning.
The RMU9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA for each add wavelength of each
east OTU. This ensures that the input power the single add wavelength of the OBU1 is
equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
port on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use method 2 to
fine-tune the optical power.
2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Test
the input power of east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer. M set the
corresponding VOA of each add wavelength for the east OTU in the east RMU9. This
ensures that the input power of the single add wavelength of the OBU1 is equal to the typical
Step 16 For wavelengths added through the RMU9 after the wavelengths are multiplexed by the MRx,
perform the following substeps:
NOTE
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, MR4 is considered as an example.
1. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MRx to
3 dB.
2. Set the VOA attenuation between the MRx and OTU to the minimum.
3. Determine the smallest input optical power value for wavelengths added through the MRx
to the IN port of the OBU1. Adjust the optical power for each of the other wavelengths to
the smallest input optical power value to flatten the optical power.
4. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MRx to
obtain the typical input power of a single wavelength of the OBU1 added through the MRx.
Step 17 Test the input and output optical power of MRx, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the MRx board must satisfy the following requirements.
l For the MR8V board, the insertion loss for the MR8V board should be equal to or less than
3.5 dB.
l For the MR4 board, the insertion loss for the MR4 board should be equal to or less than
1.5 dB.
Step 18 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the RMU9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 19 Calculate the insertion loss for each add wavelength from the AMn port to the OUT port.
Calculate the pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port for the RMU9.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
insertion loss of the RMU9 board.
Step 20 Test the optical power of the IN port and single wavelength for each output wavelength of the
OUT port for the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 21 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength
Step 22 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by using the
2 dB.
Step 23 For the optical power commissioning of the insertion loss calculation for the RC and the OUT
ports of the east FIU, see Step 13 and Step 14 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.
----End
5.13.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (RDU9+WSM9)

ROADM station in the RDU9+WSM9 mode.
Prerequisites

attenuator, VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram (Networking with RDU9+WSM9)
Figure 5-34 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with RDU9+WSM9)
L L L L L L
Q O Q O S O
M G M G X G
Station E
D40V M40
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
DM AM
IN
West F IN IN EXPO RC F East
OAU1 RDU9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
EXPI
To D U TC OUT OUT OUT U To F
OUT
OUT EXPI TC
OUT
OBU1 WSM9 RDU9 OAU1
RC EXPO IN
IN
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT DCM IN
M40 D40V
L L L L L L
Q O S O S O
M G X G X G

VOA
NOTE
at the same time.
Procedure
Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. See Step 1 in 5.13.3

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 The commissioning method for the west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of
the OLA station. For more information, see Step 12 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power
of OLA.
Step 8 Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to the west OTU at the receive end, from
the west FIU to the east FIU, and from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the
U2000.
Step 9 When wavelengths are dropped through the MR8V board or the D40V board, method 1 is
recommended to adjust the optical power for the west drop wavelengths during deployment
commissioning.
The MR8V board or the D40V board automatically adjusts the optical power for the drop
wavelength. This ensures that the average input power for the IN port of the west OTU at
the receive end meets requirements.
NOTE
2. Method 2: In the scenario where the RDU9 is directly connected to the OTU, select
Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the U2000. Manually adjust the
attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the drop wavelength of the RDU9 board.
This ensures that the average input power of the IN port for the west OTU at the receive
end meets the requirements.
Step 11 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength. Method 1 is recommended during
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength.
This ensures that the average input power of the pass-through wavelengths of the IN port
on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single
wavelength.
NOTE
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through
wavelengths of the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input
power of a single wavelength.
Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO port for the west RDU9 board by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of D40V, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the D40V board should be equal to or less than 8.0 dB.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn port and the pass-through loss
from the IN port to the EXPO port for the east RDU9.
NOTE
l For the insertion loss of the RDU9 board, refer to the Product Description.
Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength for the east OTU. Method 1 is recommended
The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength for the east OTU.
This ensures that the average input power for the add wavelengths of the IN port on the
east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-through
wavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of the pass-
through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the
typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the D40V, a VOA (in the solid frame)
Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of the M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The
insertion loss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.
Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT ports for the WSM9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn port to the OUT port. Calculate the
pass-through loss from the EXPI port to the OUT port of the WSM9.
NOTE
l When the attenuation for the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss for the WSM9 board should be
equal to or less than 8 dB.
Step 19 Test the optical power of the IN port and the single wavelength for each output wavelength for
the OUT port of the east OBU1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength
Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OBU1 by using the
2 dB.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5.13.11 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD4

+WSMD4)
ROADM station in the WSMD4+WSMD4 mode.
Prerequisites
l The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.
l The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the WSMD4 board. In this section, the
networking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used for illustration purposes. The
network providing multi-dimensional grooming can be considered as multiple networks
providing two-dimensional grooming.
Figure 5-35 Fiber connections of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)
Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN TC RC OUT
DM4
OBU1 OAU1
West To D I WSMD4 WSMD4 I To F East
OUT
U RC AM4 TC U IN
IN
OBU1 DM4 OBU1
OUT IN OUT DM1 AM1 OUT IN
AM1 DM1
OBU
OBU
D40 M40 M40 D40
L L L L
O S O S
G X G X

VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l In this diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports for the WSMD4 board are not shown.
The two pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in other direction.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical
Step 7 The commissioning method for west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that for the
OLA station. For specific procedures, see Step 12 in 5.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of
OLA.
Step 8 Create a Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and create
one from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the U2000.
Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power for the west OTUs
NOTE
l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the
dashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical
amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required.
l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD module
is configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required.
Instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured.
l The previous commissioning method is for the OTU board with a PIN photodiode. For the OTU with
APD, a 10 dB fixed attenuator needs to be configured.
l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific module type can be
identified by the bar code information pasted on the front panel. The APD had a corresponding APD
warning identifier on the panel of the board.
Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD4 with an optical power
meter. Test the output optical power for the D40.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west WSMD4, and
calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less
than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
l For the WSMD4 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero +
Attenuation value of the internal VOA of the board.
insertion loss for the WSMD4 board.
Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the WSMD4.
Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.
The WSMD4 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength of the east
OTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of
pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal to
NOTE
tune the power.
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD4 board. This ensures
that the average input power of the IN port for the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal
Step 14 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD4 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to the OUT port
for the east WSMD4.
Step 16 Test the single wavelength optical power of the IN port and single wavelength optical power of
each output wavelength for the OUT port of the east OAU1 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer.
Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the OAU1. The gain flatness for each wavelength
Step 18 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal for the OAU1 by using the
2 dB.
----End

+WSMD2)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
The fiber connections must be correct.
To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with services or must be
forced to emit light.

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal analyzer (selected
according to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET analyzer, Fixed optical attenuator,
Variable optical attenuator, U2000

Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN TC OUT EXPO OUT RC OUT

OAU1 OBU1
F IN IN EXPI IN OUT F
West To DI WSMD2 WSMD2 I To F East
U RC EXPI TC U
OUT OUT IN IN
OBU1 EXPO OAU1
OUT IN DM AM OUT IN
AM DM
D40 M40 M40 D40
L L L L
O S O S
G X G X
Procedure
Step 1 Check if the fiber connection between boards is correct based on the fiber connection diagram,
and check that the fiber on each board is well inserted. If not, immediately correct the error.
Step 2 Test the optical power of the west FIU and the SC2. See step 1 to step 9 in 5.13.3 Commissioning
Step 3 Perform the commissioning on the west OAU. See step 10 to step 12 in5.13.3 Commissioning
Step 4 Create optical cross-connections on a per-NE basis from the west FIU. Create optical cross-
connections on a per-NE basis from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the
U2000.
Step 5 Measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the IN port and the single-wavelength
output optical power at the DM and EXPO ports on the west WSMD2. Calculate the insertion
loss of the wavelength dropped from the IN port to the DM port and the insertion loss of the
wavelength that traverses from the IN port to the DM port on the WSMD2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Drop insertion loss = Input optical power for a single drop wavelength at the IN port on the
WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single drop wavelength at the DM port on the WSMD2
Pass-through loss = Input optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the IN port on
the WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the EXPO port on
the WSMD2
NOTE
For information about the parameters of optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description.
Step 6 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the IN port
and the single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port on the west D40. Calculate the
insertion loss of the D40.
Single-wavelength insertion loss of the D40 = Single-wavelength input optical power at the IN
port on the D40 – Single-wavelength output optical power at the Dn port on the D40
Step 7 Test the input optical power from the IN port on all the west OTU boards. Replace or remove
the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power from the IN port on the OTU
boards is within the optimal range: from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload point – 5) dBm.
Step 8 Test the client-side transmitting optical power of the west OTU board. There are two possible
situations, described as follows:
l If the client equipment is also newly installed, connect the OTU boards to the client equipment
for test.
l If the client equipment is not connected, use a fiber to connect the client-side TX port on the
west OTU board to the client-side RX port on the east OTU board of station C by using a
fixed optical attenuator on the ODF.
NOTE
The client side of the OTU board is connected to the client equipment normally after commissioning. The
interconnection of the OTU boards exists for the testing of 24-hour bit errors in serial after an analyzer is
connected to station A after commissioning.
Step 9 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the input optical power of the east OBU. On the U2000, set
the attenuation of the VOA which corresponds to each wavelength on the east WSMD4. Set the
attenuation to ensure that the input optical power for each pass-through wavelength of the OBU
conforms to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
The single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU permits a tolerance of ±1 dB. For the technical
specifications for the OBU board, see the Product Description.
Step 10 Measure the optical power at the RX port on the east OTU board. Add, replace or remove a fixed
optical attenuator to ensure that the optical power at this RX port is within the optimal range:
from (sensitivity + 3) dBm to (overload – 5) dBm.
NOTE
Optical ports on the OTU board used in this network scenario are the S-64.2b ports. For client-side
specifications for other types of OTUs, see the Product Description.
Step 11 Measure the output optical power at the OUT port on the east OTU board. This value should be
in the range from 0 dBm to –5 dBm. This value is usually about –2 dBm.
Step 12 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the received single-wavelength optical power at the Mn
port and the single-wavelength output optical power at the OUT port on the east M40. Calculate
the insertion loss of the M40.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
For the parameters for optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description.
Step 13 Use a spectrum analyzer to measure the input optical power at the IN port on the east OBU. On
the U2000, set the attenuation of the VOA which corresponds to each wavelength on the east
WSMD2. Set the attenuation to ensure that the input optical power for each add wavelength of
the OBU conforms to the typical input power of a single wavelength.
NOTE
The single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU permits a tolerance of ±1 dB. For the technical
specifications of the OBU board, see Product Description.
Step 14 Measure the single-wavelength input optical power at the AM and EXPI ports and the single-
wavelength output optical power at the OUT port on the east WSMD2. Calculate the insertion
loss of the wavelength added from the AM port to the OUT port, and the insertion loss of the
wavelength that traverses from the AM port to OUT port on the WSMD2.
Add insertion loss = Input optical power of a single add wavelength at the AM port on the
WSMD2 – Output optical power of a single add wavelength at the OUT port on the WSMD2
Pass-through loss = Input optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the EXPI port
on the WSMD2 – Output optical power for a single pass-through wavelength at the OUT port
on the WSMD2
NOTE
For the parameters for optical power and insertion loss, see the Product Description. The insertion loss
measured in the previous steps includes the VOA attenuation, which differs from the insertion loss
measured when the VOA attenuation is set to 0.
Step 15 Perform the commissioning on the east OBU. See 5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End
Optical Power of the OTM Station.
Step 16 Perform the commissioning on the east FIU. See 5.13.2 Commissioning Transmit-End Optical
Power of the OTM Station.
----End

+WSMD9)
Prerequisites
To make the OTU emit light normally, all channels must be accessed with services or must be
forced to emit light.

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber adapter, Fiber, Signal analyzer (selected
according to the actual service type), such as SDH/SONET analyzer, Fixed optical attenuator,
Variable optical attenuator, U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)

This section describes the commissioning procedure based on the network in Figure 5-37. If the
system is required to support the 1588 clock, see 5.11.5 Commissioning Optical Power of
ROADM Board (WSMD4+WSMD4) for the commissioning procedure.
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
D40 M40
DCM DCM
DM1 AM1
TM EXPI OUT TM
RX RX
RM RM
EXPO IN

LOUT
AM1 DM1
DCM DCM
M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Check the fiber connection for each board according to the fiber connection diagram. The optical
Step 2 Test the optical power of the LIN port on the west DAS1 with an optical power meter. Compare
the value with optical power of the OUT port on the east FIU of station D to calculate the line
attenuation between station D and station E on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is larger
than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine whether
the cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty, clear the
fault by following the appropriate procedures.
Step 3 Test the input optical power of the LIN port and the output optical power of the TM port on the
west DAS1 at 1510nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values
in the commissioning record.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Calculate the insertion loss from the LIN port to the TM port of the west DAS1. The insertion
Step 5 Test the input optical power of the RX port on the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Add a proper attenuator to make the input optical power less than –3 dBm. Record the input
optical power of the RX port in the commissioning record.
Step 6 Test the output optical power of the TX port of the DAS1 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Record the output optical power of the TX port in the commissioning record.
Step 7 Test the input optical power of the RM port and the output optical power of the LOUT port on
the east DAS1 at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer (when disconnecting the fiber
to the SIN port of the DAS1 board). Record the optical power values in the commissioning
record.
Step 8 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the LOUT port on the east DAS1. The insertion
Step 9 Measure the optical power of each wavelength at the SOUT port on the DAS1 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer. Check whether the average output optical power of a single wavelength is
in the range of nominal optical power of a single wavelength ± 2 dB.
Step 10 Create a single-station optical cross-connection from the west DAS1 to the east DAS1, and create
one from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east DAS1 on the U2000.
Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power for the west OTUs
Step 13 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn ports for the west WSMD9 with an optical power
meter. Test the output optical power for the D40.
Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN port to the DMn ports for the west WSMD9, and
calculate the insertion loss for the D40. The insertion loss for the D40 should be equal to or less
than 6.5 dB.
NOTE
l For the WSMD9 board, Insertion Loss = Insertion Loss when the inside attenuation is zero + Attenuation
value of the internal VOA of the board.
insertion loss for the WSMD9 board.
Step 15 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths for the WSMD9.
Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.
The WSMD9 automatically adjusts the optical power for the add wavelength of the east
OTU and the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of
pass-through wavelengths for the IN port on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal to
NOTE
tune the power.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Manually adjust the attenuation value for each VOA inside the WSMD9 board. This ensures
that the average input power of the IN port for the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal
Step 16 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT ports for the east WSMD9 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 17 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through loss from the AMn port to the OUT port
for the east WSMD9.
Step 18 Test the single wavelength optical power of the SIN port and single wavelength optical power
of each output wavelength for the LOUT port of the east DAS1 by using an optical spectrum
analyzer.
Step 19 Calculate the gain of each wavelength for the DAS1. The gain flatness of each wavelength must
be lower than 2 dB.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
6 Remotely Commissioning Optical Power
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to remotely commission optical power.
6.1 General Commissioning Sequence

This section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power.
6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power Commissioning
When remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical power for each
channel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing board. Then adjust the optical power
by changing the attenuation of VOAs built in the board and the gain of an optical amplifier board.
6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the Chain Network
This section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power commissioning
procedures.
6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long Spans
This section describes how to commission a system with ultra-long spans.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.1 General Commissioning Sequence

This section describes the general sequence for commissioning optical power.
Basic Conditions for Remotely Commissioning Optical Power

l The EVOA configured on the main optical path must be an EVOA board (VA1 or VA4).
l MCA/OPM boards must be configured at optical power monitoring points so that you can
query and analyze the optical spectrum through the U2000.
l Optical fibers on the entire network are properly connected. The attenuation of the optical
fibers is normal and the communication between all NEs and the U2000 is normal.
General Sequence for Commissioning Optical Power

Optical power of NEs and boards is commissioned individually based on the optical signal flow.
During commissioning, ensure that the line attenuation is normal based on the optical power,
gain, and insertion loss requirements for each board.
Generally, the optical power of the OTU board, optical amplifier (OA), and the supervisory
channel board is commissioned based on the corresponding optical power requirements for the
boards.
Optical Power Commissioning Procedures

Figure 6-1 shows the commissioning procedure.
NOTE
If the line attenuation is greater than the End of Life (EOL) specified in the design drawing, check the internal
fiber connections and external fiber attenuators.
If the customer raises specific requirements on fiber margin and provides the measured value: the line attenuation
≤ EOL – required fiber margin.
If the customer provides only the EOL, it is required that the line attenuation only be smaller than the EOL.
Figure 6-1 General commissioning flow

Commission optical power of
add wavelengths
Commission links
Equilibrate optical power
Commission receive optical

power of OTUs

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Before commissioning the optical power, determine optical power monitoring sites and optical
power commissioning stations on the network according to Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Distribution of the stations for commissioning

Power adjusting Power Power adjusting Power Power adjusting Power
station (in add monitoring station monitoring station (in add monitoring
direction) station station direction) station
MCA\ MCA\ MCA\

OSA OSA OSA
OTM OLA OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTM

Line attenuation commissioning Line attenuation commissioning
Optical power equilibrium Optical power equilibrium
OSA: Optical Spectrum Analyzer MCA: Spectrum Analyzer Unit
NOTE
Consider the OTM, FOADM and ROADM stations as the optical power commissioning stations. As the optical
power for pass-through wavelengths on the FOADM stations cannot be commissioned for equalization purposes,
consider the FOADM stations as fibers during commissioning.
NOTE
If the optical power monitoring point is settled at the OTM or OADM station, the optical power of the OLA
stations does not need to be adjusted.
NOTE
To achieve optical power equilibrium, the network needs to be divided according to the network model, the start
and end stations should be specified, and the power-adjusting stations should be determined. When determining
what stations will have optical power adjustment monitoring, adhere to the following principles:
l If the number of spans between two power-adjusting stations is N, determine the power-monitoring station
in the middle of the span (N/2). If N is an odd number, the power-monitoring point should be shifted (N/
2±0.5). And configure MCA or OPM8 boards at the transmit and received ends as required.
NOTE
OPM8 boards are recommended.
The WDM system commissions the optical power for each NE individually based on the signal
flow in each network segment. One network segment has two signal flow directions, the transmit
direction and the receive direction.
First, complete the optical power commissioning of one OTM in the transmit direction. Then
individually commission the optical power for each downstream NE. Complete the optical power
commissioning of the destination OTM in the receive direction. Finally, complete the optical
power commissioning for the other signal flow in the reverse direction.
Project X is used as an example to introduce the optical power commissioning in the following
procedures:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.1.1 Commissioning Procedure for the Chain Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the chain network.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.
Network Diagram for the Chain Network

Figure 6-3 shows the commissioning procedure for the chain network.
Figure 6-3 Commissioning procedure for the chain network

13 12 11 10 9 8
West MCA MCA MCA East
OTM OLA ROADM OLA FOADM OLA OTM
A B C D E F G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
: OTM : OLA : OADM
First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of OTM station A. Then
commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow until the optical power
commissioning is complete in the west-to-east direction. For the commissioning sequence, see
Figure 6-3 (steps 1 through 7). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction, that
is, in the east-to-west direction. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-3 (steps 7 through
13).
Commission the optical power along the A-B-C-D-E-F-G signal flow in the following sequence.
NOTE
For the technical specifications for each amplifier board and the OTU board, see Quick Reference Table of the
Units in the Hardware Description.
Commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and then commission the links:
l At station A, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths to ensure that the input
optical power for the OA at the transmit end is consistent with the nominal input optical
power for the OA.
l At station B, commission the B-from-A optical power to ensure that the input optical power
for the OA is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l At station C, commission the C-from-B optical power to ensure that the input optical power
for the OA at the receive end is consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station C, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the pass-through
wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is
consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station D, commission the D-from-C optical power to ensure that the input optical power
l At station E, commission the E-from-D optical power to ensure that the input optical power
l At station E, commission the optical power for the add wavelengths and the pass-through
wavelengths to ensure that the input optical power for the OA at the transmit end is
consistent with the nominal input optical power for the OA.
l At station F, commission the F-from-E optical power to ensure that the input optical power
l At station G, commission the G-from-F optical power to ensure that the input optical power
Equilibrate the optical power:

l If the MCA board is configured at station B, commission the optical power for the add
wavelengths at station A for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the MCA
board at station B. This ensures that:
Single-wavelength output optical power = (Nominal single-wavelength output power ± 1)
dBm
l If the MCA board is configured at station D, commission the optical power for the add
wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths at station C for the equilibrium based on the
optical power tested by the MCA board at station D. This ensures that:
dBm
l If the MCA board is configured at station F, commission the optical power for the add
wavelengths at station E for the equilibrium based on the optical power tested by the MCA
board at station F. This ensures that:
dBm
Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs:

l Commission the receive optical power of the OTUs to be in the nominal range of the receive
optical power along the A-C-E-G span.
6.1.2 Commissioning Procedure for the Ring Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the ring network.
Prerequisites
Network Diagram for the Ring Network

Figure 6-4 shows the commissioning procedure for the ring network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-4 Commissioning procedure for the ring network
19 18 17
11
9 10
1 2 3
A MCA C
12 8 MCA H D MCA 4 16
G MCA E
7 6 5
13 14 15
: OLA : OADM
NOTE
When the commissioning of 1–10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the power-monitoring
sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power of each single wavelength meets the equilibrium
requirement, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal output optical power of a single wavelength
plus or minus 1.0 dB, perform the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is, steps 11 through 19.
If the optical power of any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirement, re-commission the optical power in
a clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the commissioning in a counter-clockwise
direction until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium requirements.
Before commissioning a ring network, select the start station and end station according to the
following principle:
l The start station or end station should be a station which adds or drops wavelengths.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
First, commission the optical power in the transmit direction of ROADM station A. Commission
the optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated by arrows in the figure. For
the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-4 (steps 1 through 10). Then commission the optical
power in the reverse direction station by station. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure
6-4 (steps 11 through 19).
For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning procedures on the chain
network.
6.1.3 Commissioning Procedure for the Mesh Network

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.
Prerequisites
The fiber connection and Network configuration must be complete.
Network Diagram for the Mesh Network

Figure 6-5 shows the commissioning procedure for the mesh network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-5 Commissioning procedure for the mesh network
19 18 17
11
9 10
1 2 3
30 32
A MCA C
20 29 B
K
MCA
28
J
31 21
MCA H D MCA
12 8 4 16
27
I 26
22
MCA
F 23
G E
MCA
25 24
7 6 5
13 14 15
: OLA : OADM
NOTE
When the commissioning of steps 1 through 10 is complete, check the spectrum analysis results on the power-
monitoring sites in the B-D-F-H sequence. If the output optical power for each single wavelength meets the
equilibrium requirements, that is, the measured output optical power is the nominal output optical power of a
single wavelength plus or minus 1.0 dB, perform the commissioning in a counter-clockwise direction, that is,
steps 11 through 19. If the optical power for any board fails to meet the equilibrium requirements, re-commission
the optical power in a clockwise direction, that is, steps 1 through 10. Do not proceed with the commissioning
in a counter-clockwise direction until the optical power for every board meets equilibrium requirements.
Before commissioning the mesh network, divide the mesh network into chain subnets and ring
subnets. Then commission the subnets. Divide the mesh network according to the following
principles:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Divide the mesh network into ring and chain subnets according to the wavelength
connection. The ring subnets should carry the most wavelength connections, and the chain
subnets should carry the least wavelength connections. Determine the ring subnets first and
then the chain subnets.
l Divide the mesh networks into large-scale ring subnets and small-scale chain subnets when
possible.
l When dividing the mesh network is complete, select the start and end stations for each ring
subnet. For other principles, see the corresponding commissioning requirements on the ring
network.
Divide the mesh network shown in Figure 6-5 as follows:

l Ring subnet: A-B-C-D-E-F-G-H-A
Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow indicated by the
arrows in Figure 6-5 (steps 1 through 10). Then, commission the optical power in the
reverse direction station by station. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps
11 through 19).
l Chain subnet: A-K-J-I-E
Commission the optical power station by station along the signal flow. For the
commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 20 through 24). When commissioning the
optical power for the chain network is complete, the optical power at station E changes.
Therefore, you need to measure and analyze the optical power between the adjacent D and
F stations. In addition, you need to re-commission the optical power at station E for
equilibrium purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 24 through
26). Then commission the optical power in the reverse direction along the signal flow. For
the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps 27 through 30). Measure and analyze
the optical power between station H and station B. At station A, commission the optical
power for equilibrium purposes. For the commissioning sequence, see Figure 6-5 (steps
30 through 32).
For details on the commissioning, see the corresponding commissioning procedures on the chain
network.
6.2 Common Operations Required for Optical Power

Commissioning
When remotely commissioning optical power of a board, measure the optical power for each
channel on the board by using an optical spectrum analyzing board. Then adjust the optical power
by changing the attenuation of VOAs built in the board and the gain of an optical amplifier board.
6.2.1 Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards

This section describes how to set the gain and Rated Optical Power for an optical amplifier
(OA) board.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NM operator authority or higher.
The board must be created.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Impact on System
None

U2000
l OAU and OBU are OA boards that support gain adjustment. In practical use, calculate the
gain range that can be set based on the intermediate insertion loss.
NOTE
Adjust the gain of the OBU board only when the ALC function is used.
l Before enabling the OPA function, set the value in the Rated Optical Power field of the
OA board at the transmit end as the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.
Procedure
1. On the U2000, set the gain for an OA board.
a. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of the NE is displayed.
b. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
d. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
e. On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click Nominal Gain field, and enter an
appropriate value.
f. Click Apply.
2. On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power for an OA board.
a. Select the desired OA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
b. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
c. On the Advanced Attributes tab page, set the value in the Rated Optical Power field
as the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.
NOTE
For the technical specifications for each type of the OA boards, see Quick Reference Table of the
d. Click Apply.
3. On the U2000, close the laser at the OUT port on the OA board.
Function Tree.
c. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Laser Status to Off.
d. Click Apply.
4. On the U2000, enable the laser at the OUT port on the OA board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Function Tree.
c. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Laser Status to On.
d. Click Apply.
6.2.2 Adjusting Internal Attenuators on Boards

When a board has an internal attenuator, you can adjust the optical power of this board by
changing the attenuation of the internal attenuator. This section describes how to adjust the
attenuation based on engineering design documents.
Prerequisites
Impact on System
None

U2000
The electrical variable attenuator boards are the VA1, VA4, M40V, MR8V, ROAM, RMU9,
WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD9 and WSMD2 boards.
NOTE
l The variable attenuator built in the WSM9 or WSD9 board can be adjusted only when the board has been
configured with routes.
l The variable attenuator built in the AMx port of the WSMD2 or WSMD4 board can be adjusted only when
the board has been configured with routes.
Procedure
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology. The Running Status of
the NE is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand
Function Tree.
4. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Channel from the drop-down list.
5. On the Basic Attributes tab page, double-click the Optical Interface Attenuation
Ratio field, and then enter an appropriate value.
NOTE
The adjustable range of the built-in attenuator for a board depends on the board type.
6. Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.2.3 Configuring the MCA Board

This section describes how to set the parameters for an MCA board so that it monitors the optical
power for the specified channels.
Prerequisites
Impact on System
None

U2000
The MCA boards include the MCA4 ,MCA8 and OPM8 boards.
Procedure
1. Set parameters for an MCA board to monitor the optical power of wavelengths.
b. Right-click an NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Select the desired MCA board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
d. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Monitor Wavelength from the drop-
down list.
e. Click Query.
f. Set Wavelength Monitor Status of the specified wavelength to Monitor or No
Monitor as required.
g. Click Apply.
2. Query the optical power and OSNR of the wavelengths on the specified channels by using
an MCA board.
a. Select the desired MCA board, and then choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum
Analysis from the Function Tree.
b. Select the number for the desired channel from Port Number, and click Query.
6.2.4 Setting the Board Relay Mode for the Line Boards
This section describes how to set the board relay mode for the Line boards.
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Impact on System
None

U2000
The board works either in Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When the optical-
layer ASON is applied, however, the board must work in Optical Relay Mode. When there is
no optical-layer ASON applied, the board can work in either electrical relay mode or optical
relay mode. But, it is recommended that the board be configured to work in electrical relay mode.
NOTE
For the line boards that support the regeneration mode, see the Hardware Description.
Procedure
2. Right-click and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired line board, and then choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
4. Click By Board/Port(Channel), and select Board from the drop-down list.
5. Set Board Mode to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.
NOTE
The board mode can be set to either Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. When optical-layer
ASON is applied, however, the board mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode. When there is no optical-
layer ASON applied, the board can work in either electrical relay mode or optical relay mode. But, it is
recommended that the board be configured to work in electrical relay mode.
6. Click Apply.
6.3 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on the

Chain Network
This section uses project X as an example to illustrate the optical power commissioning
procedures.

This section describes the networking for project X.
Figure 6-6 shows the networking diagram of project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E, F and G are
the WDM systems which form the chain network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A and ONE G
are the OTM stations, the ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations, the ONE C is the
ROADM station and the ONE E is the FOADM station.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Networking Diagram of the Project X

Figure 6-6 shows the networking diagram of project X.
Figure 6-6 Networking diagram of project X

13 12 11 10 9 8
A B C D E F G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
:OTM :OLA : OADM
In this commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is used as an example to
illustrate the commissioning procedure. The commissioning method for the signal flow from
east to west is the same as the signal flow from west to east.
Figure 6-7 shows the commissioning procedure.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-7 General commissioning flow of project X
OPA function is
OTM\FOADM
available in the ROADM?
No Yes
Commission optical power of add Commission optical power of add

wavelengths wavelengths
Force one OTU to emit light

Set "Rated Optical Power" to
and close WDM-side lasers of
typical input optical power of a
other OTUs
single wavelength for the OA
Preset VOA or VA1 of add

wavelengths of multiplexer board
as 5 dB In the station, set
the "OPA Mode" to "Auto"
Adjust VOA or VA1 before

OA or gain of OA so that the
output optical power reaches the In the station, set
nominal optical power the "OPA Mode" to "Manual"
Commission links
Preset VOA or VA1 of links
Adjust the gain of the line

amplifier to compensate the line
attenuation
Equilibrate optical power
Make sure that the overall

optical power of the multiplexed
wavelength is constant and
adjust VOA or VA1 of each add
wavelength for power equilibrium
of each wavelength
Commission receive optical

power of OTUs
Measure the receive optical

power of each OTU and adjust
VOA or VA1 of the channel so
that the receive optical power of
the OTU meets requirements

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Table 6-1 shows the incident optical power requirements based on a 10Gbit/s single-wavelength
system.
Table 6-1 Requirements on Incident Optical Power
Module Type Number of G.652 SSMF G.655 LEAF G.653

Wavelengths
NRZ/(D)RZ 40 +4 +4 -5
80 +1 +1 -7
The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm.
NOTE
For other optical modules or fiber types, contact the product managers or network design personnel to determine
the incident optical power.
NOTE
The dispersion of G.653 fiber is close to zero, which causes strong non-linear effects. Therefore, the incident
power is relatively low. Hence, in the WDM system based on the G.653 fiber, a variable optical attenuator
(VOA) must be added at the output end of the transmit optical amplifier board. This ensures the per-channel
incident optical power meets the requirement of the G.653 fiber.
OAU
FIU
OAU
: VOA
6.3.2 Commissioning Procedure

This section describes the procedure for commissioning optical power.
Commissioning Procedure for the Add-Wavelength and Link Optical Power

Table 6-2 lists the procedure for each site.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 6-2 Commissioning procedures

Proced From West to East
ure
1 2 (OLA) 3 4 (OLA) 5 6 (OLA) 7
(OTM) (ROAD (FOAD (OTM)
M) M)
Commis Y N Y N Y N N
sioning
Optical
Power
for the
Add
Wavelen
gths
Commis N Y Y Y Y Y Y
sion
links
NOTE
l “Y” indicates that the commissioning procedure should be performed.

l “N” indicates that the procedure need not be performed.
NOTE
The optical power for single channel is not optimized at this step, but during equalization.
NOTE
Before starting, set the attenuation of DEMUX to maximum, if EVOA is available.
The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of the OTM/OADM is shown in Figure
6-8.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-8 Commissioning procedure for OTM/OADM optical power

Start
N Configure the E2E OCH trail

OPA is
of ROADM node if ROADM is
available?
there
Y
Block all wavelengths except
one local added wavelength
Configure the E2E OCH trail
Set OA Gain to minimum

Set reference OA power by if variable Gain OA
NMS
Adjust input power of local

Enable OPA of ROADM node wavelength to target power
(OPA set attenuation of
EVOA to calculated value)
Release all the blocked
traffic which is going to
Set OPA to manual downstream
End
The commissioning flowchart for the optical power of an OLA is shown in Figure 6-9.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-9 Commissioning procedure for OLA optical power

Start
Calculate and set the target Y

attenuation according to the Design loss <
design span loss minimum Gain OA?
Set EVOA at the receive end

to Minimum
Span loss is less than

N
design data? Check fiber
Span loss is more than N Set VOA make

minimum gain of OA? Span loss=Min gain
Set OA Gain=Span loss
End
Commissioning Procedure for Optical Power Equalization

Table 6-3 lists the procedures for each site.

ure
1 2 (OLA) 3 4 (OLA) 5 6 (OLA) 7
M) M)
Equalize Y Ya Y Ya Yb Ya N
optical
power

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE

l “a” indicates that the OLA station works as a monitoring station during the commissioning process of
commissioning the optical power for equilibrium purposes.
l “b” indicates that the optical power for each add channel at the FOADM station is commissioned for
equalization purposes.
The commissioning flowchart for equalizing wavelength optical power is shown in Figure
6-10.
Figure 6-10 Commissioning procedure for equalizing wavelength optical power

Start
Query the power level of

each channel at monitor site
Compare to the reference

level and get target
attenuation set
Set EVOA by NMS
N
Is flatness in range of
target?
N
Is the last OEQ in
equalization order?
End
Commissioning Procedure for Drop-Wavelength Optical Power

Table 6-4 lists the procedures for each site.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ure
1 2 (OLA) 3 4 (OLA) 5 6 (OLA) 7
M) M)
Commis Y N Y N Y N Y
sion
receive
optical
power of
OTUs
NOTE

The commissioning flowchart for drop wavelength optical power is shown in Figure 6-11.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-11 Commissioning procedure for drop wavelength optical power
Start
N
Is EVOA available?
Y
Set default attenuation by
NMS
Query input Power of OTU by

NMS
Y Is it in recommended
range?
Go to the site to change the

N fixed attenuator or adjust
Is EVOA available? attenuation of MVOA until the
power is inside the
recommended range
Y
Adjust the EVOA until the
power is inside the
recommended range
End
6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at

OTM Station A
This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A that is in the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite
The ECC communication must be created.
The commissioning of the optical supervisory channel must be complete.
The optical cross-connections must be configured at each station.

U2000
For the technical specifications of each type of the boards, see Quick Reference Table of the
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-12 Fiber connections of OTM station A
Station A
Rx M31
OTU
M32
M OUT OUT
OTU
4 OAU1
0 To B
IN RC OUT
M40
V
OTU
TM RM F
SC1 I
RM TM
U
Tx D31
OTU
D32
OTU D
4 OAU1 From B
0
IN OUT TC IN
D40 DCM
OTU RDC TDC

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-12, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, you must configure the MVOA
and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Laser Shutdown to Disabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE

Function from the Main Topology.
2. Click from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree.
Select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button.
3. In the row of Laser Shutdown under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Disabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light and close WDM-side lasers for the
other OTUs.
NOTE
After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser of the OTU is automatically enabled and
is forced to emit light.
1. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE A is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-
hand Function Tree.
4. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to Off. Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 1: An EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel to 5 dB.
NOTE
The EVOA attenuation set at this point is the preset value. It is used to adjust the optical power of each wavelength
during commissioning of the optical power equilibrium.
1. Select the desired M40V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to 5dB.
3. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed telling you that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
Step 2 On the U2000, set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain.
1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain to 20.0dB.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
The OAU101 is used as an example of the OAU1. The minimum nominal gain is 20 dB, and the nominal single-
wavelength input optical power is –16 dB (40 channels). For the technical specifications of the amplifier, see
Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction.
1. Select the desired OAU1 board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power
Management from the left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click Query to query the Input Power of the OAU1.
3. A prompt is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the VA1 board (EVOA) so that the actual input optical power of the
OAU1 reaches about -16 dBm, based on the Input Power of the OAU1 queried by using the
U2000.
1. Select the desired VA1 board (EVOA), and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the left-hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the desired
value.
3. Click Apply.
NOTE
If the input optical power of the OAU cannot meet the requirements after adjusting the attenuation of the
VA1, you can adjust the gain of the OAU to ensure that the output optical power meets requirements.
NOTE
In the Basic Attributes tab, Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) and Nominal Gain Lower Threshold
(dB) indicate the adjustable range of the gain of the OAU1.
Step 5 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers for the other OTUs.

1. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-
hand Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On.
3. Click Apply.
Step 6 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.

Select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button.
3. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
----End
Scenario 2: No EVOA Is Installed Before the Optical Amplifier Board

Step 1 On the U2000, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at each add wavelength channel
to 10 dB.
Step 2 Set the gain of the OAU1 to the minimum nominal gain.
Step 3 Query the input optical power of the OAU1 in the transmit direction.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA for the M40V at the add wavelength channel so that the
input optical power of the OAU1 reaches the nominal input optical power, based on the input
optical power of the OAU1 queried by using the U2000.
Step 5 Shut down the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU
that accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform the commissioning based on Step 1 through
Step 4.
Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths based on the preceding steps.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 Step 7 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the other OTUs.

1. Select the desired OTU boards, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. WDM-side Laser Status is set to On. Click Apply.
Step 8 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
Then select the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow
button.
3. In the Laser Shutdown row under Operation Type, set Auto Disabling to Enabled.
4. Click Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
----End
6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station B that is in the west-
to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of the board, see Quick Reference Table of the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-13 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OAU1)
Station B
DCM
TDC RDC
TC OUT
RC
IN
OAU1
IN OUT
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U
West East
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM

EVOA
Figure 6-14 Fiber connections of OLA station B (OBU1+OBU1)
Station B
TC IN OUT D IN OUT RC
OBU1 C OBU1
IN M OUT
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
West East
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-13 and Figure 6-14, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1
or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and
then perform the optical power commissioning on site.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The preset values for the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input optical
power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference
Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Scenario 1: Commissioning for the OLA (OAU1) Networking

Step 1 Calculate the link attenuation for this span of optical transmission line based on the engineering
design documents provided by the client.
Step 2 You should preset the attenuation of the VA1 located before the amplifier by using the following
formula: Attenuation of the VA1 = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstream
station - link attenuation - Nominal input optical power of the amplifier at the OLA station.
NOTE
If the calculated preset value is a negative number, preset the attenuation of the VA1 to the minimum attenuation.
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical Power
of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 3 Query the output optical power (Pout) of the OA at the upstream station A and input optical
power (Pin) of the OA at the downstream station B. Calculate the attenuation between the two
amplifiers according to the following formula: Attenuation between the two amplifiers = Pout
– Pin.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Querying the optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical Power
Step 4 If the actual attenuation between amplifiers is smaller than the attenuation specified in the
engineering design document, increase the attenuation of the VA1 so that the input optical power
reaches the minimum nominal input optical power. If the actual attenuation between amplifiers
is greater than the attenuation specified in the engineering design document, decrease the
attenuation of the VA1 so that the input optical power of the amplifier reaches the nominal input
optical power.
NOTE
For the technical specifications of each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the
Hardware Description.
Step 5 See Step 3, and calculate the attenuation between amplifiers after adjustment.
Step 6 Set the gain of the amplifier according to the following formula: Gain of the amplifier = Nominal
output optical power of the amplifier at the station - Nominal output optical power of the
amplifier at the upstream station + Attenuation between amplifiers.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Nominal Gain according to the following formula:
Gain of the amplifier = Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the station -
Nominal output optical power of the amplifier at the upstream station + Attenuation
between amplifiers.
3. Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 Optional: If the calculated gain exceeds the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU, the
output optical power of the OA cannot reach the nominal output optical power. Therefore, set
the gain to the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU.
NOTE
Maximum gain that can be set = Maximum gain of the OA - Intermediate insertion loss. Intermediate insertion
loss = Output optical power of the PAOUT optical port - Input optical power of the BAIN optical port.
2. In the Basic Attributes tab, click Query. Check Nominal Gain Upper Threshold and
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold to obtain the tunable range of the gain for the OAU1.
3. Choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from the left-hand Function Tree.
4. Click Query. Query and record the value of Output Power of PAOUT and the value of
Input Power of BAIN, and calculate the insertion loss.
5. Calculate the maximum gain that can be set for the OAU1 based on the insertion loss.
6. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the left-hand Function Tree.
7. In the Basic Attributes tab, set Nominal Gain to the maximum gain that can be set.
8. Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 2: Commissioning for the OLA (OBU1+OBU1) Networking

Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the VA1 located before the OBU1 at the input end to the minimum
value (1 dB). For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in
"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A". Commission
the two OBU1 amplifiers as one amplifier. Query the output optical power of the amplifier at
the transmit end of the upstream station (Pout) and the input optical power of the OBU1 amplifier
at the receive end of the station (Pin). Calculate the line attenuation according to the following
formula: Line attenuation = Pout – Pin. For the operations on the U2000, see Querying the
Optical Power of the OA in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at
OTM Station A".
NOTE
If the input optical power is within the input range of the optical power amplifier, you do not need to adjust the
optical power of the VA1. Otherwise, you should adjust the attenuation of the VA1 to make sure that the input
optical power meets the requirements for the input optical power of the optical power amplifier.
Step 2 Adjust the optical power of the VA1 between the two OBU1 amplifiers based on the line
attenuation, making the following formula valid. Output optical power of the OBU1 at the
receive end - input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end = fixed gain of the OBU1 +
fixed gain of the OBU1 - line attenuation.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical Power
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths

and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C that is in the
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of the board, see Quick Reference Table of the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-15 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSD9+RMU9)
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
M40V
Station C D40
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
OBU1
IN OUT
DM TOA
F AM F
I EXPO ROA I
OBU1 WSD9 RMU9 OBU1
U TC IN EXPI OUT IN U To F East
West To D OUT IN OUT RC
RC OUT EXPI IN
OUT
OBU1 RMU9 WSD9 OAU1
OUT IN ROA EXPO IN
TOA TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
OBU1
M40V D40
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, you must configure the MVOA, then
perform the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-15, if the 80-wavelength system is used, it is recommended to add the VA1 in the dashed
frame.
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength at
the same time.
NOTE
The preset values for the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input
optical power of the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick
Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Procedure
Step 1 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA at each drop channel of the WSD9 on the receiving side of
the ROADM station to the maximum value.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running Status of
NE C is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired WSD9 board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
4. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the
maximum value (15.0).
5. Click Apply.
----End
Scenario 1: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (OPA)
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9 are used for
compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4
Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power of a single wavelength for the OBU1 at the transmit
end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with system
(40-channel system or 80-channel system).
1. Select the desired OBU1 board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Then set Rated Optical Power to -19.0. The OBU103
(40 channels) is used as an example here.
3. Click Apply.
Step 3 Optional: If the OA at the transmit end is an OAU, set Rated Optical Power of the OAU1 at
the transmit end based on the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies
with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). For more information, see Quick
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see step Step 2 .
Step 4 Set OPA Mode to Auto.

1. In the NE Explorer window. Choose the NE C, and choose Configuration > Optical
Cross-Connection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode and
choose Auto for the desired optical cross-connections.
3. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
----End
Scenario 2: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (OPA)
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers located before the receive-end WSD9 are used for
compensating the line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4
Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power of a single wavelength for the OBU1 at the transmit
end according to the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which varies with
system (40-channel system or 80-channel system).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Rated Optical Power should be set for the OBU1 behind the M40V and the OBU1 behind the RMU9. The
recommended OBU to use behind the M40V is the OBU104.
NOTE
Step 3 Optional: If the OA at the transmit end is an OAU, set Rated Optical Power of the OAU1 at
the transmit end according to the nominal input optical power of a single wavelength, which
varies with system (40-channel system or 80-channel system). See Quick Reference Table of
the Units in the Hardware Description.
NOTE

NOTE
----End
Scenario 3: Wavelengths Are Directly Added from OTU to the RMU9 (Manual
Power Adjustment)
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the Optical
Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and shut down the WDM-side lasers
for all the other OTUs.
NOTE
Deactivate the optical cross-connections on WSD9 to block the pass-through wavelengths.

Activate the optical cross-connections after adjusting the add wavelengths.
For details, see the Configuration Guide.
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of
the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end.
1. Select the desired OBU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Click Query to query the current input optical power of the OBU1.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel of the RMU9 so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end is the same as the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and
the type of system should be considered.)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the
1. Select the desired RMU9. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function
Tree.
2. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set the Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio of the
desired channel to the desired value.
3. Click Apply.
Step 5 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU that
accesses the longest wavelength. Then perform commissioning based on steps Step 3 through
Step 4.
Step 6 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the preceding
steps.
Step 7 Disable the lasers on all the OTU boards with add wavelengths at the station. In the pass-through
direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the line optical power
attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power
at OLA Station B.
Step 8 Optional: If the EXPO port of the WSD9 is connected to the EXPI port of the RMU9, preset
the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each of pass-through wavelengths channel to 7
dB.
1. Select the desired WSD9 board. Choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for each
wavelength in the pass-through direction to 7.0.
3. Click Apply.
Step 9 Optional: If the DM port for the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9, preset the
attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In
addition, preset the attenuation of the EVOA for the RMU9 at each pass-through wavelength
channel to the minimal attenuation value.
Step 10 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of the OTU in
"Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths at OTM station A".
Step 11 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in
"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
----End
Scenario 4: Wavelengths are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual Power
Adjustment and the VA1 Appears in the Dashed Frame)
NOTE
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and shut down the WDM-side lasers
for all the other OTUs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the laser of the OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the
Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
1. Select the desired M40V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Set Attenuation(dB) for each wavelength in the add
wavelength direction to 5.0.
3. Click Apply.
Step 4 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For details, see
step Step 3.
Step 5 Adjust the attenuation of the VA1 after the M40V so that the single-wavelength input optical
power of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the nominal single-wavelength input optical
power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and the type of system should be
considered.)
NOTE
Step 6 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For details, see
Step 3.
Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9 so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9 is the same as the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.
NOTE
For the technical specifications of each type of the amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in
the Hardware Description.
Step 8 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser only on the OTU that
Step 4.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power of all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the preceding
steps.
Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.
Step 11 In the pass-through direction, the amplifiers at the receive end are used for compensating the
line optical power attenuation. For the commissioning method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the
Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 7 dB.
Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port for the RMU9, preset the
attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In
Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs again. For details, see Setting the Laser of the
OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
----End
Scenario 5: Wavelengths Are Added to the RMU9 Using the M40V (Manual Power
Adjustment and the VA1 Does not Appear in the Dashed Frame)
NOTE
Step 2 Force the WDM-side laser of only one OTU to emit light, and shut down WDM-side lasers for
all the other OTUs.
NOTE
Step 3 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V. For details, see
step Step 3.
Step 4 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the M40V so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the M40V is the same as the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1. (The models for the optical amplifiers and
the type of system should be considered.)
NOTE
Step 5 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA for each of the other wavelength add channels for the
M40V to the attenuation value of the EVOA in the wavelength add channel mentioned in step
Step 4.
Step 6 On the U2000, query the input optical power of the OBU1 at the transmit end. For details, see
step Step 3.
Step 7 Adjust the attenuation of the EVOA in one wavelength add channel for the RMU9 so that the
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1 behind the RMU9 is the same as the nominal
single-wavelength input optical power of the OBU1.
NOTE
Step 8 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side laser on only the OTU that
Step 4.
Step 9 Adjust the optical power for all the other add wavelengths on the RMU9 based on the preceding
steps.
Step 10 Disable the WDM-side lasers for all OTUs on the add channels.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
the attenuation of the EVOA for the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 7 dB.
Step 13 Optional: If the DM port of the WSD9 is connected to the AM port of the RMU9, preset the
attenuation of the EVOA of the WSD9 at each pass-through wavelength channel to 4 dB. In
Step 14 Re-enable the WDM-side lasers of the OTUs. For details, see Setting the laser of the OTU in
Step 15 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE
Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
----End

and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSD9
+WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units
in the Hardware Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-16 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSD9+WSM9)
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
Station C
D40 M40V
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
DM AM
F EXPO F
OAU1 WSD9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
West To D U
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT RC U To F East
EXPI OUT
OBU1 WSM9 WSD9 OAU1
EXPO IN
RC OUT IN OUT TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT IN
M40V D40
DCM
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, you must first configure the MVOA and
then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE
the same time.
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input
Procedure
Step 1 In the pass-through direction, the optical amplifier before the WSD9 at the receive end is used
to compensate the line optical attenuation. Commission the optical power for the pass-through
channel based on the procedure for 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA
Station B.
Step 2 On the U2000, set Rated Optical Power for the OBU1 at the transmit end based on the nominal
input optical power for a single wavelength, which varies with the system (40-channel system
or 80-channel system).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the rated optical power of the OA in "Commissioning the optical
power of the add wavelengths and link at ROADM station C".

NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the OPA function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C".
Step 4 According to the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the downstream
station, adjust the EVOA for each add channel and pass-through channel for power equilibrium
purposes. For the specific commissioning steps, see 6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of
ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for Equalization.
----End

and Link at ROADM Station C (RDU9+WSM9)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (RDU9
+WSM9) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-17 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with RDU9+WSM9)
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
Station C
D40 M40V
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
West DM AM
East
F EXPO F
OAU1 RDU9 WSM9 OBU1
I I
TC IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT RC U To F
To D U
EXPI OUT
OBU1 WSM9 RDU9 OAU1
EXPO IN
RC OUT IN OUT TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT IN
M40V D40
DCM
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure the MVOA and then perform
the optical power commissioning on site.
NOTE
the same time.
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated based on the typical single-wavelength input optical
power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and Link at ROADM Station C (ROAM+ROAM)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (ROAM
+ROAM) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-18 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with ROAM+ROAM)
Station C
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN OUT
TC EXPO RC
F OAU1 OBU1 F
IN OUT EXPI IN OUT
I RC ROAM ROAM TC
I
West EXPI U East
U OBU1 OAU1
OUT IN EXPO OUT IN
M M
DM DM RDC TDC
0 0
OUT 1 1 IN
OBU OBU DCM
D40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

EVOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 See Step 1 through Step 3 in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths
and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).
Step 2 Based on the analysis result of the optical power spectrum monitored on the downstream station,
adjust the EVOA for each add channel for power equilibrium. For specific commissioning steps,
see 6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and OLA Station D for
Equalization.
NOTE
The ROAM board cannot be used to commission the optical power for the wavelength in the pass-through
channels, and only the optical power for the add wavelength at the local station can be commissioned.
----End

and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD4+WSMD4)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSMD4
+WSMD4) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-19 Fiber connection of ROADM station (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

Station C
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN TC DM4
RC OUT
OAU1 OBU1
West I WSMD4 WSMD4 I
East
U RC AM4 TC U
OUT OUT IN IN
OBU1 DM4 OAU1
OUT IN DM1 AM1 OUT IN
AM1 DM1
OBU
OBU
D40 M40V M40V D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
NOTE
l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical ports of the WSMD4 board are not shown. The two
pairs of ports are used for signal grooming in the other direction.
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 6.3.6 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths
and Link at ROADM Station C (WSD9+WSM9).
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and Link at ROADM Station C (WSMD2+WSMD2)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C (WSMD2
+WSMD2) that is in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisite

U2000
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-20 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (networking with WSMD2+WSMD2)

Station C
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
IN TC EXPO
RC OUT
OAU1 OBU1
West F IN OUT IN EXPI OUT IN OUT F
I I East
WSMD2 WSMD2
U RC EXPI TC U
OUT OUT IN IN
OBU1 EXPO OAU1
OUT IN DM AM OUT IN
AM DM
OBU
OBU
D40 M40V M40V D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

EVOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
power for the amplifier. For technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table
of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Procedure
----End
6.3.11 Commissioning the optical power of the add wavelengths

and link at ROADM station C (WSMD9+WSMD9)
Prerequisite

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 6-21 Fiber connections of ROADM station (networking with WSMD9+WSMD9)
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
D40 M40
DCM DCM
DM1 AM1
TM EXPI OUT TM
RX RX
RM RM
EXPO IN

LOUT
AM1 DM1
DCM DCM
M40 D40
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
NOTE
NOTE
power for the amplifier. For technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick Reference Table
of the Units in the Hardware Description.
Procedure
----End
6.3.12 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station D

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station D that is in the west-
Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station
B.
----End
6.3.13 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical

Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E that is in the
Prerequisite

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-22 Fiber connections of FOADM station E

Station E
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
IN RM TM1 RM2 OUT
TM
RDC DCM TDC MI MI
VO VO
F TC IN
MO
OUT OUT F
OAU1 OBU1
I I
West To D U IN OUT VI IN RC U To F East
MR8V MR8V
RC IN VI IN
OBU1 OAU1
OUT OUT MO OUT TC
RDC TDC
OUT IN
DCM
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-22, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If no VA1 or VA4 is configured on
the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure MVOA and commission
the optical power on site.
NOTE
Procedure
NOTE
Step 2 Preset the attenuation of the EVOA on each add channel for the MR8V to 7 dB.
1. Double-click NE E in the Main Topology. The Running Status of NE E is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired MR8V board, and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
4. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio for each add
channel of the MR8V to 7.0.
5. Click Apply.
Step 3 Block all add wavelengths.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Step 5 On the U2000, query the output optical power for the receive-end amplifier OAU1.
1. Select the desired OAU1, and choose Configuration > Optical Power Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Click Query to query the Output Power for the amplifier board.
Step 6 According to the nominal input optical power of the transmit-end amplifier OBU1, calculate
and set the attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port between the two MR8V boards and the VA1
board before the OBU1 at the transmit end as follows: Attenuation = Output optical power of
the receive-end amplifier - Nominal input optical power of the transmit-end amplifier - Insertion
loss of the MR8V at the receive end - Insertion loss of the MR8V at the transmit end.
NOTE
For the technical specifications for each type of board, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the Hardware
Description.
Step 7 Equally distribute the attenuation value (10 dB) to the EVOA for the VI port in the MR8V at
the transmit end and the VA1 board. Set the attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port in the
MR8V at the transmit end and the VA1 board to 5 dB. For the adjustment of the VA1 on the
U2000, see Step 2 and Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in "Commissioning the Optical
NOTE
The OBU103 is used as the example of the transmit-end OBU1. The typical single-wavelength input optical
power of OBU103 is –19 dB (40 channels), and the typical single-wavelength output optical power of the receive-
end OAU1 is +4 dB. Therefore, the whole attenuation of the EVOA for the VI port in the MR8V at the transmit
end and the VA1 board is as follows: Attenuation = 4 + 19 - 3.5 -3.5 – 6= 10 dB.
Step 8 Block the pass-through wavelengths.

NOTE
For details about the operations on the U2000, see Disabling the laser at an output port on an OA board in
"Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards".
Step 9 Enable the laser on an OTU that accesses the longest wavelength.
Step 10 On the U2000, adjust the attenuation of the VOA on the add channel for the MR8V based on
the input optical power for the OBU1 displayed in response to a query. This ensures that the
input optical power of the OTU is equal to the nominal input optical power for a single
wavelength.
Step 11 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side lasers on the OTUs that
access adjacent wavelengths. Then perform commissioning based on Step 10.
Step 13 Enable the disabled WDM-side lasers on the OTUs. For details, see Setting the Laser of the
OTU in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 14 Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled. For details, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE
Function in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
----End
6.3.14 Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical

Power at FOADM Station E (Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer
Board)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E that is in the
Prerequisite

U2000
The optical power for the first wavelength after being adjusted is used as the reference optical
power during commissioning. In general, the longest wavelength is selected as the first
wavelength.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-23 Fiber connection of FOADM station E

Station E
DCM M
D
TDC RDC D03 Tx Rx M03 4
LINE C SYS
TC IN 4 OTU 0 IN RC
R OAU1 0 OTU OBU1
P D02 M02 V OUT
IN IN OUT OUT OUT
C OTU OTU
D01 M01
OTU OTU
West East
F TM RM1 RM F
TM2
I SC2 I To B
To F
U RM TM1 TM U
M01 D01 RM2
Rx Tx
OTU OTU
M02 D02
OUT M OTU OTU
OUT OUT D TC
M03 D03 D
OBU1 4 OTU OBU1 C
OUT OTU 4 IN
RC IN 0 IN IN M
0
V

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-23, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If no VA1 or VA4 is configured on
the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, configure MVOA and commission
the optical power on site.
NOTE
The preset values in the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input
optical power for the amplifier. For the technical specifications for each type of amplifier board, see Quick
Procedure
Step 1 Block the pass-through wavelengths.
NOTE
For details about the operation on the U2000, see "Disabling the laser on an output port on an OA board" in
Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards.

NOTE
Step 3 Force the WDM-side laser for only one OTU to emit light, and close WDM-side lasers for all
the other OTUs.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
After the OTU board is installed in the subrack, the WDM-side laser for the OTU is automatically enabled and
is forced to emit light.
NOTE
The attenuation set here is the preset value and is used to adjust the optical power for each wavelength at the
commissioning stage for the optical power equilibrium purposes.
Step 5 Set the attenuation of the VA1 before the OBU1 at the transmit end to the minimum value.
Step 6 On the U2000, set the attenuation of the VOA on the add channel for the MR8V based on the
input optical power for the OBU1 displayed in response to a query. This ensures that the input
optical power for the OTU is equal to the nominal input optical power for a single wavelength.
Step 7 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU, and enable the WDM-side laser on another OTU.
Then perform commissioning based on Step 6.
Step 9 Block all add wavelengths.

NOTE
Step 11 Unblock the pass-through wavelengths.

NOTE
For details about operations on the U2000, see "Enabling the laser at an output port on an OA board" in
Configuring Optical Amplifier Boards.
Step 12 At the upstream station, enable the WDM-side laser on only the OTU that accesses the longest
wavelength. Disable the lasers on the OTUs that transmit pass-through wavelengths. Then,
perform commissioning according to step Step 6.
Step 13 Disable the WDM-side laser on this OTU and enable the WDM-side lasers on the OTUs that
access adjacent wavelengths. Then perform commissioning based on step Step 6.
Step 14 Adjust the optical power for all the other pass-through wavelengths based on the preceding steps.
Step 15 Re-enable the lasers on the OTUs that transmit pass-through wavelengths, and enable the lasers
on OTUs that add wavelengths.
----End
6.3.15 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OLA Station F

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OLA station F that is in the west-

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisite

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
----End
6.3.16 Commissioning Link Optical Power at OTM Station G

This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station G that is in the
Prerequisite

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Diagram
Figure 6-24 Fiber connections of OTM station G
Station G
D31 Tx
OTU
D32
D OTU
From F OAU1 4
IN OUT IN 0
TC
DCM D40
TDC RDC OTU
F RM TM
I SC1
U TM RM
M31 Rx
OTU
M32
OUT OUT M
OTU
To F OAU1 4
OUT IN
0
RC
V M40
OTU

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 6-24, each EVOA can be considered as aVA1 board. If there is no VA1 or VA4 on the
Procedure
Step 1 See the steps included in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
----End
6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and

OLA Station B for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power of OTM station A and OLA station
B that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000
After wavelengths are transmitted over a certain distance, the optical power for different
wavelengths differs greatly because the loss or gain varies according to the components, boards,
fibers, and the non-linear effects of fibers. As a result, the input optical power of different
wavelengths at the downstream optical amplifier unit (OAU) is different and the OSNRs of
different wavelengths at the receive end are different.
When the optical power variation is very great, the wavelengths with very low optical power
have much lower OSNR than the wavelengths with high optical power once the wavelengths
are transmitted in the system. To ensure that wavelengths with the lowest optical power meet
system requirements, you need to increase the original OSNR tolerance. You must ensure that
the optical power at the intermediate station is flattened. For more information, see Figure
6-25.
Figure 6-25 Equalizing optical power at the intermediate station
OA OA OA
OA at the OA at the OA at the

transmit end intermediate station receive end
Flattening the
optical power at Flatness Flatness
the transmit end of 2.5 dB of 5.2 dB
Flattening the
Flatness Flatness optical power at
of 5.2 dB of 2.5 dB the receive end
Flattening the optical

Flatness power at the Flatness
of 2.5 dB intermediate station of 2.5 dB
Fixed optical attenuator
Objectives of single-wavelength optical power commissioning:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l According to the engineering requirements, the optical power flatness for each wavelength
of the intermediate OAU must be ensured. The optical power at the transmit end remains
at a certain slope that is opposite to the optical power slope at the receive end.
l According to the engineering requirement, the optical power of a single wavelength can
deviate from the nominal single-wavelength input optical power by at most 3 dB at the
transmit and receive ends.
NOTE
l When the attenuation of a channel is adjusted, the optical power of the adjacent channels also changes. The
number of affected adjacent channels depends on the attenuation adjustment step. The number of affected
adjacent channels increases when the attenuation adjustment step increases. In general, when the attenuation
adjustment step is equal to or smaller than 1 dB, one adjacent channel on each side is affected (based on an
80-channel system). The change in attenuation for the adjacent channels is the same as that for the adjusted
channel.
l It is recommended that the value of the attenuation adjustment step be smaller than 1 dB. In addition, it is
recommended that you adjust the attenuation channel by channel. Do not repeatedly adjust the attenuation
for a channel, and do not adjust the attenuation for multiple channels simultaneously.
l Equalizing optical power at intermediate stations is intended to correct any unflat link optical power resulting
from accumulated unflatness of OAs and non-linear effects from long distance transmission. When the
optical power equalization is complete, the optical spectrums at the transmit and receive ends are unflat (±2
dB). But each wavelength on the line has almost the same optical power and OSNR, which results in the
same transmission performance.
Procedure
Step 1 The optical power equalization is commissioned by using the following methods:
l If the MCA is not configured at OLA station B, at the MON port for each supervisory point
OA, use the optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) to monitor the optical power for each
wavelength on site. Commission the EVOA for each wavelength channel for the M40V at
the upstream station A based on tested data. Equalize the optical power of the channels. That
is, verify that the following formula is satisfied while the total output optical power remains
unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output
optical power ± 1.0 dBm.
l If OLA station B where the MCA is configured is considered as the supervisory station, test
the flatness of the optical power for each wavelength through the MCA. Commission the
EVOA for each wavelength channel of the M40V at the upstream station A based on the
tested data. Equalize the optical power of the channels. That is, verify that the following
formula is satisfied while the total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-
wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power ± 1.0
dBm.
l Query the optical power of each wavelength through the MCA8 as follows:
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology and the Running Status
of NE B is displayed.
3. Select the desired MCA8 board, and choose Configuration > Laser Spectrum Analysis
4. Select the channel number to be queried from Port Number, and then click Query.
Step 2 Adjust the attenuation of the channel with the highest optical power and the attenuation of the
channel with the lowest optical power. Use a step of 0.5 dB based on the spectrum analysis result
of the MCA8 board. After the attenuation is adjusted, the optical power for the two channels
must satisfy the following formula: Optical power = Highest optical power - (Highest optical

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
power - Nominal single-wavelength optical power)/2 or Optical power = Lowest optical power
+ (Nominal single-wavelength optical power - Lowest optical power)/2. For the adjustment
process on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each channel of the M40V in
Step 3 Use the MCA8 board again to measure the optical power for each wavelength and determine
the wavelengths with the highest and lowest optical power. Then equalize the optical power of
the wavelengths based on Step 2.
Step 4 View the spectrum analysis result of the MCA8 board. If the deviation between the optical power
of each wavelength and the nominal single-wavelength optical power does not exceed 1 dB, the
optical power for the wavelengths is equalized.
----End
Equalizing Optical Power (the MCA Board at the Transmit/Receive End)

When the MCA boards are configured at the transmit and receive ends, observe the following
principles to commission optical power:
l When there are less than four (inclusive) spans and there is no ROADM station on the link,
commission the optical power at the transmit end to ensure that the optical power is flattened
at the transmit end.
l When there are more than four spans and there is no ROADM station on the link, after
flattening the optical power at the transmit end, ensure that the system optical power is
equalized.
l When there are more than four spans and there is an ROADM station on the link, adjust
the attenuation of all channels of the ROADM station (configured with WSD9 and RMU9
boards, for example) to the same value. After flattening the optical power at the transmit
end, ensure that system optical power is equalized.
l If there is an REG station on the link, divide the link into two spans with the REG station
as the dividing point. In this case, consider the REG station as either the transmit end or
the receive end.
Step 1 When the optical power at the transmit end is flattened and the commissioning at the OLA station
is complete, monitor the optical power for each wavelength by using an MCA board at the receive
end. Calculate the difference between the optical power for each wavelength and the average
optical power of the wavelengths. The difference is actually the flatness deviation.
NOTE
Equalize the optical power at an intermediate station in compliance with the principles of "Commissioning the
Optical Power at the Transmit End based on that at the Receive End".
Step 2 Check the optical power at the receive end. Identify the channel that has the highest optical
power as channel A, and identify the channel that has the lowest optical power as channel B. If
the optical power difference between the two channels is greater than 2 dB, calculate the
difference between the optical power of channel A and the nominal single-wavelength optical
power, and record it as X. Also calculate the difference between the optical power of channel B
and the nominal single-wavelength optical power, and record it as Y. Then consider half of X
or Y as the target flatness deviation for commissioning the optical power at the transmit end.
See Figure 6-26.
Step 3 Commission the optical power at the transmit end. Increase the attenuation of channel A for the
M40V at the transmit end by X/2 and decrease the attenuation for channel B by Y/2. After that,
the flatness deviation at the transmit end has the same absolute amount but the reverse value as

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
the flatness deviation at the receive end. See Figure 6-27. For example, the optical power for a
wavelength at the receive end is 6 dBm, and the nominal single-wavelength optical power is 3
dBm. Adjust the optical power for this wavelength based on the following equation: 6 - (6 - 3)/
2 = 4.5 dBm.
Figure 6-26 Checking the optical power at the receive end
X
X/2
Y/2
Y
B A B A
Optical power at Optical power at
the transmit end the receive end
Figure 6-27 Commissioning the optical power at the transmit end
B A B A
Optical power at Optical power at
the transmit end the receive end
Step 4 Ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged when adjusting the optical power flatness
for each wavelength. To keep the total optical power unchanged, decrease the highest optical
power by 0.5 dB, but increase the lowest optical power by 0.5 dB.
Step 5 Adjust the optical power of wavelengths sequentially. After adjusting the highest and lowest
optical power, query the optical power for the two wavelengths again. If the optical power
difference between the two wavelengths is equal to or smaller than 2 dB, it indicates that the
optical power for the wavelengths is equalized. If they are not equalized, repeat steps Step 1
through Step 4 to recommission the optical power again.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When the equalization of optical power is complete, if the average optical power for the wavelengths is not equal
to the nominal single-wavelength optical power, do not adjust the optical power for each wavelength at the
transmit end. Instead, check and adjust the total optical power at the OLA station so that the average optical
power is equal to the nominal single-wavelength optical power.
----End
6.3.18 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Station C and

OLA Station D for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power equalization of the ROADM station
C and OLA station D that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite

U2000
For the technical specifications for each type of the boards, see Quick Reference Table of the
Procedure
Step 1 At ROADM station C, set OPA Mode to Manual.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE C in the Main Topology. The Running Status of
NE C is displayed.
3. Choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection Management from the Function
Tree.
4. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection tab. Right-click OPA Mode, and choose
Manual for the optical cross-connections.
Step 2 For the information about querying the optical power spectrum supervisory of the MCA, see
Querying the optical power spectrum supervisory of the MCA in"Commissioning the
Optical Power Equalization of the OTM station A and OLA station B".
Step 3 Adjust the EVOA of each add channel for the RMU9 (or M40V) based on the optical power
analysis result. The single-wavelength optical power for each add wavelength is equalized.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Equalize the optical power for the channels. That is, make sure that the following formula is satisfied while the
total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-
wavelength output optical power ± 1.0 dBm.
NOTE
For the operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each add channel of the RMU9 or Setting
the attenuation of each add channel of the M40V in "Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add
Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C".
Step 4 Adjust the optical power equalization in the pass-through direction based on the optical spectrum
analysis result from the downstream supervisory station D.
NOTE
Equalize the optical power for the channels. That is, make sure that the following formula is satisfied while the
total output optical power remains unchanged: Single-wavelength output optical power = Nominal single-
wavelength output optical power ± 1.0 dBm.
NOTE
For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each pass-through channel of the WSD9 in
"Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C".
----End
6.3.19 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Station E and

OLA Station F for Equalization
This section describes how to commission the optical power of FOADM station E and OLA
station F that are in the west-to-east signal flow for equalization.
Prerequisite

U2000
The static optical add/drop multiplexer board cannot be used to commission the optical power
of the wavelength for the pass-through channels. Only the optical power for the add wavelength
at the local station can be commissioned.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures included in 6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A
and OLA Station B for Equalization.
----End
6.3.20 Commissioning Optical Power (Without MCAs)

This section describes how to commission optical power for a network that has no MCA board
configured.
Prerequisites
Fibers must be connected and network configuration must be complete.
ECC communication must be established.
Commissioning of an optical supervisory channel must be complete.
The cross-connections at each station must be configured.
Tools, Meters, and Materials

U2000
For the technical specifications for all the boards, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the
If no MCA board is configured for the entire network, commission the optical power for each
wavelength to ensure that the optical power for each wavelength is consistent with the nominal
optical power for a single wavelength, and that the performance of each wavelength is optimal.
l The commissioning must start at the station where the wavelength with the worst BER
performance is added.
l The wavelengths with better performance and involving fewer spans are preferred for BER
optimization.
Commissioning Procedure
Step 1 Shut down lasers on all OTU boards. Commission the optical power for each add wavelength
based on6.3.3 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station
A so that the optical power before entering the OA at the transmit end is equal to the nominal
optical power for a single wavelength.
Step 2 For the methods of commissioning an OLA station on the line, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the
Step 3 After commissioning and equalizing the optical power for each add wavelength at a back-to-
back OTM or OADM station on the line, suppress all add wavelengths. In the case of an OADM
station configured with a WSS module, commission the optical power for each pass-through

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
wavelength so that the optical power for each pass-through wavelength is equal to the nominal
optical power for a single wavelength. For details about the commissioning methods, see 6.3.14
Commissioning the Add Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E
(Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board), 6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the
Add Wavelengths and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9), and 6.3.13
(MR8V+MR8V).
NOTE
If an FOADM station (excluding the back-to-back OTM) is an intermediate station, commission only the optical
power for the multiplexed pass-through wavelength.
Step 4 After commissioning the optical power for each wavelength, test the total input optical power
of an OA at the transmit end to verify that it satisfies the following formula: Total input optical
power = Nominal input optical power for each wavelength + 10logN (N represents the number
of wavelengths) + input offset. If the total input optical power fails to satisfy this formula, adjust
the attenuation of the VA1 board before the OA or the attenuation of the EVOA built in the OA
to ensure that the total input optical power meets requirements.
NOTE
The offset value is determined by the number of wavelengths and OSNR and varies inversely with the OSNR.
The input offset is generally smaller than 0.5 dB.
Step 5 Optimize the performance of each wavelength because the optical power flatness of each
wavelength in a multiplexed wavelength cannot be measured. Ensure that the system
performance is optimal, and at the same time, ensure that the optical power for each wavelength
is equal to the nominal optical power for a single wavelength, and that the multiplexed optical
power remains unchanged.
----End
6.3.21 Commissioning Input Optical Power of OTU

This section describes how to commission the input optical power of the OTU in a west-to-east
signal flow. Follow the commissioning sequence of A-C-E-G.
Prerequisite
NOTE
If no VA1 (or EVOA in the drop wavelength channel) is configured before the IN port of the OTU at the station,
it indicates that a fixed optical attenuator or MVOA is configured. In this case, check only the receive optical
power of the OTU. If the measured receive optical power of the OTU is not within the required range, replace
the fixed optical attenuator or adjust the MVOA on site.

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Query the input optical power of the OTU on the U2000.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the stations to be queried in the Main Topology. The
Running Status of the stations to be queried is displayed.
3. Select the desired OTU board, and choose Configuration > Optical Power
Management from the Function Tree.
4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
Step 2 Compare the queried input optical power of the OTU to the range of the input optical power of
the OTU.
l If the actual input optical power is higher than the upper threshold of the input optical power
of the OTU, increase the VA1/EVOA attenuation for this channel. The actual input optical
power is then within the range of the input optical power.
l If the actual input optical power is lower than the lower threshold of the input optical power
of the OTU, decrease the VA1/EVOA attenuation of this channel. After the attenuation is
adjusted to the minimum value, if the actual input optical power is still not within the range
of the input optical power, check the internal fiber connections.
NOTE
For the specifications for the input optical power of the OTU, see Quick Reference Table of the Units in the
NOTE
For the 10Gbit/s and 40Gbit/s OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of
the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal range: from -11 dBm to -4 dBm; adjust the
input optical power at the RXn port on the client side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within
the optimal range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.
For the other OTU boards: adjust the input optical power at the RXn port on the client side and the input optical
power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU to ensure that the input optical power is within the optimal
range: from (sensitivity +3) dBm to (overload point -5) dBm.
NOTE
For certain OTUs, if the overload point of the optical module is 0 dBm, and if the receiver sensitivity is –17
dBm, the input optical power should be adjusted within the range from –14 dBm to –5 dBm.
NOTE
When commissioning the input optical power of the OTU at the ROADM station, you do not need to configure
the VA1 before the IN port on the WDM-side of the OTU. You need to adjust only the EVOA for each drop
channel of the WSD9. For operations on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of each drop channel of the
WSD9 in “Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths and Link at ROADM Station C”.
NOTE
For operations of the VA1 on the U2000, see Setting the attenuation of the VA1 in “Commissioning the Optical
Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A”.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6.3.22 Commissioning OSNR

This section describes how to commission the OSNR for a wavelength.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NM operator" authority or higher.

Optical spectrum analyzer, U2000
The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every wavelength is
higher than the design OSNR tolerance. OSNR tolerance refers to the tolerance at which the
boards at the receive end cannot restore the error-free carrier signals when the OSNR is lower
than a specified threshold. In certain special situations, this objective can be properly adjusted,
but a certain OSNR margin must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest OSNR for the
wavelengths that have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the wavelengths
that have different sources or sinks have different OSNRs. The detected OSNR value may be
incorrect if there is a parallel OADM station using M40/D40, WSMD4, or WSM9+WSD9 boards
on the link. Therefore, OSNR commissioning should be performed only when there is no parallel
OADM station on the link.
Procedure
Step 1 When adjusting the OSNR flatness, ensure that the total optical power after the commissioning
remains the same. During the commissioning, decrease the optical power for the wavelength
that has the highest OSNR by 0.5 dB, and increase the optical power of the wavelength that has
the lowest OSNR by 0.5 dB.
Step 2 The commissioning should be performed in a specific sequence. That is, you need to recheck
the existing wavelengths to identify the wavelength that has the highest or lowest OSNR. Then
continue the commissioning in the same way as specified in Step 1. If the OSNRs for the two
wavelengths are equal to the design OSNRs, it indicates that the OSNR commissioning is
successful.
NOTE
If the OSNR remains the same or decreases after the optical power is increased, stop the commissioning, analyze
the cause, and then continue with specific commissioning.
----End
6.4 Example of Commissioning a System with Ultra-Long

Spans
This section describes how to commission a system with ultra-long spans.
Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000
Networking Diagram
Figure 6-28 shows the network topology of Project Y. In a chain network, optical network
elements (ONEs) 1 - 24 are the stations installed with the WDM equipment. ONE 1 and ONE
24 are configured as OTM stations. ONE 2–6, 8–12, 14–19, and 21–23 are OLA stations. ONE
7 and 20 are ROADM station. ONE 13 is an OEQ station.
Figure 6-28 shows the span loss and distance between NEs.
Figure 6-28 Service requirement matrix in Project Y
West Commissioning Span 1
1 60km 2 80km 3 92km 4 80km 5 80km 6 76km 7 86km 8

16.5dB 22dB 25.3dB 22dB 22dB 20.9dB 23.65dB
Commissioning Span 2 80km

22dB
16 86km
23.65dB
80km 60km 60km 76km 72km 80km

90km 15 22dB 14 16.5dB 13 16.5dB 12 20.9dB 11 19.8dB 10 22dB 9
24.75dB
60km 80km 80km 60km 60km 80km 80km
16.5dB 22dB 22dB 16.5dB 16.5dB 22dB 22dB
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Commissioning Span 3 Commissioning Span 4

East
：OTM ：OLA ：ROADM
Commissioning Requirement
l In an ultra long-haul transmission system with multiple transmission spans, divide the line
into different commissioning spans according to service stations and equalization stations

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
(namely, ROADM and back-to-back OTM stations) and then commission the system span
by span. As shown in Figure 6-28, the network is divided into four commissioning spans.
l Determine the stations that can serve as optical power equalization stations. For example,
the stations represented as dotted rectangles in the figure.
l Determine the optical power monitoring station for each commissioning span based on the
principle of equalizing optical power at the middle of a transmission link, for example,
stations 4, 10, 17, and 22 (represented as dotted rectangles).
NOTE
Define the OTM, FOADM, and ROADM stations as optical power commissioning stations. For an
FOADM station, the optical power of pass-through wavelengths cannot be equalized. Therefore, an
FOADM station is regarded as a fiber during the commissioning.
NOTE
If you select an OTM or OADM station as the optical power motioning station, skip the step for equalizing
optical power at an OLA station.
NOTE
Before equalizing optical power, divide the network into different parts and select the source and sink
stations according to the network model. Then determine the optical power adjustment station. The
principles for selecting a station for monitoring optical power on a line are as follows:
l If the number (N) of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations is greater
than 4, determine the position of a monitoring station by dividing N by 2 (N/2). If N is an odd number,
determine the position of the monitoring station according to N/2±0.5.
l If the number (N) of transmission spans between two optical power equalization stations is equal to
4, determine the transmit end as the monitoring station.
l Commission the entire network from west to east. Then, commission the entire network in
the reverse direction.
Procedure
Step 1 For the steps for commissioning the add wavelength optical power at station 1 (OTM), see 6.3.3
Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A.
Step 2 For the steps for commissioning the link optical power at station 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (OLA), see 6.3.4
NOTE
The input optical power of an optical amplifier (OA) cannot be out of the range of the total optical power of the
OA. That is, an OA cannot work with over-saturated optical power.
Step 3 For the steps for commissioning the add wavelength optical power and link optical power at
station 7 (ROADM), see 6.3.5 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths
and Links at ROADM Station C (WSD9+RMU9), 6.3.13 Commissioning the Add
Wavelengths and Link Optical Power at FOADM Station E (MR8V+MR8V) or 6.3.14
(Multiplexer Board+Demultiplexer Board).
Step 4 For the steps for equalizing the optical power for the span 1, see 6.3.17 Commissioning the
Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA Station B for Equalization.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l When the attenuation of a channel is adjusted, the optical power of the adjacent channels also changes. The
number of affected adjacent channels depends on the attenuation adjustment step. The number of affected
adjacent channels increases when the attenuation adjustment step increases. In general, when the attenuation
adjustment step is equal to or smaller than 1 dB, one adjacent channel on each side is affected (based on an
80-channel system). The change in attenuation for the adjacent channels is the same as that of the adjusted
channel.
l It is recommended that the value of the attenuation adjustment step be smaller than 1 dB. In addition, it is
recommended that you adjust the attenuation channel by channel. Do not adjust the attenuation of for a
channel repeatedly, or adjust the attenuation for multiple channels simultaneously.
l Equalizing optical power at intermediate stations is intended to correct the unflat link optical power due to
accumulated unflatness of OAs and non-linear effects after long distance transmission. When the optical
power equalization is complete, the optical spectrums at the transmit and receive ends are unflat (±2 dB),
but each wavelength on the line has almost the same optical power and OSNR and therefore has the same
transmission performance.
Step 5 Commission the optical power in commissioning spans 2, 3, and 4 based on Step 1 through Step
4.
Step 6 Optimize the BER and OSNR for the entire network so that the system performance of the entire
network is optimal.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 7 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40
Commissioning Guide Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
7 Example of Commissioning Optical Power

Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
About This Chapter
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40 Gbit/s (hereinafter referred to
as 40G) OTM and OLA stations.
CAUTION
Ensure that the optical ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise,
system performance will be affected.
NOTE
When commissioning the optical power, ensure that all channels configured for the project access service
signals, or that the WDM side is forced to emit light. By doing this, all the OTUs can emit light normally.
Then start the commissioning station by station.
NOTE
The optical power queried on the U2000 is general optical power. The difference between this value and
the value tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.
7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System

This section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning a 40G system.
7.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System
This section describes the general process for commissioning a 40G system.
7.3 Preparations for Commissioning
7.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 40 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G OTM and OLA stations on
the U2000.
7.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40Gbit/s (hereinafter referred to
as 40G) OTM and OLA, stations on site.
7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G System

This chapter describes the methods for analyzing and handling the common problems that may
happen in the process of commissioning a 40G system. You need to analyze and handle the
problems according to actual situations.

7.1 Rules for Commissioning a 40G System

This section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning a 40G system.

Table 7-1 shows the incident optical power requirements.
Table 7-1 Requirements on Incident Optical Power

Module Number of G.652 G.655 TW-RS TW-C
Type Wavelengt LEAF
hs
40G ODB 80 +1 +1 +1 +1
40G DQPSK 40 +4 +2 +2 +2
80 +1 +1 +1 +1
The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm, and is applicable to optical amplifiers
with total output optical power of 20 dBm.
NOTE
If a high-power optical amplifier with a total output optical power of 23 dBm is used on the link, the incident
optical power between the high-power optical amplifier needs to be increased by 3 dB in the commissioning
process. The optical power of 2 dBm listed in the table, however, is changed to 4 dBm.
NOTE
A 40G signal is sensitive to non-linear effects. It is prohibited to randomly increase the optical power of 40G
signals. Also, it is prohibited to let an optical amplifier work in an abnormal state.
For information about the single-wavelength incident power for fiber G.653, see Table 7-2.

NOTE
OAU
FIU
OAU
: VOA
Table 7-2 Single-Wavelength Incident Power for fiber G.653

Module Type Channel Spacing OAU Type Standard Single-
Wavelength
Incident Power
40G eDQPSK 100 GHz OAU101, -4 dBm

(no wavelength at the 0AU103, 0BU103
zero dispersion point)
100 GHz OAU101, -5 dBm

(full configuration, 0AU103, 0BU103
including the zero
dispersion point)

(no wavelength at the 0AU103, 0BU103
zero dispersion point)

(full configuration, 0AU103, 0BU103
including the zero
dispersion point)
Selection of Channels for Mixed Transmission of 10G and 40G Signals

In the system design, a 10G channel is separated from a 40G channel with an idle channel in
between. Therefore, do not configure a 10G channel as an adjacent channel of a 40G channel.

40G channels are preferred for carrying medium or long wavelengths. After all the medium and
long wavelengths are allocated, properly allocate the short wavelengths. 10G channels are
preferred for carrying short wavelengths.
Mixed transmission of 10G and 40G signals are described as follows in the order of the smallest
impact to the greatest impact:
l Mixed transmission with maximum spacing between a 10G channel and a 40G channel.
– For G.652 fibers, the spacing is at least one channel.
– For G.655 fibers, the spacing is at least 400 GHz.
l One-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 10G signals is present on one side
of a 40G channel.
l Two-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 10G signals is present on each
side of a 40G channel.
l Do not apply mixed transmission of 10G and 40G signals when there are fiber types other
than G.652 and G.655.
Commissioning Rules
Observe the following rules when commissioning a 40G system:
l When commissioning the 40G system, the MCA boards or an optical spectrum analyzer
must be used in the commissioning to ensure that the optical power is precisely
commissioned.
l Optical power is commissioned based on the nominal optical power. It is prohibited to
improve the optical power performance by increasing the transmit optical power in the
initial engineering phase. During the equalization of the system optical power, the actual
incident optical power for every section cannot deviate from the typical incident optical
power over ±1.5 dB regardless of the fiber type. Otherwise, the system performance
degrades quickly and the BER before FEC increases rapidly.
l For an ODB board, the residual dispersion compensation on a line must be accurate to
within ±5.0 km. (In a network using G.652 fibers, a 10 km or 5 km DCM module must be
used to ensure this level of accuracy.)
l For an eDQPSK board, the residual dispersion compensation on a line must be accurate to
within ±5.0 km. (In a network using G.652 fibers, a 10 km or 5 km DCM module must be
used to ensure this level of accuracy.)
l The optical power at the IN optical port on a 40 OTU board must be within the range of –
8 dBm to –3 dBm.
l The objective of the system commissioning is to ensure the optical power flatness and the
OSNR flatness. When the difference between the OSNR flatness and optical power flatness
is small, the system OSNR flatness is obtained by maintaining the optical power flatness.
l In the case of 40G system commissioning, adjust the optical power difference between each
wavelength in the middle of two equilibrium stations (stations that balance the optical
power, including ROADM, and back-to-back OTM) to a value not more than ±0.5 dB. If
the spacing between two equilibrium stations is less than or equal to four spans, you only
need to adjust the output optical power difference of equilibrium stations at the transmit
end to ±0.5 dB.
l If equalizing optical power at intermediate stations, objectives of single-wavelength optical
power commissioning at the transmit and receive ends are as follows:

– According to the engineering requirement, the optical power of a single wavelength can
l When the 10G signal and the 40G signal are mixed in transmission, the general
commissioning method is same as that for 40G system commissioning. When the 10G
signal is adjacent to the 40G signal, however, make sure that the optical power of the 10G
signal is not higher than the nominal power of a single wavelength. If the 10G signal is
stable for a long time, commission the 10G signal power to a value 1 dB less than the power
of the adjacent 40G signal.
l In the mixed spectrum of the 40G signal and the 10G signal, the spectrum of the 40G signal
is wider and its amplitude is lower than that of the 10G signal. Actually, the power of the
10G signal is equal to the power of the 40G signal. Therefore, measure optical power of
the 40G wavelength and the 10G wavelength accurately, Figure 7-1 shows the mixed
optical spectrum.
Figure 7-1 Mixed optical spectrum of 40G signals and 10G signals
10G signals
40G signals

TIP
When the system has more than 20 spans, the noise signal of the short wavelengths increases and there is
a great difference between OSNR flatness and optical power flatness. Therefore, during the extra long-haul
40G transmission, avoid using short wavelengths. If short wavelengths must be used, you need to consider
the OSNR limits of the short wavelengths when planning the network.
7.2 Process for Commissioning a 40G System

This section describes the general process for commissioning a 40G system.
Figure 7-2 shows the process for commissioning a 40G system.
Figure 7-2 Process for commissioning a 40G system
Start
Design documents Identify the

and network conditions comply No nonconformance with
with the commissioning relevant network design
requirements? department
Yes
Configure boards and stations
Flatten the optical power of the OTM

station at the transmit end
Commission the optical power of an

OLA station
Equalize the optical power at

intermediate stations
Optimize performance of each

wavelength
Document and save the commissioning

result
End

7.3.1 Checking Design Documents

Before starting the deployment commissioning, check the design documents to ensure that the
designs, such as dispersion configuration and compensation method, PMD, OSNR, ITL
configuration, and channel allocation for hybrid transmission of 10G and 40G signals, meet the
requirements for setting up a 40G system.
The optical amplifier (OA) design for a 40G system is the same as that for an Nx10G system.
Compared with an Nx10G system, a 40G system has higher requirements on incident optical
power, dispersion compensation, OSNR, and PMD.
Checking Dispersion Configurations

Check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM) configured on each optical path
meets the actual dispersion compensation requirement. First, obtain the dispersion value of each
optical path from the parameter document for optical paths. Then check whether the DCM
specified in the System Configuration Diagram at each station on the optical path can compensate
dispersion properly based on the following table. If a DCM fails to compensate the dispersion
on the optical path, provide feedback to the commissioning leader immediately.
Table 7-3 Dispersion configuration checklist for a G.652 fiber system
No. Checklist Check Result
1 Precompensation of 20 km at □Yes □No

the transmit end
2 The dispersion on the line is □Yes □No

compensated equally and the
compensation deviation does
not exceed ±10 km. Over-
compensation (for example,
the 80 km DCM is used on
65, 70, or 75 km span) is
generally applied. When
under-compensation is
applied, compensation is
supplemented on the first or
second subsequent span.
3 The compensation for the □Yes □No

chromatic dispersion (CD) at
a fiber entry point on the line
is within the range of -30 km
to -10 km.

4 The compensation for the CD □Yes □No

at the end point on the line is
in the range of -5 km to +5
km.
Table 7-4 Dispersion configuration checklist for a leaf fiber system

1 No dispersion □Yes □No

precompensation is provided
at the transmit end.
2 If ODB OTU boards are used, □Yes □No

overcompensation of 10 km
to 25 km is applied to each
span. The dispersion of the
fourth or fifth span is 0 after
periodic compensation.
3 Over-compensation (for □Yes □No

example, the 80 km DCM is
used on 65, 70, or 75 km
span) is generally applied.
When under-compensation is
applied, compensation is
supplemented on the first or
second subsequent span.

at a fiber entry point on the
line is within the range of
-100 km to +100 km.

at the end point on the line is
in the range of -5 km to +5
km.
Checking PMD Configurations

Check whether the PMD penalty on each optical path is within the range specified in the
engineering design. Check whether the PMD value for an optical path is smaller than the PMD
tolerance for the optical path against the parameter document for optical paths.

Table 7-5 PMD configuration checklist
1 The PMD value for an optical □Yes □No

path is smaller than the PMD
tolerance for this optical path.
Checking OSNR Configurations

The OSNR penalty for a network includes PMD penalty, dispersion penalty, and individual
device OSNR penalty. These OSNR penalties can be obtained from the parameter document for
optical paths. Compare the OSNR penalties specified in this document with the system OSNR
tolerance.
Table 7-6 OSNR configuration checklist
1 The sum of OSNR penalty □Yes □No

and aging margin is smaller
than the system OSNR
tolerance.
Checking ITL Board Configurations of a 40G System

Currently, only the TN11ITL04 board uses an interleaver at the transmit and receive ends. Check
the ITL board configurations against Table 7-7. If an ITL board using an interleaver at the
transmit and receive ends must be configured, check whether the ITL board type in the
engineering configuration is TN11ITL04.
NOTE
After a 40G electrical signal is encoded (ODB), two peaks appear at the spectral edges. This affects the signal
quality of the receiver. In addition, the peaks make the bottoms of the CD and OSNR curves unflat, which affects
the TDCM in searching for the optimal compensation value. Configuring an ITL board with 0.3 nm bandwidth
between the transmit end (behind the MUX board) and the receive end (before the DEMUX board) helps filter
noise and optimize OSNR tolerance, and it has no negative impact on signals.
NOTE
The 40G DQPSK signal spectrum is comparatively wide. The 20 dB spectrum width is about 0.8 nm. Therefore,
the signal overlapping in an 80-channel system is of major concern, and an ITL board that uses an interleaver
at the transmit and receive ends must be configured in an 80-channel system.
Table 7-7 ITL configuration checklist for a 40G DQPSK 80-channel system
1 The TN11ITL04 board is □Yes □No

used in a 40G DQPSK
system with 50 GHz channel
spacing.

2 The TN11ITL04 board is □Yes □No

used at an OADM station to
add/drop DQPSK
wavelengths with 50 GHz
channel spacing.
3 An ITL board is used at a □Yes □No

WSS-based ROADM station
to add/drop wavelengths with
100 GHz channel spacing.
7.3.2 40G Commissioning Meter

This section describes the types of test meters used to commission a 40G system.
Context
A 40G SDH analyzer, an optical spectrum analyzer, and a power meter are required to
commission a 40G system. Table 7-8 lists certain 40G SDH analyzers. Table 7-9 lists certain
optical spectrum analyzers intended for testing a 40G system.
NOTE
A 40G system requires high-precision optical power. Before using an optical spectrum analyzer, calibrate the
optical spectrum analyzer with respect to the optical power setting.
Table 7-8 40G SDH analyzers
Name Appearance
ONT-506
NX 4000

Name Appearance
MP1797A
Table 7-9 Optical spectrum analyzers intended for 40G system testing
Name Appearance
MTS8000
Agilent86145B/86142
AQ6370/6370B/6319/6317

7.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 40

Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G OTM and OLA stations on
the U2000.

The commissioning of the 40G system has higher requirements when compared with the
commissioning requirements of a low-rate service line. In this example, the system to be
commissioned is a long-haul 40G link.
Networking Diagram
Figure 7-3 shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical network
elements (ONEs) A, B, C and D are the stations installed with the WDM equipments. ONE A
and ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C are two OLA stations. There
are several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C. 10-channel 40G services are transmitted
between ONEs A and D.
Figure 7-3 shows the span loss and distance between NEs. The G.652 fiber is used as the line
optical fiber.
Figure 7-3 Service requirement matrix in Project H

A 80 km/22dB B C 76 km/20.9dB D
OLA
：OTM ：OLA
Wavelength Allocation Diagram

Figure 7-4 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project H. The solid line represents the
working channel and the dashed line represents the protection channel.

Figure 7-4 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H

A D
STM-256
LSXL 192.10THz LSXL 192.10THz
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
LSXL 192.70THz STM-256 LSXL 192.70THz
STM-256
STM-256
Optical Amplifier Configuration Diagram

Figure 7-5 shows the configuration for an optical amplifier at each station in project H.
Figure 7-5 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project H

A B C D
DCM DCM DCM

to
OAU D40
OBU OAU OAU
103
from 103 103 103
M40 OLA
OAU OAU OAU OBU

to 103 103 103 103
D40 from
DCM DCM DCM M40
80 km 76 km
22dB 20.9dB
NOTE
For the 40G ODB and DQPSK code patterns, an ITL board integrating two interleavers must be used in an 80-
channel system for wavelength filtering.
NE Board Configuration
NOTE
The type of OAU1 is OAU103, and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.
Figure 7-6 shows the board configuration for ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations for
ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown in Figure
7-8.

Figure 7-7 shows the board configuration of ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations for
ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown in Figure
7-9.
Figure 7-6 Board Configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU PDU
P
I
L L L U
F S S S S P
I X X X C I
U L L L CU
A
U
X
P P
I I
U L L U
O L L F S S P
F M D
M S P S
I 4
B
4R S S C I I X X C I
U 0
U
02 X X CU U L L CU
1 L L A
A
U U
X X
P P
I I
U L L L U
O O F S S P
F S S P S S
A B M C I
I C C I I X X X
U U C CU
U 1 CU U L L L
1 1 A A
A
U U
X X
DCM DCM

Figure 7-7 Board Configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
O O S
B A C
U U C
1 1
X X
CC
HH
L L S
M M D S F
S S C
C 4 4 C I
X X C
A 0 0 1 U
L L
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
L L L L
S S S S S
X X C X X
L L C L L
X X
CC
HH
L L S L L
S S C S S
X X C X X
L L L L
NOTE
The TN11LSXL occupies four slots.
NOTE
The TN12LSXL occupies three slots.

Figure 7-8 Board Configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
P
I
U
O O
F F S S P
A A
I I C C I
U U
U U 2 CU
1 1 A
U
X
DCM

Figure 7-9 Board Configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
O O S
A A C
U U C
1 1
X X
CC
HH
F F S S
I I C C
UU 2 C

the OTM Station
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTM station that is in the
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
All channels must be accessed with services or must be forced to emit light, which makes the
OTU emit light normally.


U2000
In this example, the specifications for the hardware are as follows:
l G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.
l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.
l The type of OAU1 is OAU103 and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-10 Fiber connections of the OTM station
Station A
Rx M31
LSXL
M32
M
LSXL
4 OBU1
0 OUT IN To B
OUT RC OUT
M40 V
LSXL
TM RM F
SC1 I
RM TM
U
Tx D31
LSXL
D32
LSXL D
4 OAU1 From B
0
IN OUT TC IN
D40 DCM
LSXL RDC TDC

EVOA
NOTE
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the MVOA and then
Procedure
Wavelengths at OTM Station A.
----End

7.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station

and the OTM Station at the Receive End
This section describes how to commission the link optical power of the OLA station and OTM
station at the receive end that are in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites

U2000
Testing Diagram
Figure 7-11 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OAU1)

Station B
DCM
TDC RDC
TC IN OUT RC
OAU1
IN MON OUT
MCA
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
West MCA East
MON
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM

EVOA

Figure 7-12 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OBU1+OBU1)
Station B
OBU1 C OBU1
IN M MON OUT
MCA
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
West MCA East
MON
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM

EVOA
Figure 7-13 Fiber connections of the OTM station at the receive end
Station D
D31 Tx
OTU
D32
D OTU
From C OAU1 4
IN OUT IN 0
TC
DCM D40
TDC RDC OTU
F RM TM
I SC1
U TM RM
M31 Rx
OTU
M32
OUT OUT M
OTU
To C OAU1 4
OUT IN
0
RC
V M40
OTU

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 7-11, Figure 7-12 and Figure 7-13, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there
is no VA1 or VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure
the MVOA and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.

Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
----End
7.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power equalization that is in the west-to-
east signal flow.
Prerequisites

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA
Station B for Equalization.
Step 2 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a certain wavelength
is poor, improve the performance of this wavelength by changing its optical power. In addition,
reversely change the optical power of the wavelength that has the best performance to ensure
that the total optical power remains unchanged. The changed optical power cannot exceed 2 dB.
NOTE
When changing the optical power for the wavelength, increase or decrease the optical power. Increasing the
optical power or decreasing the optical power can improve wavelength performance.
----End
7.4.5 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System

This section describes how to commission the OSNR for a 40G System.

Prerequisites

U2000
The objective of OSNR commissioning is to ensure that the OSNR for every wavelength is
higher than the design OSNR tolerance, which refers to the tolerance at which the boards at the
receive end cannot restore the error-free carrier signals when the OSNR is lower than a specified
threshold. In certain special situations, this objective can be properly adjusted, but a certain
OSNR margin must be ensured. By adjusting the OSNR, the lowest OSNR of the wavelengths
that have the same source and sink can be improved. Note that the wavelengths that have different
sources or sinks have different OSNRs. The detected OSNR value may be incorrect if there is
a parallel OADM station using M40/D40, WSMD4, or WSM9+WSD9 boards on the link.
Therefore, OSNR commissioning should be performed only when there is no parallel OADM
station on the link.
Procedure
Step 1 When adjusting the OSNR flatness, ensure that the total optical power after the commissioning
remains the same. During the commissioning, decrease the optical power of the wavelength that
has the highest OSNR by 0.5 dB, and increase the optical power of the wavelength that has the
lowest OSNR by 0.5 dB.
Step 2 The commissioning should be performed in a specific sequence. That is, you need to recheck
the existing wavelengths to identify the wavelength that has the highest or lowest OSNR. Then
continue the commissioning in the same way as specified in step 1. If the OSNRs for the two
wavelengths are equal to the design OSNRs, it indicates that the OSNR commissioning is
successful.
NOTE
If the OSNR remains the same or decreases after the optical power is increased, stop the commissioning, analyze
the cause, and then continue specific commissioning.
----End
Example
If a wavelength traverses a parallel OADM station, adjust the OSNR based on the OEQ
configuration modes and the OSNR tolerance listed in Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table
7-12.

Table 7-10 OSNR tolerance for a 40G ODB 80-channel system

1. G.652 ODB 50 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR Tolerance
Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included)
Fiber Input +1 dBm +1 dBm +1 dBm +1 dBm -

Power
Dispersion -5 km to 5 -5 km to 5 -5 km to 5 -5 km to 5
Tolerance km km km km
Power OSNR OSNR OSNR OSNR

Equilibriu Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance
m (With M40) (With (With (With
M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)
Transmissi OSNR OSNR OSNR OSNR Typical

on hops Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance PMD
OSNR
Penalty
1 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 0.0
2 18.8 18.7 18.7 18.7 0.2
3 19.3 19.1 19.1 19.1 0.3
4 19.6 19.4 19.4 19.4 0.5
5 20.1 19.8 19.8 19.8 0.7
6 20.4 20.0 20.0 20.0 0.8
7 21.0 20.5 20.5 20.5 1.0
8 21.3 20.7 20.7 20.7 1.2
9 - 20.9 20.9 20.9 1.4
10 - 21.1 21.1 21.1 1.6
11 - 21.5 21.5 21.5 1.7
12 - 21.7 21.7 21.7 1.9

Table 7-11 OSNR tolerance for a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

1. G.652 eDQPSK 100 GHz Spacing System: Transmission hops and OSNR
Tolerance Index (Unit: dB) (With Typical PMD OSNR Penalty Included)

Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
1 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 0.3
2 15.7 15.6 15.6 15.6 0.3
3 15.8 15.6 15.6 15.6 0.3
4 16.0 15.8 15.8 15.8 0.3
5 16.1 15.8 19.8 19.8 0.3
6 16.4 15.9 15.9 15.9 0.3
7 16.5 16.0 16.0 16.0 0.3
8 16.8 16.1 16.1 16.1 0.3
9 - 16.2 16.2 16.2 0.3
10 - 16.3 16.3 16.3 0.3
11 - 16.8 16.8 16.8 0.3
12 - 16.8 16.8 16.8 0.3
13 - - 16.9 16.9 0.3
14 - - 17.0 17.0 0.3
15 - - 17.1 17.1 0.3
16 - - 17.3 17.3 0.3
17 - - 17.6 17.5 0.3
18 - - 17.9 17.7 0.3
19 - - 18.2 17.9 0.3


Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
20 - - 18.6 18.2 0.3
Table 7-12 OSNR tolerance for a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system


Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
1 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 0.3
2 15.7 15.6 15.6 15.6 0.3
3 15.8 15.6 15.6 15.6 0.3
4 15.9 15.7 15.7 15.7 0.3



Power

M40V) M40V M40V
+OEQ) +OEQ
+OEQ)

OSNR
Penalty
5 16.0 15.7 15.7 15.7 0.3
6 16.2 15.7 15.7 15.7 0.3
7 16.3 15.8 15.8 15.8 0.3
8 16.5 15.8 15.8 15.8 0.3
9 - 15.8 15.8 15.8 0.3
10 - 15.8 15.8 15.8 0.3
11 - 16.1 16.1 16.1 0.3
12 - 16.1 16.1 16.1 0.3
13 - - 16.2 16.2 0.3
14 - - 16.2 16.2 0.3
15 - - 16.3 16.3 0.3
16 - - 16.4 16.4 0.3
17 - - 16.7 16.6 0.3
18 - - 17.0 16.8 0.3
19 - - 17.3 17.0 0.3
20 - - 17.6 17.0 0.3

NOTE
In Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table 7-12, "OSNR Tolerance (With M40)" indicates that the M40 board is
used at the transmit end, and that neither pre-equalization is applied nor is the OEQ station configured on the
line. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V)" indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-equalization
but no OEQ station is used on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (With M40V+OEQ)" indicates that the M40V is used
at the transmit end for pre-equalization and one OEQ station is configured on the line. "OSNR Tolerance (With
M40V+OEQ+OEQ)" indicates that the M40V is used at the transmit end for pre-equalization and two OEQ
stations are configured on the line. The concept of the OEQ station covers the back-to-back OTM station and
ROADM station on the line. The configuration modes are designed in the engineering design phase. During
commissioning, you need to select an appropriate mode and commission the optical power based on the OSNR
tolerance given in the tables.
NOTE
The OSNR tolerance given in Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table 7-12 increases with the number of spans. The
maximum number of transmission spans is 20. That is, the regenerator section must be terminated at the 20th
transmission span. If the services on the network need to be transmitted further, a regeneration board must be
added.
The number of transmission spans (also called the number of transmission levels) corresponding to the OSNR
tolerance indicates how many times that a wavelength enters a transmission fiber after being amplified by an
optical amplifier. It is equivalent to the number of spans of the transmission fibers or optical transmission sections
(OTSs). Note that a fiber connection inside a station is not considered a transmission span.
NOTE
The OSNR tolerance given in Table 7-10, Table 7-11, and Table 7-12 includes the "Typical PMD Penalty"
listed in the last column. The typical PMD penalty is obtained when the customer fiber PMD coefficient is
7.4.6 OSNR Penalties

If the system is still operating abnormally after the preceding commissioning tasks are
performed, you need to consider the OSNR penalty. With the OSNR penalty, you can evaluate
impacts of configuration nonconformance on the system to meet system requirements.
The OSNR penalty (expressed in dB) covers various penalty types, such as, OSNR penalty
resulting from over-limit dispersion and PMD penalty resulting from over-limit PMD. Currently,
focus on the following types of OSNR penalties: power penalty, hybrid transmission penalty,
high-power hybrid transmission penalty, PDL penalty, PMD penalty, and ROADM penalty.
Power Penalty
In the system design process, if a high-power amplifier is being used as required, you need to
consider the extra penalty due to an increase in the single-wavelength signal power. This extra
penalty is called the power penalty, and the high-power amplifier in this context refers to an
amplifier with the maximum output power higher than +20 dBm. For the OptiX OSN
8800/6800/3800, these high-power amplifiers include TN11HBA, TN11OAU105,
TN12OAU105, and TN11OBU205. If the amplifier has a maximum output power of +20 dBm
or less, you do not need to consider the power penalty. If an amplifier has a maximum output
power of +26 dBm, you need to consider this amplifier in the 40G system as a separate span.
The power penalties in a 40G ODB system are as follows:
l In a 40G ODB 80-channel system, the standard incident power configured for a single
wavelength is +1 dBm.

l In a regenerator section, if one to two +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you do not
need to consider a power penalty.
l In a regenerator section, if three to five +23 dBm high-power amplifiers dBm are used, you
need to consider a power penalty of 0.7 dB.
The power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system are as follows:

l The standard incident power configured for a single wavelength is +4 dBm.
l Table 7-13 lists the power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system.
Table 7-13 Power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system
Power Number of +23 dBm High-Power Amplifiers

Penalty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Nu 1 0.4 - - - - - - - - -
mbe
r of 2 0.4 0.4 - - - - - - - -
trans 3 0.4 0.4 0.4 - - - - - - -
miss
ion 4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - - - -
span
s 5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 - - - - -
6 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 - - - -
7 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 - - -
8 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 - -
9 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 -
10 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
11 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
12 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
13 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
14 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
15 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
16 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
17 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
18 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
19 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
20 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.4 1.4
The power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system are as follows:

l In a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system, the standard incident power configured for a single
wavelength is +1 dBm.
l Table 7-14 lists the power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system.
Table 7-14 Power penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system

Power Number of +23 dBm High-Power Amplifiers
Penalty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Nu 1 0.2 - - - - - - - - - -
mbe
r of 2 0.2 0.2 - - - - - - - - -
tran 3 0.2 0.2 0.2 - - - - - - - -
smi
ssio 4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 - - - - - - -
n
spa 5 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 - - - - - -
ns
6 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 - - - - -
7 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 - - - -
8 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 - - -
9 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 - -
10 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 -
11 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
12 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
13 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
14 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
15 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
16 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
17 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
18 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
19 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
20 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0
Hybrid Transmission Penalty

If low-rate modulated signals (including 2.5G NRZ signals, 10G NRZ signals, and 10G RZ
signals) need to be transmitted over the channels adjacent to a 40G channel, in the system design
process you need to consider an extra penalty, called a hybrid transmission penalty in this case.
In this context, hybrid adjacent transmission of a 40G ODB channel refers to transmission of
10G/2.5G signals over channels adjacent to a 40G ODB wavelength channel within 200 GHz
channel spacing. In the case of a network on which the standard incident power is +1 dBm for

the entire regenerator section, you can ignore the extra OSNR penalty generated by the hybrid
adjacent transmission in each section.
In the case of a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system, if the standard incident power for the entire
regenerator section is +4 dBm, extra hybrid transmission penalties must be considered. Table
7-15 and Table 7-16 lists the hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel
system.
Table 7-15 Hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system

Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type
One-Side Adjacency
100 GHz 200 GHz
NRZ RZ NRZ RZ
Number of 1 0.5 0.7 0.0

transmission
spans 2
10
11
12
13 0.8 1.2
14
15
16
17 2.7 2.6
18
19
20


Hybrid Adjacency Type
Transmissi
on Penalty Two-Side Adjacency
100 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 200 200 GHz and 200
GHz GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ RZ NRZ NRZ RZ NRZ NRZ RZ

+NR +RZ +RZ +NR +RZ +RZ +NR +RZ +RZ
Z Z Z
Num 1 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.5 1.6 1.6 0.0 0.3 0.3
ber
of 2
trans 3
missi
on 4
span
s 5
10
11
12
13 2.5 2.8 2.8 2.5 2.8 2.8 0.2 0.5 0.5
14
15
16
17 4.0 - - 4.3 - - 0.4 0.8 0.8
18
19
20
For a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system, if the standard incident power for the entire regenerator
section is +4 dBm, extra hybrid transmission penalties must be considered. Table 7-17 and
Table 7-18 lists the hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 80-channel system.


Hybrid Transmission Penalty Adjacency Type
One-Side Adjacency
50 GHz 100 GHz
NRZ RZ NRZ RZ
Number of 1 0.6 0.7 0.3 0.3

transmission
spans 2
10
11
12
13 1.0 1.5 0.4 0.4
14
15
16
17 -
18
19
20


Hybrid Adjacency Type
Transmissi
on Penalty Two-Side Adjacency
50 GHz and 50 GHz 50 GHz and 100 GHz 100 GHz and 100
GHz

Z Z Z
Num 1 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.6 1.7 1.7 0.3 0.5 0.5
ber
of 2
trans 3
missi
on 4
span
s 5
10
11
12
13 1.9 2.6 2.6 1.9 2.6 2.6 0.5 0.7 0.7
14
15
16
17 -
18
19
20
NOTE
If both 40G and 10G signals are transmitted and high-power amplifiers are used on the network, you need to
consider the overall penalty instead of only the separate 40G/10G hybrid transmission penalty and the power
penalty caused by the high-power amplifier. For details, see High-Power and Hybrid Transmission
Penalty.

High-Power Hybrid Transmission Penalty

If high-power amplifiers (the maximum output optical power exceeds +20 dBm) are used and
40G and low-rate signals are transmitted on a network at the same time, you need to consider
the OSNR penalty on the 40G signals. This type of penalty is referred to as a high-power hybrid
transmission penalty.
If a 10G or 2.5G single wavelength, or if both 10G and 2.5G wavelengths, are transmitted over
channels adjacent to a 40G ODB wavelength channel within 200 GHz channel spacing, the high-
power hybrid transmission penalties are as follows:
l In a regenerator section, if one to three +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you do
not need to consider a high-power hybrid transmission penalty.
l In a regenerator section, if four to five +23 dBm high-power amplifiers are used, you need
to consider a high-power hybrid transmission penalty of 0.5 dB.
Table 7-19 and Table 7-20 lists the high-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK
40-channel system.
Table 7-19 High-power hybrid transmission penalties in a 40G eDQPSK 40-channel system
High-Power Hybrid Adjacency Type
Transmission Penalty
One-Side Adjacency
100 GHz 200 GHz
NRZ RZ NRZ RZ
Number of 1 1.5a 1.8a 0.8a 1.0a

transmission
spans 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16


One-Side Adjacency
100 GHz 200 GHz
NRZ RZ NRZ RZ
17 -
18
19
20
High-Power Adjacency Type
Hybrid
Transmissi Two-Side Adjacency
on Penalty 100 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 200 200 GHz and 200
GHz GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ RZ NR NRZ RZ NRZ NRZ RZ

+NR +RZ +RZ Z +RZ +RZ +NR +RZ +RZ
Z +N Z
RZ
Num 1 l 1.5 l 1. l 1. l 1. l 1. l 1. 1.0a 1.2a 1.2a

ber of b 7b 7b 5 7b 7b
trans 2 b
l 2.2 l 2. l 2. l 2. l 2.
missi c l 2.
3 7c 7c 7c 7c
on 2
spans 4 c
10
11
12
13 -
14

High-Power Adjacency Type

Hybrid
Transmissi Two-Side Adjacency
on Penalty 100 GHz and 100 100 GHz and 200 200 GHz and 200
GHz GHz GHz
NRZ NRZ RZ NR NRZ RZ NRZ NRZ RZ

+NR +RZ +RZ Z +RZ +RZ +NR +RZ +RZ
Z +N Z
RZ
15
16
17 -
18
19
20
NOTE
l "a" indicates that one to five +23 dBm amplifiers are used. If more than five +23 dBm amplifiers are used,
reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than five.
l "b" indicates that one or two +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
l When no +23 dBm amplifier is used, see Hybrid Transmission Penalty.
l "c" indicates that three +23 dBm amplifiers are used. When the number of +23 dBm amplifiers exceeds
three, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value smaller than three.
Table 7-21 and Table 7-22 lists the high-power hybrid transmission penalties for a 40G
eDQPSK 80-channel system.

One-Side Adjacency
50 GHz 100 GHz
NRZ RZ NRZ RZ
Number of 1 l 1.3a l 1.4a l 0.2a l 0.2a

transmission
2 l 2.1b l 1.5b l 0.2b l 0.4b
spans
3


One-Side Adjacency
50 GHz 100 GHz
NRZ RZ NRZ RZ
10
11
12
13 l 2.6c
14 l 2.7d
15
16
17 -
18
19
20
High- Adjacency Type
Power
Hybrid Two-Side Adjacency
Transmissi 50 GHz and 50 GHz 50 GHz and 100 GHz 100 GHz and 100 GHz
on Penalty
Z Z Z
Num 1 l 1. l 1. l 1. l 1. l 1. l 1. l 0. l 0. l 0.
ber 8a 8a 3a 8a 8a 3a 3a 2a 2a
of 2
l 2. l 2. l 2. l 2. l 2. l 2. l 0. l 0. l 0.
trans 0
3 5b 5b 5b 5b 0b 5b 4b 4b
missi b
on 4 l 0. l 0. l 0.
8c 6c 6c

High- Adjacency Type

Power
Hybrid Two-Side Adjacency
Transmissi 50 GHz and 50 GHz 50 GHz and 100 GHz 100 GHz and 100 GHz
on Penalty
Z Z Z
span 5 l 1. l 1.
s 2d 2d
6
10
11
12
13 -
14
15
16
17 -
18
19
20
NOTE
l "a" indicates that one to three +23 dBm amplifiers are used. When no +23 dBm amplifier is used, see Hybrid
Transmission Penalty.
l "b" indicates that four to five +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
l "c" indicates that six to eight +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
l "d" indicates that nine to twelve +23 dBm amplifiers are used.
l When the number of +23 dBm amplifiers exceeds 12, reduce the number of these amplifiers to a value
smaller than 12.
PDL Penalty
If no ROADM station exists in a regenerator section, the OSNR tolerance specification described
in 7.4.5 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System includes the PDL penalty in a normal
situation. In this case, you do not need to consider an extra PDL penalty.

If an ROADM station exists in a regenerator section, you need to consider an extra PDL penalty
caused by the WSS component at the ROADM station. In this case, you need to consider a PDL
penalty of 0.15 dB for each WSS component that a 40G ODB or 40G eDQPSK wavelength
traverses.
PMD Penalty
The "Typical PMD OSNR Penalty" value in the OSNR tolerance table in 7.4.5 Commissioning
OSNR for the 40G System includes the typical PMD penalty, which is given based on the fiber
PMD coefficient of a regenerator section. If customers provide the actual

fiber parameter values or the actual fiber PMD coefficient is greater than the provided PMD
coefficient, you need to calculate the PMD penalty based on the following formula, then
substitute the calculated PMD penalty for the "Typical PMD OSNR Penalty" value in the OSNR
tolerance table in 7.4.5 Commissioning OSNR for the 40G System. The calculated PMD
penalty is used as the OSNR tolerance of the regenerator section after the PMD penalty is
considered.
NOTE
The PMD tolerance is a key specification in a module test of a WDM system. As a random function of optical
wavelengths and time, the PMD may be different for different fibers at a specified time. The differential group
delay (DGD) is used to measure the PMD of a line. As a statistical value, the DGD probability distribution must
comply with the Maxwell distribution rate when long fibers are used. As the maximum DGD value is three times
the average DGD value, you need to calculate the PMD value permitted by a fiber based on the maximum DGD
value.
In general, the actual PMD coefficient expressed in ps/(km)1/2 is given in engineering design
documents. Based on this PMD coefficient, you can calculate the DGD value (ps) of each optical
amplifier span and optical multiplex section.
For optical amplifier spans, the DGD calculation formula is , where

DGD represents the DGD value expressed in ps for each span, PMD represents the PMD
coefficient expressed in ps/(km)1/2 for each span, L represents the span distance expressed in
km, and L1/2 represents the square root of the span distance.
For the multiplex section, the DGD calculation formula is
, where (DGDi) represents the

DGD value of each section and is expressed in ps, and Li represents the distance for each section.
In a 40G system, a DCM module introduces a PMD penalty while compensating for distributed
dispersions. In addition, the board using a WSS component also introduces a PMD penalty of
0.2 ps.
For example, there are X (an integer representing the quantity) multiplex sections on the network.
The DGD of these multiplex sections can be calculated by using the

formula, where i is an integer equal to or smaller than X. In addition, there are M (an integer
representing the quantity) DCM modules and the PMD penalty introduced by each DCM module
can be calculated by using the formula, where j is an integer equal to

or smaller than M. Furthermore, there are N (an integer representing the quantity) boards
configured with WSS components. In this case, the DGD value of all the multiplex sections can
be calculated by using the
formula. You
can then convert the DGD value into the OSNR penalty by using the following formulas:
and
ROADM Penalty
Each WSS component at an ROADM station generates a certain OSNR penalty in 40G signals.
In a regenerator section, the number of WSS components at the ROADM stations that 40G
signals traverse corresponds to an OSNR penalty. This type of OSNR penalty is called the
ROADM penalty. For the association between the number of the WSS components and the
OSNR penalty, see Table 7-23.
Table 7-23 OSNR penalty
Num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ber of
WSS
Com
pone
nts
That
40G
Signa
ls
Trave
rse
Extra 0 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Trans
missio
n
Penalt
y
7.4.7 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation

This section describes how to adjust dispersion compensation.

Prerequisites
The commissioning for the optical power for a 40G link must be complete.

U2000
When the optical power commissioning is complete, a 40G board generally starts the automatic
dispersion search. If the automatic dispersion search is not started, manually start it for a 40G
board on the U2000.
NOTE
The turnable dispersion compensator module (TDCM) may report an OTU_LOF alarm or bit errors in the process
of the automatic dispersion search. This, however, does not indicate an exception.
Procedure
Step 1 On the U2000, check the current Dispersion Compensation Value of a 40G board. In addition,
determine whether the current dispersion compensation value is correct based on the following
principles.
l If the value is inside the range of -200 to +200, the dispersion compensation is proper.
l If the value is outside the range of -200 to +200 but is inside the range of -300 to +300,
attention is required. The project manager should provide feedback to the network design
personnel.
l If the value is outside the range of -300 to +300, immediately provide feedback to the project
manager and ask the network design personnel to optimize the design for the dispersion
compensation module (DCM) for the network.
2. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the required LSXL board, and choose Configuration > Dispersion Compensation
Management from the Function Tree on the left side of the window.
4. Optional: Select the IN/OUT port row under Port, and click Start Search.
CAUTION
Searching for dispersion configurations interrupts service.
5. Click Query to obtain the current Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm).

6. Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.
----End

7.5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site Based on 40Gbit/

s Single-Wavelength System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40Gbit/s (hereinafter referred to
as 40G) OTM and OLA, stations on site.

commissioning requirements for a low-rate service line. In this example, the system to be
Networking Diagram
Figure 7-14 shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical network
elements (ONEs) A, B, C, and D are the stations installed with the WDM equipment. ONE A
and ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C are two OLA stations. There
are several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C. 10-channel 40G services are transmitted
between ONEs A and D.
optical fiber.
Figure 7-14 Service requirement matrix in project H

A 80 km/22dB B C 76 km/20.9dB D
OLA
：OTM ：OLA

Figure 7-15 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of project H.

Figure 7-15 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H

A D
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
STM-256
LSXL 192.70THz STM-256 LSXL 192.70THz
STM-256
STM-256

Figure 7-16 shows the configuration of an optical amplifier at each station in project H.
Figure 7-16 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project H

A B C D
DCM DCM DCM

to
OAU D40
OBU OAU OAU
103
from 103 103 103
M40 OLA
OAU OAU OAU OBU

to 103 103 103 103
D40 from
DCM DCM DCM M40
80 km 76 km
22dB 20.9dB
NOTE
In the case of the 40G ODB and DQPSK code patterns, an ITL board integrating two interleavers must be used
in an 80-channel system for wavelength filtering.
NE Board Configuration
NOTE
The type of OAU1 is OAU103, and the type of OBU1 is OBU103.
Figure 7-17 shows the board configurations for ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations
for ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown in
Figure 7-19.

Figure 7-18 shows the board configurations for ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations
for ONEs B and C are the same as the board configurations for the other OLAs, as shown in
Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-17 Board configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU PDU
P
I
L L L U
F S S S S P
I X X X C I
U L L L CU
A
U
X
P P
I I
U L L U
O L L F S S P
F M D
M S P S
I 4
B
4R S S C I I X X C I
U 0
U
02 X X CU U L L CU
1 L L A
A
U U
X X
P P
I I
U L L L U
O O F S S P
F S S P S S
A B M C I
I C C I I X X X
U U C CU
U 1 CU U L L L
1 1 A A
A
U U
X X
DCM DCM

Figure 7-18 Board configurations for ONE A and ONE D (OTM)
PDU
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
O O S
B A C
U U C
1 1
X X
CC
HH
L L S
M M D S F
S S C
C 4 4 C I
X X C
A 0 0 1 U
L L
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
L L L L
S S S S S
X X C X X
L L C L L
X X
CC
HH
L L S L L
S S C S S
X X C X X
L L L L
NOTE
The TN11LSXL occupies four slots.
NOTE
The TN12LSXL occupies three slots.

Figure 7-19 Board configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
P
I
U
O O
F F S S P
A A
I I C C I
U U
U U 2 CU
1 1 A
U
X
DCM

Figure 7-20 Board configurations for ONEs B and C (OLA)
PDU
A
PIU PIU
U PIU PIU
X
O O S
A A C
U U C
1 1
X X
CC
HH
F F S S
I I C C
UU 2 C
Commissioning Procedures
Table 7-24 Commissioning stations reference list
Station Commissioning Method and Fiber Connection Diagram
A Refer to 7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM

Station
B, C Refer to 7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station
D Refer to 7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM

Station

For the commissioning method for each station in project H and the fiber connection diagram
of each station, see Table 7-24. The commissioning is performed in two directions:
Direction 1: A→B→C→D
Direction 2: D→C→B→A
Because the commissioning for the two directions are performed similarly, only the
commissioning for direction 1 is described in this document.
CAUTION
Before the equipment is connected to the line fiber at each station, you must complete the
following operations:
l Test the span loss to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement of the
engineering design.
l Test the transmission distance of the line signals to ensure the value is in accordance with
the requirement of the engineering design.
l Check the type of the line fiber to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement
of the engineering design.
If any one of the preceding operation is not performed, the system commissioning will be
affected. In this case, provide feedback to the appropriate personnel who are in charge of that
particular issue.
NOTE
The fibers between the FIU and ODF subrack, the fibers between the LSXL and client equipment, and the
fibers between cabinets are all external fibers that should be routed on site.
7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM

Station
This section uses direction 1 as an example to describe how to commission the optical power at
the transmit end of the OTM. The objective of commissioning is to ensure that the total transmit
optical power meets the specification requirements and that the optical power flatness for every
wavelength is achieved.
Prerequisites

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Fiber adapter, Fixed optical

In this example, the hardware specifications are as follows:
NOTE
When the 40G ODB system is used, a dual-module ITL board must be configured at the transmit and receive
ends. If certain OADM stations add/drop ODB wavelengths (wavelengths with 100 GHz channel spacing), a
dual-module ITL board must also be used at the transmit and receive ends. For the ROADM stations with 50
GHz channel spacing, no ITL board is required because the 50 GHz WSS module provides the 50 GHz filter
function.
Figure 7-21 Fiber connections at OTM station A
Station A
Rx M31
LSXL
M32
LSXL M
4 OBU1 To B
0 OUT IN OUT RC OUT
M40
LSXL
TM RM F
SC1 I
D31
RM TM U
Tx
LSXL
D32
LSXL D
4 OAU1 From B
0
IN OUT TC IN
D40 DCM
LSXL RDC TDC
Variable optical Fixed optical

attenuator attenuator ODF
Procedure
Step 1 Check if the fiber connections between boards are correct based on the fiber connection diagram.
Check if the fiber on each board is properly connected. If not, correct the error immediately.
Step 2 Access real service signals on the client sides of all OTU boards.
Step 3 Obtain the information on the optical module of the OTU by referring to the bar code on the
front panel or the board manufacturing information.
Step 4 Ask the customer equipment engineer to provide the transmitting optical power and the optical
module equipment type. Compare the optical power with the receiving optical power on the
client side of the OTU to determine if the fixed attenuator should be replaced. Record the
receiving optical power on the client side of the OTU.

For project H, the receiving optical power for the client-side OTU (the input optical power of
the client-side LSXL ports) must be within the range:
l TN11LSXL: from 0 dBm to +3 dBm.
l TN12LSXL: from -1 dBm to +1 dBm.
Step 5 Check whether the WDM-side OUT ports on all OTUs emit light. If the OUT ports do not emit
light,
l check whether the accessed SDH/SONET services are normal or not. If the services are
abnormal, clear the fault.
Step 6 Test the output optical power of the OUT port on the OTU. For the LSXL, the value must be
within the range from -5 dBm to 0 dBm. The normal value is –3 dBm.
Step 7 Test the receiving optical power of the Mn port for the M40 and record the value.
NOTE
Mn refers to the M31–M40 ports that are used in this example.

If the difference between the optical power and the optical power for the OUT port on the OTU is greater
than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.
Step 8 Pre-adjust the attenuation of the Variable optical attenuator attached to the M40 to +3 dB to
facilitate the fine-tuning of the attenuation in the subsequent steps.
Step 9 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical port on the M40 by using a fiber
jumper. Scan the M40 to output multiplexed signals and record the optical power for every
wavelength and the multiplexed optical power. Then calculate the wavelength insertion loss for
the M40 to check whether the wavelength insertion loss of the M40 meets the specification
requirements.
NOTE
When calculating the wavelength insertion loss of the M40, note that the attenuation of the M40 is pre-
adjusted to +3 dB.
If the detected output optical power is abnormal, check whether the optical ports M31–M40 are properly
connected.
Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical port on the OBU1 to an
optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator attached to the IN optical
port on the OBU1 to ensure that the total input optical power of the OBU1 is near –9 dBm.
NOTE
According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the signals to ensure
that the total optical power meets the specification requirements. Then, ensure the optical power flatness
for every wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power meets the standards. The total input
optical power is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength optical power. The calculation formula
is as follows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength input optical power + 10logN (N
equals 10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -19dBm, the input total optical power
is -9 dBm.
Step 11 Test the output optical power at the OUT optical port on the OBU1, and ensure that the total
output optical power of the multiplexed wavelengths reaches near +14 dBm.
NOTE
The fixed gain of the TN11OBU103 is 23 dB. In the case, the input optical power of the IN port on the
OBU1 is -9dBm, so the output optical power of the OUT port is +14dBm.

NOTE
The nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the maximum single-
wavelength input optical power should be not more than +5.5 dBm.
Obtain the total output optical power by using the following formula: Total output optical power = Single-
wavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals 10).
Step 12 Connect the OUT optical port on the OBU1 to the optical spectrum analyzer to query the optical
power for every wavelength. Adjust the wavelength attenuation of the Variable optical attenuator
attached to the M40 so that the output optical power flatness is about 0.5 dB.
Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power at the RC port of the FIU board and record
the test result.
NOTE
If the difference between the optical power at the RC port and the optical power at the OUT port on the
OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fibers.
Step 14 Test the optical power for the OUT port on the FIU (when disconnecting the fiber from the RM
port), and determine the RC-OUT insertion loss.
The RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU – Optical
power of the OUT on the FIU
Step 15 Test the output optical power for the TM port on the SC1 with an optical power meter, and then
test the input optical power for the RM port on the FIU. If the difference between the two values
is more than 1 dB, check the routing and the cleanliness of the optical fibers.
Step 16 Test the output optical power for the OUT port on the FIU with an optical power meter (when
disconnecting the fiber from the RC port). Calculate the insertion loss from RM to OUT port
for the FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.
----End
7.5.3 Commissioning Optical Power of the OLA Station

For the OLA station, you need to commission only the total optical power in terms of the optical
power commissioning.
Prerequisites

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Signal analyzer, Fiber adapter,
Fixed optical attenuator, VOA, U2000

l The type of OAU1 is OAU103.
Figure 7-22 Fiber connections of OLA station B
Station B
DCM
TDC RDC
TC IN OUT RC
OAU1
IN OUT
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM U
West East
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

DCM

Procedure
Step 1 Test the optical power for the IN port on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Compare
the value with the optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU of station A to calculate the
line attenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation is
larger than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determine
whether the cable attenuation is excessively high or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are
faulty, clear the fault immediately.
Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN port and the output optical power for the TM port on the
west FIU at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values in
the commissioning record.
Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TM port for the west FIU. The insertion loss
Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 port by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Add a proper
attenuator to make the input power less than –3 dB.
Step 5 Test the output optical power for the TM2 port of the SC2 by using an optical spectrum analyzer.
Record the input optical power for the RM1 port and the output optical power for the TM2 port
Step 6 Test the input optical power for the RM port and the output optical power for the OUT port on
the east FIU at 1510 nm by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power values

Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM port to the OUT port on the east FIU. The insertion
Step 8 Test the input optical power for the IN port and the output optical power for the TC port on the
west FIU at a certain wavelength by using an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power
values in the commissioning record.
Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN port to the TC port on the west FIU. The insertion loss
Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical port on the west OAU1 to
an optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator attached to the IN optical
port on the OAU1 to ensure that the total input optical power for the OAU1 is about –10 dBm.
NOTE
According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the signals to ensure
that the total input optical power meets the specification requirement. Then ensure the optical power flatness
for every wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power meets the specification requirements.
The total input optical power is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength optical power. The
calculation formula is as follows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength input optical
power + 10logN (N equals 10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -20 dBm, the input
total optical power is -10 dBm.
Step 11 Query the output optical power at the OUT optical port on the west OAU1. Then adjust the gain
of the OAU1 on the U2000 to ensure that the total output optical power for the multiplexed
wavelengths reaches near +14 dBm.
NOTE
The nominal single-wavelength input optical power for the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the maximum single-
wavelength input optical power should be not exceed +5.5 dBm.
The total output optical power for the multiplexed wavelengths can be obtained by using the following formula:
Total output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals 10).
Step 12 Test the input and output optical power for the DCM and calculate the DCM insertion loss.
DCM insertion loss = DCM input optical power – DCM output optical power
Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power for the RC port on the FIU and record the
value.
NOTE
If the difference between the optical power and the optical power for the OUT port on the OAU is greater
than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.
Step 14 Test the optical power for the OUT port on the east FIU (when disconnecting the fiber to the
RM port) and calculate the RC-OUT insertion loss.
The RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU – Optical
power of the OUT on the FIU
----End
7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM

Station
The commissioning rule for the OTM station is to "commission the optical power at the transmit
end based on the optical power at the receive end". At the receive end of the OTM station, you
need to commission only the total input optical power. Then adjust the attenuation for every

wavelength of the M40 at the transmit end according to the optical power flatness at the receive
end.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections must be established properly.
All channels must have service signals, or the laser on each channel emits light forcibly to ensure
that the OTU emits light normally.

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, fiber jumper, flange, fixed
optical attenuator, VOA, U2000
l The OAU1 type is OAU103. The OBU1 type is OBU103.
Figure 7-23 Fiber connections of OTM station D
Station D
D31 Tx
TDC RDC
DCM
LSXL
D32
D LSXL
From C OAU1
4
IN TC OUT IN 0
D40
LSXL
F TM RM1
I SC1
U RM TM1
M31 Rx
LSXL
OUT M32
M LSXL
To C OBU1 4
OUT RC OUT
IN 0
M40
LSXL


Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the fiber connections between boards are properly established and whether the
fibers on each board are tightly inserted. Immediately correct any issues found.
Step 2 Measure the optical power of the FIU and the SC1 by referring to 7.5.2 Commissioning
Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station.
Step 3 Commission the optical power of the OAU1 by referring to 7.5.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of the OLA Station.
Step 4 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN port on the D40 to an optical
spectrum analyzer. Scan the multiplexed signal and record the optical power for each
wavelength.
Step 5 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the IN port on the west D40 by using a fiber jumper.
Scan the multiplexed signal of the D40, and record the input optical power for each wavelength.
Step 6 Measure the single-wavelength optical power at the Dn port on the D40 by using an optical
spectrum analyzer.
Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the D40. The insertion loss must be lower
than 6.5 dB, and the maximum insertion loss variance between wavelengths of the D40 must be
smaller than 2.0 dB.
Step 8 Measure the input and output optical power of the DCM and then calculate the insertion loss for
the DCM based on the following formula:
Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM – Output optical power of the
DCM.
Step 9 Measure the optical power at the IN port on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whether the
optical power at the IN port on the OTU is within the standard range.
NOTE
The input optical power on the WDM side of the LSXL board must be within the range of -11 dBm to -4
dBm. If the measured optical power does not meet the specification requirements, you need to add a proper
fixed optical attenuator, or replace/remove the existing fixed optical attenuator according to the measured
optical power, so that the receive optical power of the OTU is within the normal range.
Step 10 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN port on the OTU after the input optical power meets
the specification requirements.
Step 11 Measure the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power on the
ODF side. Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is properly
connected. The fiber attenuation must be lower than 1 dB.
Step 12 On the U2000, query the input and output optical power of each OTU. The variance between
the optical power displayed on the U2000 and the measured optical power must be smaller than
2.0 dB. The system OSNR flatness must be near ±1 dB after the commissioning. That is, the
OSNR measured by the optical spectrum analyzer must meet the specification requirements and
the OSNR for every wavelength is flat when the equalizing optical power for every wavelength
is normal. In addition, check whether the bit error rate conforms to the expected value.
Step 13 If the connected client equipment is new, perform the 24–hour BER test on the client equipment.
If the client equipment is not connected or not being used currently, configure a loopback
between the TX and RX ports on the client side for every OTU at station C. In this case, a fixed
optical attenuator needs to be installed between the two ports.

NOTE
7.5.2 Commissioning Transmit End Optical Power of the OTM Station, 7.5.3 Commissioning Optical
Power of the OLA Station, and 7.5.4 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM
Station contain the process for commissioning an optical multiplex section. The commissioning for the
multiplex sections at OTM and OLA stations is similar.
----End
7.5.5 Commissioning Optical Power for Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power for equalization.
Prerequisites
All channels must carry services or must be forced to emit light, which makes the OTU emit
light normally.

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Fiber adapter, Fixed optical
l The G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.
l The type of OAU1 is TN11OAU103 and the type of OBU1 is TN11OBU103.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the MON port on an OA at an OLA station to an optical spectrum analyzer to scan the
multiplexed signals. Then record the optical power for each wavelength.
Step 2 Adjust the optical power for each add wavelength by changing the attenuation of the VOA on
each add channel to ensure that the optical power is flat. That is, ensure that the optical power
for one wavelength differs from that of another wavelength at an intermediate station by less
than 2 dB.
Step 3 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a specific
wavelength is poor, improve the performance for this wavelength by changing its optical power.
In addition, make the opposite change to the optical power of the wavelength that has the best
performance to ensure that the total optical power remains unchanged. The changed optical
power cannot exceed 2 dB.
NOTE
optical power or decreasing the optical power can improve the wavelength performance.
----End

7.5.6 Adjusting Dispersion Compensation

This section describes how to adjust dispersion compensation.
Prerequisites
The commissioning for the optical power for a 40G link must be complete.

U2000
When the optical power commissioning is complete, a 40G board generally starts the automatic
dispersion search. If the automatic dispersion search is not started, manually start it for a 40G
board on the U2000.
NOTE
The turnable dispersion compensator module (TDCM) may report an OTU_LOF alarm or bit errors in the process
of the automatic dispersion search. This, however, does not indicate an exception.
Procedure
Step 1 On the U2000, check the current Dispersion Compensation Value of a 40G board. In addition,
determine whether the current dispersion compensation value is correct based on the following
principles.
l If the value is inside the range of -200 to +200, the dispersion compensation is proper.
l If the value is outside the range of -200 to +200 but is inside the range of -300 to +300,
attention is required. The project manager should provide feedback to the network design
personnel.
l If the value is outside the range of -300 to +300, immediately provide feedback to the project
manager and ask the network design personnel to optimize the design for the dispersion
compensation module (DCM) for the network.
2. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the required LSXL board, and choose Configuration > Dispersion Compensation
Management from the Function Tree on the left side of the window.
4. Optional: Select the IN/OUT port row under Port, and click Start Search.
CAUTION
Searching for dispersion configurations interrupts service.
5. Click Query to obtain the current Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm).

6. Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.
----End
7.6 Analyzing and Handling Common Problems in a 40G

System
happen in the process of commissioning a 40G system. You need to analyze and handle the
problems according to actual situations.
7.6.1 OSNR Failure

This section describes how to resolve the problem with the OSNR that are not up to the design
value in the deployment commissioning phase.
Context
The integral method must be used to test the OSNR of a system to check whether the OSNR is
up to the network design value. If the input and output optical power and gain for each OA on
the network are the same as the network design values but the OSNR is not, inform the project
manager to provide this feedback to the network design engineers.
NOTE
Do not increase the optical power at the transmit end to increase the system OSNR. If you increase the transmit
optical power, the attendant nonlinear effects cause a sharp degrade in the performance of the system. As a result,
it is difficult to determine whether the system OSNR fails.
7.6.2 Excessively High Incident Optical Power

This section describes how to resolve the problem of excessively high incident optical power in
the deployment commissioning phase.
Context
A 40G system is sensitive to nonlinear effects. In general, a 40G system requires that the incident
optical power should be lower than 4 dBm. If the incident optical power is higher than 4 dBm,
nonlinear effects are caused and transmission performance degrade occurs. In the fault
identification process, check the output optical power of each OA on the line to ensure that the
actual output optical power of each OA deviates from the nominal output optical power by at
most ±1.5 dB.
7.6.3 Incorrect Dispersion Configuration

This section describes how to resolve the problem of incorrect dispersion configuration in the
deployment commissioning phase.
Context
Regardless of whether the system is a 40G or 10G, the methods for handling a dispersion problem
are similar. To resolve a dispersion problem, add a fiber or DCM at the receive end to change
the system dispersion (note that the optical power of the OTU boards and the OA boards in the

system must remain unchanged after you change the dispersion), and use the TDCM integrated
in an 40G OTU board to automatically search for the optimal dispersion compensation value (if
possible, fine-tune the dispersion compensation). Ensure that the system OSNR and optical
power are normal. If the TDCM fails to automatically search for the optimal dispersion
compensation value, you need to adjust the DCM configurations by referring to the dispersion
configuration rules.
NOTE
The TDCM integrated in a 40G OTU board has a requirement on a wavelength carrying the receive optical
signals. If this wavelength fails to match the TDCM, the dispersion adjustment fails. Therefore, the wavelengths
for the two interconnected 40G OTU boards must be the same.
7.6.4 Methods for Handling Other Faults

This section describes how to handle other faults in the deployment commissioning phase.
Context
l The performance of certain 40G channels degrades after the commissioning.
– Possible cause: The TDCM integrated in the relevant 40G boards fails to adjust the
dispersion compensation to the optimal value.
– Solution: Refer to the TDCM value of the channel that has good performance and shares
the same source and sink as the channel being commissioned. Then adjust the TDCM
value for a channel with poor performance until the channel performance reaches the
optimal value.
l All the 40G channels on a route cannot be set up, or the performance of all these channels
is poor after the commissioning.
– Possible cause 1: After the design, the fiber route or length on this link is changed. A
40G system has a high requirement on dispersion compensation deviation. After the
fiber route or length is changed, the existing DCM does not match the changed fiber
length. As a result, the 40G channels on this link cannot be set up or the performance
of these 40G channels is poor.
– Solution 1: If a fiber on a link is changed (for example, fiber length, attenuation, and
PMD), the changed parameter values must be provided to design engineers for
evaluation so that the design engineers can determine whether to adjust the design.
– Possible cause 2: The relevant DCMs are connected incorrectly or the relevant
dispersion configurations are incorrect.
– Solution 2: Focus on the dispersion configurations on the network.
NOTE
Compared with a 10G board, a 40G board has a higher rate and thus can tolerate a narrower range of
dispersion.
l For ODB and eDQPSK optical modules, the compensation for chromatic dispersion on a line must
be accurate to ±5.0 km. In a G.652 fiber network, a 10 km or 5 km DCM must be used to ensure
this compensation accuracy.
l All 40G channels on a route cannot be set up or the performance of these channels is poor
after the commissioning. In addition, this problem exists in both directions of this route.
– Possible cause: The DCMs on the link are connected incorrectly, especially the DCMs
that are used for under-compensation or over-compensation.

– Solution: Check the input and output optical power for a DCM on the U2000 . Then
calculate the attenuation of the DCM, or check the fiber connections for a station at the
site to determine whether the DCM at this station is incorrectly connected.
l The OSNR for a 40G channel is lower than the design value after the commissioning. (The
OSNR for the 40G channel is obtained by using the integral method.)
– Possible cause: The commissioning is not performed by using a normal method, or the
actual attenuation of a span on the link exceeds the design attenuation value.
– Solution: Recommission this link. If the actual attenuation of a span on the link exceeds
the design attenuation value, adjust the fibers on this span.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 8 Example for Commissioning the Optical Power of the
Commissioning Guide Coherent Transmission System
8 Example for Commissioning the Optical

Power of the Coherent Transmission System
About This Chapter
This section describes how to commission the optical power of a single-channel 40G system
(40G system for short) and a single-channel 100G system (100G system for short).
CAUTION
Ensure that the optical ports and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise,
system performance will be affected.
8.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the Coherent Transmission System
This section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning the optical power
of the coherent transmission system.
8.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission system
This section describes the general process for commissioning coherent transmission system.
designs, such as dispersion configuration and compensation method, OSNR, ITL configuration,
and channel allocation for hybrid transmission of 10G, 40G, and 100G signals, meet the
requirements for setting up the coherent transmission system.
8.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on 100 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength
System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 100G OTM, OLA and ROADM
stations on the U2000.

8.1 Rules for Commissioning the Optical Power of the

Coherent Transmission System
This section describes the general rules and requirements for commissioning the optical power
of the coherent transmission system.

Table 8-1 shows the incident optical power requirements for the coherent transmission system.
Table 8-1 Requirements on incident optical power

Module Type Number of Type of Fibers
Wavelengths
G.652 G.655 LEAF
40G ePDM-BPSK 40 +1 -1
80 +1 -1
100G ePDM-QPSK 40 +1 -1
80 +1 -1
l The optical power listed in the table is expressed in dBm, and is applicable to optical
amplifiers with total output optical power of 20 dBm.
l If a high-power optical amplifier with a total output optical power of 23 dBm is used on
the link, the incident optical power between the high-power optical amplifier needs to be
increased by 3 dB in the commissioning process.
l The preceding table lists the requirements for the incident optical power of the coherent
transmission system. For a hybrid transmission system configured with dispersion
compensation, the requirements for the incident optical power are the same as those in a
non-coherent transmission system.
NOTE
100G and 40G signals are sensitive to non-linear effects. Therefore, the optical power of 100G and 400G signals
must satisfy the requirements for nominal optical power. It is prohibited to randomly increase the optical power
of 100G and 40G signals.

NOTE
OAU
FIU
OAU
: VOA
Selection of Channels for Mixed Transmission of 100G, 40G and 10G Signals
Channel spacing does not need to be considered during mixed transmission of 100G and 40G
signals.
100G channels are preferred for carrying long wavelengths. After all the long wavelengths are
allocated, properly allocate the medium and short wavelengths. 10G channels are preferred for
carrying short wavelengths.
For the mixed transmission of 100G coherent transmission system signals and 40G and 10G
noncoherent transmission systems, only one-side neighborhood is allowed; the two-side
neighborhood is prohibited.
Mixed transmission of 100G coherent transmission system signals and 40G and 10G
noncoherent transmission systems are described as follows in the order of the smallest impact
to the greatest impact:
l Mixed transmission with maximum spacing among a 100G channel, a 40G channel and a
10G channel is at least 300 GHz.
l One-side neighboring transmission. That is, a channel of 40G/10G signals is present on
one side of a 100G channel.
l Do not apply mixed transmission of coherent system signals and noncoherent system
signals when there are fiber types other than G.652 and G.655.
Commissioning Rules
Observe the following rules when commissioning coherent transmission system:
l When commissioning the coherent transmission system, the MCA boards or an optical
spectrum analyzer must be used in the commissioning to ensure that the optical power is
precisely commissioned.

l Optical power is commissioned based on the nominal optical power. It is prohibited to

improve the optical power performance by increasing the transmit optical power in the
initial engineering phase. During the equalization of the system optical power, the actual
incident optical power for every section cannot deviate from the typical incident optical
power over ±1.5 dB regardless of the fiber type. Otherwise, the system performance
degrades quickly and the BER before FEC increases rapidly.
l In adjacent mixed transmission of 100G signals and 40G/10G signals, the optical power of
100G signals must be approximate to that of 40G signals but larger than that of 10G signals
and smaller than the nominal single-wavelength optical power.
l The optical power at the IN optical port on a 100G/40G OTU board must be within the
range of -13 dBm to -5 dBm.
l The objective of the system commissioning is to ensure the optical power flatness and the
OSNR flatness. When the difference between the OSNR flatness and optical power flatness
is small, the system OSNR flatness is obtained by maintaining the optical power flatness.
l In the case of coherent transmission system commissioning, adjust the optical power
difference between each wavelength in the middle of two equilibrium stations (stations that
balance the optical power, including ROADM, and back-to-back OTM) to a value not more
than ±0.5 dB.
l If equalizing optical power at intermediate stations, objectives of single-wavelength optical
power commissioning at the transmit and receive ends are as follows:
– According to the engineering requirement, the optical power of a single wavelength can
l In the mixed spectrum of 100G signals, 40G signals and 10G signals, the spectrum of 100G
signals and 40G signals are wider and the amplitude is lower than that of t10G signals.
Actually, the power of 10G signals is equal to the power of 100G signals and 40G signals.
Therefore, measure optical power of the 40G wavelength and the 100G wavelength
accurately.
TIP
When the system has more than 20 spans, the noise signal of the short wavelengths increases and there is
a great difference between OSNR flatness and optical power flatness. Therefore, during the extra long-haul
100G and 40G transmission, avoid using short wavelengths. If short wavelengths must be used, you need
to consider the OSNR limits of the short wavelengths when planning the network.
8.2 Process for Commissioning coherent transmission

system
This section describes the general process for commissioning coherent transmission system.
Figure 8-1 shows the process for commissioning coherent transmission system.

Figure 8-1 Process for commissioning coherent transmission system

Start
Design documents Identify the

and network conditions comply No nonconformance with
with the commissioning relevant network design
requirements? department
Yes
Configure boards and stations
Flatten the optical power of the OTM

station at the transmit end
Commission the optical power of an

OLA station
Commission the optical power of Add

Wavelengths and Links at an ROADM
station
Commission the input optical power of

the OTM station at the receive end
Equalize the optical power at

intermediate stations and Optimize
performance of each wavelength
Document and save the commissioning

result
End

designs, such as dispersion configuration and compensation method, OSNR, ITL configuration,
and channel allocation for hybrid transmission of 10G, 40G, and 100G signals, meet the
requirements for setting up the coherent transmission system.
The preparations before commissioning the optical power of the 100G coherent transmission
system are as follows:
l Check the design documents.

– Optical amplifier types and dispersion configuration and compensation modes

– Channel allocation for mixed transmission of 100G signals and 10G/40G signals
– Configuration of basic NE data such as NE IP and NE ID and station fiber connection
diagram
– Comparison between the planned designs and the actual designs on the live network
l Prepare the following commissioning meters:
– Optical spectrum analyzer
– Optical power meter
– For other types of 100G test meters, see Table 8-2.
Table 8-2 100G Analyzers

Name Appearance
JDSU ONT-503
EXFO FTB-500
l NMS:
– iManager U2000
– iManager U2000 Web LCT
8.4 Commissioning Optical Power on the U2000 Based on

100 Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System
This section describes how to commission the single-channel 100G OTM, OLA and ROADM
stations on the U2000.


commissioning requirements of a low-rate service line. In this example, the system to be
Networking Diagram
Figure 8-2 shows the network topology of Project K. In a chain network, optical network
elements (ONEs) A, B, C and D are the stations installed with the WDM equipments. ONE A
and ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B is one OLA station. ONE C is one ROADM
station. 10-channel 100G services are transmitted between ONEs A and D.
optical fiber.
Figure 8-2 Service requirement matrix in Project K

A 80 km/22dB B C 76 km/20.9dB D
56 km/19dB
：OTM ：OLA ：ROADM

Figure 8-3 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project K.
Figure 8-3 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project K

A D
100GE
LSC 192.10THz LSC 192.10THz
100GE
100GE
100GE
100GE
100GE
100GE
LSC 192.70THz 100GE LSC 192.70THz
100GE
100GE

Figure 8-4 shows the configuration for an optical amplifier at each station in project K.

Figure 8-4 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of project K

A B C D
DCM DCM R DCM

O To
OAU A D40
OBU OAU OBU OAU
103 D
From 103 103
M
103 103 至
M40 D40
R
OAU OAU OBU OAU OBU
O
To 103 103 103 103 103 来自
A
D40 D From
V40
DCM DCM M DCM M40
80 km 56 km 76 km
22dB 19dB 20.9dB

the OTM Station
This section describes how to commission the optical power of the OTM station that is in the
Prerequisites
You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
OTU emit light properly.
The receive wavelengths of 100G OTU boards have been set.

U2000

Testing Diagram
Figure 8-5 Fiber connections of the OTM station

Station A
Rx M31
LSC
M32
M
LSC
4 OBU1
0 OUT IN To B
OUT RC OUT
M40 V
LSC
TM RM F
SC1 I
RM TM
U
Tx D31
LSC
D32
LSC D OUT
4 OAU1 From B
0
IN TC IN
D40 RDC TDC
LSC

EVOA
NOTE
Procedure
Wavelengths at OTM Station A.
----End
8.4.3 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at the OLA Station

This section describes how to commission the link optical power of the OLA station that are in
the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites

U2000

Testing Diagram
Figure 8-6 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OAU1)

Station B
TDC RDC
TC IN OUT RC
OAU1
IN MON OUT
MCA
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
West MCA East
MON
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

EVOA

Figure 8-7 Fiber connections of the OLA station (OBU1+OBU1)
Station B
OBU1 C OBU1
IN M MON OUT
MCA
F TM RM1 TM2 RM F
From A I SC2 I To C
U RM TM1 RM2 TM
U
West MCA East
MON
RC OUT IN TC
OAU1
OUT RDC TDC IN

EVOA
NOTE
As shown in Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7, each EVOA can be considered as a VA1 board. If there is no VA1 or
VA4 on the network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. When this occurs, configure the MVOA
and then perform the optical power commissioning on site.
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
----End
8.4.4 Commissioning the Optical Power of the Added Wavelengths

and Links at ROADM Station (Colorless)
This section describes how to commission the optical power of ROADM station C that is in the
Prerequisite

U2000


Testing Diagram
Figure 8-8 Fiber connections of ROADM station C (Colorless)
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
RDU9 RDU9
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
OBU1
OBU1
U U U U U U
WSM9 WSM9 WSM9

WSD9
OBU1 WSM9
Station C
TM RM1 TM2 RM
SC2
RM TM1 RM2 TM
OBU1
IN OUT
DM TOA
F AM F
I EXPO ROA I
OBU1 RDU9 WSM9 OBU1
U TC IN IN EXPI OUT IN OUT RC
U To F East
West To D OUT
RC OUT EXPI IN
OUT
OBU1 WSM9 RDU9 OAU1
OUT IN ROA EXPO IN
TOA TC
AM DM RDC TDC
OUT IN
OBU1
OBU1
WSM9 WSD9
AM DM
OBU1
OBU1
WSM9 WSM9 WSM9
O O O O O O
T T T T T T RDU9 RDU9
U U U U U U
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U

EVOA
NOTE
network, the remote commissioning cannot be performed. In this case, you must configure the MVOA, then

NOTE
As shown in Figure 8-8, if the 80-wavelength system is used, it is recommended to add the VA1 in the dashed
frame.
NOTE
The preset values for the following procedure are calculated according to the typical single-wavelength input
Procedure
1. Preset the attenuation of the EVOA at each drop channel of the WSD9 on the receiving
side of the ROADM station to the maximum value.
a. In the NE Explorer, select the desired WSD9 board and choose Configuration >
WDM Interface in the navigation tree.
b. On the Basic Attributes tab page, set Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio to the
maximum value (15.0).
c. Click Apply.
2. On a pass-through channel, the OA board before the RDU9 board on the receive end is
used to compensate for the optical power attenuation of the line. For the commissioning
method, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the Link Optical Power at OLA Station B.
3. Set Laser Shutdown to Disabled.
NOTE
For the setting on U2000, see Setting Automatic Disabling of NE Function in "Commissioning the
Optical Power of the Add Wavelengths at OTM Station A".
4. Enable the WDM-side laser on only one OTU board to forcibly emit light and disable the
WDM-side lasers on other OTU boards. If pass-through wavelengths are configured on the
RDU9 board, block the pass-through wavelengths to ensure that no light is input to the
EXPI port on the WSM9 board.
NOTE
To block the pass-through wavelengths, deactivate the cross-connections of the pass-through wavelengths
on the RDU9 board. After commissioning the optical power of added wavelengths, activate the cross-
connections of the pass-through wavelengths again.
5. On U2000, query the input optical power of OBU1 in the wavelength adding direction.
NOTE
Set the attenuation of each wavelength adding channel on the WSM9 board connected to the input port of
OBU1 to the minimum value.
6. Adjust the attenuation of the single-wavelength channel on the WSM9 board connected to
the OTU board so that the input optical power of OBU1 in the wavelength adding direction
is equal to the nominal single-wavelength optical power.
7. On U2000, query the input optical power of OBU1 on the transmit end.
8. Adjust the attenuation of the single-wavelength channel on the WSM9 board on the transmit
end so that the input optical power of OBU1 on the transmit end is equal to the nominal
single-wavelength optical power.
9. Based on 6 and 8, preset the attenuation of all other wavelength adding channels on the two
WSM9 boards.

10. Disable the WDM-side laser on the current OTU board and enable the WDM-side laser on
the OTU board whose output wavelength is adjacent to the wavelength of the current OTU
board. Commission the optical power according to 5 to 8.
11. After commissioning the optical power of all added wavelengths, enable the WDM-side
lasers on all OTU boards.
12. Set Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
13. Preset the attenuation of each pass-through channel on the WDM9 board on the transmit
end to 5.0 dB.
NOTE
The preset value is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength output optical power of the OA
board on the receive end, nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the OA board on the transmit
end, and insertion loss of the WSM9 and RDU9 boards on each pass-through channel.
14. Commission the WDM-side input optical power of the OTU board.
a. Preset the attenuation of each wavelength dropping channel on the RDU9 board on
the receive end to 10 dB. The preset value is calculated based on the nominal input/
output optical power of the two OA boards in the wavelength dropping direction. In
this example, OAU1 on the receive end is OAU103 and OBU1 behind the RDU9
board is OBU103.
NOTE
During mixed transmission of coherent system signals and noncoherent system signals, a maximum
of 10 wavelengths can be dropped at each port of the RDU9 board, and noncoherent system
wavelengths can be dropped using the D40 board.
b. Preset the attenuation of each wavelength dropping channel on the WSD9 board in
the wavelength dropping direction. The preset value is calculated based on the nominal
input/output optical power of the two OA boards in the wavelength dropping direction.
In this example, OBU1 behind the WSD9 board is OBU103.
c. In colorless scenarios, the wavelengths dropped from each port of the RDU9 board
are multiplexed wavelengths. Obtain the average single-wavelength optical power
based on the optical power of the multiplexed wavelengths and the number of
multiplexed wavelengths. Adjust the attenuation of the wavelength dropping ports on
the last RDU9 board to ensure that the average signle-wavelength optical power is
within the range of -13 dBm to -5 dBm (input optical power of the OTU board).
8.4.5 Commissioning Receive-End Optical Power of the OTM

Station
This section describes how to commission the receive-end optical power of the OTM station
that are in the west-to-east signal flow.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections must be established properly.
All channels must have service signals, or the laser on each channel emits light forcibly to ensure
that the OTU emits light properly.


U2000
l The G.652 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.
l The OAU1 type is OAU103. The OBU1 type is OBU103.
Testing Diagram
Figure 8-9 Fiber connections of OTM station D

Station D
D31 Tx
LSC
D32
OUT D LSC
From C OAU1 4
IN 0
TC IN
TDC RDC D40
LSC
F RM TM
I SC1
U TM RM
M31 Rx
LSC
M32
OUT OUT M
LSC
To C OAU1 4
OUT IN
0
RC
V M40
LSC

EVOA
NOTE
Procedure
Step 1 Commission the optical power of the link on the receive end before the D40 board shown in
Figure 8-9. For details on how to commission the optical power, see 6.3.4 Commissioning the
Step 2 Commission the receive optical power of the OTU board. For details, see 6.3.21 Commissioning
Input Optical Power of OTU.
----End

8.4.6 Commissioning the Optical Power Equalization

This section describes how to commission the optical power equalization that is in the west-to-
east signal flow.
Prerequisites

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 See the procedures in 6.3.17 Commissioning the Optical Power at OTM Station A and OLA
Station B for Equalization.
Step 2 Optional: When the link commissioning is complete, if the performance for a certain wavelength
is poor, improve the performance of this wavelength by changing its optical power. In addition,
reversely change the optical power of the wavelength that has the best performance to ensure
that the total optical power remains unchanged. The changed optical power cannot exceed 2 dB.
NOTE
optical power or decreasing the optical power can improve wavelength performance.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 9 Automatic Commissioning
9 Automatic Commissioning
About This Chapter
This section describes the scenarios where the WDM optical power commissioning tool is used
to automatically commission optical power of sites and the preparations and procedure for the
commissioning. The WDM optical power commissioning tool is mainly used to commission
optical power of a new WDM network or a live WDM network under expansion. This tool
supports remote and automatic commissioning of optical power of WDM equipment.
9.1 Version Mapping
This topic describes the version mapping between the WDM equipment, and U2000.
9.2 Network Models and Application Scenarios
This section describes the network models and topologies that the WDM optical power
commissioning tool supports.
9.3 Precautions for Commissioning
This topic describes the precautions that you need to take for commissioning WDM equipment.
9.4 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a New Network
When an entire WDM network is new, and no active service is running on the WDM network,
commission the optical power of the WDM equipment according to the commissioning process
described in this topic. The purpose of commissioning optical power is to commission the
network performance to meet the requirements for transferring services. Based on optical power
commissioning results, ensure that there is a certain margin of system optical power to perform
network expansion and long-term stable running of the system.
9.5 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of an Expanded Network
When the capacity of an existing network is insufficient, expand the network capacity (by
expanding wavelengths) according to the service plan. On the expanded network, optical power
commissioning commissions only the optical power of wavelengths without services. During
the wavelength expansion, only the single-wavelength optical power of the trails on which the
specified wavelengths are located is commissioned. Select the wavelengths to be commissioned
on the U2000 client.
9.6 Optical Power Commissioning During Maintenance
When a WDM network is running, optical power performance may deteriorate. When this
occurs, you can start link optimization commissioning to optimize and commission optical power
for the entire network to ensure stable and normal network operation.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.7 Commissioning Report

The U2000 offers various types of reports to support different optical power commissioning
scenarios for WDM equipment.
9.8 Reference
This topic provides reference operations for commissioning.
9.9 Routine Maintenance
This section describes the recommended routine maintenance items and operation methods used
during routine maintenance to ensure proper network running.
9.10 FAQ
This topic describes methods of handling common problems about optical power
commissioning.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.1 Version Mapping

This topic describes the version mapping between the WDM equipment, and U2000.
Matched WDM Equipment Version

Table 9-1 lists the versions of the WDM equipment that supports automatic optical power
commissioning and quality evaluation.
Table 9-1 Version mapping between the U2000 and WDM equipment
WDM Equipment Version U2000 Version
OptiX OSN 8800 OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX OSN

3800
V100R006C03 V100R006C03 V100R006C03 V100R006C00
9.2 Network Models and Application Scenarios

This section describes the network models and topologies that the WDM optical power
commissioning tool supports.
This tool supports commissioning of only the sites described in this section. In addition, this tool
cannot be used to implement automatic commissioning if a live network does not use a topology
described in this section; instead users need to manually commission the network.
Precautions
NOTE
This section describes how to commission sites OTM, OLA, OADM, and ROADM in a 40-channel system with
examples. The WDM optical power commissioning tool also supports automatic commissioning of these sites
in an 80-channel system.
NOTE
The following are the network types that do not support automatic optical power commissioning on the
U2000:
l Broadcast and multicast mesh networks
Network Models
l Chain network:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
13 12 11 10 9 8
A B C D E F G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
: OTM : OLA : OADM
l Ring network:
19 18 17
11
9 10
1 2 3
A MCA C
12 8 MCA H D MCA 4 16
G MCA E
7 6 5
13 14 15
: OLA : OADM
l Mesh network:

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
19 18 17
11
9 10
1 2 3
30 32
A MCA C
20 29 B
K
MCA
28
J
31 21
MCA H D MCA
12 8 4 16
27
I 26
22
MCA
F 23
G E
MCA
25 24
7 6 5
13 14 15
: OLA : OADM
Availability
The G.652(SMF-28)/LEAF/TWRS/TWC/TW+/SMF-LS fibers can be commissioned using
U2000.
Table 9-2 lists the board types supported in the following application scenarios.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 9-2 Board types

Multiple Demulti OA Static Reconfig MCA VOA
xer plexer Optical urable
Add/ Optical
Drop Add and
Multiple Drop
xer (MRx Multiple
Series) xer
M40, D40, OAU1, MR2, RDU9, MCA4, VA1, VA4

M40V D40V OBU1, MR4, RMU9, MCA8,
OBU2, MR8, ROAM, OPM8
HBA, MR8V WSD9,
DAS1, WSM9,
RAU1 WSMD2,
WSMD4,
WSMD9
Application Scenarios of OTM

l Typical OTM
OTU MCA
M
OTU
4 OA
0
V
OTU
F
I
U
OTU
OTU D
4 OA
0
OTU
l Back-to-back OTM

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
M MCA
D
4
4
OTU OTU 0
OA 0 OA
V
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
F F
I I
U U
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
M
D
OA 4 OTU OA
OTU 4
0
0
V
Application Scenarios of OLA

l OLA using only a single OA on a link
MCA
OA
F F
I I
U U
OA
l OLA using cascaded OAs

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
MCA
OA OA
F F
I I
U U
OA OA
Application Scenarios of OADM

l OADM using cascaded MR2 boards (1)
MCA
OA OA
F F
MRx MRx I
I
U U
OA OA
O O
T T
U U
MCA
OA OA
F F
I MR2 MR2 MR2 MR2 I
U U
OA OA
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
MCA
RO TO
OA OA
TO RO
F I I F
I T T I
U L RE TE L U
OA M M
TE RE OA
R R
x x
O O
T T
U U
Application Scenarios of ROADM

l ROADM using WSD9+WSM9 boards (1)
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
DMUX MUX
OA OA
MCA
F F
I OA WSD9 WSM9 OA I
U U
OA WSM9 WSD9 OA
OA OA
MUX DMUX
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
l ROADM using WSD9+WSM9 boards (2)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
W W MCA
S S
D M
OA 9 9 OA
F F
I I
U U
W W
OA S S OA
M D
9 9
WSM9 WSD9
OA OA
FIU
l ROADM using WSD9+RMU9 boards (1)

O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
MUX
DMUX
OA
MCA
TOA
F F
I OA WSD9
ROA OA I
RMU9
U U
OA RMU9 WSD9 OA
ROA
TOA
OA
MUX DMUX
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
MUX
DMUX
OA
TOA
F MCA F
I ROA I
OA WSD9 RMU9
U OA U
OA
RMU9 WSD9 OA
ROA
TOA
OA
MUX DMUX
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
MRx
MRx
OA
TOA
F MCA F
I ROA I
OA WSD9 RMU9
U OA U
OA
RMU9 WSD9 OA
ROA
TOA
OA
MRx
MRx
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
l ROADM using RDU9+WSM9 boards
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U
DMUX MUX
OA
MCA
F F
I OA RDU9 WSM9 OA I
U U
OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
DMUX
OA
MUX
O O O O O O
T T T T T T
U U U U U U

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l ROADM using cascaded WSMDx boards
O O
T T
U U
MCA
OA OA
F F
I WSMDx WSMDx I
U U
OA OA
OA OA
OA OA
DMUX MUX MUX DMUX
O O
T T
U U
NOTE
WSMDx boards are classified into WSMD4 and WSMD2 boards. If the WSMD2 board is used, an OTU board
must be connected to a multiplexer board so that the OTU board can add/drop a wavelength and the demuliplexer
board must be connected to the WSMD2 board.
Application Scenario of RAU1
OTU M OUT
D OTU
Client RC OUT LINE M Client
U OBU1 RAU1
U
Side Side
OTU X X OTU
RM IN
F TC
SC1 I IN SYS
TM
U TM
TC IN F RM SC1
SYS
I
IN
U
OTU D LINE RC M
OUT OUT OTU
Client M RAU1 Client
U OBU1 U
Side Side
OTU X X OTU
NOTE
Only the TN14FIU board can work with the RAU1 board.
9.3 Precautions for Commissioning

This topic describes the precautions that you need to take for commissioning WDM equipment.
Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l The equipment is installed properly and has passed the hardware installation check. The
expected results are as follows:
– Line fibers are connected correctly through the ODF.
– A fiber is connected to the dispersion compensation module (DCM) and the DCM fiber
connection is checked.
– Ensure that all equipments must be powered on correctly, and communication between
all NEs on the network is normal.
– 15-min performance events are enabled for the WDM equipment.
– The optical port on the OTU board is enabled at the transmit end of the WDM equipment.
– Physical fiber connections must be correct.
NOTE
You need to check the installation quality of the preceding hardware before commissioning the optical
power. For the check standards of other hardware, see the relevant equipment manual.
l Non-GNEs require that the network must use the OSC but not ESC communication mode.
GNEs do not have particular requirements on the communication mode.
l Optical NEs are classified by function. Ensure that an optical NE is configured with
essential boards. For example, OTU boards and MUX/DEMUX boards must be configured
on an OTM optical NE. Do not configure the OTU and MUX/DEMUX boards on separate
NEs.
l Logical optical NE types must be consistent with physical optical NE types before
commissioning. Commissioning is based on the type of optical NEs. Do not directly add
NEs commissioned by the U2000 to the Main Topology.
l Physical and logical fiber connections must be consistent.
l The U2000 automatically stops the ALC and APE functions of the NEs before
commissioning and enables the ALC and APE functions after the commissioning is
complete. Automatic regulation remains disabled. You are advised to stop the ALC, and
APE functions or set Automatic Regulation Switch of the ALC function to Disabled if
you have to keep these functions enabled before commissioning.
l Clear FEC BER threshold-crossing alarms and OTU optical power threshold-crossing
alarms before performing commissioning.
l Only the sites where OA boards are configured at the receive end can be commissioned.
l OA boards (including RAU) must be Gain locking. Otherwise, U2000 cannot perform
optical power commissioning on the network.
l Create or search for WDM OCh trails on the U2000 before using the commissioning
function.
l Fiber types have been correctly set. For details, see 9.8.4 Setting Fiber Types.
Precautions
l If iManager MDS 6630 is used at the first time, you must synchronizing data on the U2000,
see 9.8.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000.
l Do not modify subnet data during commissioning.
l Stop the WDM commissioning processes before deploying new U2000 instances (such as
NE management instances), and restart the WDM commissioning processes after the
deployment is complete.
l If you have uploaded NE data to the U2000, synchronized NE data, or initialized U2000
data, synchronize data on the U2000 before commissioning.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Do not perform optical power commissioning during software package Loading.

Otherwise, the commissioning operation will be failed.
Limitation
l The integrated equalization feature on U2000 supports concurrent commissioning on a
maximum of twenty clients.
l The CWDM network cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l The broadcast scenarios cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l A trail that traverses Raman boards (TN11CRPC01/TN11CRPC03) cannot be
commissioned using U2000.
l G.653 fibers cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l PID cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l The network without the MCA/OPM cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l The ASON network cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l Third-party wavelengths and unterminated trails cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l The protection network cannot be commissioned using U2000.
l For 100G coherent transmission system, only the G.652 and G.655 LEAF fibers can be
commissioned using U2000.
9.4 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of a

New Network
When an entire WDM network is new, and no active service is running on the WDM network,
commission the optical power of the WDM equipment according to the commissioning process
described in this topic. The purpose of commissioning optical power is to commission the
network performance to meet the requirements for transferring services. Based on optical power
commissioning results, ensure that there is a certain margin of system optical power to perform
network expansion and long-term stable running of the system.
CAUTION
For new deployment commissioning, trails to be commissioned and their associated trails (OCh
Trails that traverse the same optical amplifier (OA) board and affect each other) cannot carry
services. Otherwise, services on the trails are interrupted during commissioning because lasers
are shut down for the OTU boards on the trails.
9.4.1 Commissioning Process

This topic describes the process of commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment by
using the U2000 during the deployment of a new network.
Figure 9-1 shows the flowchart for commissioning optical power by using the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 9-1 Flowchart for commissioning the optical power of a new network
Start
Set subnet
commissioning
parameters
Choose
commissioning trails
Record the optical

power before
commissioning
(optional)
Commission the
optical power
View the
commissioning report
End
NOTE
If the commissioning tool is used at the first time, you must synchronizing data on the U2000. For details, refer
to 9.8.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000.
NOTE
Perform the following steps in turn on the entire network after the WDM commissioning component has
been installed or deployed:
l 9.8.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000
l 9.4.3 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters
l 9.4.4 Choosing Commissioning Trails
9.4.2 Preparing for the Commissioning

Before commissioning the optical power of a newly-deployed network, you need to make
preparations for the commissioning. The preparations include preparing related documents,
checking the conditions of WDM equipment to be commissioned, preparing the data
configuration files for the WDM NEs, and evaluating whether the network scenarios of the
network to be commissioned support optical power commissioning.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Preparing Documents
The documents that you need to prepare are mainly engineering documents. If there are no
engineering documents at some offices, obtain relevant information from the
telecommunications design documents and contract. The contents of engineering documents
include:
l Network diagram: Used to set the NE ID, IP address, and other parameters before
commissioning optical power.
l Network configuration diagram: Used to check and confirm the network topology.
l Wavelength distribution diagram: Used to obtain information about channels contained in
OCh trails when the wavelengths that have the same source and sink are in the same trail.
l Cabinet panel diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.
l Fiber connection diagram: Used when you create logical fibers on the U2000.
Checking the Commissioning Conditions of WDM Equipment

Before commissioning the optical power of WDM equipment, check whether the following
conditions are met:
l The WDM equipment version meets the requirement defined in Version Mapping.
NOTE
9.4.3 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters

This topic describes how to set the commissioning parameters for a subnet. This operation must
be completed before the optical power commissioning of a WDM trail. If any parameter setting
is incorrect, the commissioning result will also be incorrect. In this operation, set System Full
Wavelengths, that determines the typical commissioning value of a single wavelength on an
optical amplifier (OA) in the WDM trail.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the subnet parameter settings.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Context
System Full Wavelengths should be set to the actual value, which can be determined based on
the frequency allocation table in the telecommunications design file or the specific product
configuration table. For example:
l If the WDM subnet is configured with the ITL and M48 or D48 boards, the System Full
Wavelengths value is 96wave. NG WDM equipment, such as OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
series, does not support this setting.
l If the WDM subnet is configured with only the M48 or D48 board, the System Full
Wavelengths value is 80wave.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Parameter
Configuration from the main menu.
Step 2 Click the Set Subnet Parameters tab.
Step 3 Set System Full Wavelengths.

NOTE
To set System Full Wavelengths for multiple subnets at a time, hold down Ctrl to select the required
subnets and right-click to choose Config Batch. In the Config Batch dialog box, set System Full
Wavelengths for multiple subnets.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes to save the settings of the subnet commissioning
parameters.
Step 6 In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
Step 7 Click OK to close the Commissioning Parameter Configuration dialog box.
----End
9.4.4 Choosing Commissioning Trails

The U2000 commissions optical power based on the OCh trail. Therefore, OCh trails need to
be created before commissioning optical power.
Prerequisite
l The fiber connection data is complete and correct.
l Creating OCh trail is complete.
l To successfully create a OCh trail, ensure that the following requirements are met:
– The logic fiber connection has been set up correctly on the U2000.
– Optical cross-connections are correctly configured for reconfiguration optical add/drop
multiplexer (ROADM) sites in the network.
– If wavelength protection, extended wavelength protection, or line protection exists in
the network, protection groups are correctly configured.
– Ensure that the wavelength No. and FEC mode of the OTU boards are configured
correctly.
CAUTION
Topological resource changes such as fiber deletion or optical cross-connection deactivation
will affect existing OCh trails. Therefore, re-create OCh trails before commissioning the optical
power.
Procedure (Entering mode 1)

Step 1 Choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail from the main menu.
Step 2 In Set Trail Browse Filter Criteria window, select the desired filter criteria and click Filter
All.
NOTE
l If you need to filter all the trails, clickFilter All.

l If you need to filter the trails in the list, click Secondary Filter.
l If you need to add to the list more trails that match the requirement, click Incremental Filter.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 In the Manage WDM Trail, select the desired OCh trails and right-click to choose Optical
Power Commission.
Step 4 The desired OCh trails are displayed in the Commissioning Trail Management.
NOTE
l Select a trail, and the trail detail diagram is displayed in the Trail Details.
l Select a trail, and the information of the associated trails is displayed in the Associated Trail.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
In the Trail Details tab, you can right-click the desired OA board and select Set OA Info to set the informations
of the OA board.
NOTE
During dimension expansion, if the number of system wavelengths of the expanded dimensions is different from
the number of system wavelengths on the original subnet, configure optical amplifiers for expansion based on
the actual networking. For details, see 9.8.3 Setting Optical Amplifier Information.
----End

Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Trail Management from
the main menu.
Step 2 In Set Trail Filter Criteria window, select the desired filter criteria and click Filter All or
Incremental Filter.
NOTE

NOTE
You can also click Subnet Settings tab to filter the subnets.
Step 3 The desired filtering OCh trails are displayed in the Commissioning Trail Management.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
of the OA board.
NOTE
----End
9.4.5 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning (Optional)

An optical power commissioning report can be created to record the before-commissioning data.
The report helps verify that the optical power has been commissioned successfully.
Prerequisites
l OCh trails have been Filtered. For details, see 9.4.4 Choosing Commissioning Trails.
l Commissioning parameters have been set for the subnet. For details, see 9.4.3 Setting
Subnet Commissioning Parameters.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Context
Before commissioning the optical power, record the following parameters:
l Bit error rate (BER) before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end
l Input and output optical power of the optical amplifier board and the OTU board
Commissioning the optical power directly without generating a commissioning report is another
option.
Procedure
Step 1 Export the link report. View the input and output optical power of the available boards on the
OCh trails, and information about wavelengths, channels for the OCh trails.
Step 2 Export the OTU commissioning report. View the input optical power, output optical power, and
the BER before FEC of the OTU board. Record and save the parameter values.
Step 3 Export the optical amplifier commissioning report. View the input optical power, output optical
power, and gain of all optical amplifier boards. Check the optical power and gain of the IN port
on the optical amplifier board on the line. Record and save the parameter values.
Step 4 Export the report. For details, see 9.7.2 Generating Commissioning Report.
----End
9.4.6 Commissioning Optical Power

By using the function of automatic optical power commissioning during deployment of a new
network, commission the optical power of one or more specified trails at a time. In addition, no
manual operation is required during the automatic commissioning process. This mode saves
manual intervention, shortens the commissioning time, and improves commissioning efficiency.
Prerequisites
l The trails to be commissioned are complete trails. trails without sinks or sources cannot be
commissioned.
Context
CAUTION
If you deselect some trails to be commissioned, lasers are shut down automatically for the OTU
boards on the deselected trails during commissioning, and then services on the deselected trails
will be interrupted.
Because the automatic level control (ALC) or automatic power equilibrium (APE) function for
the NEs may start during the commissioning, pay attention to the following points:
l For NG WDM equipment of versions earlier than V100R005, , you should stop the APE
function of the NEs, and stop the ALC function of the NEs or set the Automatic Regulation
Switch of the ALC function is Disabled, and that the OPA function is not in the Auto state
before commissioning.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l For NG WDM equipment of V100R005 or later versions, the U2000 automatically stops
the ALC and APE functions of the NEs before commissioning and enables the ALC and
APE functions after the commissioning is complete. Automatic regulation remains
disabled. You are advised to stop the ALC, and APE functions or set Automatic Regulation
Switch of the ALC function to Disabled if you have to keep these functions enabled before
commissioning.
l The intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function must be disabled before commissioning
for the network to be commissioned.
During the commissioning, the client may be disconnected from the server due to unexpected
interruptions in communication, in which case the server will continue the commissioning. When
the client is reconnected to the server, click to view the operation tasks. For details, see
9.8.1 Viewing Operation Tasks. Perform the commissioning again after the trails are
completely commissioned if you want to ensure that the operation is successful.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Commissioning Trail Management window, select trails to be commissioned and click
Operate > New Deployment Commissioning.
Step 2 In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning(Deployment) window, select the trails to be
commissioned.
Step 3 Optional: Click Advanced Option. The system displays the Advanced Option dialog box,
where commissioning options are available.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Click Start to commission the optical power. The Prompt dialog box is displayed and click
OK.
NOTE
During the commissioning process, you can obtain the commissioning progress from information in Boards or
from the progress information that is displayed at the bottom of the window.
Step 5 During the commissioning process, the Check Wavelength Status window is displayed asking
you whether to disable lasers for wavelengths that do not need to be commissioned. If you want
to disable them, click Continue. Otherwise, click Cancel.
Step 6 The Disable Laser dialog box is displayed. Click Continue to confirm. Otherwise, click
Cancel. The Prompt dialog box is displayed and click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 After commissioning is complete, the Commissioning Completed dialog box is displayed. In
this dialog box, click OK.
NOTE
After the commissioning is complete, the trails in the commissioning information are displayed in different
colors. Perform subsequent operations based on the colors of the trails.
l Black: indicates that services are successfully deployed on a trail and no subsequent operations are required.
l Yellow-orange: indicates that services are successfully deployed on a trail but you must check the data
displayed in yellow-orange in Boards.
l Red: indicates that no services are deployed on a trail and you must check the data displayed in red in
Boards.
NOTE
l Select the desired trails and Click Save as.... Select the target path and desired file name. You can save the
trail information in the U2000 window and the commissioning data in Boards to an .xls file.
l Select the desired trails and Click Generate Commission Report and select the target path, desired file
name, and desired file type to generate the OTU commissioning report and optical amplifier commissioning
report.
l OTU commissioning report:
l Optical amplifier commissioning report:
l Click Rollback to rollback the commissioned trails. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK to start
restoring the commissioned trails to original optical power. After the original optical power is restored, a
dialog box is displayed indicating successful operations. In this dialog box, click OK.
NOTE
After the rollback is complete, you must check the reported information. If error information is displayed,
rectify the fault accordingly.
----End
Troubleshooting
If an exception occurs during operations, troubleshoot by referring to 9.10.1 FAQs in the
Optical Power Commissioning Window, and then retry the commissioning.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.4.7 Viewing the Commissioning Result

When optical power commissioning is complete, check whether the commissioning result meets
the requirements by viewing the commissioning report.
Prerequisites
Optical power commissioning has been completed.
Context
NOTE
When optical power commissioning is complete, pay attention to the following parameters in the
commissioning result:
l BER before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end
Procedure
Step 1 Generate the link report, and view the input and output optical power of the available boards on
the trails, and information about wavelengths, channels for the OCh trails.
Step 2 Generate the OTU commissioning report, and view the input optical power, out optical power,
and BER before FEC of the OTU board. Check whether these parameters meet the requirements.
NOTE
If the BER before FEC does not meet the requirement, check whether the optical power is appropriate by
performing the follow-up steps in this topic.
If the optical power is appropriate, check whether the dispersion compensation module (DCM)
configuration of the related trails is consistent with that in the design file.
The optical power of the input port of the OTU board must be within input optical power alarm threshold.
In the report, the board data that does not meet the requirements of the commissioning result is marked
red.
The optical power of the output port of the OTU board must be within the specified range of the board.
Step 3 Generate the optical amplifier commissioning report, and view the input optical power, output
optical power, and gain of the optical amplifier board. Check whether the optical power and gain
of the input port of the optical amplifier board meet the requirements.
Step 5 If the average input optical power of a single wavelength of the optical amplifier board is lower
than the standard input optical power of a single wavelength, check whether the insertion loss
and fiber attenuation of the upstream board of the optical amplifier board are appropriate.
l The insertion loss of a board must be within the specification range of the board.
l For the optical amplifier board, check and analyze the contents marked red in the report.
The contents marked red indicate exceptions.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.5 Optical Power Commissioning During Deployment of

an Expanded Network
When the capacity of an existing network is insufficient, expand the network capacity (by
expanding wavelengths) according to the service plan. On the expanded network, optical power
commissioning commissions only the optical power of wavelengths without services. During
the wavelength expansion, only the single-wavelength optical power of the trails on which the
specified wavelengths are located is commissioned. Select the wavelengths to be commissioned
on the U2000 client.
CAUTION
The WDM network to be expanded must have some system margin and must be free from quality
risks. Therefore, evaluate the quality of the WDM network, optimize the WDM network
according to the evaluation result, expand the WDM network, and then commission the optical
power of the WDM network.

This topic describes the process of commissioning the optical power of WDM NEs on an
expanded network.
Figure 9-2 shows the flowchart for commissioning the optical power of an expanded network
using the U2000.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 9-2 Flowchart for commissioning the optical power of an expanded network
Start
Set subnet
commissioning
parameters
Choose
Verify Fiber
Connection for
Expansion
Commissioning
Record the optical

power before
commissioning
(optional)
Commission the
optical power
View the
commissioning report
End
NOTE
NOTE
Perform the following steps in turn on the entire network after the WDM commissioning component has
been installed or deployed:
l 9.8.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000
l 9.5.4 Choosing Commissioning Trails

This topic describes how to prepare for commissioning the optical power of WDM NEs on an
expanded network. The preparations include obtaining documents, checking the conditions of

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
the WDM NEs to be commissioned, and evaluating the network scenarios of the network to be
commissioned.
Preparing Documents
include:

conditions are met:
NOTE
l Check whether the network satisfies the following expansion requirements:
– The network contains points for adjusting optical power of single wavelengths and
multiplexed wavelengths.
– Preventive maintenance has been performed on the network.
– The gain of the OA boards on the network is properly set to compensate for span
loss can.
– The flatness of all wavelengths on the network is within the permitted range specified
in the system design.
– No pre-FEC BER threshold-crossing alarms are generated for the existing
wavelengths on the trail on which new services will be deployed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.5.3 Setting Subnet Commissioning Parameters

This topic describes how to set the commissioning parameters for a subnet. This operation must
be completed before the optical power commissioning of a WDM trail. If any parameter setting
is incorrect, the commissioning result will also be incorrect. In this operation, set System Full
Wavelengths, that determines the typical commissioning value of a single wavelength on an
optical amplifier (OA) in the WDM trail.
Prerequisites
You have obtained the subnet parameter settings.
Context
System Full Wavelengths should be set to the actual value, which can be determined based on
the frequency allocation table in the telecommunications design file or the specific product
configuration table. For example:
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Set Subnet Parameters tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Set System Full Wavelengths.

NOTE
To set System Full Wavelengths for multiple subnets at a time, hold down Ctrl to select the required
subnets and right-click to choose Config Batch. In the Config Batch dialog box, set System Full
Wavelengths for multiple subnets.
Step 4 Click OK.
Step 5 In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes to save the settings of the subnet commissioning
parameters.
Step 6 In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
Step 7 Click OK to close the Commissioning Parameter Configuration dialog box.
----End
9.5.4 Choosing Commissioning Trails

Prerequisite

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

correctly.
CAUTION
power.

All.
NOTE

Power Commission.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
of the OA board.
NOTE
----End

the main menu.
Incremental Filter.
NOTE


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
of the OA board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
----End
9.5.5 Fiber Connection Verification (for Expansion

Commissioning)
Before expansion commissioning, connect optical fibers for new wavelengths and create OCh
trails. If fibers are incorrectly connected, expansion commissioning will fail. To help ensure that
expansion commissioning is successful, a function for verifying fiber connections is provided
to check whether physical and logical fiber connections are consistent.
Prerequisites
l The optical power commissioning component has been installed.
l Non-GNEs require that the network must use the OSC but not ESC communication mode.
GNEs do not have particular requirements on the communication mode.
l There are active OCh trails.
l Logical fiber connections are complete.
l At least one MCA board is available in each received side of OMS section (except for OLA
sites) where wavelengths to be verified reside, and FIU boards are available on each line.
l Optical power of multiplexed wavelengths is within the nominal range and no new
dimension is added.
Context
In expansion scenarios where multiplexed wavelengths are properly commissioned, the function
checks whether physical fiber connections are consistent with logical fiber connections between
OTU and MUX/DEMUX boards. Verify fiber connection consistency before commissioning
when OCh trails are created and filtered.
The function applies only to active OCh trails or OCh trail groups.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Commissioning Trail Management, select the desired trails and click Operate > Fiber
connection verification for expansion commissioning.
NOTE
In the Manage WDM Trail, you can also right-click the desired OCh trails and select Fiber Verification to
enter into the Verify Fiber Connections.
Step 2 In the Verify Fiber Connections, select the desired WDM trails and click Start to verify the
desired fiber connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 A progress bar is displayed indicating the percentage of the verification that has been completed.
After verification is complete, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed, and clickOK.
NOTE
Verification Result displays the verification status of each optical fiber. The indication of the parameters is as
follows:
l Not started: Verification is not started.
l In progress: Fiber connections are being verified.
l Completed: Verification is completed and fiber connections are correct.
l Failed: Verification failed.
l Skipped: Verification cannot be performed and the operation is skipped.
NOTE
Click Save As... to save the verification results.
----End
Result
An error message is displayed if communication between the U2000 client and the server process
relevant to WDM commissioning fails (for example, the server process is not started). In this
case, the Verify Fiber Connections window will not be displayed.
l During verification, attenuation of single wavelengths on the target OCh trails may be
adjusted. The adjustment may conflict with other commission operations. If a conflict
occurs, retry later.
l Fiber connection verification mainly verifies fiber connections between OTU and MUX/
DEMUX boards on source and sink nodes, assuming that fiber connections for multiplexed
wavelengths are correct.
If verification fails on the sink node, OA boards (including OLA sites) for multiplexed
wavelengths may be marked with "Skipped", indicating that these MUX boards are not
verified. In addition, the status of all fiber connections between WSS boards and OTU
boards may be changed to "Failed", so that fiber connections at wavelength-dropping sites
will be verified first. After verifying that fiber connections at the wavelength-dropping sites
are correct, recheck fiber connections that are marked with "Skipped."
l Fiber connection verification enables or disables the laser on the source OTU board and
adjusts attenuation to ensure that the optical power is 3 dB lower than that of average of

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
existing wavelengths. This method minimizes the impact on service quality of existing
wavelengths. If insertion loss of pigtails or optical fiber connectors exceeds the permitted
range, fiber connections may be considered incorrect. When this occurs, verify fiber
connections manually, clean the fiber connectors, and retry later.
l If a malfunctioned MCA board fails to scan wavelengths, fiber connections may also be
considered incorrect. When this occurs, replace the MCA board and retry later.
l If fiber connection verification fails, the point of the problems can only be pinpointed down
to the fiber bundle and not down to the specific fiber connection because not all WDM
boards can detect single wavelengths.
9.5.6 Recording Optical Power Before Commissioning (Optional)

An optical power commissioning report can be created to record the before-commissioning data.
The report helps verify that the optical power has been commissioned successfully.
Prerequisites
l OCh trails have been Filtered. For details, see 9.5.4 Choosing Commissioning Trails.
Context
Before commissioning the optical power, record the following parameters:
l Bit error rate (BER) before forward error correction (FEC) at the receive end
Commissioning the optical power directly without generating a commissioning report is another
option.
Procedure
Step 1 Export the link report. View the input and output optical power of the available boards on the
OCh trails, and information about wavelengths, channels for the OCh trails.
Step 2 Export the OTU commissioning report. View the input optical power, output optical power, and
the BER before FEC of the OTU board. Record and save the parameter values.
Step 3 Export the optical amplifier commissioning report. View the input optical power, output optical
power, and gain of all optical amplifier boards. Check the optical power and gain of the IN port
on the optical amplifier board on the line. Record and save the parameter values.
----End
9.5.7 Commissioning Optical Power of Expansion Deployment

This topic describes how to commission optical power of expansion deployment. In this
commissioning scenario, commission new OCh trails to ensure that the flatness of optical power
between these wavelengths and other wavelengths at the receive end meet the system
requirements.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
l BERs of the OTU boards in an expanded subnet can be queried.
l The trails to be commissioned are complete.
l MCA boards are installed on the network to be commissioned.
l Setting the wavelengths to be commissioned is complete.
Context
CAUTION
Before commissioning, the system checks trails and displays abnormal ones. If you continue the
commissioning:
Lasers are disabled for wavelengths to be commissioned and existing wavelengths with BER
worse than 1E-7(FEC mode), 1E-5(AEFC mode), or 1E-4(HFEC mode) during commissioning.
Services on the wavelengths will be interrupted after the lasers are disabled. Exercise caution
when performing this operation. The system considers that there are no services on the existing
wavelengths by default, and therefore does not commission optical power for the existing
wavelengths.
After the expansion commissioning is completed, the system does not enable the lasers of the
existing wavelengths with BER worse than 1E-7(FEC mode), 1E-5(AEFC mode), or 1E-4
(HFEC mode) that are disabled during the commissioning. To make the system automatically
enable the lasers after the commissioning is complete, select Restore laser status on the
Advanced Option before the commissioning.
Incomplete trails are not commissioned. If incomplete trails carry services and have been
commissioned before, services on the incomplete trails may be interrupted, new wavelengths
are not well commissioned, or the commissioning fails.
Because the commissioning may start the automatic level control (ALC) or automatic power
equilibrium (APE) function for the NEs, pay attention to the following points:
l For NG WDM equipment of versions earlier than V100R005, you should stop the APE
commissioning.
After commissioning fails, roll back the commissioning before restarting the WDM
commissioning process. Otherwise, rollback will fail.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Operate > Expansion Deployment Commissioning.
NOTE
Commissioning adjusts optical power of expanded wavelengths to the average optical power of original
wavelengths. Ensure that optical power of original wavelengths has been optimized before the
commissioning.
Step 2 In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning(Expansion) window, select the trails to be
commissioned.
Step 4 Click Start to commission the optical power. The two Prompt dialog boxes are displayed and
click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
During wavelength expansion, the target optical power is not displayed because U2000 does not adjust the optical
power of multiplexed wavelengths on the OA board. During dimension expansion, the target optical power of
only the OA board whose optical power needs to be adjusted is displayed.
Step 5 During the commissioning process, the Check Wavelength Status window is displayed asking
you whether to disable lasers for wavelengths that do not need to be commissioned. If you want
to disable them, click Continue. Otherwise, click Cancel.
Step 6 In the Disable Laser dialog box that displayed, click Continue. If you do not want to disable
any lasers, click Cancel. The Prompt dialog box is displayed and click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 After commissioning is complete, the Commissioning Completed dialog box is displayed. In
this dialog box, click OK.
----End
Result
In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Expansion) window, verify the
commissioning result is correct.
Alternatively, Click Generate Link Report to generate the link report and view optical power
after the expansion commissioning.
If the commissioning result indicates exceptions, click Rollback to restore the optical power
and perform the following steps to save the commissioning data.
NOTE
After the rollback is complete, you must check the reported information. If error information is displayed, rectify
the fault accordingly.
1. Click Save as... to save commissioning information.

2. Enter a filename in File Name and click Save.
A filename must include date and time information (recommended format: Year-Month-
Day-Hour-Minute) to prevent a file saved later from overwriting a file with the same name
saved earlier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Troubleshooting
If an exception occurs during operations, troubleshoot by referring to 9.10.1 FAQs in the
Optical Power Commissioning Window, and then retry the commissioning..
9.5.8 Viewing the Commissioning Result

Prerequisites
Context
NOTE
Procedure

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
red.
----End
9.6 Optical Power Commissioning During Maintenance

When a WDM network is running, optical power performance may deteriorate. When this
occurs, you can start link optimization commissioning to optimize and commission optical power
for the entire network to ensure stable and normal network operation.

This topic describes the process of link optimization commissioning the optical power of WDM
NEs during maintenance.
Figure 9-3 shows the flowchart for link optimization commissioning the optical power by using
the U2000 during maintenance.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 9-3 Commissioning Process
Start
Do you want to set

online optimize
tasks?
Yes No
In Online
Optimization View the link report.
Management, are , are there trails to be
there trails to be optimized?
optimized?
No Yes Yes No
Choose
, and perform link
optimization
commissioning.
View the link report.
End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

This topic describes how to prepare for commissioning the optical power of WDM NEs during
maintenance. The preparations include obtaining documents, checking the conditions of the
WDM NEs to be commissioned, and evaluating the network scenarios of the network to be
commissioned.
Preparing Documents
include:

conditions are met:
NOTE
l Check whether the network satisfies the following maintenance requirements:
– The network contains points for adjusting optical power of single wavelengths and
multiplexed wavelengths.
– Preventive maintenance has been performed on the network.
– The gain of the OA boards on the network is properly set to compensate for span
loss can.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– The flatness of all wavelengths on the network is within the permitted range specified
in the system design.
– No pre-FEC BER threshold-crossing alarms are generated for the existing
wavelengths on the trail on which new services will be deployed.
9.6.3 Online Monitoring

The online monitoring commissioning function monitors the optical performance of a WDM
network. When optical performance deterioration is detected, the link optimization
commissioning function can be used to restore the normal running of the network.
Setting Online Optimization Parameter

To ensure stable and normal operation of WDM networks, you can set online optimization tasks
to enable scheduled monitoring on optical power and start link optical commissioning to
optimize optical power as required.
Precautions
The online optimization function can only monitor the wavelengths whose BERs are better than
1E-6(FEC mode), 1E-4(AEFC mode), 1E-3(HFEC mode). Meanwhile, you need to check
whether the BEFFEC_EXC alarm exists after link optimization commissioning.
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Optimize Parameter Settings Online tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 On the tab, select Start Online Monitoring and set parameters such as Monitoring Period and
Start Time.
NOTE
When setting Monitoring Period, you can select the Unit by Day, Week, or Month.
Step 4 In the Subnet Not Monitored area, select subnets to be monitored and click . The
selected subnets are displayed in Monitored Subnet.
Step 5 Optional: Click Advanced and select monitoring items as required.
Step 6 Click Apply. In the dialog box that is displayed indicating successful operations, click OK.
Step 7 In the Commissioning Parameter Configuration window, click OK.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Result
If optical power of a subnet deteriorates after online monitoring and optimization is enabled, the
U2000 prompts you to start link optimization commissioning to improve network transmission
performance after the next monitoring.
Online Optimization Management

With online optimization management, you can select trails to be optimized and enable link
optimization to restore the optical power performance of these trails.
Prerequisites
l Online monitoring and optimization are enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Online Optimization Management from
the main menu.
NOTE
If you select the trail, you can see the optimized cause for the OCh trail in the Cause of Trail Degrade.
Step 2 Select trails to be optimized and click Optimize.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
You can click Refresh to update information in Trail to Be Optimized.

You can click Filter... to filter and display target trails in Trail to Be Optimized based on the filter criteria and
degrade type.
Select trails that do not need to be optimized and click Ignore, and the prompt window is displayed. Click
Yes to delete these trails from Online Optimization Management.
Click Generate Commission Report and select the desired report format, and desired report type to generate
the link report refer to 9.7.2 Generating Commissioning Report.
2. Enter Start row and End row, choose the File name, and click OK.
Step 3 Navigate to the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning(Link Optimization) window. In

the window, optimize and commission the target trails. For details on how to optimize and
commission trails, see Link Optimization Commissioning.
----End
Link Optimization Commissioning

This topic describes how to optimize transmit optical power for the existing multiplexed
wavelengths. Optimization is necessary for networks that have been in service for extended
periods of time if the optical power of the existing multiplexed wavelengths significantly
deviates from the nominal values due to aging fibers, malfunctioning boards, or human errors.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The deviation causes the optical power of single wavelengths to deviate, which in turn hinders
expansion commissioning.
Prerequisites
l Physical and logical fiber connections for to-be-optimized trails must be correct and
consistent.
l BER for OTU boards in the expanded subnet can be queried.
l Input multiplexed-wavelength optical power of the transmit OA in the OMS sections of to-
be-optimized trail deviates from the nominal value by more than 1.5 dB.
l Input single-wavelength optical power of the OA in the OMS sections of to-be-optimized
trail deviates from the average value by more than +/- 3 dB.
l Input optical power of the receive OTU boards is lower than the upper threshold by at least
1 dB in wavelengths of the to-be-optimized trail and its directly associated trails.
l Existing wavelengths on the to-be-optimized trail scanned by the MCA board have a larger
quantity than new wavelengths.
l There are MCA boards in each OMS section of the to-be-optimized trail. Otherwise, the
OMS sections without MCA boards and their upstream OMS sections cannot be optimized.
l The BEFFEC_EXC and IN_PWR_HIGH/IN_PWR_LOW alarms do not exist in the OMS
sections of to-be-optimized trail.
Precautions
When performing link optimization commissioning, it is recommended to enable the ALC
function.
Because the automatic power equilibrium (APE) function for the NEs may start during the
commissioning, pay attention to the following points:
commissioning.
CAUTION
l Link optimization commissioning affects optical power of existing wavelengths. Apply for
a maintenance window (a specified time period) for commissioning to minimize the impact
on services.
l After link optimization commissioning is complete, filter alarms by time in the alarm viewing
window to check whether alarms are generated after the start time of the commissioning task.
If yes, clear these alarms.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Context
As described in section 9.7.2 Generating Commissioning Report, if a trail's transmit optical
power significantly deviates from the nominal value, perform link optimization commissioning
to adjust the transmit optical power of existing wavelengths to restore IN port optical power for
the optical amplifier (OA) boards to the nominal value. After optimization is complete, generate
reports to verify results of the optimization. Link optimization commissioning can be performed
before or after expansion commissioning. Performing link optimization commissioning before
expansion commissioning is recommended.
NOTE
l Link optimization is based on OCh trails. Trails are optimized one by one. If two trails traverse the
same OA board, the optical power of the OA board is commissioned again when the second trail is
optimized. However, the board data of the first trail is not updated after the optimization of the second
trail is complete.
l The major purpose of link optimization is to adjust the optical power of multiplexed wavelengths to
the nominal value range with the best effort and ensure the flatness of the optical power is within the
specified range while ensuring that BER of OTU boards at the receive end and IN port optical power
are within an acceptable range. This means that BER or OSNR may become acceptably worse after
the optimization.
l If optimization stops due to NE communication issues, restart link optimization after you resolve these
problems.
l If link optimization cannot determine whether a wavelength has been commissioned (BER can be
scanned but is bad), a dialog box will be displayed asking you whether to continue. If you continue
with the commissioning, the wavelength will be processed as a wavelength that has not been
commissioned. The system does not monitor BER for OTU boards relevant to the wavelength and IN
port optical power during optimization. If the wavelength has been commissioned, cancel the
commissioning, manually optimize it, and restart link optimization.
l Link optimization only processes the transmit optical power that significantly deviates from the nominal
value of an OMS section. Due to physical features of OA boards, noise power increases on each OA
along the OMS section. The increase causes the optical power of subsequent OA boards within the
OMS section to deviate from the nominal value even when the transmit optical power reaches the
nominal value. However, link optimization only deals with the transmit optical power at the start point
of an OMS section and does not deal with this problem. Optimization starts again in the next OMS
section when transmit optical power of the OA is detected to be at levels that significantly deviate from
the nominal value.
l During link optimization, OMS sections are optimized from source to sink of a trail. Services in a mesh
network are closely coupled and the adjustment margin for each OMS section is limited. Therefore,
margin may be unavailable for an OMS section until the next OMS section has been optimized. You
need to optimize the trail multiple times for optical power to reach the nominal value.
Procedure
Operate > Link Optimization Commissioning.
Step 2 In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning(Link Optimization) window, select the
trails to be commissioned.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Click Start. Two confirmation dialog boxes are displayed, and click OK to start link
optimization commissioning.
NOTE
If there are wavelengths with BER beyond the acceptable range, the Check Wavelength
Status dialog box is displayed. Determine whether to continue the commissioning according to
situation at the site.
The system checks BER of wavelengths for the trail to be commissioned and displays the
wavelengths with BER beyond the acceptable range in red.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l If existing wavelengths are marked in red, optimize wavelengths manually to lower the BER
to an acceptable range before commissioning. If you do not try to lower the BER, the system
does not monitor BER of these wavelengths during commissioning. As a result, services
carried by the existing wavelengths may be interrupted.
l If new wavelengths are marked in red, the system does not monitor BER of the wavelengths
during commissioning.
1. Click Continue.
2. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
NOTE
If data of the to-be-optimized trail is inconsistent with the OCh trail data, a prompt dialog box is displayed.
Click Generate to regenerate trails and restart trail optimization.
NOTE
In the dialog box that is displayed, the Status column displays the optimization status of the trails.
l Not required: The deviation between the monitoring optical power and the nominal optical power meet
the requirements of network design requirments. Link optimization is not required.
l In progress: Link optimization is in process.
l Succeeded: Optical power of all OMS sections has been successfully optimized.
l Partially succeeded: Optical power of some OMS sections fails to be optimized while optical power
of other OMS sections has been successfully optimized or does not need to be optimized.
l Failed: Optical power of all OMS sections fails to be optimized.
l Canceled: You have clicked Stop to cancel link optimization.
Step 5 After commissioning is complete, click OK.
----End
Result
In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Link Optimization) window, verify that
results of the commissioning meet requirements.
saved earlier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
after the link optimization commissioning.
l Link report:
Click Rollback to rollback the commissioned trails. In the dialog box that is displayed, click
OK to start restoring the commissioned trails to original optical power. After the original optical
power is restored, a dialog box is displayed indicating successful operations. In this dialog box,
click OK.
NOTE
After link optimization commissioning is complete, generate the link report (by referring to
9.7.2 Generating Commissioning Report) to view optical power optimization results.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Viewing the Commissioning Result

Prerequisites
Context
NOTE
Procedure
NOTE
red.
----End
9.6.4 Link Optimization

The link optimization commissioning function can be used to restore the normal running of a
WDM network when the optical performance of the WDM network deteriorates.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Viewing Link Report

You can check the optical power information of links on a live network in the link report and
determine whether to start link optimization commissioning to improve network transmission
performance.
Prerequisites
l OCh trails that need to be monitored are filtered. For details on how to filter OCh trails,
see Choosing Commissioning Trails.
Procedure
Step 1 Generate the link report and check information about boards whose optical power can be queried
on commissioning trails. The information includes input optical power, output optical power,
wavelengths, and channels on the boards. For details on how to export the link report, see 9.7.2
Generating Commissioning Report.
----End
Choosing Commissioning Trails

Prerequisite
correctly.
CAUTION
power.

All.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE

Power Commission.
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
of the OA board.
NOTE
----End

the main menu.
Incremental Filter.
NOTE

NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NOTE
of the OA board.
NOTE
----End
Link Optimization Commissioning

This topic describes how to optimize transmit optical power for the existing multiplexed
wavelengths. Optimization is necessary for networks that have been in service for extended
periods of time if the optical power of the existing multiplexed wavelengths significantly
deviates from the nominal values due to aging fibers, malfunctioning boards, or human errors.
The deviation causes the optical power of single wavelengths to deviate, which in turn hinders
expansion commissioning.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
l Physical and logical fiber connections for to-be-optimized trails must be correct and
consistent.
l BER for OTU boards in the expanded subnet can be queried.
l Input multiplexed-wavelength optical power of the transmit OA in the OMS sections of to-
be-optimized trail deviates from the nominal value by more than 1.5 dB.
l Input single-wavelength optical power of the OA in the OMS sections of to-be-optimized
trail deviates from the average value by more than +/- 3 dB.
l Input optical power of the receive OTU boards is lower than the upper threshold by at least
1 dB in wavelengths of the to-be-optimized trail and its directly associated trails.
l Existing wavelengths on the to-be-optimized trail scanned by the MCA board have a larger
quantity than new wavelengths.
l There are MCA boards in each OMS section of the to-be-optimized trail. Otherwise, the
OMS sections without MCA boards and their upstream OMS sections cannot be optimized.
l The BEFFEC_EXC and IN_PWR_HIGH/IN_PWR_LOW alarms do not exist in the OMS
sections of to-be-optimized trail.
Precautions
When performing link optimization commissioning, it is recommended to enable the ALC
function.
Because the automatic power equilibrium (APE) function for the NEs may start during the
commissioning, pay attention to the following points:
commissioning.
CAUTION
l Link optimization commissioning affects optical power of existing wavelengths. Apply for
a maintenance window (a specified time period) for commissioning to minimize the impact
on services.
l After link optimization commissioning is complete, filter alarms by time in the alarm viewing
window to check whether alarms are generated after the start time of the commissioning task.
If yes, clear these alarms.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Context
As described in section 9.7.2 Generating Commissioning Report, if a trail's transmit optical
power significantly deviates from the nominal value, perform link optimization commissioning
to adjust the transmit optical power of existing wavelengths to restore IN port optical power for
the optical amplifier (OA) boards to the nominal value. After optimization is complete, generate
reports to verify results of the optimization. Link optimization commissioning can be performed
before or after expansion commissioning. Performing link optimization commissioning before
expansion commissioning is recommended.
NOTE
l Link optimization is based on OCh trails. Trails are optimized one by one. If two trails traverse the
same OA board, the optical power of the OA board is commissioned again when the second trail is
optimized. However, the board data of the first trail is not updated after the optimization of the second
trail is complete.
l The major purpose of link optimization is to adjust the optical power of multiplexed wavelengths to
the nominal value range with the best effort and ensure the flatness of the optical power is within the
specified range while ensuring that BER of OTU boards at the receive end and IN port optical power
are within an acceptable range. This means that BER or OSNR may become acceptably worse after
the optimization.
l If optimization stops due to NE communication issues, restart link optimization after you resolve these
problems.
l If link optimization cannot determine whether a wavelength has been commissioned (BER can be
scanned but is bad), a dialog box will be displayed asking you whether to continue. If you continue
with the commissioning, the wavelength will be processed as a wavelength that has not been
commissioned. The system does not monitor BER for OTU boards relevant to the wavelength and IN
port optical power during optimization. If the wavelength has been commissioned, cancel the
commissioning, manually optimize it, and restart link optimization.
l Link optimization only processes the transmit optical power that significantly deviates from the nominal
value of an OMS section. Due to physical features of OA boards, noise power increases on each OA
along the OMS section. The increase causes the optical power of subsequent OA boards within the
OMS section to deviate from the nominal value even when the transmit optical power reaches the
nominal value. However, link optimization only deals with the transmit optical power at the start point
of an OMS section and does not deal with this problem. Optimization starts again in the next OMS
section when transmit optical power of the OA is detected to be at levels that significantly deviate from
the nominal value.
l During link optimization, OMS sections are optimized from source to sink of a trail. Services in a mesh
network are closely coupled and the adjustment margin for each OMS section is limited. Therefore,
margin may be unavailable for an OMS section until the next OMS section has been optimized. You
need to optimize the trail multiple times for optical power to reach the nominal value.
Procedure
Operate > Link Optimization Commissioning.
Step 2 In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning(Link Optimization) window, select the
trails to be commissioned.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Click Start. Two confirmation dialog boxes are displayed, and click OK to start link
optimization commissioning.
NOTE
If there are wavelengths with BER beyond the acceptable range, the Check Wavelength
Status dialog box is displayed. Determine whether to continue the commissioning according to
situation at the site.
The system checks BER of wavelengths for the trail to be commissioned and displays the
wavelengths with BER beyond the acceptable range in red.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l If existing wavelengths are marked in red, optimize wavelengths manually to lower the BER
to an acceptable range before commissioning. If you do not try to lower the BER, the system
does not monitor BER of these wavelengths during commissioning. As a result, services
carried by the existing wavelengths may be interrupted.
l If new wavelengths are marked in red, the system does not monitor BER of the wavelengths
during commissioning.
1. Click Continue.
2. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
NOTE
If data of the to-be-optimized trail is inconsistent with the OCh trail data, a prompt dialog box is displayed.
Click Generate to regenerate trails and restart trail optimization.
NOTE
In the dialog box that is displayed, the Status column displays the optimization status of the trails.
l Not required: The deviation between the monitoring optical power and the nominal optical power meet
the requirements of network design requirments. Link optimization is not required.
l In progress: Link optimization is in process.
l Succeeded: Optical power of all OMS sections has been successfully optimized.
l Partially succeeded: Optical power of some OMS sections fails to be optimized while optical power
of other OMS sections has been successfully optimized or does not need to be optimized.
l Failed: Optical power of all OMS sections fails to be optimized.
l Canceled: You have clicked Stop to cancel link optimization.
Step 5 After commissioning is complete, click OK.
----End
Result
In the Automatic Optical Power Commissioning (Link Optimization) window, verify that
results of the commissioning meet requirements.
saved earlier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
after the link optimization commissioning.
l Link report:
Click Rollback to rollback the commissioned trails. In the dialog box that is displayed, click
OK to start restoring the commissioned trails to original optical power. After the original optical
power is restored, a dialog box is displayed indicating successful operations. In this dialog box,
click OK.
NOTE
After link optimization commissioning is complete, generate the link report (by referring to
9.7.2 Generating Commissioning Report) to view optical power optimization results.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Viewing the Commissioning Result

Prerequisites
Context
NOTE
Procedure
NOTE
red.
----End
9.7 Commissioning Report

The U2000 offers various types of reports to support different optical power commissioning
scenarios for WDM equipment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.7.1 Preparing for Generating a Commissioning Report

Before generating an optical power commissioning report, filter the commissioning trails and
set subnet commissioning parameters.
Before you generate the optical power commissioning report, ensure that the following tasks
have been completed:
l The commissioning trails have been filtered. For details, see Choosing Commissioning
Trails.
9.7.2 Generating Commissioning Report

This topic describes how to generate a commissioning report for links, optical amplifier boards,
and OTU boards.
Context
If automatic optical power commissioning is complete, you can click Generate Commission
Report in the commissioning window to generate all commissioning reports.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Commissioning Trail Management window, choose Operate > Commissioning
Report.
Step 2 In the Report Criteria area window, select Report Format to HTML or Excel.
Step 3 Optional: Click to set the path for storing the report.
Step 4 Select Link Report, Commissioning Report of the Optical Amplifier, or Commissioning
Report of the OTU for Report Type.
NOTE
Select Include associated trails as required to generate information about associated trails in the report.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 5 Click Generate to start generating the commissioning report. A progress bar is displayed.
Step 6 After the commissioning report is generated, the report is displayed in the Report name area.
Click View to view the report.
NOTE
After generating a report in the Commissioning Report window, close the window and open it again. The new
report is not displayed in the Report name area but is saved in the specified path.
----End
Parameters in the link Report

Table 9-3 lists the parameters such as input optical power, output optical power, and attenuation
in the commissioning report of the trails. In the report, the parameter values marked in red
indicate exceptions, those marked in yellow indicate alarms, and - Indicates that the board does
not support query of the optical power, or that no error message is displayed for a failure to query
the optical power. The latter symptom usually occurs in the case of data conflicts among North
American NEs. / Indicates that the optical power of the board fails to be queried and an error
message is displayed for this failure.
NOTE
For details about how to handle abnormal issues displayed in the link report, see 9.10.6 Solutions to Abnormal
Optical Power in the Link Report.
Table 9-3 Parameters in the link report

Parameter Description
Error & Warning Indicates an error message for incorrect parameters.
Optical NE Name Indicates optical NEs on the trails.
NE Name Indicates NEs on the trails.
Board Indicates boards on the trails.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Input Optical Power (dBm) Indicates input optical power of the board.
If input optical power of the multiplexed wavelength
deviates from the nominal value by >= 1.5 dB, the board
background color becomes yellow. Use the Link
Optimization Commissioning function to adjust the
optical power to the acceptable range.
Nominal Input Optical Power Indicates nominal input optical power at the transmit end
(dBm) of the OA on the trails.
Output Optical Power (dBm) Indicates output optical power of the board.
Channel Indicates channels for the board (such as 12WSM9) that

can adjust optical power.
Wavelength No./Wave Length Indicates the wavelength NO., wavelength and

(nm)/Wavelength Frequency frequency.
(THz)
Attenuation (dB) Indicates attenuation of the board.
Actual OA Gain (dB) Indicates gain of the OA board.
OCh Trails Indicates quantity of trails traversing the OA board.
Number of Scanned Wavelengths Indicates quantity of wavelengths traversing the OA

board.
Maximum/Minimum Optical Indicates the maximum and minimum optical power

Power of Single Wavelengths (analyzed by the MCA board) of single wavelengths
(dBm) traversing the OA board.
Average Optical Power of Single Indicates the average optical power (analyzed by the
Wavelengths (dBm) MCA board) of single wavelengths traversing the OA
board.
Parameters in the OA Commissioning Report

Table 9-4 lists the parameters such as basic information, total optical power, gain, line
attenuation, and EVOA of an optical amplifier board in the OA commissioning report. In the
report, the parameter values marked red indicate exceptions and - indicates that the value is blank
or cannot be queried.
Table 9-4 Parameters in the commissioning report of an optical amplifier board
Trail Group Indicates the commissioning trail of the optical NE where

the optical amplifier board resides.
Optical NE Name Indicates the name of the optical NE where the optical
amplifier board resides.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NE ID Indicates the ID of the NE where the optical amplifier

board resides.
NE Name Indicates the name of the NE where the optical amplifier

board resides.
Board Indicates the slot ID and name of the optical amplifier

board.
Port Indicates the port type of the optical amplifier board, that
is, input port or output port.
Per-Channel Nominal Value Indicates the standard input and output optical power of
(dBm) a single wavelength carried by the input and output ports
of the optical amplifier board. Set this parameter
according to the type of the optical amplifier board and
the number of full wavelengths of the system.
All Wave/Commissioned Wave Indicates the number of logical wavelengths or the

number of commissioned wavelengths that traverse the
Current Commissioning Value Indicates the current input and output optical power of
(dBm) the optical amplifier board.
Value Before Commissioning Indicates the input and output optical power of the optical
(dBm) amplifier board that is recorded before commissioning.
Reference Range (dBm) During the commissioning, the U2000 specifies the
optical power range of the optical amplifier board
according to the target commissioning value. Optical
power beyond the range is considered abnormal.
NOTE
For the input port, the U2000 calculates the target
commissioning value and target gain value. For the output port,
its target commissioning value is determined by the target
commissioning value and target gain value of the input port.
Difference(dB) Indicates the difference between the current optical

power and reference range of the optical amplifier board.
l If the current optical power is within the reference
range, this parameter value is 0.
l If the current optical power is smaller than the
minimum value in the reference range, this parameter
value is the difference between the current optical
power and the minimum value in the reference range.
l If the current optical power is larger than the
maximum value in the reference range, this parameter
value is the difference between the current optical
power and the maximum value in the reference range.
Nominal Gain(dB) Indicates the gain of the optical amplifier board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Gain Range (dB) Indicates the gain range of the optical amplifier board. If
the gain range can be queried from the NE, the parameter
value is displayed as the queried gain range. If the gain
range cannot be queried from the NE, the parameter value
is displayed as the value queried from the specifications
database.
NOTE
If the optical amplifier board is an OAU, the gain range of the
OAU is displayed. If the optical amplifier board is of any other
type, this parameter value is blank.
Actual Span Attenuation (dB) Indicates the attenuation between the optical amplifier
boards on two sites. Currently, this parameter value is
equal to the output optical power of one optical amplifier
board minus the input optical power of the following
Nominal Attenuation (dB) Indicates the normal attenuation of the line. The normal
attenuation is equal to the normal single-wavelength
output optical power of one optical amplifier board minus
the nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the
following optical amplifier board.
Actual Line Attenuation (dB) Indicates the fiber attenuation between two sites.
Designed Attenuation (dB) Indicates the designed line attenuation, which is

displayed as Designed Attenuation (dB) in the Link
Attributes dialog box. This parameter can be set
manually or automatically by importing script. By
default, it is displayed as the value of Nominal
Attenuation (dB).
NE ID Indicates the ID of the NE where the EVOA board

resides.
NE Name Indicates the name of the NE where the EVOA board

resides.
Board Indicates the slot ID, board name, and port ID of the
EVOA board. For example, in "8-VA2-1", 8 indicates the
slot ID, VA2 indicates the board name, and 1 indicates
the port ID.
Actual Attenuation (dB) Indicates the current attenuation of the EVOA board.
Attenuation Range (dB) Indicates the attenuation range of the EVOA board
queried from the NE.
Parameters in the OTU Commissioning Report

Table 9-5 lists the parameters such as input optical power, output optical power, and BER before
FEC in the commissioning report of the OTU board. In the report, the parameter values marked

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
red indicate exceptions, those marked yellow indicate alarms, and - indicates that the value is
blank or cannot be queried.
Table 9-5 Parameters in the commissioning report of an OTU board
Number Indicates the ID of a parameter in the list.
Optical NE Name Indicates the name of the site where the OTU board
resides.
Frequency (THz) Indicates the frequency of the wavelengths that traverse

the OTU board.
Wave Length (nm) Indicates the wavelengths that traverse the OTU board.
NE ID Indicates the ID of the NE where the OTU board resides.
NE Name Indicates the name of the NE where the OTU board

resides.
OTU Board Indicates the slot ID, board name, and port ID of the OTU
board. For example, in "5-LSXR-1", 5 indicates the slot
ID, LSXR indicates the board name, and 1 indicates the
port ID.
Output Optical Power (dBm) Indicates the output optical power of the OTU board.
Input Optical Power (dBm) Indicates the input optical power of the OTU board.
The input optical power is marked in red if it is not in the
value range of thresholds.
Input Optical Power Commission Indicates the value range of reference input optical
Range(dBm) power of the OTU board.
Board Requirement Indicates the maximum allowable BER of the OTU

board.
Current Value Indicates the current BER of the live network.
FEC Indicates the FEC type of the OTU board.
TDC Scan Value Indicates the dispersion compensation value of a 40G

OTU board.
9.8 Reference
This topic provides reference operations for commissioning.
9.8.1 Viewing Operation Tasks

With the function of viewing operation tasks, you can view the progress of operation tasks and
the related information to avoid repeated operations on the same object.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Viewing Operation Tasks

The U2000 allows a user to view information about tasks that are being performed. In the
Manage Operation Tasks window, information about tasks that are being performed is
displayed. The information includes Operation Status, Start Time, and Progress.
On the toolbar, click to display the Manage Operation Tasks dialog box. The tasks under
operating are displayed in this dialog box.
NOTE
After you click an operation task, the related information about the operation task is displayed in the lower part
of the dialog box.
For online monitoring tasks, only the paths that are being scanned are displayed.
For fiber connection verification (for expansion commissioning), only the selected verification paths are
displayed.
NOTE
indicates that operations mutually exclusive are in process, such as generating reports, new/expansion
deployment commissioning, or optimizing links.
indicates no operation is in process.
9.8.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000

WDM commissioning will be affected if it is not synchronized with NMS data. In this case,
synchronize the U2000 data to be consistent with the WDM commissioning data.
Context
NOTE
You must synchronize the NMS data network-wide after the WDM commissioning component is installed
or redeployed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Synchronize Data on the U2000 tab.
Step 3 Choose the subnet to be synchronized from the Root navigation tree and click Start. A
confirmation dialog box is displayed indicating that the commissioning data will be deleted from
the subnet.
NOTE
For synchronizing optical NE data, if the selected subnet does not contain any optical NEs, a prompt
message will be displayed asking you to select an optical NE.
Step 4 Click Yes. A confirmation dialog box is displayed asking you whether to continue.
Step 5 Click Yes. Data synchronization starts.
NOTE
If data share conflicts during data synchronization on the U2000, maybe another user is deleting, uploading,
copying or checking data consistency on the NE. When this occurs, perform data synchronization again after
another user completes the operations on the NE. During synchronization, do not perform other commissioning
operations on the NE.
Step 6 Click OK in the dialog box that is displayed after the synchronization.
NOTE
The refresh icon can turn to . In this case, click to refresh the Root navigation tree.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Follow-up Procedure
Commissioning data will be deleted after data synchronization. Therefore, if you have performed
a network-wide data synchronization, perform the following steps in turn on the entire network
before commissioning. If you have not performed network-wide data synchronization, perform
the following steps for only the subnets whose data has been synchronized.
l Choosing Commissioning Trails
9.8.3 Setting Optical Amplifier Information

After the subnet parameter (the maximum number of system wavelengths) is set, information
(such as the rate, code pattern, and maximum number of system wavelengths) may need to be
set for some optical amplifiers (OAs) based on the actual networking, so that the U2000 can
precisely perform optical power commissioning.
Prerequisites
The subnet parameter is set.
Commissioning trails are filtered.
Context
Set commissioning information for specific OAs based on actual network parameters as follows:
l When both 40-wavelength and 80-wavelength systems are configured in a subnet to be
commissioned, set the subnet parameter based on the type of system that carries more
services in the subnet, and set the maximum number of system wavelengths for OAs based
on the type of the system that is not set for the subnet parameter.
l When 40 Gbit/s or 100 Gbit/s signals are received, set the service rate and code pattern for
corresponding OAs based on actual networking requirements so that the U2000 can
precisely commission incident optical power.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Commissioning Trail Management window, select Set OA Info.
Step 2 In the Set OA Info window, set the rate, code pattern, and maximum number of system
wavelengths for specific OAs based on actual networking requirements.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
You can select several trails, and right-click the Rate, Code Type, or Systme Full Wavelengths table to
configure the batch.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Ok to close the Set OA Info window.
----End
9.8.4 Setting Fiber Types

Fibers of different types have different specifications, such as attenuation. Optical power
commissioning results will vary according to the differences. Therefore, before starting
commissioning the optical power, set specific fiber types.
Prerequisites
l Data on the U2000 is consistent with the NE data.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable Management from the main menu.. Navigate
to the Fiber/Cable Management window.
Step 2 Optional: Filter fibers.
1. Click Filter. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the filter criteria.
2. Click Filter.
3. In the dialog box that is displayed, click OK. The required fibers are displayed in the Fiber/
Cable Management window.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 Select one or more fibers, right-click, and choose Modify Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu.
The Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Choose one or more fibers from the Modify Fiber/Cable list. Right-click the Medium Type
parameter column and choose Modify in Batches from the shortcut menu. The Modify in
Batches dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Select the specific fiber type from the Medium Type drop-down list and click OK.
Step 6 Click OK. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
Step 7 Click Close to close the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box.
----End
9.8.5 Querying Commissioning Index Data

This section describes how to query and obtain index data (intrinsic optical specifications) of
the optical-layer boards.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > WDM Commissioning > Commissioning Index Data from the main
menu.
Step 2 Click the Optical Amplifier Index Data tab. Query commissioning index data of the boards
displayed on the tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Click Find. In the Board Type select the desired OA board type and click OK to find the index data of the
board.
To add index items for OAs of new types, click New.
To delete unnecessary index items from the list that is displayed, select the unnecessary index items and click
Delete.
Step 3 Click the Insertion Loss Index Data tab. Query insertion loss index data of optical-layer boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Click Find. In the Board Type select the desired optical-layer board type and click OK to find the index data
of the board.
To add index items for optical-layer boards of new types, click New.
To delete unnecessary index items from the list that is displayed, select the unnecessary index items and click
Delete.
----End
9.9 Routine Maintenance

This section describes the recommended routine maintenance items and operation methods used
during routine maintenance to ensure proper network running.
9.9.1 Preventive Maintenance Items

This section describes the preventive maintenance items that must be checked before using the
U2000 to perform commissioning and the corresponding operation methods.
Table 9-6 lists the preventive maintenance items and corresponding operation methods.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 9-6 Preventive maintenance items and operation methods
Item Frequency Operation Priority

Method
Checking the current Daily Checking the Urgent

alarms and clearing current alarms
major alarms periodically and
clearing the pre-FEC
BER threshold-
crossing alarm and
OTU optical power
threshold-crossing
alarm in time.
Checking for trails Weekly Periodically Important

requiring performing online
optimization optimization
(ensuring that the management, and
online optimization performing link
monitoring function optimization
has been enabled) commissioning as
required after
detecting the trails
requiring
optimization
Synchronizing data Quarterly Periodically Minor

on the U2000 synchronizing data
on the U2000 to
ensure consistency of
commissioning data.
9.9.2 Maintenance Operations

This section describes the methods for checking each maintenance item.
Viewing Current Alarms

This topic describes how to view current alarms. This function allows you to know the running
status of the live network. During network maintenance, you must update the alarm information
and take proper measures on time.
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to a U2000 client.
Step 2 Choose Fault > Browse Current Alarm from the main menu.
Step 3 On the Filter tab page, set filter criteria and click OK. The tab page for viewing current alarms
is displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
If you have already set the startup template for viewing current alarms, the Filter dialog box will not be displayed,
but the alarms that meet the startup template criteria will be directly displayed.
Step 4 Select an alarm. Details about the alarm and the handling suggestions are displayed in the bottom
pane.
Step 5 Optional: Right-click an alarm in the query result area. Then, perform the following steps as
required:
l Choose Memo from the shortcut menu to set remarks for the alarm.
l Choose Acknowledge from the shortcut menu to acknowledge the alarm.
NOTE
l If the selected alarm is an unacknowledged and uncleared alarm, it changes to an acknowledged but
uncleared alarm.
l If the selected alarm is an unacknowledged but cleared alarm, the alarm changes to a historical alarm.
l Choose Query Opposite Port Alarms from the shortcut menu to query the alarms of the
opposite port that is connected by the optical fiber.
l Choose Mask from the shortcut menu to mask the alarm.
NOTE
The shortcut menu operation varies according to alarms.
Step 6 Optional: Select one or more uncleared alarms, right-click, and then choose Clear from the
shortcut menu. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
Step 7 Optional: Select the Display latest alarms check box to view the reported alarms in real time.
Step 8 Optional: Click the buttons in the lower pane to perform the following steps:
l Click Template to create, open, save, or delete an alarm filtering template.
l Click Filter to set filter criteria.
l Click Synchronize to synchronize current alarms.
l If an alarm reported from the equipment is changed, the Refresh button is marked by a red
circle. Click Refresh to refresh current alarms.
l Click Acknowledge to acknowledge current alarms.
l Click Clear to clear current alarms.
Step 9 Optional: On a Veritas high availability system, log in to the VCS client and check whether the
resource group has a fault tag. If the resource group has a fault tag, select the resource node
corresponding to the fault tag (for example, AppService), right-click, and then choose Clear
Fault > host name from the shortcut menu to clear the fault tag.
----End
Troubleshooting
Select the alarm to be handled, and then clear the alarm according to the Handling
Suggestion in the table at the bottom of the window.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.10 FAQ
This topic describes methods of handling common problems about optical power
commissioning.
9.10.1 FAQs in the Optical Power Commissioning Window

This topic describes the FAQs and solutions during optical power commissioning.
1. The following prompt messages are displayed in the U2000 commissioning window:
l "Failed to query the adjustable range of the EVOA"
Event code: 0x4A042
l "Failed to query the output optical power of the optical amplifier board."
Event code: 0x4A044
l "Failed to restore the gain of the optical amplifier board."
Event code: 0x4A061
l "Failed to restore the attenuation of the EVOA."
Event code: 0x4A062
l "Failed to restore the attenuation of the VMUX."
Event code: 0x4A063
l "Failed to query the input optical power of the optical amplifier board."
Event code: 0x4A043
l "Failed to query the attenuation of the EVOA."
Event code: 0x4A064
The cause of the preceding prompt messages may be that the NE or board does not work
properly. The solution is as follows:
l Check whether the board is faulty. If yes, replace the faulty board.
l "Failed to obtain the type of the optical amplifier board."
Event code: 0x4A007
The probable causes for the preceding prompt message are as follows:
l The board manufacturer information is incorrect.
l The board does not work properly.
l The U2000 does not support the optical amplifier board type.
The solution is as follows:
l Correctly configure the board manufacturer information on the U2000.
l Check whether the board is faulty. If yes, replace the faulty board.
l If the board manufacturer information is correct, send the board manufacturer
information to Huawei R&D engineers and request them to check whether the U2000
supports the optical amplifier board type.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l "The optical power of the IN interface of the OTU board will exceed the threshold
and the commissioning cannot proceed."
Event code: 0x4A105
If the preceding prompt message is displayed, the budget optical power of the IN interface
on the OTU board will exceed the upper threshold. If the U2000 continues optimizing
optical power, the optical power exceeds the upper threshold and components are burned
out. The solution is as follows:
l Check whether the attenuator before the OTU board at the receive end or transmit end
is configured properly. If the attenuator is not configured properly, replace it with a
fixed attenuator according to the network design diagram so that the attenuation meets
the designed attenuation.
l Check whether the logical fiber connections for the U2000 are consistent with the
physical fiber connections on the network according to the fiber connection diagram
and correct the inconsistent logical fiber connections.
l "The IN port power is too low (-60dBm). Stop commissioning."
Event code: 0x4A067
The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is that there is a problem with the
fiber used by the trail. For example, the fiber is cut, incorrectly connected, severely aged,
or excessively attenuated. The solution is as follows:
l Check the line attenuation or fiber connection, and replace the aged fiber.
l "Exceeds the lower threshold. You have commissioned the attenuator to the
minimum value, which still cannot reach the target optical power"
Event code: 0x4A11E
The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: The actual line
attenuation is inconsistent with the designed attenuation, and the line is excessively
attenuated. The solution is as follows:
l Reconstruct the line according to the network design so that the line attenuation meets
the designed attenuation.
l "The optical power at the transmit end is lower than the nominal output optical
power of the optical amplifier board of the added wavelengths by 3 dBm. Check
whether the fiber attenuation of the site that adds wavelengths is normal."
Event code: 0x4B03E
The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: The fiber attenuation
of the optical amplifier board that adds wavelengths is abnormal. The solution is as follows:
l Check whether the fiber attenuation of the optical amplifier board that adds wavelengths
is normal. If the fiber attenuation is abnormal, replace the fiber.
l "The optical power at the transmit end is higher than the nominal output optical
power of the optical amplifier board of the added wavelengths by 3 dBm. Check
whether the attenuation of the site that adds wavelengths is too lower."
Event code: 0x4B03D

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The probable cause for the preceding prompt message is as follows: The fiber attenuation
of the optical amplifier board that adds wavelengths is set inappropriately. The solution is
as follows:
l Replace a fixed attenuator according to the network design diagram so that the
attenuation meets the designed attenuation.
9.10.2 How to Optimize the Optical Power Using the U2000 when
the Span Loss changed and the OA Gain could not Match it
If the attenuation of a line on the network to be commissioned is too large so that the gain of the
OA board cannot be compensated, check and repair the line fiber. If this problem persists, use
an OA board with larger gain on the receive end of the line, or cascade OA boards.
9.10.3 What Restrictions Does the U2000 Have on Optical NE

Classification
This topic describes the restrictions and requirements on optical NE classification when the
U2000 is used to commission optical power of WDM equipment.
When the U2000 is used to commission optical power of WDM equipment, optical NE
classification must be consistent with the physical optical NE classification. In addition, one
physical site cannot be classified into different optical NEs. For example, a back-to-back OTM
site can be created as only one optical NE as shown in Figure 9-4 but such a site cannot be
created as two or more optical NEs as shown in Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-4 Back-to-back OTM site created as one optical NE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 9-5 Back-to-back OTM site created as two optical NEs
If a physical site is classified into two optical NEs on the U2000, automatic optical power
commissioning is unavailable. When this occurs, manually classify the two optical NEs as one.
That is, allocate the boards and fiber connections of one optical NE to the other optical NE.
9.10.4 FAQs About Setting Subnet Parameters

This topic describes the rules for setting the maximum number of wavelengths that a system
supports during the process of setting subnet parameters.
How to Set the Maximum Number of Wavelengths for a System with Multi-Level
Subnets
During the commissioning process, the U2000 calculates the power of the optical amplifier based
on the maximum number of wavelengths for the system. If the system contains multiple subnets,
calculate the power based on the maximum number of wavelengths supported by the subnet
where the optical amplifier board is located.
If the subnet contains multi-level subnets, set the maximum number of wavelengths for each
subnet.
9.10.5 FAQs About Trail Commissioning

This topic describes the FAQs and solutions about Trail commissioning.
How to Quickly Complete Deployment Commissioning in Case of Many Errors on

the Network
The entire commissioning process consists of network data recording, channel attenuation
initialization, main channel commissioning, and BER optimization. If an error occurs during
any process, the entire commissioning is stopped.
All the preceding processes need to be performed to commission the entire network. If an error
occurs during any process, the commissioning will take a long time.
To speed up commissioning and fault identification, commission a few associated trails each
time. In this manner, if an error occurs on a trail, the error is reported in a timely manner. After
the fault is rectified, only these trails need to be commissioned instead of the entire network.
When the commissioning is successful, commission other associated trails.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Are There Any Restrictions on trail Commissioning

For new deployment commissioning, trails to be commissioned and their associated trails (OCh
Trails that traverse the same optical amplifier (OA) board and affect each other) cannot carry
services. Otherwise, services on the trails are interrupted during commissioning because lasers
are shut down for the OTU boards on the trails.
Wavelength expansion commissioning applies to a network that is configured with MCA boards
and meets expansion requirements. The U2000 of the current versions does not support
wavelength expansion commissioning of a network that is not configured with MCA boards.
9.10.6 Solutions to Abnormal Optical Power in the Link Report

This topic describes how to handle abnormal optical power displayed in the link report.
Abnormal Optical Power of Optical Amplifiers

In the link report, if input optical power at the transmit end of the OA deviates from the nominal
value by >= 1.5 dB, the OA board is yellow.
Optimization suggestion:
l Check whether there are wavelengths that are not commissioned. If yes, commission them,
regenerate a link report, and check the optical power again.
l Check whether some channels are added or lost, the MCA board will detect the added or
lost channels, and CHAN_ADD or CHAN_LOS will be reported on the MCA board. At
that case, repair the channels and regenerate a link report.
l Check whether the link fiber attenuation exceeds the engineering design value, or the inter-
station fiber attenuation exceeds 0.5 dB. If yes, repair the fibers and regenerate a link report.
l Use the link optimization function to adjust the deviation in a proper maintenance time
period.
Abnormal Optical Power Flatness

Ensure that the optical power flatness of all the wavelengths is within the range of ±3 dB of the
average single-wavelength optical power. Check for MCA boards on the link from source to
sink for abnormal optical power flatness. The link report automatically discovers flatness
problems on the MCA board on the link and marks the MCA board in yellow if a problem is
discovered. Check whether there are wavelengths that are not commissioned. If yes, commission
them, regenerate a link report, and check the optical power again.
NOTE
The optical power displayed on the MCA board is 20 dB less than actual power. Therefore we need to compensate
the value obtained by 20 dB to get the actual single-channel power value. For example in the 40-channel WDM
configuration, if each channel output power should be + 4 dBm, it will be displayed as -16 dBm in the MCA
board.
Optimization Suggestion: In the event, the wavelengths are not flat, that means the flatness is
more than the recommended margin, each wavelength should be adjusted to fulfill the
recommended single-channel power value. This can be done by adjusting the VOA on the WSS
boards (WSMD4, WSM9 or WSD9) for each channel (as needed) with each step by incrementing
or decrementing 0.5 dB.
In more severe cases, it is recommended to consult Huawei to provide assistance in fixing the
issue.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
9.10.7 Common Problems Found During Link Optimization

Commissioning
This section describes common problems found during link optimization commissioning.
Logical or Physical Fiber Connections on the Trail to Be Commissioned Are

Incorrect
l If you commission link optimization or manually optimize optical power when physical
fibers are led from the Vo port to the Vi port on the electrical variable optical attenuator
(EVOA) configured before the optical amplifier (OA) board, the EVOA may be burnt,
causing service interruption.
l If you commission link optimization when the EVOA is configured before the OA board
at the local site from the aspects of logical fiber connections but the EVOA is configured
behind the OA board from the aspects of physical fiber connections, the input optical power
of the receive-end OTU board at a downstream site will be lower than the threshold. As a
result, the commissioning will be rolled back due to optical performance deterioration.
9.10.8 How to Deal with the Problem When the Optical Power of
the RAU Board Cannot Be Adjusted to the Target Value?
This section describes common problems found during the commissioning of RAU boards.
If the working mode of the RAU board is not set to gain locking before commissioning, the
working mode is automatically changed to gain locking during the commissioning. After the
commissioning is complete, if the gain of the RAU board cannot compensate for the line
attenuation, manually change the working mode of the RAU board to Maximum power or
Pump power, and adjust the optical power of the RAU board and the OA board at the receive
end.
9.10.9 Performing Other Operation Tasks Fails During NMS Data

Synchronization
During the execution of operation tasks such as online monitoring, deployment commissioning,
expansion commissioning, and link optimization commissioning, the operation tasks may fail
to be performed if the data of the subnets or optical NEs involved in the operation tasks is
synchronized with the NMS data.
Solution
Before synchronizing NMS data, click the icon to check whether tasks are being performed
in the commissioning task management window. If tasks are being performed, wait until the
tasks are completed.
9.10.10 Commissioning Fails Due to a Mismatch of Board

Manufacturer Information Between the NMS and Live Network
If board manufacturer information mismatches between the NMS and live network,
commissioning may fail.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Problem Description
During commissioning for deployment, capacity expansion, or link optimization, the NMS
displays a message "The board information is not configured" and stops the commissioning
process.
Solution
1. Locate the board that is involved in the problem according to the displayed message, and
synchronize the NMS with the data of the optical NE where the board resides by referring
to 9.8.2 Synchronizing Data on the U2000.
2. When the synchronization is complete, restart commissioning.
NOTE
If the NMS displays the message again, contact Huawei engineers.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 10 Configuring Services and System Features
10 Configuring Services and System

Features
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to configure various services and system features.
10.1 Configuring Boards
In the NE Panel/Slot Layout, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.
10.2 Configuring Services
This section describes how to configure various services.
10.3 Configuring System Features
This section describes how to configure system features.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
10.1 Configuring Boards

In the NE Panel/Slot Layout, you can add a board and set port attributes for the board.
10.1.1 Checking Board Parameters

You can check the board parameters to know the status of board parameters. Before you
configure a network, you need to check the parameters for boards, to ensure that the status of
board parameters is compliant with the actual networking requirements. When you need to adjust
the parameters that you set for a board, you can modify the parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose the corresponding item from the Function Tree to check and modify the relevant board
parameters.
1. Check and modify the parameters for an optical transponder or Ethernet unit. Table 10-1
lists the parameters for the optical transponder and Ethernet unit.
Table 10-1 List of parameters for an optical transponder

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Procedure
Scenario
Laser Status a. In the NE You can turn on or See Open and Close
Explorer, select shut down a laser by the Laser on the
the setting the laser WDM Board.
corresponding status.
board.
b. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Click By
Board/Port
(Channel) and
choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Automatic Laser a. In the NE When no light is See Setting

Shutdown Explorer, select input, a laser is Automatic Laser
the automatically shut Shutdown on the
corresponding down and stops WDM Board.
board. transmitting optical
b. Choose signals. The laser
Configuration life can be
> WDM prolonged by
Interface from decreasing the
the Function working time of the
Tree. laser. In addition,
this function
c. Click By prevents hazardous
Board/Port laser radiation
(Channel) and exposure from
choose causing permanent
Channel from eye damage.
the drop-down
list.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.
Actual Wavelength a. In the NE Used to query the See Configuring

N0./Wavelength Explorer, select operating Board WDM Port
(nm)/Frequency the wavelength at the Attributes.
(THz) corresponding WDM-side optical
board. port of a board.
b. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Click By
Board/Port
(Channel) and
choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Configure a. In the NE Used to set the

Wavelength N0./ Explorer, select wavelength No,
Wavelength (nm)/ the wavelength and
Frequency (THz) corresponding frequency of the
board. current optical port
b. Choose on the WDM side of
Configuration a board.
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Click By
Board/Port
(Channel) and
choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
d. Click the
Advanced
Attributes tab.
LPT Enabled a. In the NE You can add the See 16.29 Enabling
Explorer, select overhead byte that and Disabling
the supports the LPT LPT.
corresponding protocol to the
board. frame format of a
b. Choose WDM-side signal,
Configuration to monitor the
> WDM running status of the
Interface from network access
the Function point or the service
Tree. network.
c. Click By
Board/Port
(Channel) and
choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
NULL Mapping a. In the NE You can set NULL See 16.25 Setting
Status Explorer, select Mapping Status to the NULL
the Enabled for a path Mapping Status.
corresponding that has no signal,
board. and check or view
b. Choose OTN overhead by
Configuration using an
> WDM instrument, to
Interface from monitor the status
the Function of paths in a
Tree. network.
c. Click By
Board/Port
(Channel) and
choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
d. Click the
Advanced
Attributes tab.
OFC Enabled a. In the NE The OFC function See Enable the

Explorer, select is used to control Open Fiber Control
the the transmit optical (OFC).
corresponding power of a laser
board. when a fiber is cut,
b. Choose and check whether
Configuration the fiber recovers
> WDM by sending a short
Interface from laser pulse.
the Function
Tree.
c. Click By
Board/Port
(Channel) and
choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.
2. Check and modify the parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit. Table 10-2 lists the
parameters for the tributary unit and the line unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 10-2 List of parameters for a tributary unit and a line unit
Scenario
board.
Automatic Laser When no light is See Setting
b. Choose
Shutdown input, a laser is Automatic Laser
Configuration
automatically shut Shutdown on the
> WDM
down and stops WDM Board.
Interface from
transmitting optical
the Function
signals. The laser
Tree.
life can be
c. Click By prolonged by
Board/Port decreasing the on
(Channel) and time of the laser. In
choose addition, this
Channel from function prevents
the drop-down hazardous laser
list. radiation exposure
from causing
permanent eye
damage.
LPT Enabled You can add the See 16.29 Enabling

overhead byte that and Disabling
supports the LPT LPT.
protocol to the
frame format of a
WDM-side signal,
to monitor the
running status of the
network access
point or the service
network.
NULL Mapping You can set NULL See 16.25 Setting

Status Mapping Status to the NULL
Enabled for a path Mapping Status.
that has no signal,
and check or view
OTN overhead by
using an
instrument, to
monitor the status
of paths in a
network.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
OFC Enabled The OFC function See Enable the

is used to control Open Fiber Control
the transmit optical (OFC).
power of a laser
when a fiber is cut,
and check whether
the fiber recovers
by sending a short
laser pulse.
3. Check and modify the parameters for an Ethernet unit. Table 10-3 lists the parameters for
the optical transponder and Ethernet unit.
Table 10-3 List of parameters for an Ethernet unit

Scenario
Port Enabled a. In the NE When you See 16.32.1

Explorer, select configure a service Configuring
the for the port on an Internal Ports.
corresponding Ethernet board,
board. enable the internal
b. Choose port (that is,
Configuration VCTRUNK port).
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Select Internal
Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
TAG a. In the NE Set the port type of

Explorer, select the internal port on
the an Ethernet board
corresponding on an NE based on
board. the tag attribute of
b. Choose packets that are
Configuration transmitted by the
> Ethernet user-side
Interface equipment.
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Select Internal
Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Network Attribute a. In the NE l If the port is of

Explorer, select the UNI type,
the the port
corresponding processes the
board. tag attributes
b. Choose specified in
Configuration 802.1Q and the
> Ethernet port has the tag,
Interface access and
Management > hybrid
Ethernet attributes.
Interface from l If the port is of
the Function the C-Aware
Tree. type, the port
c. Select Internal does not process
Port. the tag attributes
in 802.1Q. The
port determines
that the data
packet carries a
C-VLAN tag
and processes
only the data
packet that has
the C-VLAN
tag.
l If the port is of
the S-Aware
type, the port
does not process
the tag attributes
specified in
802.1Q. The
port determines
that the data
packet carries an
S-VLAN tag
and processes
only the data
packet that has
the S-VLAN
tag.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Port Enabled a. In the NE When you See 16.32.2

Explorer, select configure a service Configuring
the for the port on an External Ports.
corresponding Ethernet board,
board. enable the external
b. Choose port (that is, PORT
Configuration port).
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Select External
Port.
Working Mode a. In the NE Set the transmit end

Explorer, select and receive end to
the have the same
corresponding setting of working
board. mode.
b. Choose
Configuration
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Select External
Port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
MAC/PHY a. In the NE MAC loopback and

LoopBack Explorer, select PHY loopback are
the used to locate a
corresponding fault, but they can
board. interrupt services.
b. Choose In addition, they are
Configuration mutually exclusive.
> Ethernet When you set MAC
Interface LoopBack to
Management > Inloop, PHY
Ethernet LoopBack is
Interface from automatically set to
the Function Non-Loopback.
Tree. When you set PHY
LoopBack to
c. Select External Inloop, MAC
Port. LoopBack is
automatically set to
Non-Loopback.
Autonegotiation a. In the NE When the Working

Flow Control Mode Explorer, select Mode of the port is
the Auto-Negotiation,
corresponding select the
board. autonegotiation
b. Choose flow control mode.
Configuration
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Select External
Port. Click the
Flow Control
tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Non- a. In the NE When the Working

Autonegotiation Explorer, select Mode of the port is
Flow Control Mode the not Auto-
corresponding Negotiation, select
board. the non-
b. Choose autonegotiation
Configuration flow control mode.
> Ethernet
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Select External
Port. Click the
Flow Control
tab.
TAG a. In the NE Set the port type of

Explorer, select the external port on
the an Ethernet board
corresponding on an NE based on
board. the tag attribute of
b. Choose packets that are
Configuration transmitted by the
> Ethernet user-side
Interface equipment.
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Select External
Port. Click the
TAG
Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario
Network Attribute a. In the NE The Port Attribute

Explorer, select (Ethernet Port)
the parameter specifies
corresponding the position of a
board. port in the network.
b. Choose Different port
Configuration attributes support
> Ethernet different packets.
Interface
Management >
Ethernet
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Select External
Port.
4. Check and modify the parameters for an optical amplifying unit. Table 10-4 lists the
parameters for the optical amplifying unit.
Table 10-4 List of parameters for an optical amplifying unit

Scenario
board.
b. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Click By
Board/Port
(Channel) and
choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
d. Click the Basic
Attributes tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5. Check and modify the parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit. Table 10-5 lists the
parameters for the spectrum analyzer unit.
Table 10-5 List of parameters for a spectrum analyzer unit

Scenario
Wavelength a. In the NE Enable wavelength See Monitoring

Monitor Status Explorer, select monitoring. Wavelengths by
the Using the Spectrum
corresponding Analyzer Board.
board.
b. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Click By
Board/Port
(Channel) and
choose Monitor
Wavelength
from the drop-
down list.
6. Check and modify the parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit. Table 10-6 lists
the parameters for the optical supervisory channel unit.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Table 10-6 List of parameters for an optical supervisory channel unit

Scenario
board.
b. Choose
Configuration
> WDM
Interface from
the Function
Tree.
c. Click By
Board/Port
(Channel) and
choose
Channel from
the drop-down
list.
7. Check and modify the parameters for SDH units. Table 10-7 lists the parameters for the
SDH units.
Table 10-7 List of parameters for SDH unit

Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario
Laser Switch a. In the NE Explorer, You can open or close a

select the laser by setting the laser
corresponding board. switch.
b. Choose Configuration
> SDH Interface from
the Function Tree.
c. Click By Board/Port
(Channel) and choose
Port from the drop-
down list.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameter Name Navigation Path Application Scenario
Optical (Electrical) a. In the NE Explorer, Sets loopback according to

Interface Loopback select the the path.
corresponding board.
> SDH Interface from
the Function Tree.
c. Click By Board/Port
(Channel) and choose
Port from the drop-
down list.
Automatic Laser Shutdown a. In the NE Explorer, When no light is input, a

select the laser is automatically shut
corresponding board. down and stops
b. Choose Configuration transmitting optical signals.
from the Function Tree. The laser life can be
prolonged by decreasing
the on time of the laser. In
addition, this function
prevents hazardous laser
radiation exposure from
causing permanent eye
damage.
VC4 Path Overhead a. In the NE Explorer, You can query and set
select the overhead bytes of the VC4
corresponding board. path, including J1 and C2.
> Overhead
Management from the
Function Tree.
VC3 Path Overhead a. In the NE Explorer, You can query and set
select the overhead bytes of the VC3
corresponding board. path, including J1 and C2.
> Overhead
Management from the
Function Tree.
PRBS Test a. In the NE Explorer, You can set PRBS test of

select the the ports on the board, and
corresponding board. perform the bit error test of
b. Choose Configuration the transmission link
from the Function Tree. without attaching a meter to
the equipment during the
deployment.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
If you select an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer board, a static optical add/drop multiplexer board, a
dynamic optical add/drop multiplexer board, an optical protection board, or a variable optical attenuator board,
you can choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Then, you can query or set
parameters.
Step 2 In the right-hand pane, modify the existing parameter settings and click Apply.
----End
10.1.2 Adding Ports

Client-side ports and line-side ports of some OTU boards support color light and colorless light.
You need to add different ports on the U2000 according to the SFP optical module used on the
equipment.
Prerequisites
There are client-side ports or line-side ports that are not added on the U2000.

Web LCT or U2000
Context
By default, each board is added with client side ports. To add ports, you need to delete the client
side ports that are added by default on the U2000.
Procedure on the U2000 or Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, right-click the board and then choose Path View.
2. Right-click a blank space on the right of the Path View window, and then choose Add
Port. The Add Port dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the Port, Type, and Level. Click OK.
10.1.3 Configuring Electrical Ports of a Board

If a board supports electrical ports, you must configure the electrical ports on the U2000 to enable
the board to access electrical signals.
Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.
l Electrical port modules must be configured on the board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
For details on the electrical signals that a board can access, see the Hardware Description.

U2000/Web LCT
Procedure on the U2000/Web LCT

1. In the NE Panel, right-click the required board and choose Path View from the shortcut
menu.
2. Right-click the port to be configured and choose Modify Port. The Modify Port dialog
box is displayed.
NOTE
If you need to modify Type to Electrical Port, you must first delete the port, and then add the port.
Otherwise the port cannot be modified successfully.
3. Set Type to Electrical Port and click OK .
10.2 Configuring Services

This section describes how to configure various services.
Before configuring services, see Guidelines for Configuring Equipment by Referring to This
Manual in the Configuration guide to understand various services.
Configuring WDM Services

l See Configuring WDM Services (By Trail) to configure WDM services by using trails.
l See Configuring WDM Services (Station By Station) to configure services station by
station.
Configuring Ethernet Services

l See Configuring Ethernet Services to configure Ethernet services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuring the TOM/THA/TOA/LOA/TEM28 Board

See the following sections to configure the TOM/THA/TOA/LOA/TEM28 board and the WDM
Services (by Station Service Package):
l Configuring the TN11TOM Board
l Configuring the TN52TOM Board
l Configuring the THA/TOA Board
l Configuring the LOA Board
l Configuring WDM Services (by Station Service Package)
l Configuring the TEM28 Board
10.3 Configuring System Features

This section describes how to configure system features.
Before configuring system features, you can see Mapping Relationship Between Products and
Features in the Feature Description to understand the features supported by the product on the
live network.
Configuring Protection Schemes

l See Configuring Optical Line Protection to configure optical line protection.
l See Configuring Intra-Board 1+1 Protection to configure intra-board 1+1 protection.
l See Configuring Client 1+1 Protection to configure client 1+1 protection.
l See Configuring SW SNCP to configure SW SNCP protection.
l See Configuring ODUk SNCP to configure ODUk SNCP protection.
l See Configuring VLAN SNCP to configure VLAN SNCP protection.
l See Configuring Tributary SNCP Protection to configure tributary SNCP protection.
l For OptiX OSN 6800/3800, see Configuring Board-Level Protection to configure board-
level protection.
l For OptiX OSN 6800/3800, see Configuring MS SNCP to configure MS SNCP protection.
l See Configuring DBPS to configure DBPS protection.
l For OptiX OSN 6800/3800, see Configuring an Ethernet DLAG to configure DLAG
Protection (OTN).
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring an Ethernet DLAG to configure DLAG Protection
(OTN).
l See Configuring Protection for ODUk SPRing to configure ODUk SPRing protection.
l See Configuring OWSP to configure OWSP protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring Linear MSP to configure linear MSP protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring to configure
two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring the Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring to configure
four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring SNCP Protection to configure SNCP protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring a Transoceanic MSP Ring to configure transoceanic
MSP ring protection.
l See Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection to configure Ethernet ring protection.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring Ethernet Ring Protection to configure Ethernet ring
protection (OCS).
l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring DLAG to configure DLAG protection (OCS).
Configuring Data Features

l For OptiX OSN 8800, see Configuring LCAS to configure LCAS.
l See Configuring Ethernet Link Aggregation Groups to configure LAGs.
l See Configuring the Spanning Tree to configure STP or RSTP.
l See Configuring MSTP to configure MSTP.
Configuring System Features

l See Configuring the IPA to configure IPA.
l See Configuring ALC to configure ALC.
l See Configuring APE to configure APE.
l See Configuring EAPE to configure EAPE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 11 Commissioning the Network
11 Commissioning the Network
About This Chapter
Commission the optical power for an entire network after the optical power for the equipment
in the network is commissioned. This chapter describes how to commission the optical power
for a network through a case study.
Network commissioning serves to:
l Connect all the NEs in the network in line with the engineering design plan.
l Test the services on the entire network to verify the service configuration.
l Test the required functions of the network, for example, orderwire and protection switching.
l Test the quality of long-term communication of the network by monitoring alarms and
performance events.
11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal Alarms
Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exception
on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.
11.2 Testing Protection Switching
This section describes how to test the protection switch function.
11.3 Testing Data Characteristics
This section describes how to test the data characteristics.
11.4 Testing System Features
The system features includes IPA, ALC, APE, and EAPE.
11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks
This section describes how to test the clock synchronization function at the physical layer.
11.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2
This section describes the procedure for testing IEEE 1588v2 features and the testing items.
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels
When the network transmits the Ethernet service, the availability of the Ethernet service channels
must be tested.
11.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System
You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the U2000/Web LCT.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.9 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System

This section describes how to configure the orderwire phone in an OCS system by using the
U2000.
11.10 Testing Orderwire Functions
Orderwire function tests consist of addressing call tests and conference call tests.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing

Abnormal Alarms
Viewing the current alarms on an NE helps you to intuitively and quickly locate an exception
on the network. This helps you to identify a fault on the network.
Prerequisites
The NMS computer must communicate with the NE properly.
Tools, Meters, and Materials

U2000 or Web LCT. When you need to view alarms on all NEs on the network, use the U2000.
Querying Network-Wide Alarms on the U2000

1. Click the current critical alarm indicator (red) in the upper right corner of the
U2000 to browse the current network-wide critical alarms.
NOTE
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current critical alarms. When the
indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are critical alarms to be
acknowledged.
NOTE
Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. In the case of on-site maintenance, handle Critical and
Major alarms before handling other abnormal alarms.
Analyze and handle alarms one by one according to the network situations. According to network
conditions, certain alarms are reported inevitably, whereas certain alarms cannot be reported. For example,
in general no service is accessed on the WDM side during deployment commissioning. In this case, relevant
alarms are reported inevitably. These alarms, however, are cleared automatically after real services are
accessed on the client side.
In the commissioning and configuration phases of deployment, you need to analyze every reported alarm.
In general, focus on the following alarms:
l Optical power low or high alarm
l Temperature threshold-crossing alarm
l Abnormal communication alarm
l Bit error-related alarm
l Abnormal service alarm
To handle a reported alarm, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
2. Click the current major alarm indicator (orange) in the upper right corner of the
U2000 to browse the current network-wide major alarms.
NOTE
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current major alarms. When the
indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are major alarms to be
acknowledged.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. Click the current minor alarm indicator (yellow) in the upper right corner of the
U2000 to browse the current network-wide minor alarms.
NOTE
The figure in the center of the indicator indicates the number of the current minor alarms. When the
indicator is surrounded by a square frame , it indicates that there are minor alarms to be
acknowledged.
Querying the Current Alarms of an NE on the Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Alarm > Browse Alarms from the
Function Tree.
2. In the displayed window, click the Browse Current Alarms tab.
3. Analyze and handle the reported abnormal alarms. For details, see the description of the
methods for analyzing and handling alarms by using the U2000.
11.2 Testing Protection Switching

This section describes how to test the protection switch function.
OptiX OSN 8800 supports the following protection modes:
l Optical line protection
l Intra-board 1+1 protection
l Client 1+1 protection
l SW SNCP protection
l ODUk SNCP protection
l OWSP protection
l ODUk SPRing protection
l Tributary SNCP protection
l VLAN SNCP protection
l OWSP protection
l Board-level protection
l Cross-subrack or cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP protection
l Intra-subrack DBPS protection
l DLAG protection

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l VLAN SNCP protection
l OWSP protection
l Board-level protection
l Cross-subrack or cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP protection
l Intra-subrack DBPS protection
l DLAG protection
For the working principle for each protection mode and the operating process, see the Feature
Description.
The testing methods for different types of protection switching are similar. The only difference
lies in the navigation path on the U2000.
11.2.1 Testing Inter-Subrack Communication Protection

This section describes how to test inter-subrack communication protection.
Prerequisites
Subracks must be cascaded in ring mode.
Communication cables between subracks must be connected in ring mode.
Precautions
l All network cables must be properly connected.
l The logical cascading mode must be consistent with the physical cascading mode. When
the subracks are cascaded in ring mode, the subracks must work properly and there should
be no alarm indicating that subracks form a ring or alarm indicating a fault at a cascaded
port.

U2000
Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-1 shows the set-up diagram when inter-subrack communication protection is in
normal state. Figure 11-2 shows the set-up diagram when inter-subrack communication
protection is in protection state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-1 Normal State

Master
Subrack 0
ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
Slave Normal Slave
Subrack 1 ETH2 State ETH1 Subrack 3
ETH1 ETH2
Slave
Subrack 2
Figure 11-2 Protection State

Master
Subrack 0
ETH1 ETH2
ETH1 ETH2
Slave Protection Slave
Subrack 1 ETH2 State ETH1 Subrack 3
ETH1 ETH2
Slave
Subrack 2
Procedure
1. Remove the network cable connecting the slave subrack 1 to master subrack 0 from the
ETH1 port on master subrack 0. See Figure 11-2.
2. On the U2000, check whether all slave subracks are unreachable to the NMS. Check for
the NE_COMMU_BREAK, NE_NOT_LOGIN, and GNE_CONNECT_FAIL alarms.
Observe the color of NE icons of slave subracks 1, 2, and 3.
3. If no preceding alarm is reported and the color of NE icons of all slave subracks does not
change, inter-subrack communication is normal and protection switching is successful.
Then you can reconnect the network cable to the ETH1 port.
4. After the network cable is reconnected, inter-subrack communication protection
automatically switches communication from the protection channel to the working channel.
See Figure 11-1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2.2 Testing the 1+1 Protection of the Cross-Connect Board and

Clock Board for OptiX OSN 8800
1+1 protection is configured by using the cross-connect board and clock board. This section
describes how to test the 1+1 protection switching of the cross-connect board and clock board,
thus ensuring that the protection switching is normal.
Prerequisites
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, slots 9 and 10 must house the high cross-connection, system
control and clock processing board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, slots 9 and 10 must house the cross-connect board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, slots 9 and 43 (or slots 10 and 44) must house the cross-connect
board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, slots 42 and 44 must house the clock board.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, slots 75 and 86 must house the clock board.
The NE commissioning data must be configured.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map, and the NE Panel tab is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query. The queried Active
Board should be the same as the Working Board.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, Working Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing
board in slot 9, and Protection Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing board in
slot 10. Active Board is the cross-connection, system control and clock processing board that is actually working.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9, and Protection Board is
the cross-connect board in slot 10.Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually working.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9 or 10, and Protection
Board is the cross-connect board in slot 43 or 44. Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually
working.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, Working Board is the clock board in slot 42, and Protection Board is the clock
board in slot 44. Active Board is the clock board that is actually working.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T64, Working Board is the clock board in slot 75, and Protection Board is the clock
board in slot 86. Active Board is the clock board that is actually working.
Step 4 Select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection or Clock 1+1 Protection, and then click
Working/Protection Switching. In the Microsoft Internet Explorer dialog box that is displayed,
click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
When you select the cross-connect board or the clock board for switching, the cross-connect board and the clock
board perform switching at the same time.
Step 5 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as the
Protection Board.
Step 6 Select Cross-Connect Board 1+1 Protection or Clock 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore
Working/Protection. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation
Result dialog box that is displayed, click Close.
NOTE
When you select the cross-connect board or the clock board for switching, the cross-connect board and the clock
board perform switching at the same time.
NOTE
The 1+1 protection switching on the cross-connect boards and clock boards is non-revertive. When Protection
Board becomes Active Board, restore the cross-connect boards and clock boards to the original working/
protection state by removing the protection board, or by clicking Restore Working/Protection on the U2000.
Step 7 Repeat step 3 to perform the query. The queried Active Board should be the same as Working
Board.
----End
11.2.3 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching of the Cross-Connect Board

for OptiX OSN 6800
1+1 protection is configured by using the cross-connect boards. This section describes how to
test the 1+1 protection switching of the cross-connect boards, thus ensuring that the protection
switching is normal.
Prerequisites
Slots 9 and 10 must house the cross-connect boards.
The NE commissioning data must be configured.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map and the NE Panel tab is displayed.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query, In the Operation Result
dialog box that is displayed, click Close. The queried Active Board should be the same as the
Working Board.
NOTE
Working Board is the cross-connect board in slot 9, and Protection Board is the cross-connect board in slot 10.
Active Board is the cross-connect board that is actually working.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Select Cross-connect 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection Switching. In the
Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click OK. In the Operation Result dialog box that is
displayed, click Close.
Protection Board.
Step 6 Select Cross-connect 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/Protection. In the
NOTE
The 1+1 protection switching on the cross-connect boards is non-revertive. When Protection Board becomes
Active Board, restore the cross-connect boards to the original working/protection state by removing the
protection board, or by clicking Restore Working/Protection on the U2000.
Working Board.
----End
11.2.4 Testing the 1+1 Protection Switching of the SCC Boards

1+1 protection is configured to protect the SCC boards. This topic describes how to test the 1
+1 protection switching of the SCC boards, thus ensuring that the protection switching is normal.
Prerequisites
The equipment must be configured with two SCC boards. The NE commissioning data must be
configured.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Double click the ONE icon on the Physical Map, and the NE Panel tab is displayed.
Step 3 Choose Configuration > Board 1+1 Configuration. Click Query. In the Operation Result
dialog box that is displayed, click Close. The queried Active Board should be the same as the
Working Board.
NOTE
l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, Working Board is the SCC board in slot 9, and Protection Board is the
SCC board in slot 10. Active Board is the SCC board that is actually working.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, Working Board is the SCC board in slot 18, and Protection Board is the SCC
board in slot 17. Active Board is the SCC board that is actually working.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Select SCC Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Working/Protection Switching. In the
Protection Board.
Step 6 Select SCC Board 1+1 Protection, and then click Restore Working/Protection. In the
NOTE
The 1+1 SCC board protection switching is non-revertive. When Protection Board is Current Working
Board, you need to remove the protection board, or click Restore Working/Protection on theU2000 to switch
services back to the working board.
Working Board.
----End
11.2.5 Testing Optical Line Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the test
procedure for the optical line protection switching.
Prerequisites
The optical line protection must be configured.
The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be
correctly established.
The equipment must be running normally.

U2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the optical line protection switching is shown in Figure 11-3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-3 Testing the optical line protection switching
Rx TI TO1 RI1 RO
Signal
analyzer OTU1 O OTU1
O RI1 TO1
Tx A A
D FIU OLP OLP FIU D
OTUn M M OTUn
TO2 RI2
RO RI2 TO2 TI
Station A Station B
: Fixed optical attenuator
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments
1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports of the signal analyzer to the
RX input optical port and to the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU
respectively with a fixed optical attenuator in between.
2. At station B, connect the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the
client side of the OTU with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the
loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 11-3.
l Querying the normal channel status of station A
The related parameters of the OLP are configured on the U2000. For the configuration
procedures, see Creating Optical Line Protection in the Feature Description.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of station A in the Main Topology.
The Running Status of the ONE is displayed.
2. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and choose NE Explorer to
display the NE Explorer dialog box.
3. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Port Protection
Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the right-hand
pane.
5. Check the channel status of the optical line protection. If the NE name is A, the
Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1) and the
Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). The
Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status are Normal.
l Testing the protection switching for the equipment
1. The optical line protection switching test can be performed using the following two
methods:
– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the RI1 port of the OLP board at
Station A to perform the switching.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to station A. Right-click the

desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection Channel to perform the
switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. Click Close in the operation
result dialog box.
2. Query the channel states of the optical line protection after the switching at station A.
– Choose Configuration > Port Protection from the Function Tree. Click Query.
A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
– In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–
12OLP–1(RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–
12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF, and Protection Channel
Status is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched.
– In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–
12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel
Status is Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection Channel.
3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and choose Browse
Current Alarms. The OLP_PS alarm must be reported.
4. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available.
5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, the following
two modes can be used respectively:
– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.
– Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection
Group, and choose Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection group
and then choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click the
protection group again, and choose Clear from the shortcut menu. Click Close in the operation
result dialog box.
6. After the time set in WTR Time(mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A prompt is
displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Switching Status
of the protection group should be Idle.
----End
11.2.6 Testing Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching

This section uses a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the test
procedure for the intra-board 1+1 protection switching that is achieved by using the OLP.
Prerequisites
The intra-board 1+1 protection must be configured.
established correctly.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the intra-board 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure 11-4.
Figure 11-4 Testing the intra-board 1+1 protection switching
TO1 O RI1
O
A A
FIU FIU
RI1 D D TO1
Rx TI RO Tx
O M M O
Signal
T RO OLP OLP TI T
analyzer TO2 RI2
U O O U
Tx Rx
A A
FIU FIU
RI2 D D TO2
M M
Station A Station B
Procedure
1. At station A, connect the output and input optical ports for the signal analyzer to the
RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU
respectively with a fixed optical attenuator in between.
3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.
l Querying the normal channel status of station A.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of the ONE is displayed.
3. Select the NE from the function tree and choose Configuration > Port Protection.
4. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful. Click
Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane. The switching status of
intra-board protection and channel status should be Normal.
5. Check the channel status of the intra-board 1+1 protection. If the NE name is A, the
Working Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–1(RI1/TO1) and the
Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). The
Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel Status are Normal.
l Testing the protection switching of the equipment
1. The switching test of the intra-board protection can be performed using the following
two methods.
– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber for the RI1 port of the OLP board at
Station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 11-4.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– Method 2: Forced switching. In the protection group window for station A, right-
click the desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection Channel to
perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. Click Close in the
operation result dialog box.
CAUTION
In method 1, you must disconnect the fiber in the direction that the signals are sent to
the signal analyzer. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or no
protection switching is performed.
2. Query the channel states of the intra-board 1+1 protection at station A.

12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF, and Protection Channel
12OLP–1 (RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is A–Shelf1(subrack)–105–
12OLP–2 (RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel
3. In the NE panel for the station A, right-click the OLP board, and choose Browse
Current Alarms. The INTRA_OTU_PS alarm must be reported.
4. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available with
zero bit error generated.
5. To restore the test environment for the two switching modes in step 1, use the following
two methods:
Group, and select Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection group,
and choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click the same
result dialog box.
6. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating the operation is successful. Click
Close. Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.
----End
11.2.7 Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching

This section uses a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the test
procedure for the client 1+1 protection switching that is achieved by using the OLP.
Prerequisites
The client 1+1 protection must be configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the client 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure 11-5.
Figure 11-5 Testing the client 1+1 protection switching
TO1 O F O RI1
A F
I A
OTU1 D I OTU3
RI1 U D TO1
M U RO
M
Signal TI
analyzer OLP OLP
TO2 O O RI2
RO F F TI
A A
OTU2 I I OTU4
RI2 D D TO2
U U
M M
Station A Station B
Procedure
l Connecting Test instruments
TI and RO ports on the client side of the OLP board with a fixed optical attenuator in
between.
2. At station B, connect the RO port to the TI port on the client side of the OLP board
with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side,
as shown in Figure 11-5.
3. Test the channel using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.
l Querying the normal channel status of station A.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon of the station A in the Main Topology.
2. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and choose NE Explorer to
display the NE Explorer dialog box.
3. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Port Protection

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Close. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane.
5. Check the channel status of the client 1+1 protection. Working Channel Status and
Protection Channel Status are Normal.
1. The switching test for the client 1+1 protection can be performed using the following
two methods.
– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the IN optical port for the working
OTU1 board at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 11-5.
– Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to the protection group of station
A. Right-click the desired protection group, and choose Force to Protection
Channel to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box. Click
Close in the operation result dialog box.
CAUTION
In Method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the OTU1 board at
station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or no protection
switching is performed.
2. Query the channel status of the client 1+1 protection at station A.

A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. If
the NE name is A.
12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF and Protection Channel
12OLP–2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection Channel
3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and choose Browse
Current Alarms. The CLIENT_PORT_PS alarm must be reported.
4. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, no bit
error is generated.
two methods:
Group, and select Clear. Click Close in the operation result dialog box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protection group,
and choose Manual to Working Channel from the shortcut menu. Then, right-click the same
result dialog box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6. After the time set in WTR Time (mm:ss) field elapses, click Query. A prompt is
displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Switching Status
for the protection group should be Idle.
----End
11.2.8 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations as an example to describe the test
procedure for the SW SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisites
The SW SNCP protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
l For OptiX OSN 8800, the diagram for testing the SW SNCP switching is shown in Figure
11-6.
11-7.
11-7.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-6 Testing the SW SNCP
Singal
analyzer
6
F OA OADM OADM OA F
1 2
I TOM I
U 7 8 U
OA OA
West A East
6
OA OA
F OADM OADM F
I 3 4 I
TOM
U U
7 8
OA OA
East B West

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-7 Testing the SW SNCP protection switching
Signal
analyzer
F OA OADM OADM OA F
1 2
I I
U U
OA OA
West A East
OA OA
F OADM OADM F
I 3 4 I
U U
OA OA
B
East West
1, 2, 3, 4: OTU Board
Procedure
1. As shown in Figure 11-6, at station A, connect the output and input optical ports of
the signal analyzer to the RX6 input optical port and TX6 output optical port of the
TOM with a fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect the RX6 input
optical port and the TX6 output optical port of the TOM with a fixed optical attenuator
in between to achieve the loopback on the client side.
2. As shown in Figure 11-7, at station A, connect the output and input optical ports of
the signal analyzer to the RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client
side of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between. At station B, connect
the RX input optical port and the TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU
with the fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Querying the normal channel status of the station A

2. Right-click the NE icon and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog
box.
3. Select the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > WDM Service
Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control.
4. Click Query. All protection groups are listed in the right-hand pane. Status of SW
SNCP should be Normal State.
5. Check the channel status of the SW SNCP. Channel Status of Working cross-
connection is Idle, and Channel Status of Protection cross-connection is Idle.
1. The SW SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the following two
methods.
– Method 1: Fiber removing.
– Remove the fiber of the RX8 optical port for the TOM at station A to perform
the switching, as shown in Figure 11-6.
– Remove the fiber of the IN optical port for the second working OTU at station
A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 11-7.
– Method 2: Forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control window for station A,
select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu,
select Force to Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed
dialog box.
CAUTION
In method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the signal analyzer
at station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice, or no protection
switching is performed. By doing this, the detected switching time is more scientific
2. Query the channel status of the SW SNCP protection at station A.

– Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
Click SNCP Service Control, and click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating
the operation is successful. Click Close.
– In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection is
SF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Idle. Status of the
protection group is SF Switching.
– In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection is
Forced switch, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is also
Forced switch. Status of the protection group is Forced (from working to
protection) switching state.
3. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the board and choose Browse Current
Alarms. The SW_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
For details about the board that reports the SW_SNCP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and Performance
Events Reference.
error is generated.
two methods:
– Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and click
Function. In the displayed menu, select Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog
box.
NOTE
If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-
connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then,
right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed
menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
6. Click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.
----End
11.2.9 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations in which the tributary board and the
line board are jointly used as an example to describe the test procedure for the ODUk SNCP
protection switching.
Prerequisites
The ODUk SNCP protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the ODUk SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 11-8.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-8 Testing the ODUk SNCP protection switching
Signal
analyzer
OADM 2 3 OADM
F OA OA F
I I
U U
OA OA
A
West East
OA OA
F 4 F
I I
U U
OADM 5 6 OADM
OA OA
East B West
1, 4: Tributary Unit 2, 3, 5, 6: Line Unit

Procedure
RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the tributary
board with a fixed optical attenuator in between.
client side of the tributary board with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve
the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 11-8.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of the NE A is displayed.
3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the
Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control tab.
4. Click Query. Then, all ODUk SNCP protection groups are listed. Status of the ODUk
SNCP protection is Normal State.
5. Query the channel status of the ODUk SNCP protection. Channel Status of the
working cross-connection is Idle, and Channel Status of the protection cross-
connection is Idle.
1. The ODUk SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the following two
methods.
– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber between the D1 optical port on the
OADM board and the IN optical port on working line board 3 at station A to
perform the switching, as shown in Figure 11-8.
dialog box.
CAUTION
In method 1, you must disconnect the fiber that inputs signals to the working line board
3 at station A. Otherwise, protection switching may be performed twice or no
protection switching is performed. By doing this, the detected switching time is more
scientific.
2. Check the channel status for ODUk SNCP protection of station A

– Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
Click SNCP Service Control, and click Query.
3. In the NE panel of the station A, right-click the board and choose Browse Current
Alarms. The ODU_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.
NOTE
For details about the board that reports the ODU_SNCP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and Performance
Events Reference.
error is generated.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
two methods:
– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber
Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog
box.
NOTE
connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then,
select the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed menu,
choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
6. After the WTR Time(mm:ss) elapses, click Query. Status of the protection group
should be Normal State.
----End
11.2.10 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by two stations which use the LEM24 board as an
example to describe the test procedure for the VLAN SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisites
The VLAN SNCP protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the VLAN SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 11-9.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-9 Testing the VLAN SNCP protection switching
Signal
analyzer
F OA OADM OADM OA F
1 2
I I
U U
OA OA
West A East
OA OA
F OADM OADM F
I 3 4 I
U U
OA OA
East B West
1, 2, 3, 4: LEM24 Board
Procedure
RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with a
fixed optical attenuator in between.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

3. Select the desired Ethernet board in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration >
Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
4. Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab. Select one service. Click Set/
Query Switching and select Query Switching Status, and all the current protection
groups are displayed. Current Status of VLAN SNCP should be Normal State.
5. Query the channel status of the VLAN SNCP protection. Link Status of the working
service is Normal, and Link Status of the protection service is also Normal.
1. The switching test for the VLAN SNCP protection can be performed using the
following two methods.
– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the IN optical port of the working
OTU 2 at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 11-9.
– Method 2: Forced switching. On the U2000, log in to station A. In the VLAN
SNCP Service Management, select working service, and click Set/Query
Switching. Select Force to Protection in the displayed menu to perform the
switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
2. Query the channel states of the VLAN SNCP protection at station A.
– Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the
Function Tree. Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab. Select one
service. Click Set/Query Switching, and select Query Switching Status, all the
current protection groups are displayed.
– In the fiber removing mode, Link Status of the working service is SF, Link
Status of protection service is Normal, and Current Status of the protection
group is SF Switching.
– In the forced switching mode, Link Status of the working service is Normal, Link
Status of the protection service is Normal, and Current Status of the protection
group is Forced (from Working to Protection) Switching State.
3. In the NE panel of station A, right-click the LEM24 board and choose Browse
Current Alarms. The VLAN_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported by the LEM24.
4. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, and no
bit error is generated.
two methods:
– Forced switching mode: Select the working service, and click Set/Query
Switching. In the displayed menu, select Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog
box.
NOTE
connection, and click Set/Query Switching. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to
Working. Then right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Set/Query
Switching. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
6. Click Set/Query Switching, and select Query Switching Status. A prompt is
displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. Current Status of
the protection group should be Normal State.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2.11 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network as an example to describe the test procedure for the tributary
SNCP protection switching. The ring network consists of two stations in which the tributary
board and the line board are jointly used
Prerequisites
The tributary SNCP protection must be configured.

U2000, optical fiber, fiber adapter, signal analyzer, optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the tributary SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 11-10.
Figure 11-10 Testing the tributary SNCP protection switching
Station A Station B
TOM1 TOM1
OM OD
TOM2 TOM2
Signal N F F N
analyzer D I I D
TOM1 2 U U 2 TOM1
OD OM
TOM2 TOM2
: Fixed Optical Attenuator
Procedure
RX and TX ports on the client side of the TOM boards with a fixed optical attenuator
in between.
client side of the TOM boards with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve
the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 11-10.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the
Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control.
4. Click Query. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Status of
the tributary SNCP protection is Normal State.
5. Query the channel status of the tributary SNCP protection. Channel Status of the
working cross-connection is Idle, and Channel Status of the protection cross-
connection is Idle.
1. The tributary SNCP protection switching test can be performed using the following
two methods:
– Method 1: Fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the TXn optical port on the working
line board TOM1 at station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure
11-10.
dialog box.
2. Check the channel status for tributary SNCP protection of station A
– Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree,
and click SNCP Service Control. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating
that the operation is successful. Click Close.
Alarms. The ODU_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.
NOTE
For more information, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
error is generated.
5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in step 1, use the following
two methods:
Function. In the displayed menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog
box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
connection and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Then,
right-click the same working cross-connection again, and click Function. In the displayed
menu, choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
6. Click Query. Status of the protection group should be Normal State.
----End
11.2.12 Testing Board-Level Protection Switching (OptiX OSN

6800/3800)
The board-level protection is classified into two modes: the general mode and the extended
mode. In the extended mode, the SCS board is required. This section uses the extended board-
level protection with two OTM stations as an example to describe the test procedure for the
board-level protection switching.
Prerequisites
The board-level protection must be configured.

Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-11 shows the connection for testing the board-level protection switching.
Figure 11-11 Testing the board-level protection switching

TX1
TBE1 TBE1
TI1
O O
TBE2
S L A F F A L TBE2
Signal
C 4 D I I D 4
analyzer
S G M U U M G
TBE1 TBE1
RX1
RO1 TBE2 TBE2
Station A Station B

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
RO1 input optical port and T11 output optical port on the client side of the SCS with
a fixed optical attenuator in between.
2. At station B, connect the TX1 output optical port and the RX1 input optical port on
the client side of the TBE with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from the
Function Tree.
pane. The switching status for board-level protection should be Idle.
5. Check the board status for board-level protection. If the TBE1 is in slot IU7 and the
TBE2 is in slot IU8, then Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working Board Status is
Usable, Protection Board is 108-11TBE, Protection Board Status is Usable, and
Active Board is Working Board.
1. The board-level protection switching test can be performed using the following two
methods.
– Method 1: Fiber removing. At station A, remove the fiber for the RX1 port of the
TBE1, as shown in Figure 11-11.
– Method 2: Forced switching. In the board-level protection window for station A,
right-click the desired protection group on the U2000. Select Forced Switching
to Protection to perform the switching. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
2. Check the board status of station A
– Choose Configuration > Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree. Click
Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
– In the fiber removing mode, Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working Board
Status is Unusable, Protection Board is 108-11TBE; Protection Board
Status is Usable, Switching Status is Auto Switching, and Active Board is
Protection Board.
– In the forced switching mode, Working Board is 107-11TBE, Working Board
Status is Usable; Protection Board is 108-11TBE; Protection Board Status is
Usable; Switching Status is Forced Switching to Protection; and Active
Board is Protection Board.
error is generated.
4. If all the previous items meet the requirements, the following two methods can be
used to restore the switching status to normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– Reconnect the fiber.

– Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection Group, and select
Clear. Click OK in the displayed dialog box.
Close. The switching status should be restored to Idle.
----End
11.2.13 Testing Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP

Protection Switching
This section describes the testing procedure for the DBPS and MS SNCP protection switching.
In this section, the service between station A and station C on a ring that consists of three stations
is used as an example.
Prerequisites
An MS SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station A
(or subrack m).
An MS SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station B
(or subrack n).
An SW SNCP protection group must be configured at station C.
A service path is configured between the (TX2/RX2) port of the L4G board at station C and the
(TX1/RX1) port of the TBE board at station A for observation. See Figure 11-12.
NOTE
The signal flow of the service path is as follows: The DSLAM forwards the service data from the BRAS
to another RX2 port of the L4G. The service data is output through the OUT port for transmission over the
line after the electrical cross-connection is performed. Then, the IN port of the L4G at station A receives
the service data. The service data is output through the TX1 port of the TBE1 board after the electrical
cross-connection is performed. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the
Configuration Guide.

U2000, SmartBits (SMB), optical fiber, fiber adapter
For the MS SNCP protection switching that is triggered by the fault on the OTN side, see 11.2.8
Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching.
Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-12 and Figure 11-13 show the DBPS protection and MS SNCP protection in the
normal and switching states.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
In Figure 11-12 and Figure 11-13, the L4G boards numbered 1, 4 and 5 are the working OTU
boards. The L4G boards numbered 2, 3 and 6 are the protection OTU boards.
Figure 11-12 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (normal)

SMB
P1 P2 P3
TX RX TX RX TX RX
RX TX RX TX
Bras 1 Bras 2
Master Slave
RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2 RX2 TX2

RX3 TX1
1 Master TBE 2 Slave
TBE TX3 RX1
L4G 2 RX1 TX1

L4G 1
L4G 3 L4G 4
TX1 RX1
OUT IN IN OUT
Station A Station B
IN OUT OUT IN
L4G 6
L4G 5
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX1
RX1 TX1
DSLAM
TX2 RX2
Station C
Service signals
Observed service signals

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-13 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (switching)
SMB P1 P2 P3
TX RX TX RX TX RX
RX TX RX TX
Bras 1 Bras 2
Slave Master

RX3 TX1
TBE 1 Slave TBE 2 Master
TX3 RX1
RX1
L4G 1 TX1
L4G 2 L4G 4
TX1 RX1 L4G 3
OUT IN IN OUT
Station Station
A B
IN OUT OUT IN
L4G 6
L4G 5
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX1
RX1 TX1
DSLAM
TX2 RX2
Station C
Service signals
Observed service signals
Procedure
1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of stations A and B. See
Figure 11-12. Bind P2 and P3 ports as a group to send the same packets at the same
time. Make P1 receive the service signals (data packets from P2 or P3) forwarded by
the DSLAM.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Create the electrical cross-connection from the IN port of the L4G to the TX1 port of
the TBE1 at station A. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the
3. Use fibers to connect the output optical port of the DSLAM to the RX2 port of the
L4G at station C so that a loopback is enabled. Then create the electrical cross-
connection from the RX2 port of the L4G to the OUT port of the L4G. For the
configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the Configuration Guide.
l Querying the normal channel status of station A, as shown in Figure 11-12.
Status of NE A is displayed.
3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection
Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. Working
board is TBE1, Protection Board Status is Master.
5. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management.
6. Select WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. A prompt is
displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the
uplink dual fed cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is,
the TBE1 board duplicates the cross-connection and sends the cross-connections to
the west and east L4G boards.
l Querying the normal channel status of station B, as shown in Figure 11-12.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of NE B is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection
board is TBE2, and Protection Board Status is Slave.
5. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > WDM Service Management.
displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the pass-
through cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is, the cross-
connection passes through the west and east L4G boards.
l Querying the protection switching channel status of station A

1. Remove the fiber in the RX2 optical port of TBE1 board at station A to perform the
switching, as shown in Figure 11-13.

4. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and chooseConfiguration > Distributed
Board-Level Protectionfrom the Function Tree.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
board is TBE1, and Protection Board Status is Slave.
6. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.
displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the pass-
through cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is, the cross-
connection passes through the west and east L4G boards.
l Querying the protection switching channel status of station B, as shown in Figure 11-13.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of NE B is displayed.
2. Right-click an NE, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
board is TBE2, and Working Board Status is Master.
displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close. In this case, the
uplink dual fed cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is,
the TBE2 board duplicates the cross-connection and sends the cross-connections to
the west and east L4G boards.
7. Reconnect the fiber into the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A.
l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets received
at P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
11.2.14 Testing DBPS and ERPS Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the DBPS and ERPS protection switching.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections between NE A, NE B, NE C, NE D and NE E must be established.
A pass-through service must be configured on the ring network consisting of NEs A, B, C, and
E.
DBPS protection is configured for NEs A and B. ERPS ring protection is configured between
NEs A, B, C, D, and E.
You must be an NMS user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
As shown in Figure 11-14, the DBPS protection is configured for NEs A and B. The ERPS ring
protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, D, and E.
Figure 11-14 Application of protection (DBPS+ERPS)
P1 OADM E
Master R1 LEM24 OADM A
P2
SMB OADM D
LEM24
Slave R2
P3 LEM24 DSLAM
OADM B
OADM C
LEM24
A B A B
LEM24 LEM24 LEM24 LEM24
ERPS block ERPS block
LEM24 LEM24 LEM24 LEM24
D C D C
A B
A B
LEM24 LEM24
LEM24 LEM24
LEM24 LEM24
LEM24 LEM24
D C
D C
: Working path
: DBPS protection path
: ERPS protection path
: Observed service path

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments.
1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of NEs A and B. See Figure
11-14. Configure the P2 and P3 ports as a group to send the same packets at the same
time, and configure the P1 port as a mirrored port for monitoring. In addition, enable
the P1 port to receive the service signals (data packets from the P2 or P3 port)
forwarded by the DSLAM.
l Querying the DBPS protection group status when NE A works normally.
1. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
Status window of NE A is displayed.
2. Right-click NE A and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE A,
Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Master.
l Querying the DBPS protection group status when NE B works normally.
1. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running
Status window of NE B is displayed.
2. Right-click NE B and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection
Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE B,
Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Slave.
l Querying the DBPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs.
1. At NE A, disconnect the client-side optical port on the LEM24 board and the R1 port
to trigger protection switching.
2. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
3. Right-click NE A, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
4. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed
Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.
Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE A,
Working board is LEM24, and Protection Board Status is Slave.
l Querying the DBPS protection group status on NE B after protection switching occurs.
1. Log in to the U2000, and double-click NE B in the Main Topology. The Running
Status window of NE B is displayed.
2. Right-click NE B, and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > Distributed
Close. The DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list. At NE B,
Working board is LEM24, and Working Board Status is Master.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
5. At NE A, reconnect the client-side optical port on the LEM24 board to the R1 port.
l Querying the ERPS protection group status when NE A works normally.
1. Log in to the U2000 and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
2. Right-click NE A, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired LEM24 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.
4. Click Query. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is VCTRUNK2, and Status of
State Machine is displayed as Idle.
l Querying the ERPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs.
1. At NE A, disconnect the IN optical port and OUT optical port on the LEM24 in the
direction to NE E to trigger protection switching.
2. On the NMS select the LEM24 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
State Machine is displayed as Protection.
4. At NE A, restore the fiber connection to the WDM-side optical port on the LEM24.
5. Click Query 5 to 12 minutes later. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is
VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Idle.
NOTE
Do not remove fibers on the protection path before services are restored to the original working path.
Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
l Calculate the switching time by using the following formula: Switching time = (Packets
sent by P2 or P3 - Packets received at P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
11.2.15 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the intra-subrack DBPS protection switching.
In this section, the service between station A and station C is used as an example.
Prerequisites
An SW SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station A.
An SW SNCP protection group must be configured at station C.
A service path is configured between the (TX2/RX2) port of the L4G board at station C and the
(TX1/RX1) port of the TBE board at station A for observation. See Figure 11-15.
NOTE
The signal flow of the service path is as follows: The DSLAM forwards the service data from the BRAS
to another RX2 port of the L4G. The service data is output through the OUT port for transmission over the
line after the electrical cross-connection is performed. Then the IN port of the L4G at station A receives
the service data. The service data is output through the TX1 port of the TBE1 board after the electrical
cross-connection is performed. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, see the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Intra-subrack DBPS protection must work with SW SNCP protection.
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the intra-subrack DBPS protection switching is shown in Figure
11-15.
Figure 11-15 and Figure 11-16 show DBPS protection and SW SNCP protection in the normal
and switching states.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-15 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (normal)

SMB P1 P2 P3
TX RX TX RX TX RX
RX TX RX TX
Bras 1 Master Bras 2 Slave

RX3 TX1
TBE 1 Master TBE 2 Slave
TX3 RX1
L4G L4G
OUT IN IN OUT
Station A
IN OUT OUT IN
L4G
L4G
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX1
RX2 TX2
Service signals
DSLAM Observed service signals
TX1 RX1
Station C

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-16 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (switching)
SMB
P1 P2 P3
TX RX TX RX TX RX
RX TX RX TX
Bras 1 Slave Bras 2 Master

RX3 TX1
TBE 1 Slave Master TBE 2
TX3 RX1
L4G L4G
OUT IN IN OUT
Station A
IN OUT OUT IN
L4G
L4G
TX2 RX2 TX1 RX1
Service signals
RX2 TX2
DSLAM Observed service signals
TX1 RX1 Station C
Procedure
1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point for stations A. See Figure
11-15. Bind P2 and P3 ports as a group to send packets at the same time. Make P1
receive the packets (from P2 or P3) forwarded by the DSLAM.
l Querying the Normal Channel Status of Station A, as shown in Figure 11-15.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
board is TBE1, and Protection Board is TBE2;Working board Status is Master,
and Protection Board Status is Slave.
6. Choose WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. Then, the related
cross-connections are displayed. In this case, the working and protection L4G boards
in the SW SNCP protection group have cross-connections only with the working TBE1
in the DBPS protection.
l Querying the Protection Switching Channel Status of Station A
1. Remove the fiber in the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A to perform
the switching, as shown in Figure 11-16.
2. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Distributed
board is TBE1 and Protection Board is TBE2. Working board Status is Slave,
and Protection Board Status is Master.
4. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree, click
WDM Cross-Connection Configuration.
Close. Then, the related cross-connections are displayed. In this case, the working and
protection L4G boards in the SW SNCP protection group have cross-connections only
with the working TBE2 in the DBPS protection.
6. Reconnect the fiber into the RX2 optical port of the TBE1 board at station A.
l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets received
at P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
11.2.16 Testing DLAG Protection (OTN) Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the DLAG protection switching that is triggered
by the line failure after the fiber is removed.
Prerequisites
A DLAG protection group must be configured at station A.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-17 and Figure 11-18 show DLAG protection in the normal and switching states.
Figure 11-17 DLAG protection (normal)

SMB P1 P2
TX RX TX RX
RX1 TX1
Port1/1
DSLAM
Port2/1 Port2/2
TX RX TX RX
RX1 TX1 RX1 TX1
Master Slave
TBE 1 TBE 2
L4G
OUT IN Station A
Figure 11-18 DLAG protection (switching)

SMB P1 P2
TX RX TX RX
RX1 TX2
Port1/1
DSLAM
Port2/1 Port2/2
TX RX TX RX
RX1 TX1 RX1 TX1
Slave Master
TBE 1 TBE 2
L4G
OUT IN Station A

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
l Connecting Test Instruments.
1. Connect the SmartBits (SMB). See Figure 11-17. Ensure that P2 sends data packets
and P1 receives the data packets.
l Query the normal channel status of station A, as shown in Figure 11-17
3. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link Aggregation
Management from the Function Tree.
Close. If the TBE1 is in slot IU11 and the TBE2 is in slot IU12, Main Board is 111–
11TBE, and Slave Board is 112–11TBE.
l Query the protection switching channel status of station A.
1. Remove the fiber in the RX1/TX1 optical port on the TBE1 board at station A to
perform the switching, as shown in Figure 11-18.
2. In the NE Explorer window, select the NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Distributed Link Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.
Close. In this case, Main Board is 112–11TBE, and Slave Board is 111–11TBE.
4. Reconnect the fiber into the RX1/TX1 optical port of TBE1 board at station A.
l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 - Packets received at
P1) / Packet sending speed.
----End
11.2.17 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection Switching

This section uses a ring network formed by four stations, two adjacent stations which bear
services, as an example to describe the test procedure for the ODUk SPRing protection switching.
The ODUk SPRing protection switching mainly involves the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN
6800.
Prerequisites
The ODUk SPRing protection must be configured.


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the ODUk SPRing protection switching is shown in Figure 11-19.
Figure 11-19 Testing the ODUk SPRing protection switching
Signal
analyzer
Tx Rx ODU1-2 ODU1-2
Tributary Line OADM FIU FIU OADM Line Tributary
(West) (East)
ODU1-1 ODU1-1
Line Line
OADM OADM
ODU1-2 (East) ODU1-1 ODU1-1 (West) ODU1-2
FIU A D FIU
FIU FIU
B C
ODU1-2 OADM ODU1-1 ODU1-1 OADM ODU1-2

(West) (East)
Line Line
ODU1-1 ODU1-1
Line OADM FIU FIU OADM Line

Tributary (East) (West) Tributary
Rx Tx ODU1-2 ODU1-2
Procedure
RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU with a
fixed optical attenuator in between.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Right-click the desired NE icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE
Explorer window.
3. Select the NE and choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree.
Close. All ODUk SPRing protection groups are listed in the protection group list in
the right-hand pane. The switching status of ODUk SPRing protection should be
Idle.
5. Check the channel status of the ODUk SPRing protection. Channel Status of the east
working board is Normal, Channel Status of the east protection board is
Normal.Channel Status of the west working board is Normal, and Channel
Status of the west protection board is Normal.
1. The ODUk SPRing protection switching test can be performed using the following
two methods.
– Method 1: Fiber removing. At station A, remove the fiber of the main optical
channel from the D1 port of the east OADM board to the IN port of the working
line board, as shown in Figure 11-19.
– Method 2: Forced switching. In the ODUk SPRing protection window for station
A, right-click the desired East Working Unit on the U2000, and choose Forced
Switching-Ring to perform the switching. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.
2. Check the channel status of the ODUk SPRing protection of station A.
– Choose Configuration > ODUk SPRing from the Function Tree. Click Query.
– In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of East Working Unit is SF,
Channel Status of East Protection Unit is Normal, and Switching Status is
East Switching.
– In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of East Working Unit is
Normal, Channel Status of East Protection Unit is also Normal, and Switching
Status is East Switching.
Alarms. The ODUKSP_PS alarm must be reported.
NOTE
For details about the board that reports the ODUKSP_PS alarm, see the Alarms and Performance
Events Reference.
error is generated.
– In the ODUk SPRing protection window for station A, right-click the desired
protection group in the East Protection Unit, and choose Clear. Click OK in the
dialog displayed box.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2.18 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for OWSP protection. In this section, two adjacent
stations with services on a ring that consists of four stations are used as an example for
illustration.
Prerequisites
OWSP protection must be configured

Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the optical wavelength shared protection switching is shown in Figure
11-20.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-20 Testing the optical wavelength shared protection switching

Signal analyzer
Tx Rx Tx Rx
OTU1 OTU2 OTU1 OTU2
λ2 λ2
λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2 λ1 λ1 λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2
2 x DCP OADM FIU FIU OADM 2 x DCP
(West) (East)
λ1 λ1
λ2 λ2
OADM OADM
λ2/λ1 (East) λ1/λ2 λ2/λ1 (West) λ1/λ2
FIU A D FIU
FIU FIU
B C
OADM λ1/λ2 λ2/λ1 OADM λ1/λ2

(West) (East)
λ2 λ2
λ2/λ1 λ1 λ1
OADM FIU FIU OADM
2 x DCP (East) 2 x DCP
(West)
λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2 λ1 λ1
λ2 λ2
λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2
OTU2 OTU1 OTU2 OTU1
Rx Tx Rx Tx
: Working signal : Protection signal
Procedure
RX input optical port and TX output optical port on the client side of the OTU1 with
a fixed optical attenuator in between.
client side of the OTU2 with a fixed optical attenuator in between to achieve the

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

3. Select the NE, and choose Configuration > Optical Wavelength Shared
Protection from the Function Tree.
pane. The switching status of the OWSP protection should be Idle.
5. Check the channel status of the OWSP protection. East Working Channel is 4-
DCP-1(RI11), Channel Status is Normal. East Protection Channel is 2-DCP-2
(RI12), Channel Status is Normal. West Working Channel is 2-DCP-1(RI11),
Channel Status is Normal. West Protection Channel is 4-DCP-2(RI12), Channel
Status is Normal.
NOTE
"4" in 4-DCP-2(RI12) is the slot number.

1. The OWSP protection switching test can be performed using the following two
methods:
– Remove the fiber of the main optical channel from the D1 port of the east OADM
to the RI11 port of the DCP, as shown in Figure 11-20.
– Right-click the East Working Channel on the U2000, and choose Forced
Switching-Ring to perform the switching. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.
2. Check the channel status of the OWSP protection of station A, which should be
consistent with the actual situation.
– Choose Configuration > Optical Wavelength Shared Protection from the
Function Tree. Click Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close.
– After the fiber of the main optical channel is removed, the status of East Working
Channel is displayed as 4-DCP-1(RI11). The value of Channel Status is SF. The
status of East Protection Channel is displayed as 2-DCP-2(RI12). The value of
Channel Status is Normal, and the value of Switching Status is East
Switching.
– After the Forced Switching-Ring is selected, the status of East Working
Channel is displayed as 4-DCP-1(RI11). The value of Channel Status is
Normal. The status of East Protection Channel is displayed as 2-DCP-2
(RI12). The value of Channel Status is Normal, and the value of Switching
Status is East Switching.
3. Query the alarms on the U2000. The OWSP_PS alarm must be reported by DCP.
error is generated.
– Right-click East Working Channel, and choose Clear. Click OK in the displayed
dialog box.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.2.19 Testing Linear MS Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)

The linear MSP is configured to the network to protect services that are carried by the linear MS
working paths. This section describes how to test 1+1 or 1:1 linear MS protection switching.
Prerequisites
l You must be an NMS user with "NE and NMS operator" authority or higher.
l The linear MSP must have been created and configured on the U2000. See Configuration
Example: Configuring the 1+1 Linear MSP Services and Configuration Example:
Configuring the 1:N Linear MSP Services in the Feature Description.
l The physical and logical fiber connections between and inside all relevant stations must be

U2000, SDH analyzer
Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-21 shows the diagram for testing the 1+1 or 1:1 linear MS protection switching.
Figure 11-21 Testing the 1+1 or 1:1 linear MS protection switching

VC4:VC4-1 1 1 x STM-1 1
VC4:VC4-1
Optical
19 1 x STM-1 19 attenuator
SDH analyzer
NE2: NE1:
Line board Line board Line board Line board Line board Line board
20-SLO16 1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64 20-SLO16 1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64
Traffic flow of the STM-16 line

working path board
Traffic flow of the STM-64 line
protection path board
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to an NE2 service port as in the previous connection diagram.
Loopback the service port of NE1 at the ODF side. The meter reads that services are normal.
Step 2 Log in to the U2000. Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer.
Step 3 Select the optical interface board in slot 1, and choose Configuration > SDH Interface from
the Function Tree. Check the By Function radio button, and select Laser Switch from the drop-
down list.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Select the port whose laser is to be shut down. Set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. A dialog
box is displayed. Click OK.
Step 5 Observe the SDH analyzer. No alarms related to services arise. It indicates that services are
normal after switching.
Step 6 Query the NE alarms. The ESC board should report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI
alarms.
l If the switching scheme is set to Dual-Ended Switching, both NE1 and NE2 report these
two alarms.
l If the switching scheme is set to Single-Ended Switching, only NE2 reports these two
alarms.
NOTE
Dual-Ended Switching and Single-Ended Switching are only available for 1+1 linear MSP. For 1:1 linear
MSP, no optional switching scheme is available and the protections switching scheme is Dual-End
Switching.
Step 7 Follow the previous steps 2 through 4 to switch on the laser.
Step 8 Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer.
l Revertive Mode: Revertive.
– Query NE alarms. The MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms ends.
l Revertive Mode: Non-Revertive.
– The meter reads that services are normal and the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI
alarms persists.
– Log in to the U2000. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH
Protection Subnet.
– Select the linear MS protection subnet. Select Start/Stop Protocol > Stop the Protocol
Networkwide. Then choose Start/Stop Protocol > Start the Protocol Networkwide.
– Click Query. Observe the state of the working channel. The state must be Idle (Near
End).
NOTE
Revertive and Non-Revertive are available only for 1+1 linear MSP. For 1:1 linear MSP, no optional
restore modes is available and the restore mode is Revertive.
Step 9 Remove the loopback set up in step 1.
----End
11.2.20 Testing Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection

Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)
If the network is configured as a bidirectional MSP ring, services carried by the MSs working
paths are protected. This section describes how to test the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection
switching.
Prerequisites
l The authority of "NE and NMS operator" or higher is required.
l

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection or four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection must
have been created and configured on the U2000. See Configuration Example: Configuring
the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring in the Feature Description.

U2000, SDH analyzer
Set-up Diagram
When the switching is complete, the service is restored after the restoration time. The restoration
time consists of the transmission time for the service to pass through the optical fiber and through
the equipment.
Figure 11-22 shows the diagram for testing the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection
switching. If the MSP is formed through the SLQ64 board and the STM-1 service running from
NE1 to NE3 is configured, the service flows in the NE1-NE2-NE3 direction.
Figure 11-22 Testing the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection switching
Optical
attenuator
Line board
1×STM-1 NE1: 20-SLO16
Line board Line board
VC4:VC4-1 1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64
1 19
NE2: Line board
NE1
19-SLQ64
Line board
1-SLQ64 19
VC4:VC4-1 线路
Service NE2 MSP ring NE4 板
pass-through
1
19 NE3 1
NE3: Line boardLine board

19-SLQ64 1-SLQ64
STM-16 line board
Line board
STM-64 line board 20-SLO16
SDH analyzer
Traffic flow

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Select the set-up diagram and test method based on the actual networking conditions.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to the service port of NE3 as in the previous set-up diagram. At the
ODF side, loopback the service port of NE1. The meter reads that services are normal.
Step 2 Run the U2000. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection
Subnet from the Main Menu to check the active/standby status of the resources before the
switching.
Step 3 Run the U2000. Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer.
Step 4 Select the optical interface board in slot 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the
Function Tree. Click the By Function radio button, and select Laser Switch from the drop-
down list.
Step 6 Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarms related to services are generated, it indicates that services
are normal after switching.
Step 7 Query the NE alarms. If NE1 and NE2 report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms,
it indicates that MSP switching occurs between NE1 and NE2.
Step 8 Open the laser on the board in slot 1.
Step 9 Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is
generated, it indicates that services are normal after switching.
Step 10 Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 and
NE2, it indicates that the MSP switching between NE1 and NE2 is complete.
Step 11 Remove the loopback set up in step 1.
Step 12 Repeat the preceding steps to perform the test in the remaining spans one by one.
----End
11.2.21 Testing Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection

Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)
If the network is configured as a bidirectional MSP ring, services carried by the MSs working
paths are protected. This section describes how to test the four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection
switching.
Prerequisites
l The authority of "NE and NM operator" or higher is required.
l The two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection or four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection must
have been created and configured on the U2000. See Configuration Example: Configuring
the Four-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring of the Feature Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

U2000, SDH analyzer
Set-up Diagram
When the switching is complete, the service is restored after the restoration time. The restoration
time consists of the transmission time for the service to pass through the optical fiber and through
the equipment.
Figure 11-23 shows the diagram for testing the four-fiber bidirectional MSP protection
switching. If the MSP is formed through the SLQ64 board and the STM-1 service running from
NE1 to NE3 is configured, the service flows in the NE1-NE2-NE3 direction.
Figure 11-23 Testing the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection switching
Optical Line board

attenuator 20-SLO16
NE1: Line board Line board
VC4:VC4-1 1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64
2-SLQ64 18-SLQ64
NE2: Line board
19-SLQ64 18-SLQ64
NE1
1-SLQ64 2-SLQ64
VC4:VC4-1
线路
Service NE2 MSP ring NE4 板
pass-through
Traffic flow of the
forward working path
Traffic flow of the NE3
backward working
path
Traffic flow of the
forward protection path
Traffic flow of the Line board Line board
backward protection path 18-SLQ64 2-SLQ64
VC4:VC4-1 Line board Line board
STM-16 line board
19-SLQ64 1-SLQ64
STM-64 line board SDH analyzer
NE3: Line board
20-SLO16
NOTE
Select the test connection diagram and test method according to the actual networking conditions.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to the service port of NE3 as in the set-up diagram. At the ODF side,
loopback the service port of NE1. The meter reads that services are normal.
switching.
Step 3 Test the span switching on a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

NOTE
The working ring and protection ring in the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring are defined according to the
actual service configured. In this example, the optical port of the board in slot 1 on NE1 works as the service
optical port. Therefore, the outer ring in the test connection diagram is the working ring and the inner ring
is the protection ring.
1. Run the U2000. Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer.
2. Select the optical interface board in slot 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from
the Function Tree. Click the By Function radio button and select Laser Switch from the
drop-down list.
3. Select the port whose laser is to be shut down. Set Laser Switch to Off. Click Apply. A
dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
4. Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarms related to services is generated, it indicates that
services are restored after switching.
5. Query the NE alarms. If the NE1 and NE2 reports the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI
alarms, it indicates that MSP switching occurs between NE1 and NE2.
6. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > Maintain SDH Protection Subnet.
7. Select the subnet to be viewed. Check the switching state of the four-fiber MSP ring. If one
direction of NE1 and NE2 is Signal Fail-Span(local end), it indicates that section switching
occurs.
8. Open the laser on the board in slot 1.
9. Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is
generated, it indicates that services are restored after switching.
10. Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1
and NE2, it indicates that the MSP switching between NE1 and NE2 is complete.
Step 4 Test the ring switching on a four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring.

1. Follow step 3 to step 5 in the "Testing the Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Ring Protection
Switching" to shut down the laser of the interface board in slot 1 and slot 2 of NE1.
2. Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that
services are restored after switching.
3. Query the NE alarms. The NE1 and NE2 should report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and
APS_INDI alarms.
4. Choose Service > SDH Protection Subnet > SDH Maintain Protection Subnet from the
Main Menu.
5. Select the four-fiber MSP ring protection subnet and query the switching state. If one
direction of NE1 and NE2 is Signal Fail-Ring(local end), it indicates that MSP ring
switching occurs.
6. Open the laser on the interface board in slot 1 and slot 2 of NE1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
7. Wait three minutes and then observe the SDH analyzer. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and
APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 and NE2, it indicates that the MSP switching
between NE1 and NE2 is complete.
8. Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms reported from NE1
and NE2 ends, it indicates that the MSP switching for NE1 and NE2 concludes.
9. Remove the loopback set up in step 1.
Step 5 Repeat the preceding steps to perform the test in the remaining spans one by one.
----End
11.2.22 Testing SNCP Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)

This section uses a network consisting of two OADM stations as an example to describe the test
procedure for the SNCP protection switching.
Prerequisites
SNCP must be created.

U2000, SDH analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, fixed optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 11-24.
Figure 11-24 Testing the SNCP protection switching

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
l Assume that the board in slot 12 is a working board, and the board in slot 14 is a protection
board. According to Figure 6-22, connect the SDH analyzer to a service port on NE C and
configure a loopback on NE A on the DDF side. The SDH analyzer should display that the
services are normal.
l Querying the channel status of NE C.
Configure relevant parameters for the SDH board. For more information, see Creating
SNCP in the Feature Description.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The NE
running status window is displayed.
2. Right-click the target NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
3. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Control.
Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the window.
5. Check the channel status of the SNCP protection. For Working Service, the value of
Current Status is Normal. For Protection Service, the value of Current Status is
also Normal.
l Testing the protection switching on the equipment.
1. For NE A, in the NE Explorer, select the SDH board in slot 12. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the By Function
option button, and select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.
2. Select the port whose the laser is to be shut down, and set Laser Switch to Off. Click
Apply. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click OK.
3. Query the channel status of the SNCP protection group for NE C after a protection
NOTE
The SNCP protection switching occurs only on the NE that fails to receive services. In this example,
although the laser of NE A is shut down in Step 2, the SNCP protection switching occurs on NE C
that fails to receive the service from the working channel. That is why you need to perform the
preceding step.
– In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control. Click
Query. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
– For Working Service, the value of Current Status is SF. For Protection
Service, the value of Current Status is Normal. The value of Switching Status
is SF Switching.
4. Test the services by using an SDH analyzer. The test result indicates that services are
normal after a switching is performed.
5. See Step 1 and Step 2 for information on how to turn on the laser. Then wait for ten
minutes.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
– If the value of Revertive Mode for the SNCP protection is set to Revertive,
observe the data on the SDH analyzer. In this case, the SDH analyzer indicates that
a transient service interruption has occurred, and the service has later recovered.
– If the value of Revertive Mode for the SNCP protection group is set to Non-
Revertive, do as follows:
– Log in to the U2000, right-click the NE icon, and choose NE Explorer.
– In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control. In the
working service list, select all the services, and choose Function > Forced
Switching to Working. A dialog box is displayed. Click OK, and click
Close in the displayed dialog box.
– Choose Function > Clear. Click Close in the displayed dialog box.
– Choose Function > Query Switching Status. A dialog box is displayed. Click
Close. The value of Current Status should be Normal.
6. Release the loopback on NE A.
----End
11.2.23 Testing SNCTP Protection Switching (OptiX OSN 8800)

This section uses a network consisting of two OADM stations as an example to describe the test
procedure for the SNCTP protection switching.
Prerequisites
SNCTP must be created.
The fiber connections between station A and station B must be established.

U2000, SDH analyzer, optical fiber, fiber adapter, fixed optical attenuator
Set-up Diagram
The diagram for testing the SNCTP protection switching is shown in Figure 11-25.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-25 Testing the SNCTP protection switching
Procedure
l Assume that the board in slot 12 is a working board, and the board in slot 14 is a protection
board. According to Figure 6-23, connect the SDH analyzer to a service port on NE C and
configure a loopback on NE A on the DDF side. The SDH analyzer should display that the
services are normal.
l Querying the channel status of NE C.
Configure relevant parameters for the SDH board. For more information, see Creating
SNCTP in the Feature Description.
1. Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The Running
Status of the ONE is displayed.
2. Right-click the target NE, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer
window.
3. Select the NE from the function tree, and choose Configuration > SNCTP.
4. Click Query Protection Group. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation
is successful. Click Close. All protection groups are listed in the protection group list
on the right of the window.
5. Check the channel status of the SNCTP protection. The value of Current Status
should be Normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l Test protection switching on the equipment.

1. In the NE Explorer of NE A, select the SDH board in slot 12, and then choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the By Function
option button and select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.
2. Select the port whose laser is to be shut down, and set Laser Switch to Off. Click
Apply. Click OK in the dialog box displayed.
3. Query the channel status of the SNCTP protection group for NE C after a protection
NOTE
The SNCTP protection switching occurs only on the NE that fails to receive services. In this example,
although the laser of NE A is shut down in Step 2, the SNCTP protection switching occurs on NE
C that fails to receive the service from the working channel. That is why you need to perform the
preceding step.
– In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCTP. Click Query Protection
Group. A prompt is displayed indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
– Query the channel status of the SNCTP protection group. The value of Current
Status should be Normal, and the Switching Status should be SF.
4. Test the services by using an SDH analyzer. The test result indicates that services are
normal after a protection switching is performed,
5. See Step 1 and Step 2 for information on how to turn on the laser. Then wait ten
minutes.
– If the value of Revertive Mode of the SNCTP protection is set to Revertive,
observe the data on the SDH analyzer. In this case, the SDH analyzer indicates that
a transient service interruption has occurred, and the service has later recovered.
– If the value of Revertive Mode of the SNCTP protection group is set to Non-
Revertive, do as follows:
– Log in to the U2000. Right-click the NE icon, and choose NE Explorer.
– In the function tree, choose Configuration > SNCTP. Then in Slot Mapping
Settings, right-click the protection channel on which a switching occurred.
Then select Forced Switching to Working. A dialog box is displayed for
confirmation. Click OK, and click Close in the displayed dialog box.
– Right-click the channel, and then choose Clear. Click Close in the displayed
dialog box.
– Right-click the channel, and then choose Query. A dialog box is displayed for
confirmation. Click Close. The value of Current Status should be Normal.
6. Release the loopback on NE A.
----End
11.2.24 Testing Transoceanic MSP Ring Protection Switching

(OptiX OSN 8800)
A network is configured with the transoceanic MSP ring protection, which protects the services
in the working path. This section describes how to test the transoceanic MSP ring protection
switching.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
l The authority of "NE and NMS operator" or higher is required
l The transoceanic MSP ring protection must have been created and configured on the
U2000. See Configuration Example: Configuring the Transoceanic MSP Ring in the
Feature Description.
l The MSP protocols used on the entire ring must be all transoceanic protocols. If another
protocol is used on the ring, the protection switching cannot function normally.

U2000, SDH analyzer
Set-up Diagram
Currently, the transoceanic MSP does not support lower order services.
When the transoceanic MSP is in the protection state, the extra services in the protection channel
that is not preempted by the working services can be restored one minute after the protection
switching.
Figure 11-26 shows the diagram for testing the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching. If
the STM-1 service running from NE1 to NE3 is configured, the service flows in the NE1-NE2-
NE3 direction.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-26 Testing the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching
Optical
attenuator
Line board
1×STM-1 NE1: 20-SLO16
1-SLQ64 19-SLQ64
VC4:VC4-1
1 19
NE2: Line board
NE1
19-SLQ64
Line board
1-SLQ64 19
VC4:VC4-1 线路
Service Transoceanic MSP NE4
NE2 板
pass-through ring
19 NE3 1
Line board
NE3: Line board Line board

19-SLQ64 1-SLQ64
STM-16 line board
Line board
STM-64 line board 20-SLO16
Traffic flow SDH analyzer
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the SDH analyzer to the service port of NE3 as in the previous set-up diagram. At the
ODF side, loopback the service port of NE1. The meter reads that services are normal.
switching.
Step 3 Right-click the NE1 icon and choose NE Explorer.
Step 4 Select the optical interface board in slot 1. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the
Function Tree. Click the By Function option button, and select Laser Switch from the drop-
down list.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 6 Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that services
Step 7 Query the NE alarms. If the NE1 and NE3 report the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms,
it indicates that the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching occurs between NE1 and NE3.
Step 8 Wait one minute. Then choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function
Tree.
Step 9 Click Query to query the services on the NE. Check whether the extra services on the protection
channel that is not preempted by the working services are restored.
Step 10 Follow steps 2 through 4 to switch on the laser.
Step 11 Observe the SDH analyzer. If no alarm related to services is generated, it indicates that services
Step 12 Query NE alarms. If the MS_APS_INDI_EX and APS_INDI alarms are reported on NE1 and
NE3, it indicates that the transoceanic MSP ring protection switching for NE1 and NE3 is
complete.
Step 13 Release the loopback performed in step 1.
Step 14 Repeat the preceding steps to perform the test in the remaining sections one by one.
----End
11.2.25 Testing ERPS Protection Switching

This section describes the testing procedure for the ERPS protection switching.
Prerequisites
The fiber connections between NE A, NE B, NE C, and NE D must be established.
ERPS ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, and D.

Set-up Diagram
As shown in Figure 11-27, the ERPS ring protection is configured between NEs A, B, C, and
D.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-27 Application of ERPS protection

SMB
LEM24
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
West Port East port
East port
West Port
LEM24 VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2 LEM24
A
VCTRUNK2 B D VCTRUNK1
C
West Port East port
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
East port West Port
: ERPS working signal flow

LEM24 : ERPS protection signal flow
Procedure
l Connecting test instruments.
1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of NE A, see Figure
11-27. In addition, configure a client-side loopback at NE D.
l Querying the ERPS protection group status when NE A works normally.
1. Log in to the U2000 and double-click NE A in the Main Topology. The Running
2. Right-click NE A, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
3. Select the desired LEM24 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet
State Machine is displayed as Idle.
l Querying the ERPS protection group status on NE A after protection switching occurs.
1. At NE A, disconnect the IN optical port and OUT optical port on the LEM24 in the
direction to NE D to trigger protection switching.
2. On the NMS select the LEM24 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
State Machine is displayed as Protection.
4. At NE A, restore the fiber connection to the WDM-side optical port on the LEM24.
5. Click Query 5 to 12 minutes later. East Port is VCTRUNK1, West Port is
VCTRUNK2, and Status of State Machine is displayed as Idle.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
Do not remove fibers on the protection path before services are restored to the original working path.
Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
----End
11.2.26 Testing the DLAG(OCS)

By simulating the fault on the active board and checking the service switching status and alarms
on the ring network, you can verify whether the DLAG is successfully configured.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.
The DLAG must be configured.

U2000
Set-up Diagram
The N1EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the DLAG. Figure
11-28 shows the set-up diagram.
Figure 11-28 Testing the DLAG
Working board:N1EGSH
Working port: Port 1-4
Working board:N1EGSH
Standby board: N1EGSH
Working port: Port 1-4
Standby port: Port 1-4
Standby board: N1EGSH
NE2
Standby port: Port 1-4
U2000 NE1 DLAG NE3
NE4
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer of NE1, select NE1. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link
Aggregation Management from the Function Tree.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Click Query to check the active board, main port, standby board, main port, working board, and
working port.
NOTE
Normally, the active board is the working board and the main port is the working port.
Step 3 Remove the active N1EGSH board on the NE1.
Step 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to query the current service. The current service is not interrupted. The
working board is changed to the standby board, and the working port is changed to the standby
port, which indicates that the DLAG is configured successfully.
----End
11.3 Testing Data Characteristics

This section describes how to test the data characteristics.
11.3.1 Testing the LCAS

By dynamically adding and deleting members, masking failed members, and restoring failed
members, you can determine whether the LCAS is successfully configured.
Prerequisites
The LCAS must be configured.
During adjustment of the services with the LCAS function enabled, the corresponding alarm is
reported on the U2000. This alarm can be used to verify whether the operation is successful.
l During adjustment of the services, the LCAS protocol checks whether the configured
members are the same as the actual negotiated members. When the actual bound members
at the source or sink end are less than the configured members, the opposite end reports an
alarm indicating the partial loss of bandwidth, such as LCAS_PLCR or LCAS_PLCT.
l When all members are deleted, the local end reports the LCAS_TLCR and LCAS_TLCT
alarms. Normally, when the LCAS negotiation is unavailable, the performance events are
deleted forcibly due to the timeout.
l If the LCAS state at one end is switched from Enabled to Disabled, the LCAS_FOPR alarm
indicating the failure of the LCAS protocol (the LCAS protocol fails in the receive
direction) is reported at the other end.
Procedure
Step 1 Verifying the LCAS by dynamically deleting members at one end:
1. In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE, and choose NE
Explorer from the shortcut menu.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
2. Select the corresponding board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
3. Select Internal Port, and the internal port configuration window is displayed.
4. In the internal port page, select the Bound Path tab. A list of the bound paths is displayed.
5. Click Configuration.
6. In the Bound Path Configuration dialog box, select Display in Combination.
7. Select any bound path to be deleted from Selected Bound Paths and click .
8. Right-click the Ethernet board on the NE at the opposite end, and choose Browse Current
Alarms from the shortcut menu.
9. In the Browse Current Alarms dialog box, the LCAS-related minor alarms LCAS_PLCR
and LCAS_PLCT reported by the system are displayed.
NOTE
If all members of the bound paths are deleted, the major alarm LCAS_TLCR is reported at the local end,
which indicates the complete loss of bandwidth in the receive direction.
Step 2 Verifying the LCAS by dynamically adding members at one end:

1. In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE and choose NE
2. Select the corresponding board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
3. Select Internal Port. The internal port configuration window is displayed.
4. In the internal port page, select the Bound Path tab. A list of the bound paths is displayed.
5. Click Configuration, and add bound paths as required.
6. Click OK.
7. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. Then the new members are added to the local end.
8. In the Board Tree in the left pane, select the Ethernet board configured with the LCAS
function. Right-click this board, and select Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut
menu.
NOTE
Because new members are dynamically added to only one end, the total traffic does not change. In the
Bound Path tab, query the actual used paths and check whether they are the same as those before the new
members are added. The Ethernet board at the local end reports the LCAS_PLCR alarm, but no packets
are lost. If the equivalent number of new members is added to the other end, after the WTR time for the
LCAS, the previous LCAS_PLCR alarm clears.
Step 3 Verifying the LCAS by masking the failed members:

1. In the Main Topology, select the NE at one end. Right-click this NE and select NE
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > SDH Service configuration. The list of
members configured with SDH services is displayed in the cross-connection window pane.
3. Select one or more members to be masked.
4. Click the Deactivate button in the right pane. The Confirm dialog box is displayed to query
whether to deactivate all the selected services.
5. Click OK. Masking the selected members is complete.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
6. In the Board Tree in the left pane, select the Ethernet board configured with the LCAS
function.
7. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management >
Ethernet Interface.
8. Select Internal Port, and the internal port configuration window is displayed.
9. In the Internal Port page, select the Bound Path tab.
10. Click the Query button.
11. Query the The Used Channel column. The paths that correspond to the deactivated
members are masked and not displayed.
12. In the board list, select the board configured with the LCAS function. Right-click this board,
and choose Browse Current Alarms from the shortcut menu.
14. Query the current alarms of the Ethernet board configured with the LCAS function on the
opposite NE, and the same alarms are displayed.
NOTE
The LCAS_PLCT and LCAS_PLCR alarms indicate that the actual number of paths in the transmit
(receive) VCTRUNK with the LCAS enabled is smaller than the configured number of paths. After the
cross-connections are deactivated, paths that correspond to the originally used paths become invisible. This
indicates that the failed members are successfully masked.
Step 4 Verifying the LCAS by restoring the failed members:

1. Based on Step 3, select the previously deactivated members. Click the Deactivate button
in the lower area of the window. The failed cross-connections are restored.
2. The Confirm dialog box displays to query whether to activate the selected services. Click
OK to restore the failed members.
3. Perform substeps Step 3.7 to Step 3.10 in step 3. Then, in the The Used Channel column,
the paths that correspond to the masked members are displayed.
NOTE
After the WTR time (300s by default) of the LCAS, the previously reported LCAS_PLCR and
LCAS_PLCT alarms clear. This indicates that the failed members are successfully restored.
CAUTION
During the process of dynamically deleting members or masking failed members, packet loss
occurs. The packet loss time equals the number of lost packets divided by the packet transmitting
rate. The WTR time can be lengthy and is 300s by default.
If the preceding verification operations are successfully complete and the query results are the
same as those mentioned, it indicates that the LCAS function is successfully configured.
----End
11.3.2 Testing the LAG

By simulating the fault at the main port and checking the service switching status and alarms on
the ring network, you can verify whether the LAG is successfully configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
The LAG must be configured.

U2000
Set-up Diagram
The EGSH board is used as an example to show the process of verifying the LAG. Figure
Figure 11-29 Testing the LAG
Data board:N1EGSH
Working port: Port1
NE2 standby port: Port2
U2000 NE1 LAG NE3
Data board:N1EGSH
NE4
Working port: Port1
standby port: Port2
Procedure
Step 1 The process for verifying the LAG in non-load-sharing mode is as follows.
1. In NE Explorer for NE1, select the EGSH board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.
2. Click Query. Ensure that the state of the main port Port 1 is working, and the state of the
standby port Port 2 is non-working.
3. Choose Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree, and select External Port in the right
pane.
4. In the Basic Attributes tab, change the state of Port 1 from Enabled to Disabled.
5. Right-click the EGSH board in the board list and choose Browse Alarms from the shortcut
menu. Query whether the LAG_PORT_FAIL alarm is reported among the current alarms.
6. Repeat steps Step 1.1 to Step 1.2, and query the states of the ports. The state of Port 1 is
non-working, and the state of Port 2 is working.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
The preceding operations indicate that the system successfully switches the service transmitted
through the main port to the standby port within 4s when the main port is unavailable.
Step 2 The process for verifying the LAG in load-sharing mode is as follows.
NOTE
In load-sharing mode, more than one standby port is available. Generally, traffic exists in the main and
standby links. When the main port is unavailable, traffic that originally exists in the main link is loaded by
the standby links. That is, all the standby links share the load of the main link.
1. In the NE Explorer for NE1, select the EGSH board. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.
2. Click Query. Ensure that the state of the main port is working, and the states for the standby
ports are working.
3. Choose Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree, and select External Port in the right
pane.
4. In the Basic Attributes tab, change the state of the main port from Enabled to Disabled.
5. Right-click the EGSH board in the board list and choose Browse Alarms from the shortcut
menu. Query whether the LAG_PORT_FAIL alarm is reported among the current alarms.
6. Repeat steps Step 2.1 to Step 2.2, and query the states of the ports. The state of the main
port is non-working, and the states of the standby ports are working.
----End
11.3.3 Testing the LPT

By simulating the link fault at the access point and querying the alarms reported on the NE, you
can verify whether the LPT is configured successfully.
Prerequisites
l The Ethernet service must be configured on the specified port.
l The LPT function must be enabled for the transmission equipment at the local and opposite
ends.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding Ethernet board. Select Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > LPT Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query in the lower right corner, and ensure that the LPT state of the specified port is
enabled.
Step 3 Select Ethernet Interface from Ethernet Interface Management at left hand pane, and select
External Port in the right pane.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Click the Basic Attributes tab, and select Disabled from the Enabled/Disabled drop-down list.
This causes the corresponding laser on the local board to shut down so that the access link
becomes unavailable.
Step 5 In the Main Topology, right-click the opposite NE and choose Browse Current Alarms from
the shortcut menu to query the alarms on the opposite NE. In the query results, the ETH_LOS
and LPT_RFI alarms are displayed.
Step 6 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to open the laser that was previously shut down, and query the alarms on
the opposite NE.
Step 7 The ETH_LOS and LPT_RFI alarms on the opposite NE are cleared, indicating that the LPT is
successfully configured.
----End
11.3.4 Testing the STP/RSTP

By checking the packet transmission when the STP/RSTP function is enabled and disabled, you
can verify whether the STP/RSTP is successfully configured.
Prerequisites
The Ethernet LAN services must be configured.
The STP/RSTP must be configured.

U2000, SMB meters
Set-up Diagram
The EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the STP/RSTP. Figure

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-30 Testing the STP/RSTP
Data board:N1EGSH
Data board:N1EGSH
NE2 Data board:N1EGSH
U2000 NE1 STP/RSTP NE3
NE4
SMB A
SMB B
Data board:N1EGSH
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer of NE1-NE4, select the EGSH board. Choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Protocol Enabled tab, and select the corresponding EGSH board in the board list.
Click Fast Config in the lower right corner.
Step 3 In the Fast Config window, double-click the Protocol Enabled drop-down list, select
Disabled, and click OK. This causes the STP/RSTP protocol that was previously enabled to be
disabled.
Step 4 Connect SMB A to NE1, and connect SMB B to NE3.
Step 5 Use the packet transmitting function of the SMB meter to create and transmit data packets to
the ring network.
Step 6 Then SMB B receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, and SMB A also receives the packets
transmitted by itself.
NOTE
On a ring network, if an NE receives the data packets transmitted by itself, it indicates that the packets are
cycled; or in other words, a broadcast storm occurs.
Step 7 Repeat steps 1 through 3. In the Fast Config window, enable the STP/RSTP protocol on the
EGSH boards of NE1-NE4.
Step 8 Use SMB A on NE1 again to transmit data packets to the ring network.
Step 9 Then, SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, but SMB A does not receive the
packets transmitted by itself.
NOTE
The data packets are not cycled on the ring network. That is, the broadcast storm is effectively avoided
after the STP/RSTP protocol is enabled, and the STP/RSTP is successfully configured.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.3.5 Testing the MSTP

By checking the packet transmission when the MSTP function is enabled and disabled, you can
verify whether the MSTP is successfully configured.
Prerequisites
The MSTP must be configured.

U2000, SMB meters
Set-up Diagram
The N1EGSH board is used as an example to show the process for verifying the MSTP, and
Figure 11-31 shows the setup diagram.
Figure 11-31 Testing the MSTP
Data board:N1EGSH
Data board:N1EGSH
NE2 Data board:N1EGSH
U2000 NE1 MSTP NE3
NE4
SMB A
SMB B
Data board:N1EGSH
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching
Management > Multiple Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Protocol Parameters tab, and set Enable Protocol to Disabled. Click Apply. This
causes the MSTP protocol that is previously enabled to be disabled.
Step 3 Connect SMB A to NE1, and connect SMB B to NE3.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 4 Use the packet transmitting function of the SMB meter to create and transmit data packets to
the ring network.
Step 5 The SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, and SMB A also receives the
NOTE
On a ring network, if an NE receives the data packets transmitted by itself, it indicates that the packets are
cycled; or in other words, a broadcast storm occurs.
Step 6 Repeat steps 1 through 3. Set Enable Protocol to Enabled for the MSTP protocol on the
N1EGSH boards of NE-NE4.
Step 7 Use SMB A on NE1 again to transmit data packets to the ring network.
Step 8 The SMB B then receives the packets transmitted by SMB A, but SMB A does not receive the
NOTE
The data packets are not cycled on the ring network. That is, the broadcast storm is effectively avoided
after the MSTP protocol is enabled, and the MSTP is successfully configured.
----End
11.4 Testing System Features

The system features includes IPA, ALC, APE, and EAPE.
11.4.1 Testing IPA

This section describes how to test the IPA function.
Prerequisites
Optical power commissioning must be complete.
The IPA must be configured.

U2000
The IPA can be rebooted by using three methods: automatic reboot, manual reboot, start test.
This section uses the start test as an example to describe the procedure for testing IPA.
IPA Verification Diagram

For the IPA verification diagram, see Figure 11-32.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-32 IPA verification diagram

Station A Station B
Optical Optical
amplifier unit 1 amplifier unit 2
fiber break
Optical Optical
amplifier unit 4 amplifier unit 3
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The Running Status
of the ONE is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click the NE A icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box.
Step 3 Select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function Tree.
Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, set the IPA Status to Enabled.
Step 5 Select NE B. See steps 2 through 4 to configure the IPA function.
Step 6 Remove the fiber of the output port on the OAU1.
Step 7 Log in NE A and NE B separately. In the function tree in the left-hand pane, choose
Configuration > IPA Management.
Step 8 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA protection pair. Right-click the Status column, and
select Query State. The state Power off should display.
Step 9 Insert the fiber of the output port of the OAU1.
Step 10 In IPA Protection, click Start Test. A message indicating a successful operation is displayed
in the prompt dialog box.
Step 11 Click Close.
Step 12 In IPA Protection, select Status. Right-click Query State. Status is displayed as IPA ended.
----End
Related Information
For details on the function, principle, and how to configure IPA protection groups, see the
11.4.2 Testing IPA (Raman System)

This section describes how to test the IPA function.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
Optical power commissioning must be complete.
The IPA must be configured.

U2000
The IPA can be rebooted by using three methods: automatic reboot, manual reboot, start test.
This section uses the start test as an example to describe the procedure for testing IPA.
IPA Verification Diagram

For the IPA verification diagram, see Figure 11-33, or Figure 11-34.
Figure 11-33 Diagram of applying IPA to a Raman system (Auxiliary Raman board CRPC03
+ROP+Raman Amplifier CRPC01/RAU1)
NE A NE B
Auxiliary
Raman Raman
ROP Amplifier
board
laser control board detection board
Raman Auxiliary
Amplifier ROP Raman
board
detection board laser control board
IPA pair NE
Figure 11-34 Diagram of applying IPA to a Raman system (RAU1 boards+14FIU boards+OSC
boards)
NE A NE B
laser control board Raman amplifier

auxiliary detection board RAU1
Raman OAU
auxiliary detection board
14 14
FIU OSC OSC FIU
FIU FIU
auxiliary
detection board
OAU Raman
RAU1 auxiliary detection board
Raman amplifier laser control board
IPA pair NE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
: Optical Amplifier Board
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the U2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology. The Running Status
of the ONE is displayed.
Step 2 Right-click the NE B icon, and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box.
Step 3 Select the NE and choose Configuration > IPA Management from the Function Tree.
Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, check whether IPA Status is Enabled; if it is
Disabled, change it to Enabled.
Step 5 Select NE A. See Step 2 through Step 4 to configure the IPA function.
Step 6 In the NE Explorer, select the #1 OA board in NE A. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interface from the Function Tree. Set Laser Status to Off for the site. (This simulates a fibre
fault, and will trigger IPA to shut down the link in both directions)
Step 7 Select NE A, then in the function tree in the left-hand pane, choose Configuration > IPA
Management.
Step 8 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA pair. Right-click the Status column and select Query
State. Ensure that Status is Power off. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Step 9 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and laser control board at NE A. Choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree. Verify that Laser Status for the
boards are Off.
Step 10 Repeat Step 7 to Step 9 for NE B.
Step 11 Select NE A, then in the function tree in the left-hand pane, choose Configuration > IPA
Management. in IPA Protection, click Start Test. The Warning dialog box is displayed. Click
Yes.
Step 12 A dialog box appears showing that the operation was successful. Click Close.
Step 13 Repeat Step 11 and Step 12 for NE B.
Step 14 In the NE Explorer on NE A, select the Raman board. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interfacefrom the Function Tree. Manually turn on the pump laser on the Raman board of NE
A.
Step 15 In the NE Explorer on NE B, select the Raman board. Choose Configuration > WDM
Interfacefrom the Function Tree. Manually turn on the pump laser on the Raman board of NE
B.
Step 16 In the NE Explorer of NE A, Click Query to review the Status. Ensure that Status is IPA
ended. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
Step 17 In the NE Explorer of NE B, Click Query to review the Status. Ensure that Status is IPA
ended. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 18 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and laser control board at NE A. Choose
boards are On.
Step 19 In the NE Explorer, select the Raman board and laser control board at NE B. Choose
boards are On.
----End
Related Information
For details on the function, principle, and how to configure IPA protection groups, see the
11.4.3 Testing ALC

This section describes how to test the ALC function.
Prerequisites
The ALC Link must be created. The parameters must be configured according to Parameters in
the Feature Description.

U2000, optical power meter
ALC Verification Diagram

For the ALC verification diagram, see Figure 11-35.
Figure 11-35 ALC verification diagram

Station A Station B StationC
DCM-D DCM-D
OAU1 OAU2 OAU3

From To
M40 D40
OAU OAU OAU

To
D40 V40
DCM-D DCM-D M40
OTM OLA OTM

(NE51) (NE53) (NE54)
: VOA

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to U2000. Choose Configuration > WDM ALC Management from the Main Topology.
Step 2 In WDM ALC Management, click the NG Complete Link tab. In the list of links, select a link
whose Status is Idle.
Step 3 On the U2000, query and record the line attenuation and node gain for stations A, B, and C, also
record the input and output optical power of OAU1, OAU2, and OAU3.
Step 4 On the ALC link, adjust the variable optical attenuator (VOA) between stations A and B to
increase the attenuation between the two stations by 3 dB.
Step 5 Query the input and output optical power of OAU2 on the U2000. Compare the test value with
the input optical power value obtained before adjusting the VOA to ensure that the test value is
3 dB lower. At the same time, check whether the difference between the line attenuation value
and node gain value of station B is not less than 3 dB. Also check whether an event that indicates
an ALC optical power anomaly exists.
NOTE
For the method for querying optical power, see the Supporting Tasks.
Step 6 When the icon of the downstream NE turns red, in the Link ID list, select the link. Click Start
Automatic Link Adjustment to start the ALC adjustment. Also check whether the ALC
adjustment event occurs.
NOTE
For the NG link that is configured with the VOA board, when sign occurs at the downstream node, the
system gives precedence to adjusting the VOA board after the ALC adjustment function is enabled. In addition,
check whether the ALC adjustment event and the VOA adjustment event exist.
Step 7 After the ALC adjustment is complete, the icon for the NE restores to the original color, and an
event that indicates the end of the ALC adjustment occurs.
NOTE
For the NG link that is configured with the VOA board, after the ALC adjustment is complete, the sign
disappears, and an event that indicates the end of the ALC adjustment occurs.
Step 8 Query the input and output optical power for OAU2/OAU3 on the U2000. Compare the test
value with the value obtained before the adjustment is performed to check whether they are the
same. At the same time, check whether the line attenuation value and the node gain value for
station B are consistent. If that is the case, it indicates that the ALC has been enabled.
NOTE
If OAU1 is the adjustment board, use the following formula:

Adjustment range of OAU1 with DCM = Adjustment range of OAU1 without DCM - DCM insertion loss
- 1 dBm
----End
Related Information
For details on the function, principle, and how to configure ALC links, see the Feature
Description.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.4.4 Testing APE

The APE function ensures the optical power flatness at the receive end, which ensures the signal-
to-noise ratio. The APE test is performed to determine if the APE function is started.
Prerequisites
The system optical power commissioning must be completed.

U2000, VOA
When the flatness of the optical power for each channel at the receive end differs significantly
from that configured in deployment commissioning, the APE function can automatically adjust
the optical power of each channel at the transmit end. This ensures that the flatness of the optical
power at the receive end is closer to that configured in deployment commissioning.
For a detailed description of the APE, see the Feature Description.
For details on how to configure the APE function and how to start the APE function on the
U2000, see the Feature Description.
Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexer boards and optical multiplexer boards
supporting APE function are the M40V, WSM9, WSMD2, WSMD4, WSMD9, ROAM and
RMU9 boards. This section describes the APE commissioning on the M40V board.
This section uses the M40V as an example to describe the APE function.
The following descriptions provide the details for commissioning the APE from west to east.
The commissioning of the APE from east to west is the same as the commissioning from west
to east.
The APE function testing configuration is shown in Figure 11-36.
Figure 11-36 APE function test configuration diagram
OTU M OTU
D
4
OA OA 4
0
0 OTU
OTU V
F F MCA
West SC1 I I SC1 East
U U
OTU D M OTU
4 OA OA 4
0 0
OTU OTU
V

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to U2000. Configure the APE function on the U2000. Set the standard optical power
curve and the wavelength to be checked. Save the configuration data.
NOTE
It is recommended to set the power unbalance threshold to 1.5 dB.
Step 2 Add more VOAs at any OTU WDM-side output port, and adjust the attenuation to a minimum.
Step 3 Step up the attenuation of the VOA until the MCA detects that the optical power of the channel
has decreased by 3 dB.
NOTE
l The attenuation of a channel is configurable. The attenuation of a channel must be higher than the
power unbalance threshold. It is recommended that the attenuation for a channel be set to 3 dB.
l The ALC function may be enabled after the optical power decreases.
l After the MCA scan cycle, the APE event report dialog window is displayed indicating that the power
is unbalanced.
Step 4 On the U2000, select the desired NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Optical
Power Equilibrium from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Click Query to review information about the created APE pair.
Step 6 Select the desired APE pair from the APE Pair list.
Step 7 On the U2000, click Start Regulation on the bottom to start the APE function. After the APE
adjusts the power, the difference between the system optical power curve flatness at the receive
end and the standard optical power curve flatness should be less than the power unbalance
threshold.
NOTE
The APE completes adjusting the optical power within five minutes. After the adjustment, the APE event
report dialog window is displayed indicating that the adjustment is successful.
Step 8 Remove the VOAs at the OTU WDM-side output port added in step 2.
Step 9 On the U2000, start the APE function by referring to step 7. After the APE adjusts the power,
the difference between the system optical power curve flatness at the receive end and the standard
optical power curve flatness should be less than the power unbalance threshold.
NOTE
The APE completes adjusting the power within five minutes. After the adjustment, the APE event report
dialog window is displayed indicating that the adjustment is successful.
----End
11.4.5 Testing EAPE

EAPE adjustment can be enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality for each channel
meets the preset requirement and that the services are available. This section describes how to
test the EAPE function.
Prerequisites
The system optical power commissioning must be complete.
There is no optical power alarm or bit error alarm in the system.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The EAPE functions for the related trails are enabled.

U2000, Optical power meter, VOA
When the receive performance for each channel at the receive end of the system changes greatly,
the EAPE function adjusts the optical power of each channel at the transmit end. In this way, it
is ensured that the performance of the optical signals at the receive end is close to that in the
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing
(ROADM) boards and optical multiplexer board supporting the EAPE function are the
ROAM, M40V, D40V, WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD2, WSMD9, VA1, and VA4
boards.
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, the ROADM boards and optical multiplexer board supporting
the EAPE function are the ROAM, M40V, D40V, WSM9, WSD9, WSMD4, WSMD2,
WSMD9, VA1, and VA4 boards.
l For the OptiX OSN 3800, the ROADM boards supporting the EAPE function are the VA1,
and VA4 boards.
l This section uses the west-to-east signal flow and the LOG board for OptiX OSN 8800 as
an example to describe the EAPE commissioning, and the EAPE function is configured on
the OCh trail where the LOG is located.
l This section uses the west-to-east signal flow and the LOG board and the VA4 for OptiX
OSN 6800/3800/6800A/3800A as an example to describe the EAPE commissioning, and
the EAPE function is configured on the OCh trail where the LOG is located.
EAPE Verification Diagram

l For the EAPE verification diagram, see Figure 11-37 for OptiX OSN 8800.
l For the EAPE verification diagram, see Figure 11-38 for OptiX OSN 6800/3800.
Figure 11-37 EAPE verification diagram
LOG M M LOG
R R
OA OA
8 8
LSX V V LSX
F F
U U
LOG M M LOG
R R
OA OA
8 8
LSX V LSX
V
: variable optical attenuator

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-38 EAPE verification diagram
LOG M M LOG
V
A R OA OA R
4 4 4 LSX
LSX
F F
U U
LOG M V LOG
M
R OA OA R A
LSX 4 4 4 LSX
: variable optical attenuator
Procedure
Step 1 Log in to U2000.
Step 2 Add a variable optical attenuator at the output port on the WDM side of the west LOG board.
Adjust the attenuation to the minimum value.
Step 3 Choose Fault > Browse Events from the Main Menu.
Step 4 In the Filter dialog box, set filter criteria and click OK. The event viewing window is displayed.
NOTE
l All abnormal events are selected in the default event browsing template.
l If you set the startup template for viewing abnormal events, the Filter dialog box is not displayed. Alarms
that meet the startup template condition are displayed instead.
Step 5 Increase the attenuation of the VOA section by section and click Refresh. Stop the adjustment
until EAPE abnormal event notification is displayed in the abnormal event list. When this occurs,
the EAPE adjustment needs to be started. The adjustment steps are as follows.
Step 6 On the U2000, choose Service > WDM Trail > Manage WDM Trail.
Step 7 In the Basic Setting tab of the Set Trail Browse Filter Conditions dialog box, select a proper
filtering condition and click Filter All.
Step 8 Select the OCh trail where the LOG board is located. Click Maintenance, and select EAPE
Management from the drop-down list.
Step 9 If Current Status is Can Be Adjusted, click Start Adjustment to start EAPE adjustment. The
Operation Result dialog box is displayed indicating that the verification is successful. After
the adjustment completes, Current Status is Adjustment Not Required.
Step 10 Repeat step 3 through step 5. Check the event list. EAPE adjustment result event
notification should be reported indicating the adjustment is successful.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Related Information
For details on the description and how to configure the EAPE function, see the Feature
Description.
The recommended commissioning environment is that there are more than three amplifier
boards, and long fibers are used in the line.
11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks

This section describes how to test the clock synchronization function at the physical layer.
Prerequisite
Fiber connections or clock cable connections between NEs must be established.
Clocks at the physical must be configured.

ANT-20 (or MP1550A, MP1552B, MP1570A, HP37718A) clock analyzer, frequency
meterU2000
Testing Items
1. External clock source input/output and tracing test. This test checks whether an external
clock source is properly traced.
2. Clock source selection and tracing test. This test checks whether clock synchronization is
achieved between two NEs that are interconnected by using fibers.
3. Line clock source and external clock source selection test. This test checks whether a line
clock source and an external clock source function normally.
4. Synchronous clock active/standby switching test. This test checks whether the active/
standby clock protection functions properly.
5. Master/slave subrack cascading test. This test checks whether a synchronous clock can
function properly when multiple subracks are cascaded.
Test Diagram
Figure 11-39 shows the diagram for the external clock source input/output and tracing test.
Figure 11-39 Test Diagram

BITS
Clock
analyzer

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
NE A is configured with clock and cross-connect boards.
Figure 11-40 shows the diagram for the clock source selection and tracing test.

BITS
Clock
analyzer
A B
NOTE
NEs A and B are configured with clock, cross-connect, and line boards.
Figure 11-41 shows the diagram for the line clock source and external clock source selection
test.

BITS
Fiber 1
NOTE
NE A is configured with clock, cross-connect, and line boards.
Testing Item 1: External Clock Source Input/Output and Tracing Test

Step 1 Configure NE A to trace an external clock source.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Attach a clock analyzer to NE A and the external clock source to check whether NE A properly
traces the external clock source.
----End
Testing Item 2: Clock Source Selection and Tracing Test

Step 2 Configure NE B to trace a line clock. See Configuring Clock Attributes.
Step 3 Attach a clock analyzer to NE B to check whether NE B properly traces the line clock source.
----End
Testing Item 3: Line Clock Source and External Clock Source Selection Test
Step 2 Configure the clock source priority table of NE A and assign the highest priority to the external
clock source. See Configuring Clock Attributes.
Step 3 Configuring Switching Conditions for Clock Sources.
Step 4 Disconnect the external clock source from NE A. Check whether NE A can switch the clock to
the line clock source by querying clock synchronization status.
Step 5 Reconnect the external clock source to NE A to enable NE A to trace the line clock source. Then
check whether NE A can switch the clock to the external clock source by querying clock
synchronization status.
----End
Testing Item 4: Synchronous Clock Active/Standby Switching Test

Step 1 Perform an active/standby switching when an NE properly traces a clock source. Then check
whether the NE properly traces a clock source by observing the data on the clock analyzer.
----End
Testing Item 5: Master/Slave Subrack Cascading Test

Step 1 Connect the master subrack or the last slave subrack to an external clock source. Set the external
clock as the clock source for tracing.
Step 2 Attach a clock analyzer to the master subrack or the last slave subrack to check whether the NE
properly traces the external clock source.
Step 3 Disconnect the master subrack or the last slave subrack from the external clock source. Configure
the NE to trace a line clock for any subrack on the NE. Then check whether the NE traces this
line clock by observing the data on the clock analyzer.
----End
11.6 Testing IEEE 1588v2

This section describes the procedure for testing IEEE 1588v2 features and the testing items.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.6.1 Testing Process

This section describes the general process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features.
Figure 11-42 shows the process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features.
Figure 11-42 Process of testing IEEE 1588v2 features
Start
Check
configurations
Formulate a
commissioning plan
Start
commissioning on
site
Perform short-term
performance tests
on site
Examine the pre-

test results
End
Precaution
l Before Starting Deployment:
– Examine the IEEE 1588v2 Networking Diagram for xxx Office carefully and verify that
the actual network configurations are the same as the planned network configurations.
– Prepare required versions according to the version mapping requirements.
– Prepare and verify the Clock Configuration List for xxx Office.
– Make plans properly and obtain the necessary permits for on-site operations in advance.
l Test Point Selection: perform the acceptance test using the TimeAcc-007 or an IEEE
1588v2 time tester. Try to perform the test at the end of an IEEE 1588v2 link (a point

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
farthest from a BITS device). Supply GPS signals to the TimeAcc-007 or IEEE 1588v2
time tester. Calibrate the test instrument before performing the test.
Procedure
1. Check configurations.
l After completing IEEE 1588v2-related configurations according to the network design
diagrams, check the configurations based on parameters specified in the Clock
Configuration List for xxx Office.
2. Formulate a commissioning plan. Determine a proper commissioning sequence according
to connections of OTN equipment to BITS devices and OptiX PTN equipment.
l First commission BITS devices.
l Configure delay compensation along the BITS link and ensure that the source of delay
compensation ports is BITS.
l For a ring network, disable ports to trigger clock source switching and record the
switching. After delay compensation at the standby clock tracing link is completed,
restore configurations.
l For OptiX PTN equipment where IEEE 1588v2 has been provided, configure delay
compensation on all OTN boards before connecting OTN equipment to OptiX PTN
equipment.
3. Start commissioning on site. Start commissioning from BITS and determine a proper
commissioning sequence according to site conditions. Commissioning at a site must cover
all time/clock tracing links.
l Calibrate the instrument according to the instructions.
l Test time precision of BITS: To ensure time precision of OTN equipment, observe
performance of the BITS device and ensure that the clock source satisfies requirements.
After completing compensation for test cable delay and antenna feeder delay, measure
output at the 1PPS+TOD port on the BITS device. If the maximum difference between
measurement values does not exceed 50 ns, delay compensation for the BITS device is
not required; otherwise, delay compensation for the BITS device is required (in this
case, contact BITS maintenance personnel).
NOTE
After completing delay compensation for BITS input signals, restart the BITS device. It takes the BITS
device over two hours to become stable after the restart.
l Measure and compensate for asymmetry delay site by site. For details, see 11.6.2
Testing Delay Compensation.
4. Perform short-term performance tests on site.
l To test short-term performance after asymmetry delay compensation is completed at a
site, boards can be reset (cold) after ensuring that services will not be affected. For short-
term performance specifications at each site, see 11.6.3 Testing Items.
5. Examine the pre-test results and record the testing data.
11.6.2 Testing Delay Compensation

Prerequisites
All fibers or clock cables between NEs must be properly connected.
Clocks at the physical must be configured and commissioned.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The IEEE 1588v2 must be configured.

Time tester and U2000
Testing Diagram
Figure 11-43 shows the diagram for testing delay compensation.
Figure 11-43 Testing Diagram
Convergence layer Access layer

1PPS+TOD
2M
Slave A 2M
BITS
2M E Node B
OTN network 1PPS+TOD
B D
Master 1PPS+TOD
BITS
F Node B
C
Station Direction Board
A、B、 East 18-11ST2-1

:Special cables C、D West 18-11ST2-2
:Straight cables
:Optical cable
:Physical synchronization protection route
:1588 phase synchronization protection route
:Physical synchronization route
:1588 phase synchronization route
:Crossover cables
:OSN series
:BITS :PTN equipment :Node B
WDM equipment
Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node (NE A, B)

The source OTN node is generally connected to the BITS device. They can be interconnected
in either of the following modes:
l Connected through a 2M clock port and a 1PPS+TOD port on a clock interface board.
l Connected through a GE port on the STG board.
Delay compensation is configured in a similar way in both modes. The detailed procedure is as
follows:
1. Determine clock synchronization status of the source node.
a. In NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock >
Clock Synchronization Attribute from the Function Tree.
b. Click Query. Check the query result to see whether the NE is tracing the clock
provided by the BITS device.
2. Measure delay.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
a. After ensuring that the source node is tracing the clock provided by the BITS device,
verify time precision of the source node.
b. Set the port to be tested to a 1PPS+TOD output port.
c. When the test instrument is stably tracing the GPS, connect the test cable to the TOD
port on the OTN equipment. Considering the delay caused by the antenna feeder and
test cable, check the time displayed on the test instrument 10 minutes later. When the
maximum time difference does not exceed 50 ns, record the time offset of the OTN
equipment. Then, configure asymmetry delay compensation using the U2000.
3. Compensate for delay. On the OTN equipment, delay may be caused by a cable or service
board.
a. Compensate for delay caused by a cable connecting the BITS device's 1PPS+TOD
port to the OTN equipment. For the compensation modes, see Setting Cable
Transmission Distance Permitted by an External Time Port.
b. Compensate for delay caused by a service board. For the compensation modes, see
Configuring the Cable Transmission Deviation for the Clock Port.
4. Calibrate delay. After delay compensation is completed, check the time difference on the
OTN equipment after 10 minutes. If the maximum time difference does not exceed 100 ns,
the delay compensation satisfies requirements. Otherwise, configure delay compensation
again.
Testing Delay Compensation for the Intermediate Nodes (NE A, B, C, D)

The method of measuring asymmetry delay at an intermediate node varies according to the
configuration.
l ST2+SFIU boards. This configuration simplifies asymmetry delay compensation (no site-
by-site compensation) during deployment. That is, you only need to select sites for delay
compensation and the maintenance engineers will configure delay compensation at the
selected sites. Adhere to the following principles when configuring delay compensation
during deployment:
– Time will be transmitted to the downstream nodes and time must be received over two
or more paths.
– Delay compensation must be configured for OTN equipment connected to OptiX PTN
equipment and the OTN equipment must satisfy time precision requirements.
– At a node, compensating for a time offset caused by path switching must be completed.
This ensures that the time reaching downstream nodes satisfies requirements after time
source switching.
As shown in Figure 11-43, each of sites A, B, and D provides one port for transferring time
sources to the downstream nodes and two or more ports for receiving time sources. At these
sites, delay compensation is required for path switching. After the delay compensation, no
more delay compensation is required during maintenance.
l OTU service boards or ST2+FIU boards. This configuration requires site-by-site
asymmetry delay compensation and the compensation must cover all paths at a site.
For example, site D in Figure 11-43 has two time tracing paths: B-C and D-C. Compensate
for delay on path B-C (for details, see Testing Delay Compensation for the Source
Node), switch the time source (by disabling a port on path B-C), and then compensate for
delay on path D-C. Finally, enable the port on path B-C.
Test the time precision at the time output port on the intermediate node for 10 minutes. The time
offset between the intermediate node and the GPS is within ±1 us.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configuring Delay Compensation for the Sink Node and OptiX PTN Equipment
(NE E, F)
OTN equipment may be connected to OptiX PTN equipment in either of the following modes:
l Connected through a 2M clock port and a 1PPS+TOD port on a clock interface board used
with the STG board.
l Connected through a GE port on the TN52TOG board.
Delay compensation is configured in a similar way in both modes. The detailed procedure is as
follows:
1. Measure time precision of the OTN equipment.
a. Measure time offsets between adjacent NEs using the time tester. Then, compensate
for the delay generated at the input port of the ST2 board on each downstream OTN
NE based on the time offset as well as the delay generated at the output port of the
ST2 on each upstream OTN NE with the same number with reversed polarity. For
details, see Testing Delay Compensation for the Source Node.
b. Test the time precision at the time output port on the sink node for 10 minutes. The
time offset between the sink node and the GPS is within ±1 us.
2. Measure time precision of the OptiX PTN equipment.
a. On the OptiX PTN side, test the time offset between the OptiX PTN equipments and
the BITS device using the time tester. Then, compensate for the delay generated at
the TOD port on the OptiX PTN equipments based on the time offset.
b. Test the time precision at the time output port on the OptiX PTN equipments for 10
minutes. The time offset between the OptiX PTN equipments and the GPS is within
±1 us.
11.6.3 Testing Items

This section describes the items to be tested in the testing of IEEE 1588v2 features.
Prerequisites
All fibers or clock cables between NEs must be properly connected.
Clocks at the physical must be configured and commissioned.
The IEEE 1588v2 must be configured.

Time tester and U2000
Testing Items
1. Time precision of interconnected OTN devices using ST2+SFIU boards test: To verify that
OTN devices with ST2+SFIU boards can ensure time precision by overcoming asymmetry
issues.
2. Long-term jitter in a physical clock synchronization mode test: To test long-term stability
when NEs work in physical clock synchronization mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
3. Long-term jitter in PTP clock synchronization mode: To test long-term stability when NEs
work in PTP clock synchronization mode.
4. Time precision in case of fiber fault recovery test: To test the function of restoring clock
or time in case of an exception such as a fiber cut.
5. Active/standby clock board switching test. This test verifies that the active/standby IEEE
1588v2 switching performs properly.
NOTE
Select a testing item based on the actual network topology.
Test Diagram
Figure 11-43 shows the diagram for the testing items.
Testing Item 1: Time Precision of Interconnected OTN Devices Using TN11ST2

+SFIU Boards Test
Test To verify that OTN devices with TN11ST2+SFIU boards can ensure time
Purpose precision by overcoming asymmetry issues.
Test All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode.

Configura
tion
Test Time tester with a GPS receiver

Instrumen
t
Test 1. Test the time offset between two adjacent sites using the time tester.
Procedure 2. Test the time precision for 10 minutes.
3. Extend the fiber that transmits IEEE 1588v2 messages between the two sites
by more than 10 m (connect the fiber a new fiber longer than 10 m using a
fiber adapter).
Expected The time offset is within ±100 ns before and after the fiber is extended.
Result
Testing Item 2: Long-Term Jitter in a Physical Clock Synchronization Mode Test

Test To test long-term stability when NEs work in physical clock synchronization
Purpose mode
Test All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode.

Configura
tion

Instrumen
t

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Test 1. Test the precision of the base station time for more than 8 hours using the
Procedure time tester.
Expected The time offset is within ±1 us.

Result
Testing Item 3: Long-Term Jitter in a PTP Clock Synchronization Mode Test

Test To test long-term stability when NEs work in PTP clock synchronization mode.
Purpose
Test All NEs work in PTP synchronization mode.

Configura
tion

Instrumen
t
Test 1. Test the precision of the base station time for more than 8 hours using the
Procedure time tester.
Expected The time offset is within ±1 us.

Result
Testing Item 4: Time Precision in Case of Fiber Fault Recovery Test

Test To test the function of restoring clock or time in case of an exception such as a
Purpose fiber cut.
Test All NEs work in physical-layer synchronization mode or PTP synchronization

Configura mode.
tion

Instrumen
t
Test 1. On the sink site, test the time offset using the time tester.
Procedure 2. On the sink site, remove the WDM-side fibers that transmit IEEE 1588v2.
Check for clock/time source switching alarms and performance events
generated on OTN and OptiX PTN devices before and after the fibers are
reinserted.
3. Use the time tester to test the base station time precision and record it.
4. Recover the fiber connections.
Expected When time source protection is configured on the ring network, the time offset
Result is within 240 ns before a single-point fault occurs and after the fault is rectified.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Testing Item 5: Active/Standby Clock Board Switching Test

Step 1 When the NE under test properly traces the clock source for another NE, perform a switching
between the active and standby clock boards on this NE.
NOTE
l For the OptiX OSN 6800, STG active/standby status is independent of the XCS active/standby status.
Therefore, the active/standby STG switching can be tested without affecting the active/standby XCS status.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800, the active/standby clock board status is associated with the active/standby cross-
connect board status. Therefore, it is recommended to test only the active/standby clock board switching or
active/standby cross-connect board switching.
Step 2 Check whether the traced clock source is switched from one NE to another. (Clock source
switching is not triggered in normal cases.) Use a test instrument to measure the time
synchronization performance for the NE. Determine whether the time synchronization
performance meets the clock source switching requirements (The time offset is within 240 ns
before and after the switching).
----End
11.7 Testing Ethernet Service Channels

When the network transmits the Ethernet service, the availability of the Ethernet service channels
must be tested.
11.7.1 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using Laptops

You can perform the test by connecting laptops to both ends of the Ethernet service. By doing
this, you can test the availability of the Ethernet service channel.
Prerequisites
l You must be a U2000 user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.
l The EPL services must be configured and the port attribute is set to "Access". For
configuration details, see "Configuring EPL Services on an Ethernet Switching Board" in
the Configuration Guide.

Two laptops on which the Windows operating system is installed, two straight-through cables
Set-up Diagram
Figure 11-44 shows the diagram for testing the Ethernet service channels.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 11-44 Testing the Ethernet service channels

Laptop A
Laptop B
NE4
NE5
NE1
NE3
NE2
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network port of the laptop to the Ethernet service port of the equipment according
to Figure 11-44.
Step 2 Set the IP addresses for laptop A and laptop B. The two IP addresses must be set in the same
network section.
l Set the IP address for laptop A.
– IP address: 192.168.0.100
– Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
l Set the IP address for laptop B.
– IP address: 192.168.0.101
– Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
Step 3 Choose Start > Run on laptop A to display a dialog box. Enter the ping command: ping
192.168.0.101 -n 20000 -l 64 -t.
NOTE
Parameters for the Ping command:

l -n Num: transit Num packets to the laptop at the opposite end
l -l Num: transmit buffer capacity is Num bytes
l -t: continuously transmit ping packets
Step 4 Click OK to run the ping command.

l A window is displayed to provide the feedback "Reply from 192.168.0.101: bytes=64
time=1ms TTL=255". This information indicates the Ethernet channel is normal.
l If the displayed window provides the feedback Request timed out, it indicates that the
Ethernet channel is abnormal. Check the network cable connection and the configuration of
the Ethernet service. Correct the fault, and then continue the test.
NOTE
The value of time and TTL is determined by the actual test environment. The value discrepancy is normal.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.7.2 Testing Ethernet Service Channels by Using the Ethernet

OAM Function
If the Ethernet board supports the OAM function, the OAM function can also be used to test the
availability of Ethernet service channels.
Prerequisites
l The Ethernet service must be configured between sites.

U2000
Context
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the following boards support the OAM function.
l EGSH
l LEM24
l LEX4
l LEM24
l LEX4
l LEM24
l LEX4
Before testing the availability of the Ethernet service channels by using the OAM function, you
must configure the OAM maintenance points on the two sites.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click an NE icon in the Main Topology, and select NE Explorer.
Step 2 Select the Ethernet board in the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Click New. The Create MP dialog box is displayed. Set the parameters.
Step 4 In Ethernet Service OAM, right-click the created Ethernet service maintenance point, and
choose Performance Detect.
Step 5 The Performance Detect dialog box is displayed. In Send Mode, select the specific mode, and
designate the Destination MP ID in the Maintenance Point and Source MP ID.
Step 6 Click Start Detect. The statistics of the performance are displayed in the Details. View the
results of the statistics. Then determine the performance of the service between the local
equipment and the opposite equipment through Loss Ratio and Delay.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 7 Change the length of the packet in Send Mode. Then test the performance of the packets with
the length of 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes.
----End
11.8 Configuring Orderwire of OTN System

You can configure orderwire for NEs by using the U2000/Web LCT.
Availability
l OptiX OSN 8800 T16 support Orderwire of OTN System.
l OptiX OSN 6800 support Orderwire of OTN System.
l OptiX OSN 3800 support Orderwire of OTN System.
11.8.1 Setting the Orderwire Board

Before you configure the orderwire functions, you need to set the orderwire board first.
Prerequisite
l The optical supervisory channel boards must be created.
l For an OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800, only the optical supervisory channel boards
on the main subrack supports the orderwire function.

U2000/Web LCT
The orderwire can be used only when the orderwire board is configured with the NE.

1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the
Function Tree. Click the Orderwire Board Settings tab.
2. Click Query to query the NE-side information.
3. Select a board from the Available Boards pane and click .

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are set.
11.8.2 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can
configure orderwire for NEs.
Prerequisite
l SC1 or SC2 board has been configured.

U2000/Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the
Function Tree. Click the General tab.
2. Click Query to query information from the NE.

3. Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.
NOTE
l Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication.
When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9
seconds.
l The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet.
l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum length
is eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the number
length must be the same. For the settings of the orderwire subnet, refer to 11.8.4 Dividing
Orderwire Subnets.
l The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference call number.
4. Click Apply.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.8.3 Configuring Conference Calls

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrent
voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.
Prerequisite

U2000/Web LCT

Function Tree. Click the Conference Call tab.
2. Click Query to query the conference call configuration of the NE.
3. In the Available Conference Call Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure
a conference call, and click .

NOTE
If the optical ports that support conference call form a loop, howler tone is generated. Hence,
"releasing loop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the conference call in a certain
node.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click the General tab, and set Conference Call number.
NOTE
The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same length as the
orderwire phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the conference call number
is recommended to be 9999.
6. In the Available Orderwire Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure a
conference call, and click .

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
7. Click Apply.
11.8.4 Dividing Orderwire Subnets

When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the
conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls are
configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conference
calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.
Prerequisite
l Conference calls must be configured.

U2000/Web LCT
Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of one
or two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference call
number by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number. For
example, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet conference
call number of the subnet 1 is 199.
The optical ports with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.
Different optical ports on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence, an NE can
belong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.

Function Tree.
2. Optional: Click the Auxiliary tab and set Subnet No. Length.
NOTE
When the Subnet No. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in
the range of 0 to 9. When the Subnet No. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical
Interface is in the range of 0 and 10 to 99.
3. Click the Optical Interface Subnet No. tab.
4. Click Query to query information from the NE.
5. Select an optical port where conference calls are configured, and click the subnet field and
enter a subnet number.
NOTE
The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click Query, and the operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The parameter
values of Subnet displayed in the window are the same as the ones set previously.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
11.9 Configuring the Orderwire Phone in an OCS System

This section describes how to configure the orderwire phone in an OCS system by using the
U2000.
Availability

11.9.1 Configuring Orderwire

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express orderwire channel, you can
configure orderwire for NEs.
Prerequisite
l TNL1STI board has been configured.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree. Click the General tab.
Step 2 Click Query to query information from the NE.
Step 3 Set Call Waiting Time(s), Telephone No. and orderwire ports.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
l Call Waiting Time(s) should be set to the same value for all NEs with orderwire communication.
When the number of NEs is smaller than 30, set the value to 5 seconds. Otherwise, set it to 9 seconds.
l The telephone number cannot repeat in the same orderwire subnet.
l Set the length of the telephone number according to the actual requirements. The maximum length is
eight digits and the minimum length is three digits. In the same orderwire subnet, the number length
must be the same. For the settings of the orderwire subnet, refer to Dividing Orderwire Subnets.
l The length of the telephone number must be the same as that of the conference call number.
l A piece of NG WDM equipment supports a maximum of two channels of orderwire.
l A piece of NG WDM equipment supports a maximum of two channels of orderwire.
l If the length of the subnet number is 1, the first digit of the two orderwire numbers must be the same.
If the length of the subnet number is 2, the first two digits of the two orderwire numbers must be the
same.
Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query to confirm that the parameter values are the same as the ones set previously.
----End
11.9.2 Configuring Conference Calls

To provide the maintenance personnel with a dedicated express channel that allows concurrent
voice communication among multiple NEs, you can configure the conference calls for NEs.
Prerequisite


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree. Click the Conference Call tab.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 2 Click Query to query the conference call configuration of the NE.
Step 3 In the Available Conference Call Ports pane, select the port where you want to configure a
conference call, and click .
NOTE
If the optical ports that support conference call form a loop, howler tone is generated. Hence, "releasing
loop" is a must, that is, only one optical port can be set for the conference call in a certain node.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click the General tab, and set Conference Call number.
NOTE
The conference call number for all NEs must be the same, and must have the same length as the orderwire
phone number. If the orderwire phone number has four digits, the conference call number is recommended
to be 9999.
Step 6 Click Apply.
Step 7 Click Query. The values of the parameters are the same as the values that are set.
----End
11.9.3 Dividing Orderwire Subnets

When there are too many NEs, the concurrent conference calls affect the quality of the
conversation. You can assign the subnet number to optical ports, where the conference calls are
configured, to allocate the NEs to different orderwire subnets. You can make the conference
calls between NEs that are associated with the same orderwire subnet.
Prerequisite
l Conference calls must be configured.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Set the length of the subnet number before dividing the orderwire subnet, which can be of one
or two digits. Then configure the subnet number. You can obtain the subnet conference call
number by overlaying the preceding digits of the conference call number by subnet number. For
example, if the conference call number is 999 and the subnet number is 1, the subnet conference
call number of the subnet 1 is 199.
The optical ports with the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.
Different optical ports on each NE can belong to different orderwire subnets. Hence, an NE can
belong to several orderwire subnet at the same time.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Orderwire from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Optional: Click the Auxiliary tab and set Subnet No. Length.
NOTE
When the Subnet No. Length is set to 1, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is in the range
of 0 to 9. When the Subnet No. Length is set to 2, the Subnet of the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface is
in the range of 0 and 10 to 99.
Step 3 Click the Subnet No. for the Optical Interface tab.
Step 4 Click Query to query information from the NE.

Step 5 Select an optical port where conference calls are configured, and click the subnet field and enter
a subnet number.
NOTE
The optical ports that have the same subnet number belong to the same orderwire subnet.
Step 6 Click Apply.

Step 7 Click Query, and the operation result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The parameter values
of Subnet displayed in the window are the same as the ones set previously.
----End
11.10 Testing Orderwire Functions

Orderwire function tests consist of addressing call tests and conference call tests.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Prerequisites
l The orderwire is connected to the EOW port of the SC1/SC2/HSC1/TNL1STI
l Orderwire on each NE must be configured.
l The orderwire phone set must be installed correctly at related stations.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Testing the addressing call.
1. At a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the orderwire of other NEs.
2. Check whether the orderwire phone rings at the called station.
3. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and without noise.
4. See the previous steps to test addressing calls at other stations.
Step 2 Testing the subnet conference call.
1. At a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the subnet conference call number.
2. Check whether the orderwire phone rings at the other station.
3. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and without noise.
4. See the previous steps to test subnet conference calls at other stations.
NOTE
l The subnet conference call covers only the optical ports that have the same subnet No. on the network. The
subnet No. for the optical port can be set on the U2000. The subnet conference call number consists of the
subnet No., which replaces the first one or two digits of the network-wide call number. For example, if the
subnet No. is 1, the subnet conference call number is 199.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 12 Testing Bit Errors
12 Testing Bit Errors
About This Chapter
The network-wide bit error test must cover all the service channels in the network. You can
perform the bit error tests to the concatenated service channels or to the service segments. There
must be no bit error for 24 consecutive hours.
This section uses Project G as an example to illustrate the test for network-wide bit errors. For
the network diagram for Project G, see Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1 Network diagram for Project G
A B C D E
: OTM : OLA : OADM
Each of the stations A, C and E have four LSX boards.
CAUTION
Before the test, make sure that the input and output optical power for each board is in the optimal
range, and that there is no abnormal alarm or performance event.
12.1 Testing 10-Minute Bit Errors for Each Optical Channel

To ensure that the 24-hour network-wide bit error test is successfully complete, perform a 10-
minute bit error test for each channel in advance.
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
The all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all functional boards and channels on
a transmission link are normal.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
12.1 Testing 10-Minute Bit Errors for Each Optical Channel

To ensure that the 24-hour network-wide bit error test is successfully complete, perform a 10-
minute bit error test for each channel in advance.
Prerequisites
There must be no abnormal alarm or performance event in the entire network.
Tools, Equipments and Materials

Signal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, fiber adapter
Set-up Diagram
For the bit error test for one channel, see Figure 12-2, Figure 12-3, and Figure 12-4.
Figure 12-2 Testing bit errors for one channel from station A to station E
IN Tx Rx
Signal
analyzer OTU OTU
OUT Rx Tx
Station A Station E
IN Tx Rx
Signal Tributary Line Line Tributary
analyzer board board board board
OUT Rx Tx
Station A Station E
Figure 12-3 Testing bit errors for one channel from station A to station C
IN Tx Rx
Signal
LSX LSX
analyzer
OUT Rx Tx
Station A Station C

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
IN Tx Rx
OUT Rx Tx
Station A Station C
Figure 12-4 Testing bit errors for one channel from station C to station E
IN Tx Rx
Signal
LSX LSX
analyzer
OUT Rx Tx
Station C Station E
IN Tx Rx
OUT Rx Tx
Station C Station E
Procedure
Step 1 See Figure 12-2, for station A, connect the receive and transmit optical ports of a signal analyzer
to the TX output optical port and RX input optical port with a fixed optical attenuator in between.
Step 2 At station E, connect the TX output optical port to the RX input optical port with a fixed optical
attenuator in between to achieve the loopback on the client side.
Step 3 Use the signal analyzer to perform a 10-minute bit error test for the service channel.
Step 4 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 10-minute bit error test again until there is
no bit error.
Step 5 See steps 1 through 4 and Figure 12-3 to perform 10-minute bit error tests to all the channels
between station A and station C.
Step 6 See steps 1 through 4 and Figure 12-4 to perform 10-minute bit error tests to all the channels
between station C and station E.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
12.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors

The all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all functional boards and channels on
a transmission link are normal.
Prerequisites
No abnormal alarm or performance event exists on the entire network.
Tools, Equipments and Materials

Signal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, fiber adapter
Fiber Connection
At the local end, connect the output port on the signal analyzer to the RX port on the first OTU
or tributary board. After the signals are looped back from the remote end, the signals are output
from the TX port on the first OTU or tributary board. This establishes the connection of a single
channel. Connect the TX port on the first OTU or tributary board to the RX port on the second
OTU or tributary board with a fixed optical attenuator in between. Then connect the second OTU
or tributary board to the third OTU or tributary board in the same way until OTU or tributary
board (N-1) is connected to OTU or tributary board N. Finally, connect the TX port on the OTU
or tributary board N to the IN port on the signal analyzer.
Precautions
CAUTION
l The number of cascaded OTUs or tributary boards should be less than or equal to 13.
l There are five types of LC connector-shaped fixed optical attenuators: 15 dB, 10 dB, 7dB,
5 dB and 2 dB. According to the requirements for the optical power, use the correct fixed
optical attenuators when you perform the network commissioning.
Set-up Diagram
This section uses Project G as an example to describe how to test bit errors on all channels in
cascading order. Figure 12-5 shows the testing diagram. The testing diagram does not show the
OLA and repeater stations because no signal is inserted into or extracted from an OLA station
or a repeater station.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Figure 12-5 Fiber connections for the all-channel bit error test
OUT Rx Station A Station E

OTU OTU
OTU OTU
Signal
analyzer OTU OTU
OTU OTU
IN Tx
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
Station C
Station A Station E
OUT Rx Tx
T L L T
Signal T L L T
analyzer
T L L T
T L L T
IN Tx Rx
L L L L
T T T T
Rx Tx
Station C

T: Tributary board
L: Line board
Procedure
Step 1 Use Figure 12-5 to connect the fibers according to the information inFiber Connection.
Step 2 Use the signal analyzer to perform the 24-hour bit error test.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Step 3 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 24-hour test again until there is no bit error.
----End

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 13 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment
13 Checklist for Commissioning During

Deployment
Correct setting and commissioning of each system parameter is the precondition for ensuring
normal network operation.
Check the configurations of NEs and boards according to Table 13-1 and rectify inappropriate
configurations, for example incorrect parameter settings and incomplete parameter settings.
Table 13-1 Checklist for commissioning during deployment

N Item Related Operation
o.
1 Communication between NEs on the network is Creating NEs in Batches

normal and login to an NE is successful. Creating Optical NEs
Uploading the NE Data
2 NE ID and IP are changed properly according to the Setting NE ID and IP

customer planning requirements.
3 All NEs are synchronized with the NMS time and NE Synchronizing the NE Time
performance monitoring can be enabled normally. with the U2000/Web LCT
Server Manually
Setting Performance
Monitoring Parameters of an
NE
4 When the network uses the HWECC communication Setting Manually Extended
protocol, a proper extended ECC communication ECC Communication
mode is selected when the number of NEs that adopt
the extended ECC communication exceeds eight.
When the network uses IP over DCC communication Configuring IP over DCC
protocol, the IP over DCC protocol is configured
properly.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 13 Checklist for Commissioning During Deployment
N Item Related Operation

o.
When the network uses OSI over DCC Configuring OSI over DCC
communication protocol, the OSI over DCC protocol
is configured properly.
5 Logical fiber connections are created on the entire Creating Fiber Connections in
network and they are consistent with actual fiber Graphic Mode
connections.
6 OCh trails are complete and no discrete service Creating OCh Trails by Trail
exists. Search
7 Optical cross-connections at an ROADM station are Creating Single-Station

complete. Optical Cross-Connection
8 Acceptance items such as bit errors and OSNR Testing Bit Errors
satisfy the requirements and optical power on the l Commissioning Optical
entire network is commissioned correctly. Power on Site
l Remotely Commissioning
Optical Power
l Automatic Commissioning
9 Attributes of every WDM optical port on a board are Configuring Boards

set properly.
10 Various services are configured correctly. Configuring Services
11 Protection schemes and system features are Configuring System Features

configured correctly. Testing Protection Switching
Testing Data Features
Testing System Features
Testing Ethernet Service
Channels
TIP
In the actual commissioning and configuration process, you are recommended to check the configurations
of an NE after configuring the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 14 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board
14 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC

Board
You need to back up the NE database during daily maintenance, to ensure that the SCC board
of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after a data loss or equipment power failure.
When you back up the NE database to the SCC board, you actually back up the NE data in the
DRDB database of the SCC board to the Flash database. When the NE is restarted after a power
failure, the SCC board automatically reads the configuration from the FLASH and issues the
configuration to the boards.
Prerequisite
You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.

U2000 or Web LCT
Precautions
NOTE
By default, the NMS automatically backs up the NE database into the flash memory every 30 minutes.

1. In the Main Menu, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management.
2. Select the NE from the Function Tree, and then click .

3. In Configuration Data Management List, select an NE or multiple NEs of which the
database you want to back up. Click Back Up NE Data and select Back Up Database to
SCC. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click OK.
4. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

1. Select one or more NEs in the NE list. Click BackUp NE Database > BackUp to SCC.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 14 Backing Up the NE Database to the SCC Board
NOTE
The NMS takes a few minutes to back up the NE database. Do not perform any operation in the
process of backup.
2. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
3. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
(Optional) Related Operation Backing Up and Restoring This section describes

the NE Data several NE data backup and
restoration methods. You can
select the method as required.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 15 Analyzing and Handling Common Deployment Problems
15 Analyzing and Handling Common

Deployment Problems
About This Chapter
happen during the deployment process. You need to analyze and handle problems according to
actual situations.
15.1 OSC/ESC Conflict

This section describes workarounds and solutions to the problem associated with frequent
switching between OSC and ESC channels during the deployment commissioning phase.
15.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports
This section describes how to disable the unused auxiliary ports.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
15.1 OSC/ESC Conflict

This section describes workarounds and solutions to the problem associated with frequent
switching between OSC and ESC channels during the deployment commissioning phase.
Prerequisites

U2000
During the deployment commissioning phase, the commissioning of optical power for an OTU
board or a line board is not complete. When this occurs, the ECC link is unstable and the OSC
and ESC channels may be frequently switched. The symptoms are as follows:
l As shown on the NMS, the NE is occasionally unreachable. A query of the WDM-side
alarms for the corresponding OTU or line boards shows that the power_high or power_low
alarm is reported.
l Switching between different channels on the ECC link frequently occurs.
Procedure
1. On the U2000, check the value of Communication Status. Then determine which port
fails in ESC communication after a check of the value of Port.
b. Right-click an NE and choose NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer window.
c. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree.
d. Select the DCC Rate Configuration tab, and click Query.
e. On the DCC Rate Configuration tab page, check whether Communication Status
for a channel whose Channel is GCC0, GCC12_18, GCC12_9, or RES_ODU is
displayed as Receiving Failed. If yes, this Port fails in ESC communication.
2. On the U2000, disable all the failed ESC channels on all the NEs on the network.
a. On the DCC Rate Configuration tab page, change the value of Enabled/Disabled
for all channels for the failed Port identified in step 1 to Disabled. Click OK in the
displayed dialog box.
NOTE
If Communication Status for all channels on the specified Port is Normal, skip the preceding sub-
step.
b. Click Apply. Then, click OK in the displayed Confirm dialog box. Then click
Close in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.
3. After the entire system is commissioned and the optical power on the entire line becomes
stable, set the enable status of the ESC channels to Enabled. For details, see step 2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
After the enable status of the ESC channels is set to Enabled, the supervisory channel on the ECC route
is automatically switched to the ESC channel.
15.2 Disabling the Unused Auxiliary Ports

This section describes how to disable the unused auxiliary ports.
Prerequisite
The commissioning of the entire system must be complete.

U2000
The auxiliary ports that are not currently used must be disabled. If they are required in a
subsequent phase, enable these auxiliary ports.
CAUTION
Disabling the unused auxiliary ports may make NEs go offline.
Procedure
1. In the NE Explorer, choose Communication > Access Control from the left-hand
Function Tree.
2. Optional: Set the unused serial port to disabled.
a. Deselect the Enable Serial Port Access check box.
b. Click Apply.
c. A dialog is displayed indicating a This operation will reset the communication
between NEs. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK.
d. A dialog is displayed indicating a Disabling access will disable the serial port
communication. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK.
NOTE
If you select the Enable Serial Port Access check box, Baud Rate must be set. You are advised to
set Baud Rate to 19200.
3. Optional: Set the unused ETH/NMETH port to Disabled.
a. Set Enabled/Disabled of the unused port to Disabled.
b. Click Apply.
4. Optional: Set the two NMETH ports to disabled.
a. Deselect the Enable Ethernet Access check box.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
b. Click Apply.
c. A dialog is displayed indicating a This operation will reset the communication
between NEs. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK.
d. A dialog is displayed indicating a Disabling access will disable the network
interface communication. Are you sure to continue? message. Click OK.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 16 Reference Operations for the Commissioning and
Commissioning Guide Configuration
16 Reference Operations for the

Commissioning and Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter lists the reference operations for the commissioning and configuration. You can
perform proper operations according to the network condition.
16.1 Configuring the NE Data
Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first
so that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE.
16.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple shelves
are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for centralized
management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/Web
LCT.The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple
shelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for
centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/
Web LCT.
16.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming
This chapter describes the configuration of optical cross-connections. Flexible service grooming
at the optical layer is implemented through optical cross-connections.
16.4 Configuring the NE Time
Time consistency between the U2000/Web LCT and NEs is very important for troubleshooting
and network monitoring. You should set the U2000/Web LCT time and NE time before service
configuration.
16.5 Performance Management
To ensure normal functioning of a network, the network management and maintenance personnel
should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance management
measures.
16.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs
After an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the following task
sets.
16.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration

After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the board based
on the following task sets.
16.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration
After a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the fiber based
16.9 Creating a Single NE
After the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single
NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of
whether the data is configured on the NE or not. Creating NEs one by one is applicable no matter
what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do not
support the NE search function and you must create them one by one.
16.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User
During a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create another
NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.
16.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode
In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside
NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the
list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few
fiber connections only.
16.12 Configuring the Edge Port
An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port is
to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.
16.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection
The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board (WSD9/WSM9/ROAM) that
performs grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the
creation of single-board optical cross-connection.
16.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes
Port attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering requirements. Every board
has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All port parameters
can be queried.
16.15 Configuring Board SDH Port Attributes
Configure the port attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every board
can be queried.
16.16 Opening/Closing Lasers
This section describes the basic method of opening and closing lasers during the detection of
faults and the commissioning.
16.17 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board
You can manually change the rated input and output optical power of an optical amplifier (OA)
board to trigger a change in the attenuation of the power adjustment board.
16.18 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards
16.19 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters
In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You also
need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In addition,
you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission
fibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.

16.20 Configuring the Service Mode

If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the
board.
16.21 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)
The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber
is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than
remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output
optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.
16.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM Board
Automatic laser shutdown is a function of automatically shutting down the laser when there is
no input light and the laser stops emitting optical signals. For example, when an optical interface
board does not bear services, a fault occurs on the fiber, or the received optical signals are lost,
the laser is automatically turned off. This reduces the on period of the laser, extends the service
life of the laser, and prevents hazardous laser radiation exposure from causing permanent eye
damage.
16.23 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board
damage.
16.24 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection Switching
You can configure signal degrade (SD) conditions for triggering automatic protection switching
of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.
16.25 Setting the NULL Mapping Status
Some OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping detection. For
the channel where no signals are input, the U2000 can be used to set the NULL mapping status
to Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel status in the network can be monitored.
16.26 Configuring Path Binding
By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals to
multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower order
signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical port decreases.
16.27 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring
The WMU board is connected to the MON ports of the optical amplifier boards or optical
multiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the wavelengths and
reports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to the SCC. To achieve the function,
the OTU board and NE where the monitored wavelength is located must be configured on the
U2000, and the intra-subrack and inter-subrack communication must be normal.
16.28 Configuring the FEC Function
When configuring the forward error correction (FEC) function of a board, you need to enable
the function and set the FEC type of the current optical port.
16.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT
When the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format of the WDM-
side signals, the running status of the network access point or the service network can be
monitored.
16.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans

This section describes how to set the speed level of fans.

16.31 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals Using the RS232 Serial Port
This section describes how to use an RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel of
alarm signals of an external device.
16.32 Configuring Ethernet Boards
During the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board attributes must
be configured.
16.33 Verifying Ethernet Services
After configuring Ethernet services, you need to verify whether the service communication is
normal.
16.34 Configuring the PRBS Test
Some OTUs of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 provide the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS)
error detection function. On the U2000, enable the meter board to send PRBS signals, and the
client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS signals. In
this way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without connecting a meter
to the equipment during the deployment.
16.35 Managing NE Power Consumption
You can configure power consumption monitoring and energy conservation for an NE, to ensure
that energy conservation and environment protection can be achieved when the NE runs in the
normal state.
16.36 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data
To ensure security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.

16.1 Configuring the NE Data

Though an NE is successfully created, it is not configured. You need to configure the NE first
so that the U2000 can manage and operate the NE.
16.1.1 Configuring the NE Data Manually

By configuring NE data manually, you can configure the board slot information of an NE.
Prerequisite

U2000

1. Double-click the optical NE with unconfigured NE on the Main Topology. Then, double-
click the unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialog
box is displayed.
2. Select Manual Configuration and click Next. The Confirm dialog box is displayed,
indicating that manual configuration clears the data on the NE side.
3. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that manual configuration
interrupts the service on the NE.
4. Click OK. The Set NE Attribute dialog box is displayed.
5. Optional: If you need to modify the NE Attribute, set NE Name, Equipment Type, Cross-
Connect Type of Master Shelf, Cross-Connect Capacity of Master Shelf, NE
Remarks, Shelf Type, and and so on.
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800, Cross-Connect Type of Master Shelf and Cross-Connect Capacity of Master
Shelf must be set based on the current license requirements; otherwise, the NE cannot be used.
6. Click Next, and the NE slot window is displayed.
7. Optional: Click Query Logical Information to query the logical boards of the NE.
8. Optional: Click Query Physical Information to query the physical boards of the NE.
9. Optional: Right-click on the slot to add a board.
10. Click Next to display the Send Configuration window.
11. Select Verify and Run as required and click Finish.
NOTE
Verification involves running the verification command. Click Finish to deliver the configuration to
the NE and complete the basic configurations for the NE. After the verification is successful, the NE
starts to work normally.
12. On the Main Topology, double-click the optical NE where the NE configured previously
is located. select the NE in the left pane of the window to view the board information of

the NE. If the configured board information of the NE is displayed in the right pane, it
indicates that the NE is configured successfully.
16.1.2 Replicating the NE Data

You can replicate the data of an existing NE to a new NE, if the existing NE is already configured
and if the existing NE is of the same NE type and the same NE version as the new NE.
Prerequisite
l The type and NE software version of the source NE must be consistent with the type and
software version of the replicated NE.

U2000/Web LCT

1. Double-click the unconfigured NE on the main topology. Then, double-click the
unconfigured NE in the left-hand pane and the NE Configuration Wizard dialog box is
displayed.
2. Select Copy NE Data and click Next. The NE Replication dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the NE from the drop-down list and click Start. The Confirm dialog box is
displayed, indicating that the replication operation copies all the data of the source NE.
NOTE
After the NE data is replicated, only the data on the U2000 side is changed, but the data on the
equipment side is not changed.
4. Click OK. The Confirm dialog box is displayed, indicating that the replication operation
results in the loss of the original data of the NE to which the data is copied.
5. Click OK to start the replication. The Operation Result dialog box is displayed after a
few seconds.
6. Click Close.

16.2 Configuring Master/Slave Subrack

The OptiX OSN 6800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple shelves
are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for centralized
management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/Web
LCT.The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the management of master/slave shelves. When multiple
shelves are required for an new NE, the master/slave subrack mode must be adopted for
centralized management. In this mode, multiple shelves are displayed as one NE in the U2000/
Web LCT.
This section describes how to configure master and slave subracks for new NEs.
16.2.1 Master/Slave Subrack Configuration

In the master/slave subrack mode, the master subrack and its multiple slave shelves are displayed
as one NE in the network management system. They share the same NE ID and IP address.
Generally, the subrack where the optical amplifier board, optical supervisory channel (OSC)
board, and fiber interface unit (FIU) exist is selected as the master subrack.
16.2.2 Configuring Subrack Cascading Mode of an NE

To ensure proper functioning of the subracks and normal communication between subracks on
an NE, set Shelf Link Mode to be consistent with the actual physical cascading mode of the
subracks on the U2000.
Prerequisite
Cables for communication between subracks must be installed.

U2000 or Web LCT
Precautions
NOTE
The cables for communication between subracks are properly installed and no alarm indicating a cascading
fault is reported.

1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Shelf Link Management
2. Double click Shelf Link Mode and select Tree or Ring based on the actual physical
cascading mode of the subracks.
3. Click Apply.

(Optional) Related Operation Testing Inter-Subrack This section describes how to

Communication Protection test inter-subrack
communication protection.
16.2.3 Changing a Subrack Attribute

You can set the attributes of the master or slave subrack to change the name of the master or
slave subrack.
Prerequisite
The master or slave subrack has been created.

U2000/Web LCT

1. Double click the NE being required to Change the subrack attribute. Choose the desire
subrack from the upper side of the NE Panel.
2. Right-click the subrack and then choose Modify Shelf Attribute from the shortcut menu
to display the Modify Shelf Attribute dialog box.
3. Change the Shelf name and click OK.

NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800, Cross-Connect Type and Cross-Connect Capacity must be set based on the
current license requirements; otherwise, the NE cannot be used.
16.2.4 Querying the Status of a Slave Subrack

This section describes how to query the status of a slave subrack. The status includes Physical
Installed, Logical Installed, and Not Installed.
Prerequisite
The master or slave subrack has been created.


U2000/Web LCT

1. Choose the NE from the left pane of the NE Panel.
2. Click to refresh the state of the NE Panel. On the NE Panel, you can query the status
of the slave subrack and compare the status with the legends.
3. Optional: Click to view the legend and learn the running status of the subrack.
1. Click to refresh the state of the Slot Layout. On the Slot Layout, you can query the
status of the slave subrack and compare the status with the legends.
2. Optional: Click to view the legend and learn the running status of the subrack.
16.2.5 Deleting a Slave Subrack

The slave subrack that does not need to be managed by the U2000 can be deleted.
Prerequisite
All boards that are manually created on the slave subrack are deleted.

U2000/Web LCT

1. Double click the NE being required to Change the subrack attribute. Choose the desire
subrack from the upper side of the NE Panel.
2. Right-click the subrack and then choose Delete the Shelf from the shortcut menu.

3. Click OK in the displayed Confirm dialog box.

NOTE
When the slave subrack is deleted, the system automatically deletes the system boards, such as the
AUX, PIU, EFI, and FAN.
16.3 Configuring Wavelength Grooming

This chapter describes the configuration of optical cross-connections. Flexible service grooming
at the optical layer is implemented through optical cross-connections.
16.3.1 Basic Concepts

The equipment provide reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function. The
U2000 and Web LCT are used to configure the add/drop and the pass-through state of channels,
and thus the remote dynamic adjustment of channels is enabled. Optical power equalization can
be performed on pass-through and adding wavelengths.
There are two schemes supported by the WDM equipment for wavelength allocation:
l Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM)
l Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
FOADM cannot reconfigure the wavelength allocation based on the requirements of service
development. The ROADM realizes the reconfiguration of wavelengths by blocking or cross-
connecting wavelengths, changing the static wavelength allocation to a flexible and dynamic
operation. Making use of the ROADM technology, the U2000 and Web LCT software adjusts
the status of wavelengths (add, drop or pass-through) to realize remote and dynamic adjustment
of wavelength status. The adjustment of a maximum of 80 wavelengths is supported.
Optical grooming is the configuration of logical wavelength routes, realized by optical cross-
connection. This function meets the user's requirement of managing the services at the optical
layer. Products provide flexible optical grooming. When there are changes in the services, users
need only to make configuration accordingly on the U2000 and Web LCT.
Different nodes adopt different methods of optical grooming. The three main methods are listed
as follows:
l WSD9 + RMU9 (WSM9): Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for
multidimensional grooming. It supports the grooming of at most eight dimensions.
l WSMD4+WSMD4: Mainly applied to inter-ring nodes and suitable for the grooming in no
more than four dimensions.
l ROAM (WSMD2): Applied to common nodes and suitable for two-dimensional grooming.
NOTE
Dimension refers to transmission direction. Two-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming in

two transmission directions. Multidimensional grooming refers to wavelength grooming in multiple
transmission directions.
For more details of optical grooming, see the Product Description.

16.3.2 Wavelength Grooming Configuration Flow

This section describes the configuration process related to wavelength grooming. Before
configuring wavelength grooming based on the configuration flow, complete the basic
configuration of NEs according to the configuration flow of creating a network.
Figure 16-1 Wavelength grooming configuration flow
Start
Creating firbers
Creating the
board optical
cross-connections
Creating the
Single-Station optical
cross-connections
End
Task Name Task Description
Creating Required
Fibers on the If the single-station cross-connection is configured, you can create the logic
U2000 fiber connection between NEs and between boards that are inside the NEs
Creating Fiber on the U2000. Or create the logic fiber connection between NEs on the
Connections U2000 and the logic fiber connection between boards that are inside the
by Using the NEs on the Web LCT.
Web LCT
Creating The inter-board service route can be established by creating the single-
Single-Station station optical cross-connection.
Optical Cross-
Connection
NOTE
The intra-board service route can be established by creating the board optical cross-connection.
16.3.3 Configuring the ROADM

This section uses project R as an example to describe how to configure the reconfigurable optical
add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) on the U2000 and Web LCT when the WSS board is used.

Networking Diagram
Tangent rings are taken as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the optical
layer.
Project R adopts a tangent ring networking that comprises seven ONEs: A, B, C, D, E, F and G.
All of the ONEs are OADM stations. Figure 16-2 shows the networking diagram of Project R.
Figure 16-2 Networking diagram of Project R

C
D B
E G
: OADM
In project R, the uni-directional services are allocated as shown in Figure 16-3. There are two
services between station B and station C. Between station A and station B, station B and station
D, station C and station D, station D and station E, station D and station G there is one service
respectively. All of the services are STM-64 services.

Figure 16-3 Service allocation of Project R
C
E W
D B
A E
W
S N
E G
Service Signal Flow and Wavelength Allocation

This section describes the planning of network data, wavelength allocation and board
configuration of the project.
Service Signal Flow

Take station A and station C as an example to illustrate the configuration of grooming at the
optical layer in the WSD9+RMU9 mode and the ROAM mode. The wavelength route at station
A is shown in Figure 16-4. The wavelength route at station C is shown in Figure 16-5.

Figure 16-4 Services at station A of Project R
W DM1 DM1 E
IN IN IN
OA WSD9 DM7 DM7 WSD9 OA
DM8 DM8
EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT
ROA AM1 ROA
AM1
RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
O
OAA OA
AM7 AM7
AM8 AM8
S DM1 DM1 N
IN IN WSD9 DM7 DM7

WSD9 IN
OA OA
DM8 DM8
EXPO EXPO
OUT EXPI EXPI OUT
ROA AM1 AM1 ROA
RMU9 RMU9
TOA TOA
OA OA
AM7 AM7
AM8 AM8

Figure 16-5 Services at station C of Project R
W
OD
DM
IN EXPO
OA
ROAM
OUT EXPI
OA
M01 M02 M40
E OD
DM
IN EXPO
OA
ROAM
OUT EXPI
OA
M01 M02 M40

Figure 16-6 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project R.
Figure 16-6 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project R
No./Wavelength(nm) B C D No./Wavelength(nm) A B
/Frequency(THz) E W E W /Frequency(THz)
E W
8/1531.90/195.70 18/1535.82
/195.20
10/1532.68/195.60
12/1533.47/195.50
No./Wavelength(nm) D A F
No./Wavelength(nm) /Frequency(THz) E W N W
D A E
/Frequency(THz) E W S W
12/1533.47
/195.50
10/1532.68/195.60

Configuration Process
This section describes the process of configuration between station A and station C. For the
configuration of other stations, see the description for station C.
Prerequisite
The related boards are configured.


Step 1 Station A configuration process
1. Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection
tab in the right-hand pane.
2. Click New. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed. Select the
corresponding source port and sink port of the optical cross-connect service.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-
Connection window is displayed.
3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on
the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Open the Select Source
Wavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No. window. Select the wavelengths from
the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected

Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to north at station A for the service
12/1533.47/195.50 from station D to station F.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Select the source slot, sink slot, source
port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength or Sink
Wavelength. Open the Select Wavelength window. Select the wavelengths from the Available
Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the pass-
through service from west to north at station A for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station D to
station F.

4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical Cross-
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click OK and the wavelength selection is
completed. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
5. Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

6. Repeat steps Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the pass-through service from west to south at
station A for the service 10/1532.68/195.60 from station D to station E.

7. Repeat Step 1.2 to Step 1.5 to create the service added from the east at station A for the
service 18/1535.82/195.20 from station A to station B.
8. The created optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.

9. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-Station Optical
Cross-Connection window. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box displayed.
All single-station optical cross-connections configured are displayed in the Single-Station
Optical Cross-Connection window. Click a single-station optical cross-connection, the
physical connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are displayed in the
Detailed Physical Route window.

Step 2 Station C configuration process

1. Click the NE182 in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-
Connection Management from the Function Tree. Click Single-Station Optical Cross-
Connection tab in the right-hand pane.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click New. The Create Optical Cross-
3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on
the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Open the Select Source
Wavelength No. or Select Sink Wavelength No. window. Select the wavelengths from
the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected

Wavelengths. Set the pass-through service from west to east at station C for the service
12/1533.47/195.50 from station B to station D.
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Select the source slot, sink slot, source
port and sink port. Click the button on the right of Source Wavelength or Sink
Wavelength. Open the Select Wavelength window. Select the wavelengths from the Available
Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected Wavelengths. Set the pass-
through service from west to east at station C for the service 12/1533.47/195.50 from station B to
station D.
4. Click OK and the wavelength selection is completed. The Create Optical Cross-
NOTE
If the Web LCT is used, the navigation path is as follows: Click OK and the wavelength selection is
completed. The Create Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

5. Click Apply. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

6. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create two services dropped from the west at station C for
the services 10/1532.68/195.60 and 8/1531.90/195.70 from station B to station C.

7. Repeat Step 2.2 to Step 2.5 to create the service added from the east at station C for the
service 8/1531.90/195.70 from station C to station D.
8. After all optical cross-connections are created, click Query in the Single-Station Optical
Cross-Connection window. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box displayed.
All single-station optical cross-connections configured are displayed in the Single-Station
Optical Cross-Connection window. Click a single-station optical cross-connection, the
physical connections of the single-station optical cross-connection are displayed in the
Detailed Physical Route window.
----End

Enabling the Port Blocking Function

After the port blocking function is enabled, the VOA is set to the default value (greater than 45
dB) and the port is blocked when no OCh trail is found at the optical port that services traverse.
Prerequisite
l The TN11RMU9 board must be installed.
After the port blocking function is disabled, the attenuation remains the same.
When the port blocking function is enabled:
l If no optical cross-connection in automatic mode is configured at the port, the port is in

blocking state. In this case, the blocking function can be disabled after the attenuation is
adjusted manually.
l If optical cross-connections in automatic mode are configured at the port, the OPA function
automatically computes the attenuation according to the first optical cross-connection that
traverse the port. Then, the blocking function is disabled at the port.
l After all optical cross-connections at the port are deleted, the port is in blocking state.
When the port blocking function is disabled:
l The port is enabled with the port blocking function by default after being powered on.
However, the port blocking function is disabled after attenuation is set.
l Attenuation at the port remains the same after optical cross-connections are configured.

U2000/Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board, and choose Configuration > WDM
2. Select By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.
3. In the Basic Attributes tab, select the desired optical port.
4. Double-click the Block Port field and select Enable.
5. Click Apply.
16.4 Configuring the NE Time

Time consistency between the U2000/Web LCT and NEs is very important for troubleshooting
and network monitoring. You should set the U2000/Web LCT time and NE time before service
configuration.

16.4.1 Time Synchronization Schemes for the U2000/Web LCT and

NEs
With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the
U2000/Web LCT server time. In this way, the U2000/Web LCT is able to record the correct
time at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by
NEs.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the U2000, the time at which such alarms and
events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time with regard
to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the U2000. This may cause trouble in fault location.
In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded in the
NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the U2000 provides two time synchronization
schemes: synchronizing with the U2000 server and synchronizing with the standard NTP server.
NOTE
The Web LCT improves the accuracy of NE time by synchronizing the NE time with the NMS time.
l If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the U2000 server, all NEs use the U2000 server
time as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with the U2000 server time
manually or automatically. The U2000 server time refers to the system time of the
workstation or computer where the U2000 server resides. This scheme features easy
operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard to time.
l If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the standard NTP server, all NEs and the
U2000 are synchronized with the standard NTP server automatically. The NTP server can
be the U2000 server or a special time server. This scheme is applicable in networks that
require a high accuracy with regard to time.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the Web LCT, the time at which such alarms
and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time with
regard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the Web LCT. This may cause trouble in fault
location. In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded
in the NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the Web LCT provides one time
synchronization scheme: synchronizing with the Web LCT server.
In this scheme, all NEs use the Web LCT server time as the standard time. The NE time can be
synchronized with the Web LCT server time manually or automatically. The Web LCT server
time refers to the time of the computer system where the Web LCT server resides. This scheme
features easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard
to time.
16.4.2 Setting Automatic Synchronization of the NE Time with the

NMS Time
This section describes how to set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time.
After you set automatic synchronization of the NE time with the NMS time, the NE time is
automatically synchronized with the NMS time at specified intervals.
Prerequisites
l You must have logged in to an NE.
l The NTP service must not be configured for the U2000 and NEs.


Web LCT or U2000

from the Function Tree. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.
2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM, and click Apply. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click
Close.
3. Set Start Time and Period (days), and then click Apply. The Auto-Synchronization
Settings dialog box is displayed. Click Yes.
NOTE
Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.

4. The Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close

2. Set Synchronous Mode to NM and then click Apply.
3. Set Start Time and Period (days), and then click Apply.
NOTE
Start Time cannot be earlier than the current time.
16.4.3 Configuring the Standard NTP Key

On the U2000, you can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically
synchronize the NE time with the standard NTP server time. To ensure that a reliable server is
accessed, the NTP authentication function must be started. In this case, you need to set the key
and password, which are authenticated together to check whether the server is reliable.
Prerequisites
l The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.

U2000
Context
The NTP authentication of the NE must be the same as the standard NTP server. If the standard
NTP server is configured with a key for authentication, the key of the NE must be the same as
the key of the server.

Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE
Time Synchronization from the main menu. Click Standard NTP Key Management tab.
2. In the Object Tree, select one or more NEs and click .

3. Click Close on the Result dialog box.
4. Click Add and the Add Key and Password dialog box is displayed.
5. Select the NE in the NE List pane, set Key ID and Password, and set Trusted to Yes.
Then, click Apply.
6. In the Result dialog box displayed, click Close.
16.4.4 Synchronizing the NE Time with the Standard NTP Server

Time
You can use the standard network time protocol (NTP) service to automatically synchronize the
NE time with the standard NTP server time.
Prerequisites
l The key and password of an NE must be set by using the standard NTP key management
function.
l The NE must support the standard NTP synchronization mode.

U2000
Context
After you change the value of Synchronous Mode from NULL to Standard NTP, when the
modification is delivered to the NE, the time synchronization may be successful though the
encryption key is incorrect.
Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE
Time Synchronization from the main menu.
2. In the Object Tree, select an NE and click the .

3. In the NE Time Synchronization tab, set the Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.
4. Set the Standard NTP Authentication to Enabled.
5. Click Apply.
6. In the displayed Result dialog box, click Close.
7. In the pane at the bottom of the window, right-click, and then choose New from the shortcut
menu to create a standard NTP server.
l If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to NE ID, enter the NE ID of the standard
NTP server and Standard NTP Server Key.

l If the Standard NTP Server Identifier is set to IP, enter the IP address of the standard
NTP server and the Standard NTP Server Key.
8. Click Apply to synchronize the NE time.
10. Click Query. Make sure that the parameter values of the NTP server are the same as the
ones set previously.
16.5 Performance Management

To ensure normal functioning of a network, the network management and maintenance personnel
should periodically check and monitor the network by taking proper performance management
measures.
16.5.1 Setting the Board Performance Threshold

The NE reports an event when it detects that a performance value exceeds the specified threshold.
According to the requirement, you can set different performance thresholds for a board. On the
U2000, if you have already created a performance threshold template, you can set performance
thresholds for one or more boards at the same time.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select a related board and choose Performance > Performance
Threshold.
2. In the Monitor Object pane, select the desired board, port, or channel.
3. Set performance thresholds according to the requirement.
NOTE
On the U2000, if you have already created a performance threshold template for the boards, click
Use Template and select the desired template. Click Open.
4. Optional: Click Default to restore the default settings.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click Query. Confirm that the value of Threshold value is the same as the value that is
set.
16.5.2 Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters

By setting performance monitoring parameters of a specified NE or board properly, and starting
the performance monitoring for this NE or board, you can obtain the detailed performance record
during the running of the NE or board. This facilitates the performance status monitoring of
services and NEs.

Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of a Board

You can set the monitoring status and the automatic reporting status of monitored objects. The
U2000/Web LCT monitors all the performance of board, but the automatic reporting feature is
disabled by default. You can modify the value of the attribute according to the requirement.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Performance Monitor
Status from the Function Tree.
2. Select a condition from the Monitored Object Filter Condition drop-down list.
3. Set the Monitor Status, 15-Minute Auto-Report and 24-Hour Auto-Report. Click
Apply.
5. Click Query. The displayed results are the same as the values that are set.
Setting Performance Monitoring Parameters of an NE

Prerequisite
The NE time must be synchronized with the U2000/Web LCT server time.

U2000 or Web LCT

1. In the Main Topology view, choose Performance > Set NE Performance Monitoring
Time from the Main Menu.
2. Select NEs from the NE list. Click .

3. Select one or more NEs, and set the 15-Minute Monitoring and 24-Hour Monitoring
parameters according to the requirement.
a. Select Enabled.
b. Set the start time and date.

c. Optional: Select To: check box, set the end time and date.
NOTE
l The start time must be later than the current time of the network management system and the end time
must be later than the start time.
l If the end time is not set, this indicates that the performance monitoring starts from the start time and
does not stop.
4. Click Apply and then click Close in the Result dialog box.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Performance > NE Performance Monitor
Time from the Function Tree.
2. Set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitor parameters as required. Click Apply.
3. Click Query. The displayed results are the same as the values that are set.
4. When the NE time is later than the monitoring time that is set, you can query the 15-minute
and 24-hour performance monitoring of an NE normally.
Viewing Statistics Group Performance of an Ethernet Port

To know the real-time statistics, you can view the statistic group performance data of an Ethernet
port.
Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with " Monitor Group" authority or higher.
l The Ethernet service must be configured.
l The performance monitoring parameters must be set.


U2000/Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select a desired board and choose Performance > RMON
Performance.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
3. Select a port from the Select port drop down list.
4. Select the performance events. Set the Query Conditions.
5. Click Start and the result is shown.

1. In the NE Explorer, select a desired board and choose Performance > RMON
Performance.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
3. Select a port from the Select port drop down list.
4. Select the performance events. Set the Query Conditions.
5. Click Start.
16.5.3 Resetting Board Performance Registers

After a network test or fault recovery but before the official operation, you need to reset the
performance register so that the system enters a new performance monitoring period.
Prerequisite

U2000 or Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance
Register from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ports and registers that you want to reset and click Reset.
3. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is
successful.
4. Click Close.

1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Performance > Reset Board Performance
Register from the Function Tree.
2. Select the registers that you want to reset.

3. Click Reset and the confirmation dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
All registers supported by the NE are provided as options for setting the register.
4. Click OK.
16.6 Modifying the Attributes of NEs

After an NE is configured, you can modify the attributes of the NE based on the following task
sets.
16.6.1 Modifying the NE Name

You can change the NE name as required. This operation does not affect the running of the NE.
Prerequisites

U2000 or Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the
Function Tree.
2. Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.
NOTE
You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols, and
numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", <, and
>.
3. A dialog box indicating that the operation is successful is displayed. Click Close.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from the
Function Tree.
2. Enter Name of the NE according to the customer planning, and then click Apply.

NOTE
You can enter an NE name with a maximum of 64 characters consisting of letters, symbols, and
numbers, excluding special characters that are not allowed on the interface, such as |, :, *, ?, ", <, and
>.
16.6.2 Modifying the Optical NE Name

You can change the optical NE name at any time as required with no effect on the running of
the NE.
Prerequisites

U2000
Procedure
1. Right-click an NE on the Main Topology and choose Object Attributes from the shortcut
menu. The Attribute dialog box is displayed.
2. In the NE Attribute tab, enter the new optical NE name and click OK.
3. After the optical NE name is changed successfully, the optical NE is displayed by the new
name on the Main Topology.
NOTE
An NE name can contain a maximum of 64 letters, symbols, and numerals, but cannot contain the
following special characters: | : * ? " < >.
16.6.3 Modifying GNE Parameters

During the network optimization and adjustment, you may need to change the GNE type or the
communication address.
Prerequisites
You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.

U2000
Precautions
CAUTION
This is a potential service affecting operation. Specifically, it may interrupt the communication
between a GNE and the U2000, and the communication between the GNE and the non-gateway
NEs that are managed by the GNE.

NOTE
l It is not recommended to change the Port No..

l In the case of IP GNE, make sure that the IP address of the GNE is in the same network segment as
the IP address of the U2000. When the U2000 server and the GNE are in different network segments,
you need to set the network port attributes of the router through which the U2000 server and the GNE
are connected. In this way, the U2000 can log in to the GNE.

1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the Main
Menu.
2. Close the displayed Filter NE dialog box. Click the GNE tab.
3. Select the GNE to be modified in the displayed Filter GNE dialog box. The NE is shown
in list of GNE tab.
4. Select the NE in the list, right-click and choose Modify GNE from the shortcut menu.
5. In the Modify GNE dialog box displayed, set the parameters.
6. Click OK. In the Warning dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
16.6.4 Changing the GNE for NEs

When the number of NEs managed by a certain GNE exceeds a certain number (the number is
usually 50 and varies depending on different types of equipment), change the GNE for certain
NEs so that the communication between the U2000 and the NEs is not affected.
Prerequisites

U2000
Precautions
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt the NE communication.
Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the Main
Menu.
2. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown in
the list of the NE tab.
3. Select the NE in the list. Double-click the Primary GNE1 field and select a GNE.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Refresh in the list window.

16.6.5 Changing a GNE to a Normal NE

When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change the
GNE to a normal NE.
Prerequisites

U2000
Precaution
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt the service.
Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the main
menu.
2. Close the displayed Filter NE dialog box. Click the GNE tab.
3. Select the GNE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown in
list of GNE tab.
4. Right-click the GNE that you want to change in the list, and choose Delete GNE from the
shortcut menu. Click OK in the Confirm and Reconfirm dialog box. Click Close in the
Result dialog box.
Follow-up Procedure
After changing the GNE to a normal NE, modify the attributes of the NE that uses the GNE and
select another GNE.
16.6.6 Changing a Normal NE to a GNE

When you adjust the communication link between the GNE and the U2000, you can change a
normal NE to a GNE.
Prerequisites

U2000

Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > DCN Management from the main
menu.
2. Select an NE to be modified in the displayed Filter NE dialog box. The NE is shown in
the list of the NE tab.
3. Select the NE in the list, Right-click a normal NE under the NE Name field and choose
Change to GNE from the shortcut menu.
4. In the Change to GNE dialog box, select the Gateway Type, and enter the IP Address or
NSAP Address.
5. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box. Click Close in the Result dialog box.
NOTE
The NE is now changed to a GNE and appears in the GNE tab.
16.6.7 Deleting NEs

If you have created a wrong NE, you can delete the NE from the U2000. Deleting an NE removes
all information of the NE from the U2000 but does not affect the running of the equipment.
Prerequisite
Fibers and cables connected to the NE must be deleted.
On the Web LCT, you have already logged out the NE.

U2000 or Web LCT
When the NE is not logged in, you can delete the NE on the U2000.

1. Delete a single WDM NE.
a. Choose an optical NE in the Main Topology. Right-click the NE in the left pane and
then choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
b. In the Confirm dialog box that is displayed, click Yes.
2. Delete NEs in batches.
a. Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main
Menu. The NE Configuration Data Management window is displayed.
b. In the left-hand pane, select multiple NEs and click . The Configuration Data
Management List pane displays the configuration data of all the selected NEs.
c. Select the NEs to be deleted, right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
The Delete the NE dialog box is displayed.
d. Click OK.


1. In the NE List, select the NE you wish to delete, and click Delete NE.
2. Click OK.
16.7 Modifying the Boards Configuration

After a board is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the board based
16.7.1 Deleting Boards

To modify the network configuration or the NE configuration, you may need to delete the boards
from the NE Panel or Slot Layout.
Prerequisite
l You are an NMS user with "Maintenance Group" authority or higher.
l The services and protection groups must be deleted.

U2000 or Web LCT

1. Double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel and choose the desire subrack.
2. Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
When you delete the board, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also deleted.
3. Click OK in the Delete Board dialog box.
4. Click OK to delete the board.

1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout. Click required subrack on which board you want
to delete is present.
2. Right-click the board you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
When you delete the board, the inactive single-station optical cross-connections are also deleted.
16.7.2 Adding Boards

When manually configuring the NE data, you need to add boards on the NE Panel/Slot Layout.
Prerequisite
l For U2000, You are an NMS user with "Operator Group" authority or higher.
l The NE must be created.

l There must be idle slot on the NE Panel Slot Layout.

U2000 or Web LCT
The physical boards are the actual boards inserted in the shelf. A logical board refers to a board
that is created on the U2000 or Web LCT. After a logical board is created, you can configure
the relevant services. If the corresponding physical board is online, the configured services can
be available.

1. In the Main topology, double-click the icon of the NE to open the NE Panel.
2. Select the NE to be added in the left pane on the NE Panel after performing the preceding
operation and choose the desire shelf.
3. Right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the list.

1. In the NE Explorer, click Slot Layout.
2. Select the shelf, right-click the selected idle slot. Select the board you want to add from the
list.
NOTE
For Web LCT, click Add Physical Boards. All the slots in which physical boards are configured,
and the system automatically creates corresponding logical boards.
16.8 Modifying the Fibers Configuration

After a fiber is configured, you can modify or delete the configuration data of the fiber based
16.8.1 Modifying Fiber/Cable Information

You can modify the name, attenuation, length, and medium type of a fiber/cable according to
its connection status and physical features.
Prerequisites

U2000

Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable
Management from the main menu. The information of all fiber/cable is displayed in the
pane on the right.
2. Modifying the fiber/cable information.
l In the Name column, right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify Fiber/
Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, enter
a proper name for the fiber/cable and click OK. Click Close in the Result dialog box.
l In the Length(km) column, right-click the value for a fiber/cable and choose Modify
Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed,
enter the actual length for the fiber/cable and click OK. Click Close in the Result dialog
box.
l Modify the attenuation of a fiber.
a. In the Attenuation column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify
Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu.
b. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box, enter the actual loss and click OK. Click
Close in the Result dialog box.
l Modify the medium type of the fiber.
a. In the Medium Type column, right-click the value for a fiber and choose Modify
Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu.
b. In the Modify Fiber/Cable dialog box displayed, select the actual medium type
of the fiber from the drop-down list and click OK. Click Close in the Result dialog
box.
16.8.2 Deleting Fibers

When adjusting the network if you need to delete the NEs or change the links between NEs, you
need to delete the fiber connections between the NEs.
Prerequisite
There are no services on the fiber to be deleted.

U2000/Web LCT

1. In the Main Topology view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable
Management from the main menu.
2. To delete a fiber or cable from both the NMS database and the NE database, right-click
this fiber or cable and then choose Delete Fiber/Cable from the shortcut menu. The
Warning dialog box is displayed. Click OK to delete the fiber/cable.

CAUTION
The deletion of the fiber/cable will delete the related protection subnets, trails and user-
defined information. Exercise caution before you delete the fiber/cable. You can export the
script of the entire network first to avoid deletion by mistake.
3. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

1. In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Select the fiber you wish to delete, and click Delete.
3. Click OK.
16.9 Creating a Single NE

After the NE is created, you can use the U2000 to manage the NE. Although creating a single
NE is not as fast and exact as creating NEs in batches, you can use this method regardless of
whether the data is configured on the NE or not. Creating NEs one by one is applicable no matter
what way of communication an NE adopts. The NEs that use serial ports to communicate do not
support the NE search function and you must create them one by one.
Prerequisite
l For OptiX OSN 8800, the license must be installed and the license must support creating
the NE of the type.
l The NE Explorer instance of the NEs must be created.

U2000 or Web LCT
For U2000:
l First create a GNE, and then create a non-gateway NE.
l If the NE is not created properly or the communication between the NE and the U2000 is
abnormal, the NE is displayed in gray color.

1. Right-click in the blank space of the Main Topology and choose New > NE... from the
shortcut menu. The Create NE dialog box is displayed.
2. Select required NE from tree structure at left hand pane.
3. Complete the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name and Remarks.
4. To create a GNE, proceed to 5. To create a non-gateway NE, proceed to 6.

5. Select Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list and set the IP address.
6. Select Non-Gateway from the Gateway Type drop-down list. Select the GNE to which
this NE is associated, from the Gateway drop-down list.
7. Select the optical NE in Associated ONE to which the WDM NE is associated.
NOTE
When creating the OptiX OSN 8800/6800 NE, you need not to choose the optical NE that is NE
belongs to and this NE is directly created on the Main Topology.
8. Enter the NE User and Password.
NOTE
The default NE user is root, and the default password is password.
9. Click OK, the cursor is displayed as "+", click on the blank space of the physical view and
the NE is created.
Result
After an NE is successfully created, the system automatically saves the information, such as the
IP address, subnet mask, and NE ID to the U2000 database.

1. Click Add NE in the NE list. The Add NE dialog box is displayed.
2. Set the NE Type to Europe, enter the NE ID and Extended ID.
3. Select Gateway Type and set related parameters.
l If the gateway type is IP Gateway, set IP Address and Port.
l If the gateway type is Serial Port, set Port and Baud Rate.
NOTE
You are advised to set Baud Rate to 19200bps.

l If the gateway type is SSL Gateway, set IP Address and Port.
4. Enter the User Name and the Password.
NOTE
The default user name is lct and the default password is password.
5. Click OK. One entry is added in the NE list. Usually the NE communicates normally and
is in the Logged In state.
Postrequisite
After an NE is created, if you fail to log in to the NE, possible causes are listed as follows:
l The communication between the U2000 and the NE is abnormal. Check the settings of
communication parameters, such as the IP address of the NE and NE ID.
l The password for the NE user is incorrect. Enter the correct password for the NE user.
l The NE user is invalid or the NE user is already logged in. Change to use a valid NE user.
16.10 Switching a Logged-In NE User

During a new deployment, after the root/lct NE user creates the NE, this user can create another
NE user. You can log in to the NE with the new NE user name.

Prerequisite
l The NE user must be created.
An NE user cannot log in to or manage an NE at the same time. After you use an NE user to log
in to an NE through a U2000/Web LCT server, if you use the same NE user to log in to the same
NE through another U2000/Web LCT server, the NE user is forced to log out from the first
U2000/Web LCT server.

U2000 or Web LCT

1. Choose Administration > NE Security Management > NE Login Management from
the Main Menu, click the NE Login Management tab.
2. Select the required NE from the NE list, and click .

NOTE
When this button is used for the first time, or the configuration data is changed, or the selected object on
the Object Tree on the left is changed, this button becomes in a red frame.
3. Click Query to query the current NE user.
4. In the NE Login Management Table, select the NE and click Switch NE User. In the
Switch Current NE User dialog box, enter User and Password, and set Offline
Switching.
NOTE
If Offline Switching is selected, the system does not check the user name and password, and thus
later login of the NE may fail, which causes the NE unreachable by the NMS. Therefore, it is
recommended not to select Offline Switching.
5. Click OK.

1. In the NE List, select one or more NEs that are logged in and click NE Logout. The NE
status becomes Not Logged In.
2. Click NE Login. The NE Login dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the User Name and the Password.
4. Click OK. In the NE List, the Login Status changes to Logged In.
16.11 Creating Fiber Connections in List Mode

In Fiber/Cable Management, you can manage the fiber connections between NEs and inside
NEs in a unified manner. Compared with the graphic mode, the creating fiber connections in the
list mode is not visual. Hence, the list mode is applicable to the scenario where you create a few
fiber connections only.

Prerequisite
l The board on relevant NEs must be created.
l The boards to be connected with the fiber or cable have been created.
l Before the creation of fibers, it is recommended that you set Configure Wavelength No./
Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) of the port on the tunable OTU as the designed
wavelength.

U2000
After the equipment commissioning is completed, the fiber connections might exist on the NE.
You can synchronize on the U2000 the internal fiber connection data of the NE with the
U2000 side.
Conflicting fibers see the different fibers configured on the NE and U2000 sides. Click
Synchronize and Create Fiber/Cable, and then the conflicting fibers are displayed in the
Uncreated Fiber in NMS and Uncreated Fiber in NE user interfaces. The conflicting fibers
cannot be synchronized between the U2000 and the NE. In this case, based on the networking
design, delete the incorrect fibers. After that, click Create Fiber/Cable and re-create the
remaining fibers.
NOTE
The U2000 supports the ability to synchronize WDM fibers in batches. To do so: In the Main Topology
view, choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > WDM Fiber/Cable Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Step 1 Optional: Creating Fibers in the Synchronization Mode.
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Fiber/Cable
Synchronization from the Function Tree.
2. Click Synchronize, and the data of the internal fiber connections on the U2000 side and
that on the NE side are displayed. Click Close in the Result dialog box.
NOTE
Synchronized Fiber: Indicates the fibers that exist on both the U2000 and NE sides. U2000 is the
same as the fiber data on NEs.
3. Handle different situations as follows:
l If uncreated fiber in U2000 or uncreated fiber in NE exists, select all the fibers. Click
Create Fiber/Cable, and the dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The synchronized
fibers are displayed in the list of Synchronized Fiber/Cable.
l If conflicting fibers are configured and therefore you fail to create a fiber, click Delete
Fiber/Cable to delete the incorrect fiber and click Create Fiber/Cable to re-create the
failed fiber.
Step 2 Creating fiber connections in list mode.

1. Choose Inventory > Fiber/Cable > Fiber/Cable Management from the Main Menu.

2. Click Create, and the Bulk Create Fibers/Cables dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
The source and sink ports that the fiber connects cannot be edge ports.
3. Click Select Object, select all the NEs you need to create fiber/cable in the dialog box.
4. Click OK.
5. Click New in the Bulk Create Fibers/Cables dialog box.
6. Double-click the setting area of each attributes. Set Direction, Source NE, Source Port,
Sink NE and Sink Port.
7. Click Apply.
TIP
You can create multiple fibers/cables and set parameters in step 2.5 , click Apply.
8. Click Close on the Result dialog box. Repeat Step 2.6-2.8 to create another fiber
connection.
9. Click Apply to complete the settings. The created fiber connections are displayed in the
Fiber/Cable Information list.
10. Move the cursor to the fiber that is created and then information about the fiber is displayed.
Read the information to check whether the fiber is created correctly.
----End
Postrequisite
After you create fiber connections, you need to scan wavelengths to ensure that the fiber
connections are correct and the line communication is available.
16.12 Configuring the Edge Port

An edge port refers to the port that is connected to another NE by fiber. Setting an edge port is
to set an optical port of an NE as a connection point between this NE and another NE.
Prerequisite

U2000/Web LCT
NOTE
l The line-side ports of the FIU and the OTU do not need this configuration. By default, such a port is
a Fixed Edge Ports.
l If fiber connection between NEs has been added to a port, the port automatically becomes the edge
port of NEs.
l If fiber connection between boards that are inside the NEs has been added to a port, the port cannot be
configured as the edge port of NEs.


1. Click the NE on the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > Optical Cross-Connection
Management from the Function Tree. Select the Edge Port tab.
2. Select the desired port in the Available Edge Ports field. Click to add the port
to Selected Edge Ports.
3. Click Apply. The displayed dialog box prompts that the operation succeeded. Click
Close.
NOTE
When the operation is performed on the U2000, the Operation Result dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the operation is successful. Click Close.
If you want to change the selected edge port, select the corresponding port from the Selected Edge
Ports, and then click to add the port to Available Edge Ports.
16.13 Creating Board Optical Cross-Connection

The intra-board optical wavelength route can be set for a board (WSD9/WSM9/ROAM) that
performs grooming at the optical layer. The intra-board service route is established through the
creation of single-board optical cross-connection.
Prerequisite

When creating an optical cross-connection of a board, make sure that the optical cross-
connection of the single station where this board resides does not occupy the wavelength that
the optical cross-connection of the board uses.

U2000/Web LCT
Single-board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection are
independent from each other. The user can create single-board optical cross-connection and
configure services based on the planning to realize grooming at the optical layer. However, as
for the single-station optical cross-connection, grooming is realized after automatic computation
of the equipment. The configuration of single-board optical cross-connection and that of single-
station optical cross-connection are mutually exclusive in terms of resources. When the user
configures an optical-layer grooming board with the single-board optical cross-connection of
one wavelength, this wavelength can no longer be configured for single-station optical cross-
connection.

Management from the Function Tree. Click Board-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab
in the right-hand pane.
3. Select the Source Slot, Sink Slot, Source Port and Sink Port. Click the button on
the right of Source Wavelength No. or Sink Wavelength No.. Select the wavelengths
from the Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected
Wavelengths.
4. Click OK. The displayed dialog box prompts that the operation succeeded. Click Close.
The created single-board optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.

Management from the Function Tree. Click Board-Level Optical Cross-Connection tab
in the right-hand pane.
2. Click Create. The Create Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.
3. Select the source slot, sink slot, source port and sink port. Click the button on the
right of Source Wavelength or Sink Wavelength. Select the wavelengths from the
Available Wavelengths list. Click to add the wavelengths to Selected

Wavelengths.
4. Click OK. The Create Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection window is displayed.

5. Click OK. The created single-board optical cross-connection is displayed in the window.
16.14 Configuring Board WDM Port Attributes

Port attributes of WDM boards need to be set to meet the engineering requirements. Every board
can be queried.
Prerequisite

U2000/Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM
2. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list. Click Query.
The parameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the window.
NOTE
When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set from
the perspective of function.
3. Select Basic Attributes, Advanced Attributes tabs. Double-click corresponding
parameter fields to enter or select parameters.

4. Click Apply.
5. Click Query. The attributes values of the board are the same as the ones set previously.
16.15 Configuring Board SDH Port Attributes

Configure the port attributes of SDH boards to meet the engineering requirements. Every board
can be queried.
Prerequisite

U2000/Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > SDH
2. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Port from the drop-down list. Click Query. Click
OK in the Confirm dialog box. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box. The
parameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the window.
NOTE
When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set from
the perspective of function.
3. Double-click corresponding parameter fields to enter or select parameters.
4. Click Apply. In the Confirm dialog box, click OK. In the Prompt dialog box, click OK.
5. In the Operation Result dialog box, click Close.
16.16 Opening/Closing Lasers

This section describes the basic method of opening and closing lasers during the detection of
faults and the commissioning.
Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.
To forcibly turn on the laser, you must first disable the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
For details of procedure, see Enabling/Disabling the ALS Function.
Impact on System
Closing the laser of the local board interrupts the services of the downstream board.

U2000

Opening/Closing Lasers In the case of the WDM board

1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM
2. Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel from the drop-down list.
3. In the Basic Attributes tab, double-click the desired optical port. In the Laser Status field,
choose On or Off to change the laser state.
4. Click Apply.
5. The Modifying the following attribute(s) may cause service interruption or NE login
failure. Are you sure to apply the modification to the attribute(s): Laser Status? dialog
6. The This operation may interrupt services or the NE cannot be logged in to as a result.
Please confirm again that you need to apply the modification to the attribute(s): Laser
Status? dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
7. Click Query.
Opening/Closing Lasers In the case of the SDH board

1. Double-click the desired ONE icon on main topology to display the NE Panel of the ONE.
2. Right-click the desired board and choose WDM Configuration from the shortcut menu.
Then, the NE Explorer window is displayed.
3. Select Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
4. Select By Board/Port(Channel), and then select Port from the drop-down list.
5. Double-click the Laser Switch field of the required port, and then select On or Off from
the drop-down list to change the laser state.
6. Click Apply.
7. The Modifying the following attribute(s) may cause service interruption or NE login
failure. Are you sure to apply the modification to the attribute(s): Laser Status? dialog
8. The This operation may interrupt services or the NE cannot be logged in to as a result.
Please confirm again that you need to apply the modification to the attribute(s): Laser
Status? dialog box is displayed. Click OK.
16.17 Setting the Rated Optical Power of the OA Board

You can manually change the rated input and output optical power of an optical amplifier (OA)
board to trigger a change in the attenuation of the power adjustment board.
Prerequisite
The OA board must be created.



Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an OAU board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. The rated optical power value of the
receive port is displayed.
Step 2 Double-click the Rated Optical Power (dBm) fields of the input and output ports, and enter
values.
Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.
----End
16.18 Configuring the Receive Wavelength of Boards
Prerequisite

U2000/Web LCT
The TDC, LSXL, LSXLR, LSQ, and NS3 board supports the configuration of receive
wavelengths.

1. In the NE Explorer, select the corresponding board. Choose Configuration > WDM
2. Click By Board/Port (Channel) and choose Channel from the drop-down list.
3. Click the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click Receive Band Type and select C.
4. Double-click Receive Wavelength and make required settings.
5. Click Apply.
16.19 Setting Dispersion Compensation Parameters

In a 40G system, you must accurately configure the fixed dispersion compensator. You also
need to use the tunable dispersion compensator (TDC) to adjust dispersion precisely. In addition,

you need to use TDC dispersion real-time adjustment to rectify dispersion offsets of transmission
fibers caused by changes in factors such as ambient temperature.
Prerequisites
Applicable to the LSXL, LSQ, LSXLR, TDC, NS3 boards.
established correctly.
Precaution
CAUTION
This operation may interrupt services.
Procedure
l Search the best dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Dispersion
Compensation Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensation
parameter.
3. Select the port, click Start Search. Click OK in the dialog box displayed. The search
status changes to Searching. After successful search, the search status changes to The
search is successful.
NOTE
l After successful search, only the search status automatically changes. Other parameters do not
change until you query them.
l If you start searching the best value, you cannot set the dispersion compensation value.
4. Click Query. After confirmation, you can query the best dispersion compensation
value.
5. Optional: Set Fine Tune Switch to Enabled.
NOTE
After you enable the fine tune switch, the board may be fine tuned and the query result of the
dispersion compensation value may change.
6. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.
l Manually set the dispersion compensation value and apply the configuration to the board.
1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Dispersion
Compensation Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click Query. After confirmation, you can view the dispersion compensation
parameter.
3. Set Dispersion Compensation Value (ps/nm) and Fine Tune Switch.

NOTE
l The dispersion compensation value must be in the range of the dispersion compensation range.
l The dispersion compensation value and the best dispersion compensation value can be fine tuned
only if they are in the fine tune range.
4. Click Apply. After confirmation, apply the configuration.
----End
16.20 Configuring the Service Mode

If services such as OTU1 are input to a board, you need to configure the service mode of the
board.
Prerequisite

Precautions
CAUTION
Modifying the service mode interrupts the existing services.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from
the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel), and then choose Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the Basic Attributes tab, and then select the desired optical port. Double-click the Service
Mode field, and then choose the desired service mode from the drop-down list. For details, see
Service Mode (WDM Interface).
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
16.21 Enable the Open Fiber Control (OFC)

The open fiber control (OFC) function controls the transmit power of the laser when the fiber
is disconnected. When the OFC function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse, rather than
remains in the enabled state, to check whether the fiber is connected. In this way, the output
optical power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye injury.

Prerequisite
Service Type of the board on the client side must be set to ISC1G, ISC2G, InfiniBand 2.5G
or InfiniBand 5G.
Applies to TN12TQM, TN12LQMS, TN12LQMD, TN11LOM and TN13LQM board.

U2000/Web LCT
Precautions
CAUTION
l Set the LPT Enabled and Automatic Laser Shutdown functions to Disabled before the
OFC function is enabled.
l The OFC function cannot coexist with protection.

1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
2. Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down
list.
3. Select the Basic Attributes tab. Double-click the OFC Enabled field, and select
Enabled.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the values that are set.
16.22 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the WDM

Board
damage.
Prerequisite
The OTU board must be created.


U2000/Web LCT

1. In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree. Select the By Function option button.
2. Select Automatic Laser Shutdown from the drop-down list. Click Query and the attribute
of Automatic Laser Shutdown for the port or channel are shown in the window.
3. Select an optical port and set Automatic Laser Shutdown to Enabled.
NOTE
This operation may cause service interruption or NE login failure. You can confirm the settings
according to actual service requirement.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Query. The value of Automatic Laser Shutdown is the same as the one set
previously. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the relevant laser on the client side of
the board is shut down automatically when an R_LOS alarm is reported from the WDM
side of the board.
16.23 Setting Automatic Laser Shutdown on the SDH Board

damage.
Prerequisite
The optical interface board must be created.

U2000/Web LCT (U2000is recommended)

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown
Step 2 Set Automatic Shutdown to Enabled. Set the On Period (ms), Off Period (ms) and
Continuously On-test Period (ms).
Step 3 When you click Apply. A prompt appears indicating that the operation is successful. Click
Close.
----End

16.24 Configuring SD Conditions for Triggering Protection

Switching
You can configure signal degrade (SD) conditions for triggering automatic protection switching
of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.
Prerequisite
The OTU board must be applicable to the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800.
For the boards for which you configure SD conditions, see the parameter description of each
OTU board in the Hardware Description.

The following protection trigger conditions are supported: B1_SD, OTUk_DEG and
ODUk_PM_DEG.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the desired OTU board and then choose Configuration > WDM
Step 2 Click By Board/Port(Channel) and select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 4 Double-click the SD Trigger Condition cell that you want to set. In the SD Trigger
Condition dialog box, select one or more options and then click OK.

NOTE
After the configuration of the parameters for the SD trigger condition of automatic protection switching,
the switching will enable when a selected alarm happens.
l The B1_SD is an alarm indicating that regenerator section B1 signals in the received signals are
degraded. This alarm occurs, when the processing board detects the B1 byte, indicating that the bit
error rate of the regenerator section signals exceeds the specified threshold value.
l The OTUk_DEG is an alarm indicating that OTUk signal degraded. This alarm occurs when bit errors
are of burst distribution and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses the threshold. When bit
errors are of Poisson distribution, if signals degrade this alarm occurs; if the bit error count crosses the
threshold, an OTUk_EXC alarm occurs.
l The ODUk_PM_DEG is an alarm indicating that ODUk PM signal degraded. This alarm occurs when
the BIP8 detection mode is bursty mode and the signal degradation or bit error count crosses the
threshold.
Step 5 Click Apply in the lower right corner.

Step 6 Click Query. Confirm that the value of SD Trigger Condition is the same as the value that is
set.
----End
16.25 Setting the NULL Mapping Status

Some OTU boards in the NG WDM equipment support the OTN NULL mapping detection. For
the channel where no signals are input, the U2000 can be used to set the NULL mapping status
to Enabled. By checking OTN overheads, the channel status in the network can be monitored.
Prerequisite
The OTU boards or tributary boards and line boards must be configured. For details, see

Figure 16-7 shows the common networking mode for NULL mapping detection.
Figure 16-7 Networking diagram for NULL mapping test

Precaution
CAUTION
The PRBS test and the NULL mapping test cannot be performed at the same time.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button. Select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click the NULL Mapping Status and select
Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Start the NE Explorer of the opposite NE. Select a board and choose Configuration > OTN
Overhead Management > OPU Overhead.
Step 6 Check if the value of PT Received is the same as the PT to be received.
----End
16.26 Configuring Path Binding

By configuring path binding, you can realize inverse multiplexing of client side signals to
multiplex the higher order signal accessed from the client side to several channels of lower order
signals. In this way, the bandwidth of the optical port decreases.
Prerequisite
Applies to the TN11TDX board.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and choose Configuration > Path Binding from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Click Configure, and the Configure Path Binding dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Configure relevant information of the path binding service, including the Slot ID, Port ID, and
Direction. For details, see 17.1.11 Path Binding.Configure relevant information of the path
binding service, including the Slot ID, Port ID, and Direction.

NOTE
For the bound path, ODU1-1 is required. If you want to select other paths as the bound path, you must
select paths in the order from ODU1-2 to ODU1-4 according to the actual service situation.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
16.27 Configuring Centralized Wavelength Monitoring

The WMU board is connected to the MON ports of the optical amplifier boards or optical
multiplexer boards in the two transmit directions. The board monitors the wavelengths and
reports information such as optical power of the wavelengths to the SCC. To achieve the function,
the OTU board and NE where the monitored wavelength is located must be configured on the
U2000, and the intra-subrack and inter-subrack communication must be normal.
Prerequisite
Ensure the normal DCN communication between NEs.
The WMU board must be created after the physical WMU board is installed.

l The wavelength locking function is achieved after the WMU board is configured with the
centralized wavelength monitoring function.
l When configuring wavelength monitoring, check the transmit directions of each OTU
board and the fiber connections. In addition, check which optical port on the WMU board
is connected. Based on the check result, configure the optical ports on the WMU board and
wavelength monitoring of the OTU board.
l There are three types that the wavelengths be locked:
– Scenario I: The OTU, WMU, and optical-layer boards are on the same NE, and logical
fiber connections are configured. In this case, the wavelengths can be locked
automatically without any operation performed by the user.
– Scenario II: The OTU and WMU boards are on the same NE, but the optical-layer boards
are on another NE. In this case, you need to configure the mapping between the OTU
board and WMU board.
– Scenario III: The OTU board and the WMU board are on different NEs. Ensure that the
NEs be allocated to the same optical NE and that the DCN communication between the
NEs is normal. You need to configure the mapping between the OTU board and the
WMU board.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the WMU board and choose Configuration > Wavelength
Monitoring Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Wavelength Monitoring Unit field, and choose an optical port of the WMU board
from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click Query. The information about the wavelength monitoring that has been configured is
displayed.
NOTE
See 17.1.2 Wavelength Monitoring Management to query and enter the parameters.
Step 4 Click New. The New Monitored Object dialog box is displayed. Select the NE and the OTU
board where the wavelengths to be detected are located.
NOTE
Click New. The system displays all the OTU boards that are not configured with wavelength monitoring
but support wavelength monitoring.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 6 A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Click Close. The
wavelength monitoring that has been created is displayed in the user interface.
NOTE
l If the logical fiber connections are configured, click Calculate OTU. The system calculates all the
OTU boards that have been logically connected based on the fiber connection relationship. Click
Apply so that the wavelength monitoring configuration of the OTU boards is delivered.
l After you click Calculate OTU, if some of the displayed boards do not need wavelength monitoring,
click Delete to remove them one by one.
----End
16.28 Configuring the FEC Function

When configuring the forward error correction (FEC) function of a board, you need to enable
the function and set the FEC type of the current optical port.
Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU units must be created.



Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the By Board/Port(Channel) radio button and select Channel from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click FEC Working State and FEC Mode fields,
and select an appropriate value.
NOTE
After changing the service type on the board, you need to check whether FEC Mode is correct on the U2000.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The values of
FEC Working State and FEC Type are the same as the ones set previously.
----End
16.29 Enabling and Disabling LPT

When the overhead byte supporting the LPT protocol is added in the frame format of the WDM-
side signals, the running status of the network access point or the service network can be
monitored.
Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU units must be created.
The services on the boards must be normal and must be of no protection.



Function Tree.
Step 3 Click the Basic Attributes tab. Enable or disable the LPT.
l To enable the LPT, select the desired Optical Interface/Channel, double-click LPT
Enabled, and choose Enabled from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
l To disable the LPT, select the desired Optical Interface/Channel, double-click LPT
Enabled, and choose Disabled from the drop-down list. Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Query, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close. The value of LPT
Enabled is the same as the one set previously.
----End
16.30 Setting the Speed Level of Fans

This section describes how to set the speed level of fans.
Prerequisite
Fan Speed Mode must be Adjustable Speed Mode.


Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click the NE and choose Configuration > Fan Attribute from the Function
Tree.
Step 2 Select a shelf for which you want to change the fan speed from the Subrack drop-down list.
Step 3 Select Adjustable Speed Mode in the Fan Speed Mode pane.
Step 4 Set Fan Speed Level.

NOTE
The values of Fan Speed Level are as follows:

l For the OptiX OSN 3800/6800: Stop, Low, Medium, and High.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T32/OptiX OSN 8800 T64: Stop, Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-
High, and High.
l For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16: Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, and High.
Step 5 Click OK in the dialog box displayed. Click Apply.
----End

16.31 Transparently Transmitting External Alarm Signals

Using the RS232 Serial Port
This section describes how to use an RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel of
alarm signals of an external device.
Prerequisites
The TNK2SCC, TN22SCC, TN52SCC, or TN16AUX board is installed on the NE.
The TN12SC1, TN12SC2, or TN11ST2 board is installed on the NE.
The SCC board and the SC1, SC2 or ST2 board are installed in the same subrack.

U2000
Context
A WDM device can transparently transmit one channel of alarm signals of an external device
using its RS232 serial port. In this manner, the WDM device can centrally manage alarms of the
external device.
When the WDM device uses its RS232 serial port to transparently transmit one channel of alarm
signals of an external device, the data source and sinks must be specified. Broadcast
communication is required from the source to the sinks. The source can broadcast a command
to all the sinks. The sinks can send data to the source but only one sink is allowed to do so at a
time. The source and sinks can be specified randomly.
Table 16-1 lists the interface boards that support transparent transmission of external alarm
signals using their RS232 serial ports.
Table 16-1 Interface boards that support transparent transmission of external alarm signals
Device Type Interface Board Port
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 EFI1 Serial
OptiX OSN 8800 T32 EFI1 Serial
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 EFI Serial
OptiX OSN 6800 EFI Serial
OptiX OSN 3800 AUX EXT
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the SCC/AUX board and choose Configuration > RS232
Transparently Transmit from the Function Tree.

Step 2 From the RS232 Data Source drop-down list, select Shelf11(subrack)-17-52SCC-1.
Step 3 In the Available RS232 Data Sink area, select Shelf11(subrack)-12-12SC2–1, and click
to add the selected board to the Selected RS232 Data Sink area.
Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 Click Query. Ensure that the query result is consistent with the configuration.
----End
16.32 Configuring Ethernet Boards

During the service configuration or test on an Ethernet board, the Ethernet board attributes must
be configured.
Context
Follow the process given below to configure an Ethernet board:
16.32.1 Configuring Internal Ports

The attributes of Ethernet ports need to be configured when Ethernet boards are configured with
services or used for tests. You can configure the internal ports (VCTRUNK ports) for an Ethernet
board.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet boards must be created.


CAUTION
To ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the port attributes
of the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the same.
NOTE
The configuration items are different according to different boards.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board and select Configuration > Ethernet Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface in the Function Tree. Select the Internal Port option
button.
Step 2 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG. Click Apply. For the configuration of related
parameters, see TAG Attributes.
Step 3 Optional: Click Encapsulation/Mapping tab and set the port encapsulation and mapping. Click
Apply.
NOTE
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting.

The GFP is the most widely applied general encapsulation and mapping protocol. It provides a general
mechanism to adapt higher-layer client signal flows into the transport network and can map the variable-length
payload into the byte-synchronized transport path. The client signals can be protocol data units (PDU-oriented,
such as IP/PPP and Ethernet), block code data (block-code oriented, such as Fiber Channel and ESCON), or
common bit data streams. The GFP protocol complies with ITU-T G.7041.
Step 4 Click the Network Attributes tab and set the Port Type of the internal port. Click Apply.
NOTE
l In the case of UNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with the Tag Aware/
Access/Hybrid attribute.
l In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag.
l In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag.
l When the working mode of a port is NNI mode, that is, when the port functions as a network-to-network
interface, it is used for connecting to another network node.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Network Attributes.
Step 5 Optional: Click LCAS tab and set the port LCAS. Click Apply. For relevant information, see
LCAS of Feature Description .
NOTE
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting for OptiX OSN 8800.
Step 6 Optional: Click Bound Path tab, click Query to browse the bound paths.
NOTE
This tab is just for the EGSH board setting.

Step 7 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the port attribute. Click Apply.
NOTE
l Broadcast packet suppression is based on the proportion between the broadcast packet and all packets.
The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an increment of 10%.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Advanced Attributes (Internal Port).
----End
16.32.2 Configuring External Ports

The attributes of Ethernet ports need to be configured when Ethernet boards are configured with
services or used for tests. You can configure the external ports for an Ethernet board.
Prerequisite
The Ethernet board must be created.

Precaution
CAUTION
To ensure the availability of an end-to-end Ethernet service, make sure that the port attributes
of the Ethernet boards at the two ends of the services are the same.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the appropriate Ethernet board and then select Configuration >
Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Select the
External Port option button.
Step 2 Click the Basic Attributes tab and set the basic attributes of the external port.
NOTE
l Working mode: If Working Mode at one end is set to Auto-Negotiation, Working Mode at the other
end also must be set to Auto-Negotiation. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.
l MAC loopback and PHY loopback: They are used for locating faults and are service-affecting. The
two are mutually exclusive. When the value of MAC loopback is set to Inloop, the value of PHY
loopback is set to Non-Loopback automatically. The same applies to the reverse case.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Basic Attributes (External Port).

Step 3 Click Apply.
Step 4 Click Flow Control tab, set the Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode and
Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the external port.
NOTE
l Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the port is Auto-
Negotiation. Enable Dissymmetric Flow Control means the port only transmits and does not receive
flow control frames. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the port is able to transmit and
receive only PAUSE frames. Enable Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow Control means that the
symmetric or dissymmetric flow control mode is selected according to the auto-negotiation.
l Non-Autonegotiation flow control mode: Select this mode when the working mode of the port is not
Auto-Negotiation. Enable Symmetric Flow Control means that the port is able to transmit and
receive PAUSE frames. Send Only means that the port is able to transmit PAUSE frames only. Receive
Only means the port is able to receive PAUSE frames only.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Flow Control (External Port).
Step 5 Click Apply.
Step 6 Click the TAG Attributes tab and set the TAG of the port. Click Apply. For the configuration
of related parameters, see TAG Attributes.
Step 7 Click Network Attributes tab, set the port attributes of the external port.
NOTE
l In the case of UNI/NNI, the port processes the TAG attribute of 802.1Q and the port is with the Tag
Aware/Access/Hybrid attribute.
l In the case of C-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries C-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the C-VLAN tag.
l In the case of S-Aware, the port does not process the TAG attribute of 802.1Q. It determines that the
data packet carries S-VLAN tag and processes the data packet based on the S-VLAN tag.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Network Attributes.
Step 8 Click Apply.
Step 9 Click the Advanced Attributes tab and set the Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold,
Loop Detection, Loop Port Shutdown etc. parameters of the port.
NOTE
l Broadcast packet suppression threshold is based on the proportion between the broadcast packet and
all packets. The value ranges from 10% to 100%, with an increment of 10%.
l For the configuration of related parameters, see Advanced Attributes (External Port).
Step 10 Click Apply.
----End

16.33 Verifying Ethernet Services

After configuring Ethernet services, you need to verify whether the service communication is
normal.
Prerequisite
Ethernet services must be created.

NOTE
You can select different steps to verify Ethernet services based on the networking and application
requirements.

Step 1 Optional: Test Ethernet services. For details, see Testing Ethernet Services of Feature
Description.
NOTE
The board supports the test of Ethernet services refer to Hardware Description.
Step 2 Optional: Test the connectivity of Ethernet services. For details, see Configuring the IEEE
802.1ag OAM of Feature Description.
Step 3 Optional: Test the connectivity of Ethernet ports. For details, see Configuring the IEEE 802.3ah
OAM of Feature Description.
----End
16.34 Configuring the PRBS Test

Some OTUs of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 provide the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS)
error detection function. On the U2000, enable the meter board to send PRBS signals, and the
client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS signals. In
this way, you can perform the bit error test of the transmission link without connecting a meter
to the equipment during the deployment.
16.34.1 PRBS Test

If no commissioning instruments are available in the network maintenance phase or on a new
network where no services are deployed, you can perform a self-transmit and self-receive test
using the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) function to check whether links on each section
are normal by performing loopbacks section by section.

As provided in Figure 16-8, in PRBS applications, the local board with the PRBS test function
sends PRBS codes and analyzes the PRBS codes looped back from the remote end. By comparing
the PRBS codes looped back from the remote end with the PRBS codes that should be received
according to the theoretic calculation, the local board determines whether equipment or the
transmission line is normal. As provided in Table 16-2, the PRBS test is applicable to two types
of network topology.
For the same network, as provided in Table 16-2, a client-side PRBS test is more penetrative
than a WDM-side PRBS test. If a board on which the PRBS test has been started does not receive
the PRBS test signals transmitted from the local board, the board reports a PRBS_LSS alarm.
Figure 16-8 PRBS application

Enable the PRBS on the auxiliary board
Send PRBS codes
WDM
network
Meter Near end Far end

board auxiliary auxiliary
board Inloop in Outloop in board Inloop in
WDM side WDM side client side
Station A Station B
NOTE
l When a PRBS test is in progress, only query operations can be performed. Users are not allowed to
delivery any configuration to the boards participating in the test. During a PRBS test, the boards
participating in the test cannot carry any services. If services are carried on the boards, they will be
interrupted during the PRBS test.
l The PRBS test function is only used during deployment and fault location. After the deployment and
fault location, users must disable the PRBS Test Status.
l The PRBS codes vary according to the types of client-side service. Therefore, to perform a client-side
PRBS test, users must ensure that the client-side service types for the tester board and auxiliary board
are the same.
Table 16-2 PRBS networking applications

Test Mode Service Type Networking Diagram
Client-side Services except GE TX RX OUT IN TX

1
PRBS test services and Meter Near 2
Remote
WDM network 3 auxiliary 4
standard OTN board auxiliary
RX TX board IN OUT
board
services RX
Client Client WDM WDM Client

side side side side side
1 Start PRBS test

2
Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback
3
4 Loopback on the Client side/fiber loopback

Test Mode Service Type Networking Diagram
GE services and GE or standard

OTN frames
standard OTN
TX IN TX
services 1
Remote
Meter WDM network 2 3
auxiliary
board
RX OUT board RX
Client WDM Client

side side side
1 Start PRBS test
2 Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback
3 Loopback on the Client side/fiber loopback
WDM-side - OUT IN
1
PRBS test
Remote
Meter 2
WDM network auxiliary
board IN OUT board
WDM WDM
side side
1 Start PRBS test

2 Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback
Meter board: used to generates PRBS test signals and monitors PRBS test signals that are
looped back from the remote board. By comparing the transmitted and received PRBS test
signals, you can determine whether the current link or equipment is normal.
Auxiliary board: connects a meter board and the network under test to transparently transmit
the PRBS test signals. Auxiliary boards need to be configured at the near end only when client-
side services that are set to services except GE services or standard OTN services.
When a tributary board or line board is used as a meter board or auxiliary board, cross-
connections need to be configured to form a complete service path.
16.34.2 Configuring the PRBS Test Status of the Auxiliary Board

Before you configure a PRBS test on the meter board, set PRBS Test Status of the auxiliary
boards at the local and remote ends.
Prerequisite
The corresponding OTU must be configured.
The service type must be set according to the board type.
The WDM-side outloop, client-side inloop, or fiber loopback is configured on the remote
auxiliary board based on the networking requirements.


Precautions
CAUTION
l Create cross-connections between the IP port and the ClientLP port before enabling the PRBS
on the client side. Otherwise, the PRBS test will fail to be enabled. Do not delete the created
cross-connections after the PRBS is enabled.
l After the PRBS Test Status is enabled, do not perform any other operations, such as
modifying the service type, opening or closing a laser, or configuring a loopback.
l After the PRBS test is complete, stop the test. Then, configure the PRBS Test Status of the
board to Disabled.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as an auxiliary board and choose
Configuration > WDM Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click PRBS Test Status field, and select
Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply. A message is displayed indicating that the operation was successful. Click
Close.
NOTE
Set the service type of the auxiliary board before configuring the PRBS test status.
----End
16.34.3 Configuring PRBS Test on the Meter Board

In the PRBS test, the OTU sends out the PRBS code and monitors the PRBS code that is looped
back from the remote board. After comparing the PRBS code that is sent with the code that is
received, you can determine that the current link or equipment is normal or not.
Prerequisite

The corresponding OTU must be configured.

The service type must be set according to the board type.
Before enabling the PRBS test on the client side, ensure that the client-side lasers of all OTU
boards are turned on.
When enabling the PRBS test, you need to enable PRBS Test Status of the port on the OTU
board which is used as auxiliary board.

Precautions
CAUTION
When the PRBS test is performed, it is not allowed to access services. A PRBS test is used only
in deployment. After the deployment, set PRBS Test Status to Disabled.
Before starting the PRBS function on the client side, create a cross-connection between the IP
and clientLP ports; otherwise, starting the PRBS function fails. After the PRBS function is
started, the cross-connection cannot be deleted.

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the OTU board which is used as meter board and choose
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function tree.
Step 2 Select a channel or a port in the right pane, and set Duration and Measured in Time.
NOTE
Measured in Time: The unit is second, 10 minute, or hour. Select a proper unit based on the actual situation.
Step 3 Optional: Choose Accumulating Mode. The test result is displayed in the coordinates pane in
an accumulative manner.
NOTE
In a cumulative mode, the bit error value in the n second is the sum of the bit errors in the previous n
seconds.
Step 4 Click Start to Test. A dialog box indicating that this operation may interrupt the service is
displayed.
Step 5 Click OK to start the PRBS test.
Step 6 After the test is complete, view the test result in the coordinates pane.

NOTE
l If the green histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the equipment is normally working.
l If the red histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, bit errors exist on the line.
l If the yellow histogram is displayed in the coordinates pane, the line might be interrupted or have loud
noise.
----End
16.35 Managing NE Power Consumption

You can configure power consumption monitoring and energy conservation for an NE, to ensure
that energy conservation and environment protection can be achieved when the NE runs in the
normal state.
16.35.1 Monitoring NE Power Consumption

You can monitor the power consumption of an NE, to ensure that the actual NE configuration
does not exceed the maximum power consumption.
Querying the Power Consumption of an NE

After you query the power consumption of an NE, if the power consumption exceeds the
threshold, you need to configure energy conservation for the NE in a timely manner.
Prerequisites
It applies to the OptiX OSN 8800 or OptiX OSN 6800.

You can use this function to query the power consumption threshold, and the nominal and current
power consumption of an NE.
You can query the power consumption of an NE on a per-subrack basis. The power consumption
of an NE is displayed in the NE/Shelf Name format.
You can query the NE threshold of the OptiX OSN 8800 on a per-partition basis.
The nominal power consumption of an NE is the sum of the nominal power consumption of all
boards on the NE.
The current power consumption of an NE is the actual power consumption of a running NE and
is calculated based on the actual voltage and current.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Power
Management from the Main Menu. Click the NE Power tab.
Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more NEs. After the double-right-arrow button
turns red, click the button.
Step 3 Click Query and the result is displayed.
----End
Querying the Power Consumption of a Board

You can query the power consumption of a board to learn the board that has abnormally high
power consumption, which causes high NE power consumption or threshold crossing.
Prerequisites

U2000
l You can use this function to query the logical board status, board nominal power
consumption, physical board type, board current power consumption, and other
information.
l The nominal power consumption of a board is a fixed value and is coded in the software.
l The current power consumption of a board is the actual power consumption of a running
board and is calculated based on the actual voltage and current.
Procedure
Management from the Main Menu. Click the Board Power tab.
Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more boards, and click .

----End
16.35.2 Configuring Energy Conservation for an NE

You can configure energy conservation for an NE to dynamically adjust the power consumption
of the NE. In this way, environment protection and energy conservation are achieved.
Prerequisites

U2000
There are five power saving modes of an NE: Idle Boards, Idle Low Order Cross-Connect
Board, Idle Ports, Standby Cross-Connect Board, and Idle Cross-Connect Bus.
Idle Low Order Cross-Connect Board is applicable only to the XCM and SXM boards (when
the SXM board is used with the XCT board) intended for the OptiX OSN 8800, but not applicable
to the XCH boards.
Table 16-3 lists the power saving measures specified to power saving modes.
Table 16-3 Power saving measures specific to power saving modes
Power- Power Saving Measure

Saving
Mode Idle Cross- Idle Boards Idle Ports Standby Idle Low
Connect Cross- Order
Bus Connect Cross-
Board Connect
Board
Normal Y N N N N
mode
Power- Y Y Y N N
Saving
mode

Power- Power Saving Measure

Saving
Mode Idle Cross- Idle Boards Idle Ports Standby Idle Low
Connect Cross- Order
Bus Connect Cross-
Board Connect
Board
Enhanced Y Y Y Y Y
power-
saving mode
Procedure
Management from the Main Menu. Click the Power Saving Configuration tab.
Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more NEs, and click .
Step 3 Set Power-Saving Mode to Normal mode, Power-Saving mode, or Enhanced power-saving
mode.
Step 4 Click Apply.
Step 5 Click Query. Confirm that the query results are the same as the set values.
----End
16.35.3 Viewing the Network-wide NE Power Consumption Report

By viewing the network-wide power consumption report, you can learn the network-wide power
consumption statistics, annually-conserved energy, and other information.
Prerequisites

U2000
Querying the network-wide NE power consumption is time-consuming. If the number of NEs
queried exceeds 100, a dialog box is displayed asking you whether to continue.
The network-wide NE power consumption report is based on NEs instead of subracks.

Procedure
Management from the Main Menu. Click the Power Consumption Stat. Report tab.
Step 2 In the left-hand Physical Root, select one or more NEs, and click .
NOTE
It is recommended that you do not select more than 100 NEs at a time. Otherwise, the operation may take
a long time.
NOTE
l During the query process, you can learn the query status according to the progress bar.
l Click Cancel to stop the query.
Step 4 Optional: Click Print to print the NE power consumption report.

Step 5 Optional: Click Save As to save the report to any directory.
----End
16.36 Backing Up and Restoring NE Data

To ensure security of the NE data, you can back up and restore the NE data.
16.36.1 Comparison of NE Data Backup and Restoration Methods

You need to back up important NE data during daily maintenance. This ensures that the SCC
board of the NE automatically restores to normal operation after the NE data in the DRDB
database of the SCC board is lost or a power failure occurs on the equipment. This section
describes several NE data backup and restoration methods. You can select the method as
required.
Comparison of Backup and Restoration Methods

The locations for backing up and restoring the NE database include the SCC board, CF card,
local server, and remote server. The data backup and restoration methods vary according to
storage locations. See Table 16-4.

Table 16-4 Data backup and restoration methods and application scenarios
Backup and Restoration Method Application Scenario
Back up/Restore the NE database to/from an Backs up the NE data in the DRDB database
SCC board of the SCC board to the flash database, when
the SCC board does not have a CF card.
l After a warm reset on the SCC board, the
MDB reads the configuration from the
DRDB database.
l After a cold reset on the SCC board, the
FLASH database.
Back up/Restore the NE database to/from a Backs up the NE data in the DRDB database
CF card of the SCC board to the CF card, when the
SCC board has a CF card.
During the restoration, the database is
restored from the CF card to the DRDB
database of the SCC board.
l After a warm reset on the SCC board, the
DRDB database.
l After a cold reset on the SCC board, the
FLASH database.
Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMS Stores the data in the computer where the
server NMS server resides.
During restoration, select the backup file in
the directory where the NE data is saved.
Back up/Restore the NE data to/from an NMS Stores the data in the computer where the
client NMS client resides.
During restoration, select the backup file in
the directory where the NE data is saved.
NOTE
After the warm resets on other boards, the NE memory data is issued to the boards. When the actual
configuration of a board is consistent with the configuration saved in the database for restoration, the
process of delivering configuration data to the board does not interrupt services.
NOTE
The SCC boards of the OptiX OSN 8800 support CF cards.

The SCC boards of the OptiX OSN 6800 support CF cards.
The SCC board of the OptiX OSN 3800 does not support CF cards.
NE Database
The NE configuration data is saved in the NE database. There are three types of NE databases:

l MDB: Memory database. The data in an MDB database is changed when the configuration
information is changed. The data will be lost when the SCC board is reset or a power failure
occurs.
l DRDB: Dynamic random database. The data that is verified is automatically saved in the
DRDB database. The data will be lost when a power failure occurs but will not be lost after
a warm reset is performed.
l FDB: Flash database. There are FDB0 and FDB1 databases. The data can be saved
permanently.
When the NE configuration data is issued to the SCC board, it is saved in the MDB database. If
the verification is successful, the SCC board automatically copies the contents in the MDB
database to the DRDB database and issues the verified configuration data to the boards. The
DRDB database is copied from the DRDB database to the FDB database, as a backup of the
DRDB database. When the NE is restarted after a power failure, the SCC board checks whether
there is configuration data in the DRDB database. If there is configuration data, the data is
restored from the DRDB database. If the data in the DRDB database is damaged, the data is
restored from the FDB0 and FDB1 databases.
NE Configuration Data
The NE configuration data refers to the information in the DRDB database of the NE, such as
the board configuration, clock configuration and protection relationships of the NE. It is the
instruction file of the NE and the key for the NE to operate normally on the entire network.
NE Database Package
The NE database package is a package that contains all database files on an NE and a file list
that defines and manages those files.
The NE database package and NE configuration data are the same data on the NE of different
software versions.
16.36.2 Manually Backing Up the NE Database to a CF Card

You need to back up the NE database during the daily maintenance. You can back up the NE
data in the DRDB database of the SCC board to a CF card manually, to ensure the automatic
restoration of the operation after the data in the DRDB database is lost on the SCC board or a
power failure occurs on the equipment.
Prerequisites
l You must have logged in to the NE as an NE user with "System Level" authority.
l The SCC board must be configured with the CF card.

U2000

Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data
Management from the Main Menu, and the NE Configuration interface is displayed.
2. In the Object Tree, select an NE and click .

3. Select one or more NEs in the NE Configuration.
4. Click Back Up NE Data and then choose Manually Back Up Database to CF Card.
5. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
6. Click Close in the Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
16.36.3 Backing Up Device Data to the NMS Server or the NMS

Client
This operation describes how to backup device data manually for multiple device(s) of same
device type. You can backup device data to the NMS server or the NMS client.
Prerequisites
The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.

U2000
l Backup operation can be performed only for multiple devices of same device type.
l On selecting the device type in the device tree, all the devices and the device type versions
related to the device type is displayed in the NE View table.
l The files backed up from the server can be viewed in the Backup Information tab.
Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE
Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu.
2. Right click the device(s) that you want to backup in the NE View table.
NOTE
The Backup Information tab is unavailable when multiple devices are selected.
3. Select Backup... to open the Backup dialog.
4. Select the option NMS Server or NMS Client to backup the selected device information.
NOTE
By default the NMS Server is selected. If the NMS Server is selected, the selected device information
is stored on the NMS server.
5. Optional: If the NMS Client is selected, click to select the location where the device
data have to be backed up.
6. Click Start to start the backup operation for the selected device(s). On the NE View tab
page, the backup progress is displayed.

7. When the backup operation is successful, the NMS creates the dbf.pkg file in the NEName/
yyyymmddhhmmss directory. "NEName" indicates the name of the NE, "yyyymmdd"
indicates the date when the backup is created, and "hhmmss" indicates the time when the
backup is created.
16.36.4 Restoring the NE Database from the SCC Board

When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE
data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up to the Flash database on the SCC
board.
Prerequisites
l You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.
l The NE data from DRDB Database must be backed up to Flash database on the SCC board.

U2000
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click the active SCC board in the NE panel, choose Warm Reset or Cold Reset.
NOTE
The reset modes for different SCC board are different. You need to choose the reset mode as required.
Step 2 Click OK in the Warning dialog box.
Step 3 Click Close in the Result dialog box.
----End
16.36.5 Restoring the NE Database from the CF Card

When the database file is lost due to the NE maintenance or NE fault, you can restore the NE
data from the DRDB database file that is already backed up on the CF card.
Prerequisites
You must log in to the NE as an NE user with system level authority.
The SCC board must be with a CF card and the NE data from DRDB database must be backed
up to the CF card.

U2000

Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data
Management from the Main Menu, and the NE Configuration Data Management
interface is displayed.
2. In the Object Tree on the left, select an NE and click .

3. In NE Configuration, select an NE or multiple NEs.
4. Click Restore NE Database from CF Card. The Confirm dialog box is displayed,
indicating that the restoration of the NE database may lead to service interruption.
5. Click OK to start to restore the NE database.
NOTE
If the database is performing a scheduled backup task, a message will be displayed on the NMS, indicating
that restoring data from the CF card will fail. In this scenario, you are advised to wait 5 minutes, and restore
data again from the CF card after the database finishes the scheduled backup task.
6. Click Closeafter an Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
After the NE databases are restored, the NE software issues the data in the CF card to only the SCC board
but not other boards. To ensure that the configurations in the SCC board and the configurations in other
boards are consistent, you need to perform warm resets on other boards.
16.36.6 Recovering Device Data from the NMS Server or the NMS
Client
This operation describes how to recover the device data from the NMS Server or the NMS Client.
Prerequisites
l The FTP/TFTP/SFTP server is configured and the FTP/TFTP/SFTP service is started.
l To perform the Recover operation from client, the SFTP server must be configured, and
the SFTP service is started.
l You cannot perform the Recover operation for multiple devices of different device types.
l On selecting the device type in the device tree, all the device information related to the
device type is displayed in the NE View table.

U2000
Procedure
1. In the Main Topology view, choose Administration > NE Software Management > NE
Data Backup/Restoration from the Main Menu.
2. Right click the device(s) that you want to recover in the NE View table.
3. Select Recover... to open the Recover dialog.
4. In the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered. If the backup file is listed
in the File Name drop-down list, select the file to be recovered, and turn to 7. If the backup

file is not listed in the File Name drop-down list, click Browse... to select the backup file
in the Select File dialog box.
5. Select NMS Server or NMS Client to recover the backup file for the selected device(s).
By default NMS Server is selected.
l If NMS Server is selected, you need to select the appropriate backup file from the NMS
server. The selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File field.
l If NMS Client is selected, you need to click to select the backup file from the
NMS Client. The selected backup file path is displayed in the Select File field.
6. Click OK.
NOTE
The selected backup file path from the NMS Server or NMS Client is displayed in the File Name drop-
down list.
7. Click Start, the Operation Confirmation dialog box is displayed.
8. In the Operation Confirmation dialog, click Yes to start the recover operation. The
recover operation status is displayed in the NE View table.
Result
After the device data is recovered, right click the device in the NE View table. Select Activation
Database... to open the Activation Database dialog box, and then click Start to activate the
device database.
NOTE
If you do not activate the software within five minutes after the restoration is successfully complete, the
U2000 automatically rolls back the software and cancels the restoration operation.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide 17 Parameters Reference
17 Parameters Reference
About This Chapter
Describes the parameter-related information that needs to be configured for boards in different
types and WDM system functions on the U2000.
17.1 Parameters (Creating a Network)
Describes the parameters involved in the network configuration.
17.2 Parameters: WDM Interface
This section describes how to configure ports on WDM boards.
17.3 Parameters (Configuring Wavelength Grooming)
Describes the parameters involved in the wavelength grooming configuration.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
17.1 Parameters (Creating a Network)

Describes the parameters involved in the network configuration.
17.1.1 Laser Spectrum Analysis

The laser spectrum analysis is used to analyze an optical signal and to obtain parameters such
as optical power, central wavelengths and optical signal noise ratios (OSNRs) of the optical
paths. You can use this function to determine the transmission quality of the current optical
signal. In this user interface, you can query and print the spectrum analysis result of the optical
signal.
Parameters
Field Value Description
Port Number l On the U2000, for Displays the port number of

example: NE185-10- each path of the spectrum
MCA-2(R02) analysis board.
l On the Web LCT, for For MCA4, there are four
example: 1(IN1) ports. For MCA8, there are
eight ports.
Compensation Power (dBm) Range: -10 to +30. For Due to the factors such as the
example: 20 coupling ratio and optical
board attenuation of the
spectrum analysis board, the
optical power value of each
path after analysis has a fixed
deviation from the actual
value. You can set this field
to keep consistency between
the analysis value and the
actual one.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Spectrum Data Wavelength No, Standard Displays the result of the

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency optical performance data
(THz), Central Wavelength after spectrum analysis.
(nm)/Frequency (THz), Wavelength No: indicates the
Wavelength Deviation (nm), wavelength No. of each
Optical Power (dBm), OSNR optical path.
(dB)
Standard Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz): indicates
the standard central
wavelength of the optical
path.
Central Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz): indicates
the actual central wavelength
of the optical path.
Wavelength Deviation (nm):
deviation between the
standard wavelength and the
actual wavelength.
Optical Power (dBm): the
optical power of the optical
path.
OSNR (dB): the optical
signal noise ratio of the
optical path.
Spectrum Waveform None Displays spectrum data in

graphics.
Profile None Displays the spectrum profile

of the optical signal.
X-Axis Frequency Checked, Unchecked Specifies that the X-axis for

the Spectrum Data,
Spectrum Waveform, and
Profile represents the
frequency.
X-Axis Wavelength Checked, Unchecked Specifies that the X-axis for

the Spectrum Data,
Spectrum Waveform, and
Profile represents the
wavelength.
Automatically query when Checked, Unchecked Sets whether to automatically

this window is displayed query when the window is
displayed.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
17.1.2 Wavelength Monitoring Management

Wavelength monitoring boards such as the WMU can monitor wavelengths transmitted from
the optical ports at the WDM side of the OTU boards (including service convergence units).
This section describes how to query and set the wavelength monitoring.
Parameters
Wavelength Monitoring Unit For example: OTM1- Selects a wavelength

NE183-5-WMU-1(IN1) monitoring unit.
Wavelength Monitoring For example: OTM1- Displays the wavelength

Object NE183-2-TMX-1(IN/OUT) monitored object.
Wavelength For example: C/ Displays the wavelength of

1/1529.16/196.050 the monitored object.
17.1.3 Orderwire Board Settings

This section describes how to set the orderwire board before running the equipment. The setting
options contain orderwire board settings and settings for the first orderwire phone.
Parameters
Orderwire Board Available For example: The boards that can be set as the
Settings Boards SC1 orderwire board.
Selected Board For example: The board that is selected as the

SC1 orderwire board.
Settings for the Available For example: The boards that can be set as the first
First Orderwire Boards SC1 orderwire board.
Phone
Selected Board For example: The board that is selected as the first
SC1 orderwire board.
17.1.4 General
This section describes how to set orderwire phone before running the equipment. You can set
call waiting time, dialing mode, conference call number, one to three orderwire phone number,
and orderwire phone port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Call Waiting Time(s) 1-9 The Call Waiting Time(s)

Default: 9 parameter specifies the
timeout period of searching an
orderwire route. If the period
of searching an orderwire
route exceeds the specified
value, the orderwire phone
changes to the busy tone
status.
On the U2000, click Call
Waiting Time(s) for more
information.
Dialing Mode Pulse, Dual-Tone Frequency Displays the orderwire dialing

Default: Dual-Tone mode.
Frequency
Conference Call 100-99999999 The Conference Call

Default: 999 parameter specifies the phone
numbers of networkwide
orderwire calls.
On the U2000, click
Conference Call for more
information.
Phone 1, Phone 2, Phone 3 100-99999999 The Phone parameter

specifies the phone numbers
of orderwire addressing calls.
An addressing call refers to a
point-to-point call.
The overhead supports a
maximum of 3-channel
orderwire phone number. As
some of the equipments
support Phone1 only, Phone2
and Phone3 are not available.
When the value is null, after
the configuration is delivered,
the corresponding data on
NEs remains unchanged
instead of being cleared.
On the U2000, click Phone for
more information.
Selected Orderwire Port For example: 12-SC2-1 Selects the line board port for
orderwire transmission.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Available Orderwire Port Available Orderwire Port The Available Orderwire

Default: Bid-BidType-PortID Port parameter specifies
whether the optical interface
is used to make orderwire
calls.
On the U2000, click Available
Orderwire Port for more
information.
17.1.5 Conference Call

This section describes how to query and set the use mode of conference call at an NE, query and
set conference call attributes, and select a conference call port.
Parameters
Conference Call Authorities Able to Listen and Speak, Displays or sets the
Able to Listen but not Speak conference call authorities.
Default: Able to Listen and NOTE
Speak l Able to Listen and Speak:
The user of the conference
call can either hear the
voices from other phones in
the networkwide
conference call or let other
phone users hear his own
voice.
l Able to Listen but not
Speak: The user of the
conference call can only
hear the voices from other
phones in the networkwide
conference call but cannot
let other phone users hear
his own voice.
Selected Conference Call For example: 12-SC2-1 The optical ports in this list
Port are used for conference call.
Available Conference Call Available Orderwire Port The Available Conference

Port Default: Bid-BidType- Call Port parameter
PortID specifies whether the optical
interface is used to make
conference calls.
On the U2000, click
Available Conference Call
Port for more information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
17.1.6 Auxiliary
This section describes how to query and set auxiliary parameters.
Parameters
Subnet No. Length 1, 2 The Subnet No. Length

Default: 1 parameter specifies the
length of the subnet number
of the orderwire subnets if the
entire network is divided into
multiple orderwire subnets.
On the U2000, click Subnet
No. Length for more
information.
First Communication Port l On the U2000: S1, S2, Selects the first data
RS232, RS422 communication port for SDH
l On the Web LCT: RS232, NNI connection to achieve
RS422 the communication with the
opposite end of the SDH NNI
orderwire.
First Phone Port F1 port, Phone2, Phone3 Selects the first phone port
for the SDH NNI orderwire.
17.1.7 NE Attributes
This section describes how to view and set NE attributes, including NE ID, subrack type, and
IP address.
Parameters
l On the U2000: ID For example: 1 Displays the unique ID of an

l On the Web LCT: NE ID NE on the NMS for
identifying an NE, which is
the basis of communication
between the NMS and an NE.
Extended ID 1 to 254 For NE ID extension.

Default: 9 On the U2000, click
Extended ID for more
information.
Name For example: NE70 Displays the NE name, for

the convenience of searching
for the NE.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Remarks - Enters extra notes of the NE

if desired.
Gateway Type l On the U2000: Non- The gateway type of an NE

gateway, Gateway decides the mode of
l On the Web LCT: IP communication between the
Gateway, Serial Port NE and the NMS.
Affiliated ONE For example: ONE A Selects the affiliated ONE.
Affiliated Gateway For example: NE181 When you are creating a

Non-Gateway NE, you can
select a created gateway NE
as its affiliated GNE here.
Affiliated Gateway Protocol IP Displays the protocol used

for communication between
the affiliated Gateway NE
and the NMS.
l On the U2000: NE User For example: root The NE name is used when
l On the Web LCT: User logging in to the NE. Before
Name the NE is configured, use the
internally reserved user name
root for login.
Password For example: password Corresponds to the above NE

user password. The
corresponding password for
the reserved user root is
password.
17.1.8 NE User Management

This section describes how to manage NE users for the specific NE. You can query, add, delete
and modify an NE user, and set password for the NE user.
Parameters (U2000)
Table 17-1 NE user parameters

NE For example: NE70 The operation object

selected.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NE user Up to 8 characters can be The name of NE user.

supported. Click NE User (NE User
Management) for more
information.
User Level Monitor level, Operation The operations carried out by

level, Maintenance level, the NE user are classified into
System level, Debug level five levels, namely monitor
level, operation level,
maintenance level, system
level and debug level from
the lowest level to the
highest. Each user of higher
level can perform all the
functions that a lower level
user can do. For example, an
operation level user has all
the rights processed by a
monitor level user. The
detailed right settings for
each level are:
l Monitor level: all query
commands, log in/out,
and modification of its
own password
l Operation level: all
settings for fault and
performance, partial
security settings, and
partial configuration
l Maintenance level:
partial security settings,
partial configuration,
communication settings,
and log management
l System level: all security
settings, all
configuration.
l Debug level: all security
settings, all
configuration, and all
debug commands
Click User Level (NE User
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NE User Flag LCT NE user, EMS NE user, Different NE users are used
CMD NE user, General NE for logging in to NEs through
user different network
management systems.
LCT NE user: NE user used
when NEs are managed by
LCT.
EMS NE user: NE user used
EMS.
CMD NE user: NE user used
CMD.
General NE user: NE user
used when NEs are managed
by the network management
system of any type.
Click NE User Flag (NE User
information.
User Group Belonged Administrator User Group, Displays the user group of
Super Administrator User NE user.
Group, Operator User Group,
Monitor User Group,
Maintainer User Group
Detailed Description Up to 32 characters can be Displays the user description.

supported.
Whether the password is Yes, No Sets whether the password is

allowed to be modified allowed to be modified
immediately immediately. This setting is
supported only for release 5.0
NEs.
Time of Canceling User 5-60, Disable Specifies the time that will
Automatically(m) elapse before the NE user
automatically logs out.
User Valid Till(days) 1-999, Not overdue Specifies the number of the
days that the NE user will be
valid for.
Password Valid Till(days) 1-999, Not overdue Specifies the number of the
days that the NE user
password will be valid for.
Isonline Yes, No Specifies whether the NE

user is online.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters (Web LCT)
Table 17-2 NE user parameters

NE For example: NE70 The operation object

selected.
NE User For example: USER The name of the NE user. The

name consists of 4-16
characters. It can be a
combination of letters, digits,
spaces and underlines. Note
that at least one letter must be
included.
User Level Monitor level, Operation The operations carried out by

level, Maintenance level, the NE user are classified into
System level, Debug level. five levels, namely monitor
level, operation level,
maintenance level, system
level, debug level from the
lowest level to the highest.
Each user of higher level can
perform all the functions that
a lower level user can do. The
detailed right settings for
each level are:
l Monitor level: all query
commands, log in/out,
and modification of its
own password.
l Operation level: all
settings for fault and
performance, partial
security settings, and
partial configuration.
l Maintenance level:
partial security settings,
partial configuration,
communication settings,
and log management.
l System level: all security
settings, all
configuration.
l Debug level: all security
settings, all
configuration, and all
debug commands. Debug
level is the highest level.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NE User Flag LCT NE User, EMS NE Different NMSs log in to the

User, CMD NE User, NE using different NE users.
General NE User LCT NE User: The LCT is
the local craft terminal of the
Web LCT. This user is the
one that the LCT uses for
managing the NE.
EMS NE User: The EMS is
the Web LCT. This user is the
one that the Web LCT uses
for managing the NE.
CMD NE User: CMD is the
command line NMS. This
user is the one that is used for
managing the NE by
command line.
General NE User: NE user
without partition NM.
New Password - The new password must

contain at least eight
characters in three formats
(letters, digits, and special
characters). The new
password cannot be the same
as the user name or reverse of
the user name, or the same as
one of the most recent five
passwords. In addition, the
new password must contain
different characters in at least
two character positions.
Confirm Password - The new password of the user

that you need to enter again.
User Group Belonged For example: Administrator Displays the belonged user
User Group group name.
Login Allowed Yes, No Sets whether the NE user is

allowed to log in.
Permanently Valid or not Yes, No Sets whether the NE user is

permanently valid or not.
Valid From For example: 2005-05-07 The start time of user

10:18:07 validity.
Valid Till For example: 2005-05-07 The expiration time of user

10:18:07 validity.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Whether the password is Yes, No Sets whether the password is

allowed to be modified allowed to be modified
immediately immediately.
Records of all Logins Yes, No Sets whether the NE user is

valid permanently.
Allowable Login Start Date For example: Sunday Sets the allowable login start
date. The parameter is valid
when Records of all Logins
is set to No.
Allowable Login Start Time For example: 00:00:00 Time format is hour: min:
second.
Sets the allowable login start
time. The parameter is valid
is set to No.
Allowable Login End Date For example: Saturday Sets the allowable login end
is set to No.
Allowable Login End Time For example: 23:59:59 Time format is hour: min:
second.
Sets the allowable login end
is set to No.
Time to Lock User for No 0-255 Sets the time to lock the NE
Activities (Day) user for no activities.
Maximum Password 25-999 Sets the maximum password

Validity (Day) validity.
Password Modification Time For example: 2007-01-23 Displays the password

10:28:26 modification time.
Last Login Time For example: 2007-01-23 Displays the last login time of
10:28:00 the NE user.
17.1.9 NE Time Synchronization

This section describes how to set NE time, to keep it synchronized with the U2000 server time.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
NMS Time l On the U2000, Displays the time of the

format: mm/dd/yyyy U2000 server in real
hh:mm:ss time.
l On the Web LCT, for
example: 2006-11-04
20:30:00
NE Name For example: NE1 Displays the name of the

NE.
NE ID Format: Extended ID-ID Displays the ID of the

NE.
Synchronous Mode l On the U2000: Displays the

Standard NTP, NMS, synchronization mode of
NULL NE Time.
l On the Web LCT: On the U2000, click
NMS, NULL Synchronous Mode (NE
Time Synchronization)
for more information.
Standard NTP Authentication Enabled, Disabled Displays or sets whether

the standard NTP
authentication is
enabled.
On the U2000, click
Standard NTP
Authentication for more
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Server Enabled ECC Server, Disabled Displays or sets whether

to set it to the NTP server
and the type of the NTP
server.
When the ECC protocol
is used for
communication between
NEs, the gateway NE is
an ECC server. So, the
Server Enabled
parameter is set to ECC
Server. While non-
gateway NEs are ECC
clients and the Server
Enabled parameter is set
to Disabled.
When the IP protocol is
used for communication
between NEs, all NEs
are IP clients and the
Server Enabled
parameter is set to
Disabled.
Client Enabled ECC Client, IP Client, Displays or sets whether

Disabled to set it to the NTP client
and the type of the NTP
client.
When the IP protocol is
used for communication
between the NE and the
NTP server, the NE is an
IP client and the Client
Enabled parameter are
set to IP Client.
Synchronous Server NE ID, IP address Displays or sets the IP

address or NE ID of the
NTP synchronous
server.
If the client type is ECC
Client, set it to the NE ID
of the synchronous
server.
If the client type is IP
Client, set it to the IP
address of the
synchronous server.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Polling Period (min) 2 to 1440 Minutes Displays the period of

synchronizing the NE
time with the NTP server
time.
The Number of Sampling 1 to 8 It indicates how many

times the NTP server
time will be sampled in a
querying cycle. The NTP
server time is the average
of that sampled.
NE Current Time l On the U2000, Displays the current time

format: mm/dd/yyyy of the NE.
hh:mm:ss
l On the Web LCT, for
example: 2006-11-04
20:30:00
Daylight Saving Time Yes, No Displays whether to save

the time in the daytime or
not.
Recent NE Synchronization Time l On the U2000, The latest time when the
format: mm/dd/yyyy NE was synchronized.
hh:mm:ss If the difference between
l On the Web LCT, for the current NE time and
example: 2006-11-04 the latest time when the
20:30:00 NE was synchronized is
within two querying
cycles, it indicates the
NTP server is running
normally. Otherwise, it
indicates the NTP server
is not running normally,
and the color of the
parameter box will
change to the one that is
for "Major Alarm".
l Set Auto Synchronizati l On the U2000, Sets the start time of

Synchronization on Starting format: mm/dd/yyyy synchronizing the NE
Parameter Time hh:mm:ss time with the NMS time.
(U2000) l On the Web LCT, for Applied only when the
l Synchronization example: 2006-11-04 NE time is synchronized
Starting Time 20:30:00 with the NMS time.
(Web LCT)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Synchronizati 1 to 300 Sets the cycle of

on Period Default: 1 automatically
(days) synchronizing the NE
time with the NMS time.
Applied only when the
NE time is synchronized
with the NMS time.
On the U2000, click
Synchronization Period
(days) (NE Time
Synchronization) for
more information.
Standard NTP Server Identifier NE ID, IP Sets the identifier of the

NE.
On the U2000, click
Standard NTP Server
Identifier for more
information.
Standard NTP Server For example: 1-1 or Sets the ID or IP address

129.9.0.1 of the standard NTP
server.
Standard NTP Server Key 0 to 1024 Sets the key of the

standard NTP server.
17.1.10 Standard NTP Key Management

This section describes how to manage standard NTP keys.
Parameters
NE Name For example: oadm1- Displays the name of an NE.

NE112
NE ID For example: 9-112 Displays the NE ID.
Key 1 to 1024 Sets the key number. When you

create keys in batches, you can enter
the key numbers in the a-b format or
use a comma to separate the
numbers. For example, if you create
four keys whose numbers are 1, 2, 3,
4, you can enter the key number as
1-4, or "1,2,3,4".

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Password 6 to 16 characters Specifies the password that contains

at least a numeral and a letter.
Trusted Yes, No If you select No, when NEs

synchronize clocks, the NEs verify
the key and the key is untrusted.
Hence, the clock of the NE cannot be
synchronized with the standard NTP
server.
17.1.11 Path Binding

This section describes how to configure or query the path binding.
Parameters
Port For example, NE832-12- Displays available optical

TDX-151(IMP1/IMP1) ports.
Direction Uplink, Downlink Displays the sink of Ethernet

services.
Path Binding ODU1 (1, 2, 3, 4) Displays the bound paths.
Binding Path Count 1, 2, 3, 4 Displays the number of

bound paths.
Slot ID For example, 12-TDX Displays the board that

realizes path binding.
Port ID For example, 151(IMP1/ Displays ports available for

IMP1) the board.
Available Bound Path For example, ODU1-1 Displays available paths.
Selected Bound Path For example, ODU1-1 Displays the selected paths.
NOTE
The bound path ODU1-1 is
required.
17.2 Parameters: WDM Interface

This section describes how to configure ports on WDM boards.
On the right side of the window, there are four domains from the top down:
l The first field provides two option buttons (By Board/Port (Channel) and By Function)
that are used to select the attribute classification mode.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l The second field specifies the object that needs to be set after the classification, which
varies with the first field.
l The third field specifies attributes, which vary with the second field. Double-click or select
to set attributes (for attribute description, refer to the parameter descriptions of different
boards).
l The last field provides two buttons at the bottom: Query and Apply. Before setting, you
can click Query to query the board attribute from the NE and after setting you need to click
Apply to send the configurations.
17.2.1 Optical Transponder Board

This section describes how to set parameters for optical transponder boards. The parameters are
laser status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use
status.
Parameters (U2000)
Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE name- Slot Displays the position of

No.- Board name- Optical port this optical port.
number (Optical port name)
Optical Interface Name For example: IN/OUT Displays the default names.
Do not modify this field.
Laser Status Open, Close Sets the status of a laser.

Default: Open Click Laser Status (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Automatic Laser Shutdown Values of parameters vary with Sets whether to shut down
different boards and products. the laser automatically or
For details, click the links in the not. If auto-shutdown is set,
Description column. when the received signal is
lost, the laser shuts down
automatically, so that the
laser service life is
extended and body injury is
avoided.
Click Automatic Laser
Shutdown (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Port Mapping Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 Displays the flow control
G), MAC Transparent mode of a trail to which that
Mapping (10.7 G), Bit services at this port are
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), mapped.
Encapsulated to FEC5G, Click Port Mapping (WDM
Encapsulated to OTU5G Interface) for more
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Client Service Bearer Rate The transmission rate of the Displays the rate range of
(M) client-side service varies client services that the
according to different OTU equipment can bear.
boards as follows: Click Client Service Bearer
l 100 to 2500 (applicable to Rate (Mbit/s) (WDM
the LDMS, LDMD, Interface) for more
12LDM, 12LQMS, information.
12LQMD, 13LQM, and
TOM boards)
l 100 to 5000 (applicable to
the 12LOM board)
other OTU boards)
Default: 2500
Service Type For example: GE Queries or sets the service

type of the client side.
Click Service Type (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Service Mode SDH, OTN Sets the service mode for a

Default: OTN port.
Click Service Mode
(WDM Interface) for more
information.
Client Rate (bit/s) 155M, 622M, 2.5G Sets the rate of accessing
Default: 155M services at the optical port
on the client side of a board.
Click Client Rate (bit/s)
information.
Current Bearer Rate (M) 0 to 65535 Queries the rate of services

accessed at the optical port
on the client side for such
OTUs at any rate
Click Current Bearer Rate
(Mbit/s) (WDM Interface)
LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the

Default: Disabled LPT function of the
service.
Click LPT Enabled (WDM
Interface) for more
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
FC Internal Working Mode Normal Mode, Special Mode Sets the FC internal
working mode.
Timeslot Allocation Mode Manual, Automatic Sets the timeslot allocation

mode.
Channel Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether to use the

Default: Used channel or not.
Click Channel Use Status
information.
Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Sets loopback according to

Outloop the port of the OTU board.
LCK Insertion in the ODU Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to insert LCK
Layer Default: Disabled or not.
Click LCK Insertion in the
ODU Layer (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Max. Bearer Ratio (M) 34 to 2700 Displays the maximum

traffic that can be
processed.
Click Max. Bearer Ratio
(M) (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Min. Bearer Ratio (M) 34 to 2700 Displays the minimum

traffic that can be
processed.
Click Min. Bearer Ratio
(M) (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Rate band (M) 34 to 2700 Sets the rate of

transmission for this
optical port.
Click Ratio band (M)
information.
VOA Supported Support, Not Support Sets whether to support

Default: Not Support VOA or not.
Click VOA Supported
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
FEC Working State Enabled, Disabled Sets whether the board

Default: Enable performs FEC processing
on data.
Click FEC Working State
information.
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC Sets the type of FEC.

Default: AFEC Click FEC Mode (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
PAUSE Frame Flow Control Enable, Disable Click PAUSE Frame Flow
Default: Enable Control (WDM Interface)
Wavelength No./ Optical For example: C/ Displays the working

Interface Wavelength (nm)/ 1/1560.61/192.10 wavelength of the optical
Frequency (THz) port.
Auto-Negotiation Disabled, Enabled Sets whether to perform

Default: Disabled port auto-negotiation.
Click Auto-Negotiation
information.
Max. Packet Length 1518 to 9600 Sets the maximum packet

length of the data, and any
packet exceeding this
length is discarded.
Click Max. Packet Length
information.
Band Type C Displays the band type of

the optical port.
Click Band Type (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Board Receiving/ Single fed and single receiving, Displays the receiving/
Transmitting Attributes dual fed and selective receiving transmitting attributes of
board.
Click Board Receiving/
Transmitting Attributes
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board Tracing Clock Source Local Clock Source, Line Sets the tracing clock
Clock Source source of the board.
Default: Local Clock Source Click Board Tracing Clock
Source (WDM Interface)
ESC Auxiliary Switch Disable, Enable Sets status of the ESC

Default: Enable auxiliary switch.
Click ESC Auxiliary
Switch (WDM Interface)
Planned Wavelength No./ For example: Displays the working

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1529.16/196.05 wavelength, wavelength
(THz) number and frequency of a
port that you configure.
Click Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Planned Band Type L, RAMAN_C, C Plus, Sets the band of the

CWDM, C, C (320G), C192, working wavelength. If the
SMC, RAMAN_L, C+L board supports the band
that you configure, the
actual band type is the same
as the configured band
type.
Click Planned Band Type
information.
Actual Wavelength No./ For example: Displays the actual

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1529.16/196.05 working wavelength,
(Thz) wavelength number and
frequency of a port.
Actual Band Type C, CWDM Displays the band of the

current working
wavelength.
Configure Wavelength No./ For example: Displays the working


OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configure Band Type C, CWDM Sets the band of the

working wavelength. If the
board supports the band
that you configure, the
actual band type is the same
as the configured band
type.
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half- Displays the working

Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, modes of the Ethernet port.
100M Half-Duplex, 100M Auto-Negotiation can
Full-Duplex, 1000M Half- automatically determine
Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex the optimized working
Default: 1000M Full-Duplex modes of the connected
ports. This mode is easy to
maintain and is
recommended.
During configuration,
make sure that working
modes of the connected
ports are consistent. If the
working modes are
different, the services are
down.
Click Ethernet Working
Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.
PRBS Test Status Disabled, Enabled Sets the PRBS status of the
Default: Disable tributary board.
Click PRBS Test Status
information.
Remarks - -
SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, Sets the SD switching

ODUk_PM_DEG, condition. Values of
ODUk_TCM1_DEG, parameters vary with
ODUk_TCM2_DEG, different boards and
ODUk_TCM3_DEG, products.
ODUk_TCM4_DEG,
ODUk_TCM5_DEG,
ODUk_TCM6_DEG
FC Distance Extension Enabled, Disabled Displays whether the FC

distance extension is
enabled.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Cross-Connect Loopback Values of parameters vary with In the boards, broadcasts

different boards and products. optical signals received by
For details, click the links in the the client side to optical
Description column. transmission modules of
the client side and WDM
side, or broadcasts optical
signals received by the
WDM side to optical
transmission modules of
the WDM side and client
side.
Click Cross-Connect
Loopback (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Ingress Rate (kbps) 64 to 1250 Displays the ingress rate.
Egress Rate (kbps) 64 to 1250 Displays the egress rate.
Port Work Mode For example: OSC Mode Displays the working mode
of the optical port of a
board. Working mode of
the optical port varies with
the board mode.
Non-Intrusive Monitoring Enabled, Disabled Sets the non-intrusive

Status monitoring status.
Hold-Off Time of Automatic 0s to 2s, the increments is 100 Specifies the time between
Laser Shutdown ms. the point when the system
Default: 0s detects an interruption of
the services and the point
when the ALS is started
when the ALS function is
enabled.
Board Mode For example: Eight OSCs A board-level attribute of

Convergence general configuration. You
can manage boards by
switching the mode.
ESC Supervisory Channel Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to combine

ESC monitoring signals.
Protocol Type Normal, Enhanced Sets the protocol type of the

channel. Normal indicates
lower transmission rate.
Enhanced indicates higher
transmission rate and
supports transmitting E1
services.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Band Type/Wavelength No./ For example: C/ Displays the information of

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1529.16/196.050 the optical port, including
(THz) band type, wavelength
number, wavelength and
frequency.
Click Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength(nm)/
Frequency(THz) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE name- Slot Displays the position of this
No.- Board name- Optical optical port.
port number (Optical port
name)
Optical Interface Name For example: RX1/TX1 Displays the default names.
Channel Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether to use the path
or not.
Optical Interface Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Sets loopback according to

Outloop the port of the OTU board.
Loopback may interrupt
services and can be used only
for testing or
troubleshooting.
Service Type For example: GE Sets the service type of the

client side.
OFC Enabled Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable the

OFC function.
This parameter can be edited
only when you set Service
Type of 13LQM or 12LOM
board to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.
Port Mapping Bit Transparent Mapping Displays the flow control

(11.1G), MAC Transparent mode of the mapped trail of
Mapping (10.7G), Bit the service that passes the
Transparent Mapping port.
(11.1G)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Client Service Bearer Rate The transmission rate of the Displays the range of client
(M) client-side service varies service rates that the
according to different OTU equipment can bear.
boards as follows:
the LDMS, LDMD,
12LDM, 12LQMS,
12LQMD, 13LQM, and
TOM boards)
the 12LOM board)
other OTU boards)
Laser Status Open, Close Sets the status of a laser.
Automatic Laser Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to shut down the
laser automatically or not. If
auto-shutdown is set, when
the received signal is lost, the
laser shuts down
laser service life is extended
and body injury is avoided.
Service Mode For example: OTN Selects the service mode of

the port.
Board Mode For example: ITL Mode A board-level attribute of

general configuration. You
can manage boards by
switching the mode.
LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the LPT

pass-through function of the
service.
FC Internal Working Mode Normal Mode, Special Mode Sets the FC internal working
mode.
Current Bearer Rate (M) For example: 50 Displays the rate of the client
service that is currently
accessed.

performs FEC processing on
data.
FEC Type FEC, AFEC Sets the FEC type.
Non-Intrusive Monitoring Enabled, Disabled Sets the non-intrusive

Status monitoring status.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Hold-Off Time of Automatic 0s to 2s, the increments is Specifies the time between
Laser Shutdown 100ms the point when the system
Default: 0s detects an interruption of the
services and the point when
the ALS is started when the
ALS function is enabled.
Actual Wavelength No./ For example: Displays the actual working

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1529.16/196.05 wavelength of the optical
(THz) port.
An actual wavelength is the
optical wavelength emitted
by a laser.

actual working wavelength.

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1529.16/196.05 wavelength configured for
(THz) the optical port.
An configuration wavelength
is a logical wavelength.
During the optical cross-
connection configuration, if
temporarily no required
actual wavelength is
available, you can use the
logical wavelength to
configure the optical cross-
connection.
Configure Band Type C, CWDM Configures the band for the

working wavelength.
Maximum Packet Length 1518-9600 Sets the maximum packet

length of the data. Packets
that exceed this length are
discarded.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Ethernet Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Displays the working modes

Half-Duplex, 10M Full- of the Ethernet port. Auto-
Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, Negotiation can
100M Full-Duplex, 1000M automatically detect the
Half-Duplex, 1000M Full- optimized combination of
Duplex, working modes of the
opposite port. This mode is
easy to maintain and is
recommended.
Make sure that the working
modes of this port and the
opposite port are consistent.
If the port modes are
different, services are down.
OTN Overhead Transparent Disabled, Enabled Enables or disables the

Transmission function of OTN Overhead
Transparent Transmission.
SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, Sets the SD switching

ODUk_PM_DEG, condition.
ODUk_TCM1_DEG,
ODUk_TCM2_DEG,
ODUk_TCM3_DEG,
ODUk_TCM4_DEG,
ODUk_TCM5_DEG,
ODUk_TCM6_DEG
FC Distance Extension Enabled, Disabled Displays whether the FC

distance extension is
enabled.
NOTE
In the case of different boards on different equipment, different WDM interfaces are supported. According to
the corresponding user interface of the NMS, the parameter description table lists the whole set of parameters
in this user interface of the NMS. For detailed parameters supported by each board, see the Hardware
Description for each type of equipment.
17.2.2 Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

This section describes how to set and query the attenuation rate of a port, the fixed band, and
the parity of the working band.
Parameters (U2000)
Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE613-1- Displays the position of this

M40-1 (OUT) optical port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Optical Interface Name For example: OUT Displays default names. Do

not modify this field.
Optical Interface Attenuation Values of parameters vary Sets the actual attenuation
Ratio (dB) with different boards and ratio of the optical port.
products. On the U2000, click Optical
Interface Attenuation Ratio
(dB) (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 The maximum attenuation

rate allowed. When this rate
is exceeded, the output
optical power is too low,
causing the signal-to-noise
ratio of the receive end to fall.
On the U2000, click Max.
Attenuation Rate (dB)
(WDM Interface-Optical
Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer Unit) for more
information.
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 The minimum attenuation

rate allowed. When this rate
is exceeded, the output
optical power is too high,
ratio of the receive end to
decrease.
On the U2000, click Min.
Attenuation Rate (dB)
information.
Fixed Band Values of parameters vary On the U2000, click Fixed

with different boards and Band (WDM Interface) for
products. more information.
Parity of the Working band Odd, Even, FULL Displays the parity of the
Default: FULL working band.
On the U2000, click Parity of
the Working Band (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Actual Band C Displays the actual working

band of the multiplexer and
demultiplexer board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Configure Band C Displays the working band

that you configure.
Threshold of Input Power For example: -50 The power that is smaller
Loss (dBm) than this value cannot be
determined.
On the U2000, click
Threshold of Input Power
Loss (dBm) (WDM
Interface-Optical
Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer Unit) for more
information.
Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Sets the parity of the working
band for a port.
Configure Working Band Even, Odd Sets the parity of the working
Parity band for a port.
PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT 0.00 to 1.00 Sets PMD coefficient.

(km))
Chromatic Dispersion -15.00 to 30.00 Sets chromatic dispersion

Coefficient (ps/(nm*km)) coefficient.
Channel Number Mode C40 Mode, C80 Mode, Sets and queried the channel
CWDM Mode number mode for the
calculation of the resource
utilization.
DCM Dispersion Send, Receive Set DCM dispersion

Compensation Direction compensation direction.
DCM Dispersion 1.0 to 6500.0 Set DCM dispersion

Compensation Value (ps/ compensation value.
nm)


M40-1 (OUT) optical port.
Optical Interface Name For example: OUT Displays default names. Do

Optical Interface Attenuation For example: 20 Sets the actual attenuation

Rate (dB) ratio of the optical port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 40 Displays the maximum

attenuation ratio allowed.
When this ratio is exceeded,
the output optical power is
too low, causing the signal-
to-noise ratio of the receive
end to fall.
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 0 Displays the minimum

attenuation ratio allowed.
When this ratio is exceeded,
the output optical power is
too high, causing the signal-
to-noise ratio of the receive
end to fall.
Actual Band C Displays the actual working

band of the multiplexer or
demultiplexer board.
Configure Band C Displays the working band

that you configure.
Threshold of Input Power -35.0 to -10.0 Input power that is smaller

determined.
Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Displays the parity of the
current working band of the
port. Currently only even
band is supported.
Configure Working Band Even, Odd Configures the parity of the

Parity current working band of the
band is supported.
PMD Coefficient (ps/SQRT 0.00 to 1.00 Sets PMD coefficient.

(km))
Chromatic Dispersion -15.00 to 30.00 Sets chromatic dispersion

Coefficient (ps/ (nm*km)) coefficient.
Channel Number Mode C40 Mode, C80 Mode, Sets and queries the channel
CWDM Mode number mode for the
calculation of the resource
utilization.
DCM Dispersion Send, Receive Set DCM dispersion

Compensation Direction compensation direction.
DCM Dispersion 1.0 to 6500.0 Set DCM dispersion

Compensation Value (ps/ compensation value.
nm)

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
17.2.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplex Board

This section describes how to set and query the added/dropped wavelengths for optical add and
drop multiplex boards.
Parameters (U2000)

MR2-1 (A1/D1) optical port.
Optical Interface Name For example: A1/D1 Displays default names. Do

Attenuation Ratio (dB) 0 to 40 Sets the attenuation ratio of

the optical port.
Click Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio (dB)
information.
Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the maximum

attenuation rate. When this
rate is exceeded, the output
Click Max. Attenuation Rate
more information.
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the minimum

Click Min. Attenuation Rate
more information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Channel Use Status Unused, Used Sets whether to use the

information.
Block Port Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to prevent

Default: Disabled optical signals from
traversing the optical port.
When Block Port is set to
Enabled, the optical
attenuation rate of the optical
port is so high that optical
signals cannot traverse the
optical port.
Disabled, the optical
port is within the normal
range and thus optical signals
can traverse the optical port.
Fixed Band Values of parameters vary Displays the fixed band.

with different boards and Click Fixed Band (WDM
products. Interface) for more
information.
Synthesized Input Optical For example: -50 The power that is smaller than
Power Loss Threshold this value cannot be
(dBm) determined.
Click Threshold of Power
Loss (dBm) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Band Type/Wavelength No./ C: 1529.16/196.05 to Queries the added/dropped

Add-Drop Wavelength 1560.61/192.10 wavelength of the board. It is
(nm)/Frequency (THZ) L: 1570.42/190.90 to applicable to MR2.
1603.57/186.95 Click Band Type/
Wavelength NO./Add-Drop
C (320G): 1535.82/195.20 to
Wavelength(nm)/Frequency
1560.61/192.10
(THz) (WDM Interface) for
CWDM: 1471 to 1611 more information.
Band Type C+L, C, L, C (320G), Queries the waveband type.

CWDM Click Band Type (WDM
Default: C Interface) for more
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Actual Wavelength No./ For example: Queries the added/dropped

Add-Drop Wavelength 1/1529.56/196.00 wavelength of the board. It is
(nm)/Frequency (THz) applicable to CMR2 and
CMR4.
Actual Band Type C, CWDM Queries the actual waveband

type.
Configure Wavelength No./ For example: Sets the add and drop
Add-Drop Wavelength 1/1529.56/196.00 wavelength for a board.
(nm)/Frequency (THz)
Configure Band Type C, CWDM Sets the band type.
Add/Drop Wave Band 1 to 40 Displays the add/drop wave

band.
Click Actual Add/Drop Wave
Band (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Actual Working Band Parity Odd, Even, All Displays the parity of the
actual working band.
Configure Working Band Odd, Even, All Sets the parity of the working
Parity band.


CMR2-1 (A1/D1) optical port.
Optical Interface Name For example: A1/D1 Displays default names. Do

Actual Wavelength No./ For example: Queries the added/dropped

Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/ 1/1529.56/196.00 wavelength of the board. It is
Frequency (THz) applicable to CMR2 and
CMR4.
Actual Band Type C, CWDM Queries the actual waveband

type.
Configure Wavelength No./ For example: Configures the added/

Add-Drop Wavelength (nm)/ 1/1529.56/196.00 dropped wavelength of the
Frequency (THz) board.
Configure Band Type C, CWDM Configures the waveband

type of the board.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Actual Working Band Parity Odd, Even, All Displays the parity of the
Configure Working Band Odd, Even, All Sets the parity of the working
Parity band.
NOTE
17.2.4 Tributary and Line Boards

This section describes how to set parameters for tributary and line board boards, such as laser
status, automatic laser shutdown and path use status.
Parameters

NS2-1 (IN/OUT)-2 optical port.
Laser Status On, Off Sets the status of a laser.
Automatic Laser Shutdown Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to shut down

the laser automatically or
not. If auto-shutdown is set,
when the received signal is
lost, the laser will shut down
laser service life is extended
and body injury is avoided.
Service Type For example: STM-64 Sets the service type of the
client side.
LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the LPT

function for an EPL service.
On the U2000, click LPT
Enabled (WDM Interface)
Path Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether to use the path
or not.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Optical Interface Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Sets loopback according to

Outloop the port of the board.

performs FEC processing on
data.
On the U2000, click FEC
Working State (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
FEC Type FEC, AFEC Sets the FEC type.
Wavelength No./Optical For example: Working wavelength of the

Interface Wavelength (nm)/ 1/1560.61/192.10 optical port.
Frequency (THz)
Max. Packet Length 1518 to 65535 Sets the maximum packet

length of the data, and any
packet exceeding this length
will be discarded.
Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Sets loopback according to

Outloop the path.
Optical Interface Status IS-NR, OOS-AU, OOS- Displays the status of this
MA, OOS-AUMA, IS-NR, optical port.
LPBK, OOS-AU, LPBK,
OOS-MA, LPBK, OOS-
AUMA, LPBK

(Thz) number and frequency of a
port.

current working wavelength.

Configure Band Type C, CWDM Set the band of the working

wavelength. If the board
supports the band that you
configure, the actual band
type is the same as the
configured band type.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
OTN Overhead Transparent Enabled, Disabled Sets whether performs OTN

Transmission overhead transparent
transmission for the board.
Working Mode Autosensing, 10 Mbit/s half- Working modes of the

duplex, 10 Mbit/s full- Ethernet port. The
duplex, 100 Mbit/s half- autosensing mode is
duplex, 100 Mbit/s full- recommended, because it
duplex,1000 Mbit/s half- can automatically find out
duplex, 1000 Mbit/s full- the best working mode to
duplex0 combine a port and its
interconnected port and thus
is convenient for
maintenance, and thus is
convenient for maintenance.
The port and its
interconnected port must
have the same settings of
working mode. Otherwise,
this results in the failure of
services.
Line Rate Standard Mode, Speedup Sets the rate of the line-side
Mode port on the board.
SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG, Sets SD trigger condition.

ODUk_PM_DEG
PMD Threshold (ps) For example: 50 Displays the PMD threshold

of the board.
OFC Enabled Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to enable the

OFC function. This
parameter can be edited only
when you set Service Type
to ISC 1G or ISC 2G, and set
Automatic Laser
Shutdown and LPT
Enabled to Disabled.
17.2.5 Optical Amplifier Board

This section describes how to set or query parameters of optical amplifier boards.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters (U2000)
name)
Optical Interface Name For example: IN1 Displays default names. Do

Optical Amplifier Gain (dB) 20 to 40 The gain of the optical

booster amplifier is the ratio
of output power to input
power.
Optical Interface Attenuation 0 to 20 Set the attenuation ratio of

Ratio (dB) the optical port.
Laser Status Values of parameters vary Sets the on/off status of a

with different boards and laser.
products. Click Laser Status (WDM
Interface-Optical
Amplifying Unit) for more
information.
Attenuation Ratio (dB) 0 to 30 The actual attenuation ratio

Default: 0 of the optical port, which can
be obtained through query.
Click Attenuation Ratio (dB)
information.
Gain (dB) 20 to 40 Displays the actual gain for

an optical amplifier board.
The actual gain is the ratio of
the output power to the input
power.
Click Gain (dB) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Gain Slope (dB) For example: 2.5 Displays the actual gain slope
of the optical booster
amplifier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 15.0 The maximum attenuation
rate of the optical port. If this
value is exceeded, the quality
of optical signals or signals of
the next station degrades due
to low power.
more information.
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) For example: 0.5 The minimum attenuation
rate of the optical port. If this
value is exceeded, the quality
of optical signals or signals of
the next station degrades due
to high power.
more information.
Fixed Band Values of parameters vary The default value is usually

with different boards and used.
products. Click Fixed Band (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Nominal Gain Values of parameters vary Query the nominal gain of

with different boards and this optical amplifier.
products. Click Nominal Gain (dB)
information.
Synthesized Input Optical -35.0 to -10.0 Sets the threshold of the

Power Loss Threshold (dBm) synthesized input optical
power loss. When the
synthesized input optical
power is below this value, the
loss of input signals occurs.
Click Synthesized Input
Optical Power Loss
Threshold(dBm) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Board Work Type C, L, C+L Queries and sets the board

work type.
Click Board Working Type
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Actual Band For example: C Displays the actual working

band.
Configure Band For example: C Displays the working band

that you configure.
Nominal Gain Upper For example: 35 Displays the upper threshold

Threshold (dB) of the gain of the optical
amplifier board.
Click Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Nominal Gain Lower For example: 10 Displays the lower threshold

Threshold (dB) of the gain of the optical
amplifier board.
Click Nominal Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd, All Displays the parity of the
Click Parity of the Working
more information.
Parity of the Working Band ODD, EVEN, FULL Sets the parity of the working
band.
Rated Optical Power (dBm) -30.0 to 30.0 Sets the rated optical power
Default: of the input or output port of
l Input port: -19
Click Rated Optical Power
l Output port: 4 (dBm) (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Forced Emitting Power For example: 20.0 Sets the forced launched
(dBm) optical power.
Fixed Pump Optical Power 5.0 to 30.0 Displays the fixed pump
(dBm) optical power. The value is in
the range of Min. Fixed
Pump Optical Power and
Max. Fixed Pump Optical
Power.
Min. Fixed Pump Optical For example: 6.0 Displays the minimum fixed
Power (dBm) pump optical power that is

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Max. Fixed Pump Optical For example: 28.0 Displays the maximum fixed
Power (dBm) pump optical power that is
Pump Optical Amplification Online, Offline Displays whether the pump

Card Status optical amplification board is
online.
Pump Optical Amplification Disabled, Enabled Sets the working status of the
Card Working Status pump optical amplification
board.

name)
Optical Interface Name For example: IN1 Displays default names. Do

Optical Amplifier Gain (dB) 20 to 40 The gain of the optical

booster amplifier is the ratio
of output power to input
power.
Laser Status Open, Close Sets the on/off status of a

laser.
Optical Interface Attenuation 0 to 20 Set the attenuation ratio of

Gain (dB) For example: 20 Displays the actual gain of

the optical booster amplifier.
It is the ratio of output power
to input power.
Fixed Band C, CWDM The default is usually used.
Nominal Gain For example: 25 Sets the nominal gain of this

optical amplifier.
Threshold of Input Power -35.0 to -10.0 Sets the threshold of the input
Loss (dBm) optical power loss. When the
input optical power is below
this value, loss of input signal
is considered to occur.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Board Work Type C, L, C+L Queries and sets the board

work type.
Actual Band For example: C Displays the actual working

band.
Nominal Gain Upper For example: 35 Displays the upper threshold

Threshold (dB) of the nominal gain of the
optical amplifier unit.
Nominal Gain Lower For example: 10 Displays the lower threshold

Threshold (dB) of the nominal gain of the
Upper Threshold of Actual For example: 35 Displays the upper threshold

Gain (dB) of the actual gain of the
Lower Threshold of Actual For example: 10 Displays the lower threshold

Gain (dB) of the actual gain of the
Actual Working Band Parity Even Displays the parity of the

Configure Working Band Even Sets the parity of the working

Parity band.
Rated Optical Power (dBm) -30.0 to 30.0 Sets the rated optical power
Default: of the input or output port of
l Input port: -19
l Output port: 4
Fixed Pump Optical Power 5.0 to 30.0 Displays the fixed pump
(dBm) optical power. The value is in
the range of Minimum Fixed
Pump Optical Power and
Maximum Fixed Pump
Optical Power.
Minimum Fixed Pump For example: 6.0 Displays the minimum fixed
Optical Power (dBm) pump optical power that is
Maximum Fixed Pump For example: 28.0 Displays the maximum fixed
Optical Power (dBm) pump optical power that is

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
17.2.6 Optical Supervisory Channel Board

This section describes how to set laser status and loopback, and query the wavelengths of an
optical port.
Parameters (U2000)

SC2-1 (RM1/TM1) optical port.
Optical Interface Name For example: RM1/TM1 Displays default names. Do

Laser Status Values of parameters vary Sets whether the laser is

with different boards and enabled.
products. Applicable to the boards such
as HSC1, SC1, or SC2.
Click Laser Status (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Port Enabled Enable, Disable Enables or disables the use of

this optical port.
Return Clock West clock, East clock Set the return clock source.
In the case of the optical
supervisory channel board
with dual optical interfaces,
such as SC2, you set the
optical port that returns the
clock to the SCC board. In the
case of the west clock, the
optical port 1 is used. In the
case of the east clock, the
optical port 2 is used.
FE Transparent Enable, Disable Enables or disables the FE

Transmission transparent transmission
function.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, Performs corresponding

Outloop loopback settings for
Default: Non-Loopback debugging or fault
localization.
Click Loopback (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Channel Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether to use the

information.
Band Type/Wavelength No./ For example: SMC/ Displays the band type,
Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 240/1510.00/198.54 working wavelength,
(Thz) wavelength number and
frequency of a port.
Click Band Type/
Wavelength No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency(THz)
information.

(Thz) number and frequency of a
port.


Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE107-16- Displays current optical port/

SC1-1 (RM/TM)-1 channel number.
Optical Interface Name For example: RM/TM Sets/displays the optical port
name.
Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, You can set optical port

Outloop loopback for troubleshooting
Default: Non-Loopback or testing.
Laser Status Open, Close Sets the laser status.

Applicable boards: HSC1,
SC1 and SC2.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Actual Wavelength No./ For example: Displays the working

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency 1/1510.00/198.54 wavelength of the optical
(THz) port.

NOTE
17.2.7 Protection Board

This section describes how to set parameters for protection boards. The parameters are laser
status, automatic laser shutdown, maximum or minimum attenuation rate and path use status.
Parameters

OLP-2 (RI1/TO1) optical port.
Optical Interface Name For example: RI1/TO1 Displays the default names.
Threshold of Input Power Values of parameters vary Sets the threshold of the
Loss (dBm) with different boards and optical power loss. When the
products. input optical power is below
this value, the loss of input
signals occurs.
On the U2000, click
Threshold of Input Power
Loss (dBm) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Initial Variance Value -10.0 to 10.0 Sets the initial variance value
Between Primary and between primary and
Secondary Input Power (dB) secondary input power.
On the U2000, click Initial
Variance Value Between
Primary and Secondary Input
Power (dB) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Variance Threshold Between 3.0 to 8.0 Sets the variance threshold

Primary and Secondary Input between primary and
Power (dB) secondary input power.
On the U2000, click Variance
Threshold Between Primary
and Secondary Input Power
more information.
NOTE
17.2.8 Spectrum Analysis Board

This section describes how to set working wavelengths for spectrum analysis boards. For
example, you can set parity of working band and fixed band.
Parameters (U2000)

MCA-1 (RO1) optical port.
Optical Interface Name For example: RO1 Displays default names. Do

Optical Monitoring Enabled, Disabled Used to set the optical port

Default: Enabled monitoring state. When the
monitoring of an optical port
is set to Disabled, the MCA
board does not analyze the
wavelength at this port.
Fixed Band Values of parameters vary Usually use default value.

information.
Parity of the Working band FULL, Odd, Even Displays the parity of the
more information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Wavelength Monitor Status Monitored, Unmonitored Sets whether to monitor this

Default: Unmonitored port.
Click Wavelength Monitor
Status (WDM Interface) for
more information.
WDM System Mode NRZ Or DRZ System, CRZ Sets the WDM system mode.
System (100GHz
Alternation), CRZ System
(50GHz Alternation),
40Gbps System (100GHz
Alternation), 40Gbps System
(50GHz Alternation)
Actual Band C Displays the current working

band of a channel.
Configure Band C Sets the working band for a

port.
working band for a port.
Optical Switch No. 1 to 8 The MCA board can access

eight optical signals. To
select one optical port to
perform spectrum analysis,
you need to know the
analyzed optical port No. of
the board, that is, the optical
switch status or the optical
switch number.
Click Optical Switch No.
information.
Monitor Interval (min) 5 to 49995 Sets the time interval of

Default: 10 performance monitoring on
the board.
Click Monitor Interval (min.)
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Optical Interface/Channel For example: NE107-12- Displays the current optical

MCA8-1 (IN1) port/path location.
Optical Interface Name For example: RO1 Do not modify this field. Use
the default value.
Optical Monitoring Enabled, Disabled Enables or disables the

spectrum analysis of the path.
Actual Band C Displays the optical band that

the path is monitoring.
Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Currently only even band is
supported.
Configure Band C Configures the optical band

that the path monitors.
Configure Working Band Even, Odd Displays the parity of the

Parity current working band of the
port. Currently only parity
band is supported.
Optical Switch No 1 to 8 The MCA board can access

eight optical signals. To
select one optical port to
perform spectrum analysis,
you need to know the
analyzed optical port No. of
the board, that is, the optical
switch status or the optical
switch number.
Monitor Interval (min) 5 to 49995 Sets the time interval of

Default: 10 performance monitoring on
the board.
Wavelength Monitor Status Monitor, No Monitor Sets whether to monitor the

Default: Unmonitored port.
Band For example: C Displays the band.
WDM Type NRZ or DRZ, 100-GHz Sets the WDM type.

Spacing with CRZ, 50-GHz
Spacing with CRZ
NOTE

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
17.2.9 Variable Optical Attenuation Board

This section describes how to set the maximum or minimum attenuation rate for optical ports
and path use status. You can set or query parameters related to working wavelengths, including
fixed band and the parity of working band.
Parameters (U2000)

VA4-1 (IN1/OUT1) optical port.
Optical Interface Name For example: IN1/OUT1 Displays default names. Do

Attenuation Ratio (dB) 0 to 40 Sets the attenuation ratio of

the optical port.
Click Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio (dB)
information.
Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the maximum

more information.
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) 0 to 40 Displays the minimum

more information.
Channel Use Status Unused, Used Sets whether to use the

information.
Fixed Band Values of parameters vary Displays the fixed band.

information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parity of the Working band FULL, Odd, Even Displays the parity of the
more information.
Actual Band C Displays the working band of

a channel.
Configure Band C Configures the working band

of the port.
Threshold of Input Power For example: -50 The power that is smaller
determined.
Click Threshold of Power
Loss (dBm) (WDM
Interface) for more
information.
Remarks - Sets the remarks of the

optical port.
Actual Working Band Parity Even, Odd Sets the parity of the working
band for a port.


VA1-1 (IN/OUT)-1 optical port.
Optical Interface Name For example: IN1/OUT1 Displays default names. Do

Optical Interface Attenuation 0-40 Sets the attenuation ratio of

Max. Attenuation Ratio (dB) For example: 40 Displays the maximum

attenuation ratio. If the actual
attenuation ratio is greater
than this value, the output
power is so small that it may
cause decrease of the optical
signal noise ratio (OSNR) at
the receive end.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Min. Attenuation Ratio (dB) For example: 5 Displays the minimum

attenuation ratio. If the actual
attenuation ratio is smaller
than this value, the output
power is so large that it may
cause decrease of the optical
signal noise ratio (OSNR) at
the receive end.
Path Use Status Used, Unused Sets whether the path is being
Default: Used used.
Actual Band C Displays the current working

band of the path. Currently
only C band is supported.
Configure Band C Configures the working band

of the port.
Threshold of Input Power For example: -50 Input power that is smaller
determined.
current working band of the
band is supported.
Configure Working Band Even, Odd Configures the parity of the

Parity working band of the port.
Currently only even band is
supported.
NOTE
17.2.10 Dispersion Compensation Board

This section describes how to query parameters for dispersion compensation boards.
Parameters

TDC-1 (IN1/OUT1) optical port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
NOTE
17.3 Parameters (Configuring Wavelength Grooming)

Describes the parameters involved in the wavelength grooming configuration.
17.3.1 Parameters: Edge Port

Before creating an optical cross-connection, you need to configure the corresponding port of the
board as an edge port.
Parameters
Fixed Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No. Displays the fixed edge port
(port name) of the NE. By default, the port
of the FIU and the port at the
OTU line side are fixed edge
port.
Click Fixed Edge Port
(Optical Cross-Connection
information.
Available Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No. Displays available edge port
(port name) of the NE.
Click Available Edge Port
information.
Selected Edge Port Slot-Board Name-Port No. Displays the selected edge
(port name) port of the NE.
Click Selected Edge Port
information.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
17.3.2 Parameters: Single-Station Optical Cross-Connection

You can configure optical cross-connections on a single NE. An optical cross-connection refers
to the cross-connection at the OCh level that can be dynamically created. An optical cross-
connection can realize wavelength grooming. The optical cross-connection is classified into
board optical cross-connection and single-station optical cross-connection. A single-station
optical cross-connection refers to the end-to-end optical cross-connection within an NE.
Parameters
Table 17-3 Optical cross-connection parameters
Source Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the source slot of

the optical cross-connection.
Source Port Port No.(port name) Displays the source port of

Source Band C Currently the Metro

equipment supports C band.
Source Wavelength No. For example: 1 The Source Wavelength

No. parameter indicates the
number of the wavelength to
which the source port of the
single-station optical cross-
connect service corresponds.
Sink Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the sink slot of the

Sink Port Port No.(port name) Displays the sink port of the
Sink Band C Currently the Metro

Sink Wavelength No. For example: 1 The Sink Wavelength No.

parameter indicates the
number of the wavelength to
which the sink port of the
single-station optical cross-
connect service corresponds.
Activation Status Active, Inactive The Activation Status

Default: Active parameter indicates the status
of the selected optical cross-
connect service on the
U2000.
Service Origin Create Manually, Displays the mode of

Intelligently Generate creating optical cross-
connections.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
OPA Mode Manual, Auto Optical cross-connection

Default: Auto power adjustment mode. If
you select Auto, the dynamic
optical add/drop multiplexer
board automatically adjusts
the attenuation range of the
optical attenuator in the
board. If you select Manual,
you need to manually adjust
the attenuation range of the
optical attenuator in the
dynamic optical add/drop
multiplexer board.
The Auto option is available
for the following types of
optical cross-connection
trails:
l Transparently transmitted
service, such as
FIU>OAU1>WSM9>O
AU1>FIU,
OAU1>WSM9>OAU1,
FIU>OAU1>WSM9>O
AU1 and
OAU1>WSM9>OAU1>
FIU.
l Add service, such as
OTU>WSM9>OAU1>FI
U, OTU>WSM9>OAU1
and
OTU>RUM9>OAU1.
l Drop service, such as
FIU>OAU1>WSD9>OT
U,
OAU1>ROAM>D40>O
TU and
OAU1>WSD9>OTU.
For all the optical cross-
connections other than the
three types described above,
you can only select the
Manual mode.
17.3.3 Parameters: Single-Board Optical Cross-Connection

This section describes how to configure optical cross-connections on a board. Optical cross-
connection is the cross-connection at OCh level that can be dynamically created. It can
implement wavelength grooming. Optical cross-connection contains board optical cross-

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
connection and single-station optical cross-connection. Board optical cross-connection is the

optical cross-connection operations on one board.
Parameters
NOTE
Descriptions of the parameters on the U2000 are the same as that on the Web LCT.
Source Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the source slot of

Source Port Port No.(port name) Displays the source port of

Source Band C Currently the Metro

Source Wavelength For example: Numbers wavelengths

2/1529.56/196.00 sequentially. The value is
expressed in the order of
"wavelength number/central
wavelength (nm)/frequency
(THz)"
Currently 80 wavelengths in
C band are supported.
Sink Slot Slot-Board Name Displays the sink slot of the

Sink Port Port No.(port name) Displays the sink port of the
Sink Band C Currently the Metro

Sink Wavelength For example: Numbers wavelengths

2/1529.56/196.00 sequentially. The value is
expressed in the order of
"wavelength number/central
wavelength (nm)/frequency
(THz)"
Currently 80 wavelengths in
C band are supported.
17.3.4 Parameters: Enabling the Port Blocking Function

During network capacity expansion, if a port that is not configured with services is connected
to an OTU board, the new wavelength may be conflict with the existing wavelength on the
network. Wavelength conflict interrupts the existing services. This problem is resolved after the
port is enabled with the port blocking function.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Parameters
Block Port Enabled, Disabled Sets whether to prevent

Default: Disabled optical signals from
traversing the optical port.
Enabled, the optical
port is so high that optical
signals cannot traverse the
optical port.
Disabled, the optical
port is within the normal
range and thus optical signals
can traverse the optical port.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Commissioning Guide A Glossary
A Glossary
Numerics
1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection
SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is
permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the
normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the
permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic
signal to be provided.
3G-SDI 3G-serial digital interface
AC See alternating current

access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
ACK See acknowledgement
acknowledgement A response sent by a receiver to indicate successful reception of information.
Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level including the physical level (using
voltage on one or more wires to coordinate transfer), at the link level (to indicate
successful transmission across a single hardware link), or at higher levels.
ACL See access control list
add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals
contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/
or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Add/drop wavelength Add/drop wavelength refers to the wavelength that carries the add/drop services in the
OADM equipment.
Address Resolution Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to
Protocol MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
ADM See add/drop multiplexer

administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
Administrator A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore
product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
ADSL See asymmetric digital subscriber line
AGC See automatic gain control
AID access identifier
AIS See alarm indication signal
alarm A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management
system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery
alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes
to cleared.
alarm cable The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.
alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
alarm cause A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault cause
is the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that is
representative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem.
alarm indication On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current
status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on.
When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the
orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow
indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on
the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm mask On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions for
the system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meeting
the conditions.
alarm severity The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T
recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning.
alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
alarm type Classification of alarms with different attributes. There are six alarm types as following:
Communication: alarm indication related with information transfer. Processing: alarm
indication related with software or information processing Equipment: alarm indication
related with equipment fault Service: alarm indication related with QoS of the equipment
Environment: alarm related with the environment where the equipment resides, usually
generated by a sensor Security: alarm indication related with security
ALC See automatic level control

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
ALC link A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single
station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils optical
power control on the line that contains the link.
ALC node The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit,
variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node work
together to achieve the ALC function.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown
alternating current Electric current that reverses its direction of flow (polarity) periodically according to a
frequency measured in hertz, or cycles per second.
American National An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.
Standard Institute American National Standard Institute (ANSI) participates in defining network protocol
standards.
American Standard American Standard Code for Information Interchange - the standard system for
Code for Information representing letters and symbols. Each letter or symbol is assigned a unique number
Interchange between 0 and 127.
ANSI See American National Standard Institute
antistatic floor A floor that can quickly release the static electricity of the object contacting it to prevent
accumulated static electricity
APD See avalanche photodiode
APE automatic power equilibrium
APID access point identifier
application-specific A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in
integrated circuit the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.
By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for
many needs.
APS See automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
arrayed waveguide A device, built with silicon planar lightwave circuits (PLC), that allows multiple
grating wavelengths to be combined and separated in a dense wavelength-division multiplexing
(DWDM) system.
ASCII See American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASE amplified spontaneous emission
ASIC See application-specific integrated circuit
ASON See automatically switched optical network
asymmetric digital A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone
subscriber line lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides
continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most
of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive
information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice)
information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from
512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Asynchronous A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.
Transfer Mode A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in
the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.
Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATAG autonomously generated correlation tag
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU See administrative unit
auto-negotiation An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to
automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.
automatic gain control A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a
function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.
automatic laser A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters
shutdown and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control A well-known application in communication systems with a given input signal
conditioned to produce an output signal as possible, while supporting a wide gain range
and controlled gain-reduction and gain recovery characteristics.
automatic protection Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch
switching to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatically switched A network which is based on technology enabling the automatic delivery of transport
optical network services. Specifically, an ASON can deliver not only leased-line connections but also
other transport services such as soft-permanent and switched optical connections.
avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.
Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
AWG See arrayed waveguide grating
B
background block The ratio of background block errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a
error ratio fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.
backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of
database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data
synchronization between active and standby boards.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a
network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
BAS See broadband access server
basic input/output A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control
system programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
bayonet-neill- A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
concelman
BBE background block error

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
BBER See background block error ratio

BC See boundary clock
BDI Backward Defect Indication
BEI backward error indication
BER See bit error rate
BIAE backward incoming alignment error
bill of material Listing of all the subassemblies, parts and raw materials that go into the parent assembly.
It shows the quantity of each raw material required to make the assembly. There are a
variety of display formats for BOMS, including single level, indented, modular/
planning, transient, matrix and costed BOMs [APICs, CMSG].
BIOS See basic input/output system
BIP See bit-interleaved parity
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity order 8
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.
bit interleaved parity A frame is divided into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)in a parity unit. Then arrange
order 8 the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the
corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bit-interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
BITS See building integrated timing supply
BMC best master clock
BNC See bayonet-neill-concelman
BOM See bill of material
boundary clock A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit
BPS board-level protection switching
bridge protocol data The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
unit uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
bridging The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channels
simultaneously.
broadband access A server providing features as user access, connection management, address allocation
server and authentication, authorization and accounting. It also works as a router featuring
effective route management, high forwarding performance and abundant services.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
broadcast service The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks.
building integrated In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
timing supply a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
BWS Backbone WDM System
C
cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.
capex See capital expenditure
capital expenditure Capital expenditures (CAPEX or capex) are expenditures creating future benefits. A
capital expenditure is incurred when a business spends money either to buy fixed assets
or to add to the value of an existing fixed asset with a useful life that extends beyond the
taxable year. Capex are used by a company to acquire or upgrade physical assets such
as equipment, property, or industrial buildings.
CAR See committed access rate
CBS See committed burst size
CC See connectivity check
CCI connection control interface
CCM See continuity check message
CD chromatic dispersion
CDMA See Code Division Multiple Access
CE See customer edge
CENELEC See European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
centralized alarm The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.
system
CF See compact flash
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two
or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
channel spacing The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels
in a WDM device.
CIR See committed information rate
CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CLEI common language equipment identification
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CLNS connectionless network service
clock synchronization Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal
frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.
clock synchronization A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588
compliant with V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control
precision time protocol system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
CM See configuration management
CMEP connection monitoring end point
CMI coded mark inversion
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM
does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
Code Division Multiple A communication scheme that forms different code sequences by using the frequency
Access expansion technology. In this case, subscribers of different addresses can use different
code sequences for multi-address connection.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Common Object A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of
Request Broker programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two
Architecture programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different
platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or
ORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object
comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP,
object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
Configuration Data A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can
collaborate with other Nes in an entire network. Thus, configuration data is the key factor
for normal running of an entire network.
configuration 1. A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization
management (ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software.
2. Configuration Management (CM) is a system for collecting the configuration
information of all nodes in the network.
configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.

congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service
efficiency.
connecting plate A metallic plate which is used to combine two cabinets.
connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound
to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the
input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is
characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point
is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
continuity check CCM is used to detect the link status.
message
convergence 1. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or
several channels of required signals.
2. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific
routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
convergence service A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for
the specific requirements of the convergence service user.
CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture
corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.
CPLD Complex Programmable Logical Device
CPU See central processing unit

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
CRC See cyclic redundancy check

CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSMA carrier sense multiple access
CST Common Spanning Tree
current alarm An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.
current performance Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers,
data namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of a
performance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data only
in the specified monitoring period.
customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancy A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
check a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DAPI destination access point identifiers
Data backup A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data loss
in the case of the damage or failure in the original storage area.
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data
network Communication Function (DCF).
data communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
channel transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
DBPS distribute board protect system
DCC See data communications channel
DCF See dispersion compensation fiber
DCM See dispersion compensation module
DCM frame A frame which is used to hold the DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module).
DCN See data communication network
DDF See digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
demultiplexer A device that separates signals that have been combined by a multiplexer for transmission
over a communications channel as a single signal.
dense wavelength Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of
division multiplexing single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing
as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.
device set A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into different
device sets, users can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If an
operation authority over one device set is assigned to a user (user group), the authority
over all the devices in the device set is assigned to the user (user group), thus making it
unnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately.
It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, device
type, or another criterion.
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
diamond-shaped nut A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.
digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital distribution A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
frame transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital subscriber line A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that
access multiplexer receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and
puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.
dispersion A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion
compensation fiber of transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
dispersion A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
compensation module dispersion of transmitting fiber.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical
Multicast Routing dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
Protocol datagrams with its neighbors.
distributed link The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection
aggregation group technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end.
In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services
can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the
inter-board ports.
DLAG See distributed link aggregation group
DMUX; DEMUX See demultiplexer
DNI Dual Node Interconnection
domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
DQPSK differential quadrature phase shift keying
DRDB dynamic random database
DRZ differential phase return to zero
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
DSCR dispersion slope compensation rate

DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer
DSP Digital Signal Processing
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF See dual tone multiple frequency
DTR data terminal ready
dual tone multiple In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations of
frequency two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the
other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used.
dual-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected
entity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.
DVB Digital Video Broadcasting
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing
Dynamic Host Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol.
Configuration Protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host
requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet
network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
E2E End to End

EAPE enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium
EBS See excess burst size
ECC See embedded control channel
EDFA See erbium doped fiber amplifier
eDQPSK enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying
EFM See Ethernet in the first mile
ejector lever A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis.
electric supervisory A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits the
channel monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electromagnetic Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications
compatibility equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
interference limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
element management An element management system (EMS) manages one or more of a specific type of
system network elements (NEs). An EMS allows the user to manage all the features of each NE
individually, but not the communication between NEs - this is done by the network
management system (NMS).
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
channel to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See electromagnetic interference
EMS See element management system
enterprise system A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.
connection It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
ePDM-BPSK enhanced polarization division multiplexing-binary phase shift keying
ePDM-QPSK enhanced polarization division multiplexing-quadrature phase shift keying
EPL See Ethernet private line
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service
erbium doped fiber An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of
amplifier optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of
Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light
source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
ESC See electric supervisory channel
ESCON See enterprise system connection
ESD See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..
Ethernet in the first Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the
mile advantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM
provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In
addition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV)
and Video On Demand (VOD).
Ethernet private LAN An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a
service dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet virtual An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
private LAN service bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Ethernet virtual An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
private line bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
ETSI 300mm cabinet A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standards
of the ETSI.
European Committee The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization was established in 1976
for Electrotechnical in Brussels. It is the result of the incorporation of two former organizations. It aims to
Standardization reduce internal frontiers and trade barriers for electrotechnical products, systems and
services.
EVOA electrical variable optical attenuator
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network
segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.
External cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces and
optical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals.
eye pattern An oscilloscope display of synchronized pseudo-random digital data (signal amplitude
versus time), showing the superposition of accumulated output waveforms.
F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network
providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for
special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte.
fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
fault A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault
does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external
resources and intentional settings.
FBG fiber Bragg grating
FC See fiber channel
FDB flash database

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface

FE See fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction
fiber channel A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber
channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode
and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair
copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and
connectionless services.
Fiber Connect A new generation connection protocol which connects the host to various control units.
It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and
provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
fiber distributed data A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
interface speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for
transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on
the token ring network.
fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.
fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
fiber spool A device used in coiling up an extra length of optical fibers.
Fiber trough The trough that is used for routing fibers.
fiber/cable Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical
entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user
information and network management information) and perform transmission function
in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable
transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber
connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs
represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical
fiber type.
FICON See Fiber Connect
field programmable A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network
management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards,
it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present,
two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID
and port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist
in the same port.
FMT See fiber management tray
FOADM fixed optical add/drop multiplexer
FOAs fixed optical attenuator
Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the
protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
correction the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
four-wave mixing Four-Wave Mixing (FWM), also called four-photon mixing, occurs when the interaction
of two or three optical waves at different wavelengths generates new optical waves,
called mixing products or sidebands, at other wavelengths.
FPGA See field programmable gate array
frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-
specified by the sending and receiving parties.
frame alignment signal A distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in every n frames, always occupying
the same relative position within the frame, and used to establish and maintain frame
alignment.
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both
directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line
telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard
at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with
one lane for each direction.
G
gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,
which expressed in dB.
gain flattening filter Gain Flattening Filter (GFFs), also known as gain equalizing filters, are used to flatten
or smooth out unequal signal intensities over a specified wavelength range. This unequal
signal intensity usually occurs after an amplification stage (for example, EDFA and/or
Raman). Typically, GFFs are used in conjunction with gain amplifiers to ensure that the
amplified channels all have the same gain. A static spectral device that flattens the output
spectrum of an erbium-doped fiber amplifier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Gateway IP When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used
to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the
gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot
identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP
networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the
network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
gateway network A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
element the NM application layer
Gb See gigabit
GCC general communication channel
GCP See GMPLS control plan
GE See gigabit Ethernet
GE ADM The technology can optimize GE service transport over WDM for Metro network. It
owns the capability of GE service convergence and grooming and benefits to use the
network resource more effectively.
generic framing A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
procedure standardized by ITU-T SG15.
GFF See gain flattening filter
GFP See generic framing procedure
gigabit In data communications, a gigabit is one billion bits, or 1,000,000,000 (that is, 10^9)
bits. It's commonly used for measuring the amount of data that is transferred in a second
between two telecommunication points.
gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System timing services to worldwide users.
GMPLS generalized multiprotocol label switching
GMPLS control plan The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei.
The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the
traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series
support the ASON features.
GNE See gateway network element
GPS See Global Positioning System
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
grounding The connection of sections of an electrical circuit to a common conductor, called the
ground, which serves as the reference for the other voltages in the circuit.
GSSP General Snooping and Selection Protocol

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
GUI See graphical user interface
Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface
to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
HCS See hierarchical cell structure
HDB high density bipolar code
HDLC See high level data link control
HD-SDI See high definition-serial digital interface signal
hierarchical cell This is a term typically used to describe the priority of cells within a mixed environment.
structure That is when Macro, Micro, and Pico cells may be viewed as candidates for cell
reselection the priority described by the HCS will be used in the associated calculations.
high definition-serial High definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
digital interface signal
high level data link The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer
control of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by
adding a trailer and a header.
History alarm The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.
History Performance The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported
Data and stored in the NMS.
IAE incoming alignment error

IC See integrated circuit
ICC ITU carrier code
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol
ID See identity
identity The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively
recognizable or known.
Idle resource optical When the U2000 is started successfully, an NE icon called "Idle ONE" will be displayed
NE on the topological view. In this NE, the subracks and boards that are not divided to other
optical NEs (such as OTM, OADM and other NEs) are retained. In this NE, idle DWDM
subracks and boards are reserved, which can be distributed to other ONEs. Double-click
the NE icon to view all the currently idle DWDM subracks or boards in the network.
IE See Internet Explorer
IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when
modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored
seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30
second measurement intervals.
Institute of Electrical A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
and Electronics boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
Engineers electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
integrated circuit A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
integrated services A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for the
digital network voice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on a
small number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensive
transmission service.
intelligent power A technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
adjustment regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of
optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, the
performance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well.
Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the slice
of broken fiber.
Internal cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and
optical interfaces within the cabinet.
internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
International The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-
Electrotechnical governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.
Commission
International An international association that works to establish global standards for communications
Organization for and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted
Standardization ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers
connected by communications networks.
International A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
Telecommunication bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
Union radio networks (ITU-R).
International An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications
Telecommunication technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a
Union- letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For
Telecommunication example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open
Standardization Sector system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Control A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
Message Protocol other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.
Task Force Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Internet Explorer Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions of
Internet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience on
the Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
Management Protocol the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
IP See Internet Protocol
IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to
the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets.
An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values
of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the
IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identify
the host itself.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote
NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead
DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.
IPA See intelligent power adjustment
IPG inter-packet gap
ISDN See integrated services digital network
ISO See International Organization for Standardization
IST See internal spanning tree
ITU See International Telecommunication Union
ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization
Sector
J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
Jitter transfer The physical relationship between jitter applied at the input port and the jitter appearing
at the output port.
L
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
LAN See local area network

LAPD link access procedure on the D channel
LAPS link access protocol-SDH
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically
as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer
of its characteristic information.
LB See loopback
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme
LCD See liquid crystal display
LCN local communication network
LCT local craft terminal
LED See light emitting diode
LHP long hop
light emitting diode A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product
on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and
perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical
mice and laser-class printers.
Link Aggregation A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to
Control Protocol increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE
802.3ad.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Control Protocol In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes,
configures, and tests data-link Internet connections.
link state The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is the
advertisement condition of the link.
linktrace message The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP
is called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC
address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is
called Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the
TTL of LTM minus 1.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
liquid crystal display A type of display that uses a liquid compound having a polar molecular structure,
sandwiched between two transparent electrodes.
LLC See logical link control
LMP link management protocol
LOC loss of clock
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
logical link control According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper
sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media
(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
logical port A logical port is a logical number assigned to every application.
loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP See loss of pointer
LOS See Loss Of Signal
loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the
PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of
cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
Lower subrack The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.
LP See logical port
LPT link-state pass through
LSA See link state advertisement
LSP See label switched path
LT linktrace
LTM See linktrace message
LTR See linktrace reply
M
MA Maintenance Associations
MAC See media access control
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
main distribution A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
frame
main path interface at A reference point on the optical fiber just after the OM/OA output optical connector.
the transmitter
main topology A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).
The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine
interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms
of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic
network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
MAN See metropolitan area network
managed object The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that may
be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receive
port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, and
regenerator section.
Management The information that is used for network management in a transport network.
information
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
Mapping A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of
an SDH network.
marking-off template A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation
holes for the cabinet.
MD See maintenance domain
MDB Memory Database
MDF See main distribution frame
MDP message dispatch process
MDS message distribution service software
ME maintenance entities
mean launched power The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by the
transmitter.
Mean Time Between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
Failures of the reliability of the system.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
MEP maintenance end point
metropolitan area A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer
network resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local
area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).
The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger
network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is
also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them
with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal
MIB See management information base
MIP maintenance intermediate point
MLD See multicast listener discovery
MLM laser See multi-longitudinal mode laser
MO See managed object
mother board A printed board assembly that is used for interconnecting arrays of plug-in electronic
modules.
mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or
components.
MP See maintenance point
MPI main path interface
MPI-R main path interface at the receiver
MPI-S See main path interface at the transmitter
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSI multi-frame structure identifier
MSOH See multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection
MSPP multi-service provisioning platform
MST See multiplex section termination
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
MTA Mail Transfer Agent

MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit
multi-longitudinal An injection laser diode which has a number of longitudinal modes.
mode laser
multicast listener The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
discovery connected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6
networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which
the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the
multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always
signal occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and
maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP
instance within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for
frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST
Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
Multiple Spanning Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
Tree Protocol algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH
overhead definition.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
protection including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiplex section The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH frame
termination signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
multiplexer Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels
being fixed.
Multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
Switching layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
MUX See multiplexer
MVOA mechanical variable optical attenuator

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
N
NA No Acknowledgment
NCP See Network Control Protocol
NE See network element
NE database There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following:
(1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery;
(2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM;
(3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM.
In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same
time. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB
to FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database is
restored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, the
main control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due to
the exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.
NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and
maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a
unique NE ID.
NE Panel A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks,
boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the
configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.
NE-side data The NE configuration data that is stored on the SCC board of the equipment. The NE-
side data can be uploaded to the network management system(NMS) and thus is stored
on the NMS side.
NEBS Network Equipment Building System
NEF See network element function
Network Control This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implements
Protocol path control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link.
network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which
manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC
board.
network element A function block which represents the telecommunication functions and communicates
function with the TMN OSF function block for the purpose of being monitored and/or controlled.
network management The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity.
ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management,
accounting management, configuration management, security management and
performance management.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
System

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.
network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all
nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
point access OSI network services.
Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. It
synchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client.
NM See network management
NMS See Network Management System
NNI See network node interface
NOC network operation center
Noise figure An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing a
system.
NSAP See network service access point
NTP See Network Time Protocol
O
OA See optical amplifier
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer
OADM frame A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance
OAMS Optical fiber line Automatic Monitoring System
OC See optical coupler
OCI open connection indication
OCP See optical channel protection
OD optical demultiplexing
ODB optical duobinary
ODF See optical distribution frame
ODUk optical channel data unit-k
OEQ optical equalizer
OFC open fiber control
OLA See optical line amplifier
OLP See optical line protection
OM optical multiplexing
OMS optical multiplexing section
ONE See optical network element

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Online Help The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions
for using their features when so requested by the user.
OOF See out of frame
OPA optical power adjust
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.
Open Systems A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by
Interconnection different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation, A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
administration and activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
maintenance location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
OpEx; OPEX operation expenditure
OPS optical physical section
optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source
(or a detector).+
optical add/drop A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel
multiplexer and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical amplifier Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the
stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.
optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the
optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is
available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.
optical channel A signal transmitted at one wavelength in a fiber-optic system.
optical channel In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain
protection wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical
channel protection is configured.
optical coupler A coupler for coupling light in an optical system. Multiple discrete layers of alternating
optical materials have respective first and second indexes of refraction. The thickness of
each layer is a fraction of the light wavelength.
optical distribution A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
frame
optical line amplifier A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input optical
signals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA is
the EDFA amplifier.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
optical line protection A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and single-
ended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibers
forms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line is
normal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carries
line signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large.
optical network A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/drop
element multiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The types
of ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC. The locating of an ONE is
equivalent to that of a common NE. In a view, an ONE is displayed with an icon, like a
common NE and its alarm status can be displayed with colors. Logically, an ONE consists
of different subracks. Like a common NE, an ONE cannot be expanded or entered like
a sub-network. Similar to a common NE, an ONE provides a list of the subracks that
form the NE to display the board layout.
optical signal-to-noise The most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The ratio
ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. That is, OSNR = signal power/
noise power.
optical spectrum A device that allows the details of a region of an optical spectrum to be resolved.
analyzer Commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems.
optical supervisory A technology that realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission network
channel and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working
channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm).
Optical switch A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects,
or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.
optical time domain A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system
reflectometer and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light
loss and locate the fiber fault.
optical transmission Optical transmission section allows the network operator to perform monitoring and
section maintenance tasks between NEs.
optical transponder A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-
unit compliant WDM wavelength.
optical transport A network that uses the optical signal to transmit data
network
optical wavelength In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection between
shared protection different stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelength
sharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelength
shared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured with
distributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network where
services are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then,
two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one service
among stations.
OPU optical channel payload unit
OPUk optical channel payload unit-k
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
original equipment An original equipment manufacturer, or OEM is typically a company that uses a
manufacturer component made by a second company in its own product, or sells the product of the
second company under its own brand.
OSA See optical spectrum analyzer
OSC See optical supervisory channel
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio
OSPF See open shortest path first
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer
OTM optical terminal multiplexer
OTN See optical transport network
OTS See optical transmission section
OTU See optical transponder unit
OTUk optical channel transport unit-k
out of frame An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specified
number of consecutive frame bit positions.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
overhead cabling Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
OWSP See optical wavelength shared protection
P
PA pre-amplifier
packet over SDH/ A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS
SONET interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of
packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
packet switched A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
network
Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.
Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane.
pass-through The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given
direction of transmission.
PBS See peak burst size
PCB See printed circuit board
PCC protection communication channel
PCC See policy and charging control
PCS See physical coding sublayer

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
PDF Power Distribution Frame

PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDL See polarization dependent loss
PDU Protocol Data Unit
PE Provider Edge
peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be
not less than the committed information rate.
Performance register Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15-
min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history
performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES
register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so
every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is
used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so
as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
PGND protection ground
phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of
a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
PHY See physical sublayer & physical layer
physical coding The PCS further helps to define physical layer specifications for 10 gigabit Ethernet after
sublayer having been broken down into their Physical Media Dependent Sublayer or PMD. Each
sublayer places the 10GBASE standards into either LAN or WAN specifications.
physical sublayer & 1. physical sublayer: One of two sublayers of the FDDI physical layer. 2. physical layer:
physical layer In ATM, the physical layer provides the transmission of cells over a physical medium
that connects two ATM devices. The PHY is comprised of two sublayers: PMD and TC
PID photonics integrated device
PIM-DM protocol independent multicast-dense mode
PIM-SM See protocol independent multicast sparse mode
PIN See Positive Intrinsic Negative
PIR See peak information rate
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
hierarchy rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
PLL See phase-locked loop
PMD polarization mode dispersion
PMI payload missing indication
POH path overhead

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
point to multipoint A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations
(from one to many).
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
Point-to-Point Protocol PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulating
over Ethernet PPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standard
PPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression.
Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.
polarization dependent The maximum, peak-to-peak insertion loss (or gain) variation caused by a component
loss when stimulated by all possible polarization states. It is specified in dB units.
policy and charging Short for Policy and Charging Control, the PCC is defined in 3GPP R7. The PCC
control provides the QoS control and service-based charging functions in the wireless bearer
network.
POS See packet over SDH/SONET
Positive Intrinsic Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- and
Negative n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers.
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
power distribution box A power box through which the power enters the cabinet and is re-distributed to various
components, at the mean time, the Power Distribution Box protects the electric devices
from current overload.
PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC primary reference clock
PRI See primary rate interface
primary rate interface An interface consisting of 23 channel Bs and a 64 kbit/s channel D that uses the T1 line,
or consisting of 30 channel Bs and a channel D that uses the E1 line.
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
protection ground A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
cable half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection policy In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protection
policies can be selected as required. Protection policy refers to the protection mode given
the priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above,
the protection preference is divided into trail protection and subnet connection
protection.
Protection service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
protocol independent It is applicable to large-scale multicast networks with scattered members.

multicast sparse mode
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
PSI payload structure identifier
PSN See packet switched network
PSTN See public switched telephone network
PT payload type
PTMP See point to multipoint
PTN packet transport network
PTP Point-To-Point
public switched A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public
telephone network subscribers. Sometimes called POTS.
Q
QA Q adaptation
QoS See quality of service
quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
radio network An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of
controller the radio resources.
RAI remote alarm indication
RAM See random access memory
random access memory Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the central processing unit
(CPU) or other hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order.
Note that the various types of ROM memory are capable of random access but cannot
be written to. The term RAM, however, is generally understood to refer to volatile
memory that can be written to as well as read.
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
Protocol convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received
power at point R to achieve a 10-12 (The FEC is open).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
reconfiguration optical The WDM equipment supports the ROADM. It flexibly and dynamically adjusts add/
add/drop multiplexer drop wavelengths of sites on the network by adjusting the pass-through or block status
of any wavelength without affecting the service transmission in the main optical channel.
This implements wavelength allocation among sites on the network. After the ROADM
is used, the existing services are not affected during upgrade. The wavelength can be
modified quickly and efficiently during network maintenance, which reduces
maintenance cost. In addition, the ROADM supports the equalization for optical power,
which equalizes the optical power at the channel level.
Reed Solomon Code A type of forward error correcting codes invented in 1960 by Irving Reed and Gustave
Solomon, which has become commonplace in modern digital communications.
reference clock A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks
for reference.
Reflectance The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.
REG A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
REI Remote Error Indication
Resource Reservation The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
Protocol used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
RF Radio Frequency
RFC Requirement for Comments
RFI remote failure indication
ring network A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes,
forming a circular pathway for signals.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller
ROADM See reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer
route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
Protocol based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
RS Code See Reed Solomon Code
RS232 In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can
communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the
transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
RZ return to zero code
S1 byte In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference
source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization
of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NE
will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection
switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality
information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to
transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the
multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality
grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be
implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.
Safe control switch The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement,
which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off,
IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, the
IPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm.
SAN See storage area network
SAP service access point
SAPI source access point identifiers
SBS stimulated Brillouin scattering
SC See square connector
SD See signal degrade
SD trigger flag SD stands for signal degrade. The SD trigger flag determines whether to perform a
switching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network
management system.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy
SDI See Serial Digital Interface
SDP serious disturbance period
Search domain Search field refers to the range of IP addresses being searched. In the TCP/IP, the IP
addresses include: Category A address (1.0.0.0---126.255.255.255). For example,
10.*.*.*, whose search field is 10.255.255.255, all 10.*.*.* to be searched. Category B
address (128.0.0.0---191. 255. 255. 255). For example, 129.9.*.*, whose search field is
129.9.255.255, all 129.9.*.* to be searched. Category C address (192.0.0.0---223. 255.
255. 255). For example, 192.224.9.*, whose search field is 192.224.9.255, all
192.224.9.* to be searched. Category D address (224.0.0.0---230.255.255.255), which
is reserved. Category E address (240.0.0.0---247.255.255.255), which is reserved. Net-
id 127.*.*.*, in which .*.*.* can be any number. This net-ID is a local address.
Secure File Transfer A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Protocol
Self-healing Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the
NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found
by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that
time.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Serial Digital Interface An interface for transmitting digital signals.

Serial Line Interface Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement
Protocol transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection
function with a known IP address.
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the
forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization
(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement
as a whole or partially.
Service protection A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.
SES See severely errored second
SETS See synchronous equipment timing source
settings Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >= 10-3 or at least one defect. Time
interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio
greater than 10-3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) .
SF See signal fail
SFP See small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol
shock-proof reinforce A process by which the cabinet is fastened to the wiring frame or the top of the equipment
room so that the cabinet stands stably.
shortcut menu A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an object's name or icon. This is also
referred to a context menu.
side door The side door of a cabinet is used to protect the equipment inside the cabinet against
unexpected touch and environment impact.
side mode suppression The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total
ratio source spectrum to the second largest peak.
side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the
cabinet.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal degrade A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect
(e.g., dDEG) condition is active.
signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end of
the protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectional
failure.
single-mode fiber A type of fiber optic cable through which only one type of light signal with a fixed wave
length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10
microns. This type of fiber is used to transmit data in long distance.
SLA See service level agreement
SLIP See Serial Line Interface Protocol
SLM single longitudinal mode
SM section monitoring
small form-factor A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
pluggable
SMF See single-mode fiber
SMSR See side mode suppression ratio
SNCP See subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP See subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR See signal to noise ratio
soft permanent An ASON connection which features flexible and dynamic adjustment of routes. SPC
connections includes different classes of services (CoS).
SONET See synchronous optical network
span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans
determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies
according to transmission system type.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SPC See soft permanent connections
SPM self phase modulation
SQL See structured query language
square connector Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style".
SRLG Shared Risk Link Group
SRS stimulated Raman scattering
SSM See Synchronization Status Message

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
SSMB synchronization status message byte

SSU synchronization supply unit
STM Synchronous Transfer Mode
STM-1 See synchronous transport mode 1
STM-4 Synchronous Transport Module of order 4
storage area network An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers,
tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system the
devices appear as locally attached devices.
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
structured query A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying,
language updating, and managing data in relational database systems.
sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and
closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a
topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network
planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space
can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on
the equipments under their management.
sub-network number A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A sub-
network ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a user phone number. An
oderwire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the user number.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection
protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance
falls below a required level.
subnetwork connection SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty,
tunnel protection the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.
support A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor, it is made of welded steel
plates and is used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling.
Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under
the supports, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfy
the insulation requirements.
Suppression state An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression
status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not
occur even when the alarm conditions are met.
Switching priority There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary
board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the
same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher
priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronize NE time To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so as
to synchronize all NEs with the server.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
hierarchy transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is
suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since
it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts of
equipment timing multiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock.
source
synchronous optical A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to
network connect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data
types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiples
of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.
mode 1
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring

TCP See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM See time division multiplexing
TE See traffic engineering
Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.
terminal multiplexer A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals
into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals
into multiple channels of low rate signals.
TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TIM trace identifier mismatch
time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
multiplexing (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3 and so on), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross
time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be
transmitted over one channel.
Time Slot Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able
to interconnect.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Time Synchronization Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the
synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals
keeps consistent with the UTC time.
time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TL1 See Transaction Language 1
TLV Type/Length/Value
TM See terminal multiplexer
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
TP traffic Policing
traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
Transaction Language Transaction Language One is a widely used telecommunications management protocol.
1 TL1 is a vendor-independent and technology-independent man-machine language. TL1
facilities can be provided as part of an OSS for interacting with either underlying
management systems or NEs. One popular application is for a management system (or
NE) to package its trap/notification data in TL1 format and forward it to an OSS
component. ...(from authors.phptr.com/morris/glossary.html) Transaction Language 1
(TL1) is a widely used, "legacy", management protocol in telecommunications. It is a
cross-vendor, cross-technology man-machine language, and is widely used to manage
optical (SONET) and broadband access infrastructure in North America. It is defined in
GR-831 by Bellcore (now Telcordia). (from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TL1)
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tray A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.
tributary unit group One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VC-
n payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that
mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed
to increase flexibility of the transport network
Trivial File Transfer A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
Protocol applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP
restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is
small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines.
trTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker
TTI trail trace identifier
TTL See time to live
TU tributary unit

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
TUG See tributary unit group
UAS unavailable second

UAT See unavailable time event
UDP See User Datagram Protocol
unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The
event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than within 10 consecutive
seconds.
UNI See user network interface
universal time The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained
coordinated atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide.
Unprotected Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot
be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is
interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.
upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network
Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored
at the NMS side.
Upper subrack The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.
User A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation
rights of a user in the NMS.
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
Protocol datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
UTC See universal time coordinated
VB virtual bridge
VC See virtual container
VCG See virtual concatenation group
VCI See virtual channel identifier
virtual channel A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to
identifier identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on
its way to its destination.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
group virtual concatenation link
virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists
of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block
frame structure which repeats every 125 μs or 500 μs.
virtual local area A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
virtual path identifier The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which
VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
VLAN See virtual local area network
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP See voice over IP
VPI See virtual path identifier
VPN See virtual private network
VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
WAN See wide area network

wavelength division A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of
multiplexing single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple
channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
Wavelength protection The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection
group structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The
wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the
wavelength protection group.
WDM See wavelength division multiplexing
WEEE waste electrical and electronic equipment
wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
Working path The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.
Working service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.
WRR weighted round Robin
WSS wavelength selective switching

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
WTR Wait To Restore

WXCP wavelength cross-connection protection
WXCP service The WXCP service is also called the GE ADM protection service. The WXCP is a type
of channel protection based on ring network. It adopts the dual fed and selective receiving
principle and uses the cross-connection function to achieve service switching between
working and protection channels.
X
XFP 10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable
XPM cross-phase modulation


OSN 8800&amp;6800&amp;3800 V100R006C03 Commissioning Guide 03

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 8800&amp;6800&amp;3800 V100R006C03 Commissioning Guide 03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 V100R006C03

OptiX OSN 6800 V100R006C03

OptiX OSN 3800 V100R006C03

iManager U2000 V100R006C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R006C00

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Based on Product Version V100R006C03

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

9 Automatic l 9.9 Routine Maintenance is added.

5 5.7 Commissioning Guide of the Raman Amplifier is modified.

16.34 l PRBS Application Scenarios is deleted.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-04-05) Based on Product Version V100R006C03

9 Automatic Automatic Commissioning is modified.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C03

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

Automatic Automatic Commissioning is deleted.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.

16.35 Managing Managing NE Power Consumption is added.

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-09-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

2 Quick Guide Quick Guide is added.

16.35 Managing Managing NE Power Consumption is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

5 Commissioning Optical Power of PID Board is deleted.

9 Automatic Automatic Commissioning is modified.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

3 The procedures for commissioning and configuration during deployment

5.11 5.11.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSMD9

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

5.13 Example of 5.13.13 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSMD9

11 11.1 Viewing Current Alarms on an NE and Removing Abnormal

16 Reference The section "Reference for Commissioning During Deployment" is

17 Parameters The section "Parameter Description" is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

4 Configuring Creating OCh Trails by Trail Search is added.

5.7 Description of commissioning the optical power of Raman boards is

5 11.5 Testing Physical-Layer Clocks is added.

5 11.6.3 Testing Items is added.

9 Automatic Automatic Commissioning is added. This section describes the scenarios

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

2.2.2 Starting the Web LCT..............................................................................................................................44

3 Commissioning and Configuration Procedure During Deployment...............................54

5 Commissioning Optical Power on Site...................................................................................94

Issue 03 (2012-06-22) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

OSN 8800&6800&3800 V100R006C03 Commissioning Guide 03

OSN 8800&6800&3800 V100R006C03 Commissioning Guide 03